Kyocera Copier 3035 User Manual
3035  
4035  
5035  
* The above illustration includes the optional original cover.  
Please read the Operation Guide before using the copier  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All MaKnueales SpeairtchcAlondsDeowtonlotahd.e copier for easy reference  
Introduction to this Operation Guide  
The explanations contained in this Operation Guide have been  
separated into different sections in order to allow even those using a  
copier for the first time to use this machine efficiently, properly and  
with relative ease.  
A basic introduction to each section can be found below for reference.  
Refer to the related section when using this copier.  
Section 1 IMPORTANT! PLEASE READ FIRST.  
This section contains explanations on information that is necessary  
for you to know prior to using this copier for the first time after  
purchase.  
For example, it contains notes and cautions on installation and  
operation that should be strictly obeyed in order to ensure its safe and  
proper operation.  
Section 2 NAMES OF PARTS  
This section contains explanations on the names and functions of the  
parts of the copier and its operation panel.  
Section 3 PREPARATIONS  
This section contains explanations on procedures for loading copy  
paper.  
Section 4 BASIC OPERATION  
This section contains explanations on the basic procedures required  
to make simple copies.  
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS  
This section contains explanations on using the various convenient  
functions of this copier.  
Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT  
FUNCTIONS  
This section contains explanations on the procedures for registering  
frequently used business forms and documents on the optional Hard  
Disk, printing them out when desired, and managing printing  
conditions.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT  
This section contains explanations on the procedures for changing the  
various default settings available for adjusting the copier to fit your  
copy needs and on the procedures for managing copy us.  
Section 8 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT  
This section contains explanations on the optional equipment that are  
available for use with this copier.  
Section 9 TROUBLESHOOTING  
This section contains explanations on handling problems that may  
occur during operation of this copier, such as when an error indication  
appears or if a paper jam occurs.  
Section 10 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION INFORMATION  
This section contains explanations on maintaining the copier in proper  
condition and on replacing the toner container, as well as information  
on the specifications for this copier.  
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONTENTS  
5. Adding a space next to the copy images for making notes  
[Memo mode] .......................................................................... 5-9  
Section 1  
IMPORTANT! PLEASE READ FIRST. .. 1-1  
6. Making copies with clean edges [Border erase modes] ........ 5-11  
(1) Erasing blemishes from edges of copies  
CAUTION LABELS ................................................................... 1-1  
INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS ............................................. 1-2  
PRECAUTIONS FOR USE ...................................................... 1-3  
(Sheet erase mode) ....................................................... 5-11  
(2) Erasing blemishes from the edges and middle of copies  
made from books (Book erase mode) ........................... 5-11  
(3) Erasing blemishes from the edges of copies using individual  
border settings (Individual border erase mode) ............. 5-12  
Section 2  
7. Fitting the image of either two or four originals onto a single copy  
page [Combine/Merge Copy modes] ..................................... 5-13  
(1) 2 in 1 .............................................................................. 5-13  
(2) 4 in 1 .............................................................................. 5-13  
NAMES OF PARTS ............................... 2-1  
1. Main body ................................................................................ 2-1  
2. Operation panel ....................................................................... 2-3  
3. Touch panel ............................................................................. 2-5  
8. Printing page numbers on copies  
[Print page numbers mode] ................................................... 5-16  
9. Overlaying one image over another [Form overlay mode] ..... 5-20  
10. Making booklets from sheet originals  
[Booklet/Stitching mode]........................................................ 5-22  
Section 3  
11. Making booklets from book originals  
PREPARATIONS ................................... 3-1  
[Book to Booklet mode] ......................................................... 5-26  
1. Loading paper ......................................................................... 3-1  
(1) Note when adding paper.................................................. 3-1  
(2) Loading paper into the drawer[cassette] .......................... 3-2  
(3) Loading paper into the multi-bypass tray ......................... 3-3  
12. Automatic sorting of copy sets without the Document Finisher  
[Sort/Finished mode] ............................................................. 5-29  
13. Auto rotation function............................................................. 5-30  
14. Adding a front and/or back cover to your copy sets  
[Cover mode] ......................................................................... 5-31  
15. Original size selection mode ................................................. 5-34  
Section 4  
16. Feeding paper as a backing sheet for OHP transparencies  
[Transparency + backing sheet mode]................................... 5-36  
BASIC OPERATION.............................. 4-1  
17. Inverting black and white [Invert mode] ................................. 5-38  
18. Making mirror image copies [Mirror image mode] ................. 5-39  
1. Basic copying procedure ......................................................... 4-1  
2. Enlarging/reducing the copy image ......................................... 4-5  
(1) Auto magnification selection mode .................................. 4-5  
(2) Zoom mode..................................................................... 4-6  
(3) Preset zoom mode........................................................... 4-7  
(4) XY zoom mode ................................................................ 4-8  
19. Making a test copy prior to large volume copying  
[Proof mode] .......................................................................... 5-40  
20. Making more of the same copies after a copy job is finished  
[Repeat copy mode] .............................................................. 5-42  
(1) Registering a copy job for repeat copying...................... 5-42  
(2) Printing out with the repeat copy mode ......................... 5-43  
3. Interrupt copying ...................................................................... 4-9  
4. Job reservation ...................................................................... 4-10  
5. Energy-saving modes............................................................ 4-11  
21. Copying a large volume of originals in one operation  
[Batch scanning mode] .......................................................... 5-47  
22. Saving on toner use [Eco print mode] ................................... 5-48  
23. Original set direction.............................................................. 5-49  
Section 5  
24. Memorizing frequently used settings [Program function] ...... 5-50  
(1) Registering a program ................................................... 5-50  
(2) Using programmed settings to make copies .................. 5-51  
(3) Changing a registered program name ........................... 5-51  
(4) Deleting a registered program ....................................... 5-52  
OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS .... 5-1  
1. Making 2-sided copies from various types of originals [2-sided  
copy modes] ............................................................................ 5-1  
(1) Making 2-sided copies from a 2-sided original ................ 5-1  
(2) Making 2-sided copies from an  
25. Registration keys ................................................................... 5-53  
(1) Registering a function or mode under a function key .... 5-53  
(2) Deleting a registration key ............................................. 5-55  
open-faced (books, etc.) original ..................................... 5-1  
(3) Making 2-sided copies from one-sided originals.............. 5-2  
2. Copying two-page originals onto separate sheets  
26. Easily add covers and insert sheets between various sets of  
originals in one operation [Job build mode] ........................... 5-57  
(1) Using the job build mode ............................................... 5-57  
(2) Selecting the settings and functions ................................ 5-62  
[Page separation/Split copy modes] ........................................ 5-4  
(1) Page separation/Split copy from book originals ............... 5-4  
(2) Page separation/Split copy from 2-sided originals ........... 5-4  
3. Making a margin space on the copies [Margin mode] ............. 5-6  
(1) Standard margin .............................................................. 5-6  
(2) Separate front and back margin settings ......................... 5-6  
4. Centering the copy image [Centering/Image shift mode] ........ 5-8  
ii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONTENTS  
Section 6  
DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT  
Section 8  
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT ...................... 8-1  
MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS............... 6-1  
(1) Document Processor ....................................................... 8-1  
(2) Paper Feeder ................................................................... 8-5  
(3) Paper Feeder ................................................................... 8-5  
(4) Document Finisher........................................................... 8-5  
(5) Document Finisher........................................................... 8-9  
(6) Document Finisher........................................................... 8-9  
(7) Built-in Finisher ................................................................ 8-9  
(8) Job Separator ................................................................ 8-11  
(9) Hard Disk ....................................................................... 8-11  
(10) Key Counter ................................................................... 8-12  
(11) Document Tray ............................................................... 8-12  
(12) Printer Kit ....................................................................... 8-12  
(13) Printer/Scanner Kit ........................................................ 8-12  
(14) Fax Kit ............................................................................ 8-12  
1.  
Document management functions.......................................... 6-1  
(1) What are the “document management” functions? .......... 6-1  
(2) Form registration.............................................................. 6-1  
(3) Shared data box .............................................................. 6-4  
(4) Synergy print boxes ......................................................... 6-9  
2. Output management functions .............................................. 6-20  
(1) What are the “output management” functions?.............. 6-20  
(2) Display of the output management functions................. 6-21  
(3) The “Print status” screen................................................ 6-22  
Section 7  
COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 7-1  
1. Copy management mode ........................................................ 7-1  
(1) Copy management procedures ....................................... 7-2  
(2) Accessing the copy management menu screen .............. 7-3  
(3) Editing copy management information ............................ 7-4  
(4) Checking the copy management counts ........................ 7-21  
(5) Turning the copy management function ON/OFF .......... 7-25  
(6) Changing the copy management default settings .......... 7-25  
(7) Making copies when copy management is turned ON .. 7-37  
Section 9  
TROUBLESHOOTING........................... 9-1  
1. If one of the following messages is displayed.......................... 9-1  
2. If one of these indicators lights or flashes ............................... 9-3  
3. When paper misfeeds.............................................................. 9-4  
(1) Cautions........................................................................... 9-4  
(2) Removal procedures ........................................................ 9-4  
2. Default settings ...................................................................... 7-38  
(1) Machine default settings ................................................ 7-38  
(2) Accessing the machine default settings ......................... 7-41  
(3) Making machine default settings ................................... 7-42  
(4) Copy default settings ..................................................... 7-59  
(5) Accessing the copy default settings............................... 7-62  
(6) Making copy default settings ......................................... 7-63  
4. If other trouble occurs ............................................................ 9-13  
Section 10  
MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION  
INFORMATION .................................... 10-1  
3. Multi-bypass tray paper settings............................................ 7-87  
(1) Paper size and type ....................................................... 7-87  
(2) Selecting other standard sizes....................................... 7-88  
1. Cleaning the copier ............................................................... 10-1  
2. Replacing the toner container and waste toner box .............. 10-3  
3. Specifications ........................................................................ 10-7  
4. Environmental Specifications ................................................ 10-9  
5. Installing the optional equipment ......................................... 10-10  
Appendix: Functions and settings combination chart .................. 10-12  
4. Original size registration ........................................................ 7-90  
5. Drum refresh ......................................................................... 7-91  
6. Checking the total counter and printing out the counter  
report ..................................................................................... 7-93  
7. Box management default settings ......................................... 7-94  
(1) Box settings ................................................................... 7-94  
(2) Accessing the box management default settings .......... 7-94  
(3) Making box management default settings ..................... 7-95  
8. Hard disk management ......................................................... 7-99  
9. Report print out.................................................................... 7-101  
10. Changing the language used for messages ........................ 7-103  
11. Entering characters ............................................................. 7-104  
(1) Character input screens............................................... 7-104  
(2) Character input procedure ........................................... 7-106  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
● MAKING FULL USE OF THE COPIER'S ADVANCED FUNCTIONS  
1
Having the copier automatically select  
copy paper of the same size as the  
original  
<Auto paper selection mode>  
(Page 4-2)  
2
Making clear reproductions of  
photographs  
<Image quality selection>  
(Page 4-3)  
3
Various functions for making enlarged  
and reduced copies  
■ Enlarging/reducing the copy image to fit the  
size of paper in a specified drawer[cassette]  
<Auto magnification selection mode>  
(Page 4-5)  
abcdefghijk  
abcdefghijk  
11"✕17" (A3)  
abc  
defghi  
abcdefghijk  
abcdefghijk  
abcdefghijk  
abcdefghijk  
abcdefghijk  
abcdefghijk  
abcdefghijk  
jkmn  
8
1/2"✕11" (A4)  
129% (141%)  
64% (70%)  
5
1/2"✕8 1/2" (A5)  
■ Enlarging/reducing the copy image to a  
desired size between 25% and 400%  
<Zoom mode> (Page 4-6)  
■ One-touch selection of the copy  
magnification ratio  
<Preset zoom mode>  
(Page 4-7)  
■ Enlarging/reducing the length and width of  
the image to separate magnification ratios  
<XY zoom mode>  
(Page 4-8)  
70%  
141%  
400%  
50%  
25%  
Y %  
M
M
400%  
X %  
4
7
Making 2-sided copies from various types  
of originals  
<2-sided copy modes>  
(Page 5-1)  
5
8
Copying each image of open-faced  
(books, etc.) or 2-sided originals onto  
separate sheets  
<Page separation/Split copy modes>  
(Page 5-4)  
6
9
Creating a margin on the copies  
<Margin mode>  
(Page 5-6)  
5
5
4
3
3
2
12  
1 2  
1
1
1
1
2
Centering the copy image  
<Centering/Image shift mode>  
(Page 5-8)  
Adding a space next to the copy images  
for making notes  
<Memo mode>  
Making copies with clean edges  
<Border erase modes>  
(Page 5-11)  
(Page 5-9)  
10 Fitting the image of either two or four  
originals onto a single copy page  
<Combine/Merge Copy modes>  
(Page 5-13)  
11 Printing page numbers on the copies  
<Print page numbers mode>  
(Page 5-16)  
12 Overlaying one image over another  
<Form overlay mode>  
(Page 5-20)  
A
A
B
B
C
C
A
B
C
A
B
C
D
D
-1-  
-2-  
-3-  
-4-  
iv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13 Making booklets from sheet originals  
<Booklet/Stitching mode>  
(Page 5-22)  
14 Making booklets from books  
<Book to Booklet mode>  
(Page 5-26)  
15 Automatic sorting of copy sets without the  
Document Finisher  
<Sort/Finished mode>  
3
2
1
(Page 5-29)  
3
2
1
a
3
2
1
b
1
1
a
1
b
A
A
3
2
1
B
B
3
3
3
16 Automatic rotation of the copy image  
<Auto rotation function>  
(Page 5-30)  
17 Adding a front and/or back cover to your  
18 Feeding paper as a backing sheet for  
OHP transparencies  
copy sets  
<Cover mode>  
(Page 5-31)  
<Transparency + backing sheet mode>  
(Page 5-36)  
6
5
5
4
3
2
3
1
1
B
A
19 Inverting black and white  
<Invert mode>  
20 Making mirror image copies  
<Mirror image mode>  
(Page 5-39)  
21 Making a test copy prior to large volume  
copying  
(Page 5-38)  
<Proof mode>  
(Page 5-40)  
22 Making more of the same copies after a  
copy job is finished  
23 Copying a large volume of originals in  
one operation  
24 Saving on toner use  
<Eco print mode>  
(Page 5-48)  
<Repeat copy mode>  
(Page 5-42)  
<Batch scanning mode>  
(Page 5-47)  
C
B
A B C  
A
25 Memorizing frequently used settings  
<Program function>  
26 Easily add covers and insert sheets  
between various sets of originals in one  
operation  
27 Registering images to be used for form  
overlay  
(Page 5-50)  
<Form registration>  
(Page 6-1)  
<Job build mode>  
(Page 5-57)  
4
5
3
6
7
2
1
8
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
28 Managing shared forms  
<Shared data box>  
(Page 6-4)  
29 Printing out different stored originals in  
one operation  
<Synergy print boxes>  
(Page 6-9)  
30 Using department ID-codes to manage  
the number of copies made by each  
department  
<Copy management mode>  
(Page 7-1)  
31 Changing the language used in the touch  
32 A full range of optional equipment is  
available  
■ Document Processor (Page 8-1)  
■ Paper Feeder (Page 8-5)  
■ Document Finisher (Page 8-9)  
■ Job Separator (Page 8-11)  
■ Document Tray (Page 8-12)  
panel  
<Language selection function>  
(Page 7-103)  
English  
Español  
■ Paper Feeder (Page 8-5)  
■ Document Finisher (Page 8-9)  
■ Hard Disk (Page 8-11)  
■ Document Finisher (Page 8-5)  
■ Built-in Finisher (Page 8-9)  
■ Key Counter (Page 8-12)  
vi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
■ Printer Kit (Page 8-12)  
■ Printer/scanner Kit (Page 8-12)  
■ Fax Kit (Page 8-12)  
vii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
● Low Power Mode  
The device automatically enters “Low Power Mode” when 15 minutes  
have passed since the device was last used. The amount of time of no  
activity that must pass before “Low Power Mode” is activated may be  
lengthened. See “5. Energy-saving modes” on page 4-11 and “Auto  
low power time” on page 7-48 for more information.  
We have determined as a participating company in the International  
Energy Star Program that this product is compliant with the standards  
laid out in the International Energy Star Program.  
● Off Mode (Only when using the copier functions of this machine)  
The device automatically enters “Off Mode” when 60 minutes have  
passed since the device was last used. The amount of time of no  
activity that must pass before “Off Mode” is activated may be  
lengthened. For more information see “5. Energy-saving modes” on  
page 4-11 and “Auto sleep time” on page 7-47.  
About the International Energy Star Program  
International Energy Star Program has as its basic goals the  
promotion of efficient energy use and the reduction of the  
environmental pollution that accompanies energy consumption by  
promoting the manufacture and sale of products that fulfill program  
standards.  
● Sleep Mode (If the copier has printer and/or facsimile function)  
The device automatically enters “Sleep Mode” when 60 minutes have  
passed since the device was last used. The amount of time of no  
activity that must pass before “Sleep Mode” is activated may be  
lengthened. For more information see “5. Energy-saving modes” on  
page 4-11 and “Auto sleep time” on page 7-47.  
International Energy Star Program standards require that copies  
come equipped with a “Low Power Mode” where energy consumption  
is reduced after a certain amount of time elapses since the device  
was last used, as well as an “Off Mode” where the device  
automatically turns itself off after there is no activity within a set  
amount of time. When the copier includes printer and fax functions,  
the printer and fax must enter a “Low Power Mode” where power  
consumption is automatically reduced after a certain amount of time  
elapses since they were last used, and they must also support a  
“Sleep Mode” where power consumption is reduced to a minimum  
when there is no activity within a set amount of time.  
● Automatic 2-Sided Copy Function  
The Energy Star Program encourages the use of 2-sided copying  
which reduces the load on the environment and this device includes  
2-sided copying as a standard function. For example, by copying two  
1-sided originals onto a single sheet of paper as a 2-sided copy, it is  
possible to lower the amount of paper used.  
For more information see “1. Making 2-sided copies from various types  
of originals [2-sided copy modes]” on page 5-1.  
This product is equipped with the following features as a result of its  
compliance with International Energy Star Program standards.  
● Paper Recycling  
The Energy Star Program encourages the use of environmentally  
friendly recycled paper.Your sales or service representative can  
provide information about recommended paper types.  
* When you are using the copier functions of this machine, replace all references to the “Sleep Mode” with the “Off Mode”.  
viii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Please read this Operation Guide before using the copier. Keep it close to the copier  
for easy reference.  
The sections of this guide and parts of the copier marked with symbols are safety warnings meant  
to protect the user, other individuals and surrounding objects, and ensure correct and safe usage  
of the copier. The symbols and their meanings are indicated below.  
DANGER: Indicates that serious injury or even death will very possibly result from  
insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with the related points.  
WARNING: Indicates that serious injury or even death may result from insufficient attention  
to or incorrect compliance with the related points.  
CAUTION: Indicates that personal injury or mechanical damage may result from insufficient  
attention to or incorrect compliance with the related points.  
Symbols  
The m symbol indicates that the related section includes safety warnings. Specific points of attention  
are indicated inside the symbol.  
................. [General warning]  
................. [Warning of danger of electrical shock]  
................. [Warning of high temperature]  
The symbol indicates that the related section includes information on prohibited actions. Specifics  
of the prohibited action are indicated inside the symbol.  
.................. [Warning of prohibited action]  
................... [Disassembly prohibited]  
The ● symbol indicates that the related section includes information on actions which must be  
performed. Specifics of the required action are indicated inside the symbol.  
.................. [Alert of required action]  
.................. [Remove the power plug from the outlet]  
.................. [Always connect the copier to an outlet with a ground connection]  
Please contact your service representative to order a replacement if the safety warnings in this  
Operation Guide are illegible or if the guide itself is missing. (fee required)  
ix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 1 IMPORTANT! PLEASE READ FIRST.  
CAUTION LABELS  
Caution labels have been attached to the copier at the following locations for safety purposes.  
BE SUFFICIENTLY CAREFUL to avoid fire or electric shock when removing a paper jam or when replacing toner.  
Label 1  
High temperature inside. Do not  
touch parts in this area, because  
there is a danger of getting burned.  
Label 4  
High temperature inside.  
Do not touch parts in this  
area, because there is a  
danger of getting burned.  
Label 2  
Do not incinerate toner and  
toner container. Dangerous  
sparks may cause burn. ......  
Label 3  
Moving parts inside. May cause  
personal injury. Do not touch  
moving parts..................................  
NOTE: DO NOT remove these labels.  
1-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS  
• During copying, some ozone is released, but the amount  
■ Environment  
does not cause any ill effect to one's health. If, however,  
the copier is used over a long period of time in a poorly  
ventilated room or when making an extremely large  
number of copies, the smell may become unpleasant. To  
maintain the appropriate environment for copy work, it is  
suggested that the room be properly ventilated.  
CAUTION  
• Avoid placing the copier on or in locations which  
are unstable or not level. Such locations may  
cause the copier to fall down or fall over. This  
type of situation presents a danger of personal  
injury or damage to the copier..............................  
■ Power supply/Grounding the copier  
• Avoid locations with humidity or dust and dirt. If  
dust or dirt become attached to the power plug,  
clean the plug to avoid the danger of fire or  
electrical shock.....................................................  
WARNING  
• DO NOT use a power supply with a voltage other  
than that specified. Avoid multiple connections in  
the same outlet. These types of situations  
• Avoid locations near radiators, heaters, or other  
heat sources, or locations near flammable items,  
to avoid the danger of fire. ...................................  
present a danger of fire or electrical shock. .........  
• To keep the copier cool and facilitate changing of  
parts and maintenance, allow access space as  
shown below. Leave adequate space, especially  
around the vents, to allow air to be properly  
ventilated out of the copier. ..................................  
• Plug the power cord securely into the outlet. If  
metallic objects come in contact with the prongs  
on the plug, it may cause a fire or electric shock.  
• Always connect the copier to an outlet with a  
ground connection to avoid the danger of fire or  
electrical shock in case of an electric short. If an  
earth connection is not possible, contact your  
service representative. .........................................  
Other precautions  
• Connect the power plug to the closest outlet possible to  
the copier.  
Rear: 11  
>
=
1
3
Left:  
=>11  
30cm  
/
1
6"/30cm  
Right: 11  
>
13  
/
• The power supply cord is used as the main disconnect  
device. Ensure that the socket/outlet is located/installed  
near the equipment and is easily accessible.  
16"/  
=
1
3
F
/
1
ront:  
6"/30cm  
=>39  
100cm  
3
/
8"/  
Other precautions  
■ Handling of plastic bags  
• Adverse environmental conditions may affect the safe  
operation and performance of the copier. Install in an air-  
conditioned room (recommended room temperature:  
around 73.4°F (23°C), humidity: around 50%) and avoid  
the following locations when selecting a site for the  
copier.  
WARNING  
• Keep the plastic bags that are used with the  
copier away from children. The plastic may cling  
to their nose and mouth causing suffocation........  
.
Avoid locations near a window or with exposure to  
direct sunlight.  
.
.
.
.
Avoid locations with vibrations.  
Avoid locations with drastic temperature fluctuations.  
Avoid locations with direct exposure to hot or cold air.  
Avoid poorly ventilated locations.  
• Delicate floor material may be damaged if this product is  
moved after installation.  
1-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PRECAUTIONS FOR USE  
■ Cautions when using the copier  
CAUTION  
WARNING  
• DO NOT pull the power cord when removing it  
from the outlet. If the power cord is pulled, the  
wires may become broken and there is a danger  
of fire or electrical shock. (ALWAYS grasp the  
power plug when removing the power cord from  
the outlet.) ............................................................  
• DO NOT place metallic objects or containers with  
water (flower vases, flower pots, cups, etc.) on or  
near the copier. This of situation presents a  
danger of fire or electrical shock should they fall  
inside....................................................................  
• ALWAYS remove the power plug from the outlet  
when moving the copier. If the power cord is  
damaged, there is a danger of fire or electrical  
shock....................................................................  
• DO NOT remove any of the covers from the  
copier as there is a danger of electrical shock  
from high voltage parts inside the copier. ............  
• DO NOT damage, break or attempt to repair the  
power cord. DO NOT place heavy objects on the  
cord, pull it, bend it unnecessarily or cause any  
other type of damage.  
These types of situations present a danger of fire  
or electrical shock. ...............................................  
• If the copier will not be used for a short period of  
time (overnight, etc.), turn the power switch OFF  
(O).  
If it will not be used for an extended period of  
time (vacations, etc.), remove the power plug  
from the outlet for safety purposes during the  
time the copier is not in use. ................................  
• NEVER attempt to repair or disassemble the  
copier or its parts as there is a danger of fire,  
electrical shock or damage to the laser. If the  
laser beam escapes, there is a danger of it  
causing blindness.................................................  
• ALWAYS hold the designated parts only when  
lifting or moving the copier. ..................................  
• For safety purposes, ALWAYS remove the power  
plug from the outlet when performing cleaning  
operations. ...........................................................  
• If the copier becomes excessively hot, smoke  
appears from the copier, there is an odd smell, or  
any other abnormal situation occurs, there is a  
danger of fire or electrical shock. Turn the power  
switch OFF (O) immediately, BE ABSOLUTELY  
CERTAIN to remove the power plug from the  
outlet and then contact your service  
• If dust accumulates within the copier, there is a  
danger of fire or other trouble. It is therefore  
recommended that you consult with your service  
representative in regard to cleaning of internal  
parts. This is particularly effective if accomplished  
prior to seasons of high humidity. Consult with  
your service representative in regard to the cost  
of cleaning the internal parts of the copier. ..........  
representative. .....................................................  
• If anything harmful (paper clips, water, other  
fluids, etc.) falls into the copier, turn the power  
switch OFF (O) immediately. Next, BE  
ABSOLUTELY CERTAIN to remove the power  
plug from the outlet to avoid the danger of fire or  
electrical shock. Then contact your service  
representative. .....................................................  
• DO NOT remove or connect the power plug with  
wet hands, as there is a danger of electrical  
shock....................................................................  
• ALWAYS contact your service representative for  
maintenance or repair of internal parts. ...............  
1-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PRECAUTIONS FOR USE  
Other precautions  
• DO NOT place heavy objects on the copier or cause  
other damage to the copier.  
■ Cautions when handling  
consumables  
• DO NOT open the front cover, turn off the power switch,  
or pull out the power plug during copying.  
CAUTION  
• When lifting or moving the copier, contact your service  
representative.  
• DO NOT attempt to incinerate the toner container  
or the waste toner box. Dangerous sparks may  
cause burns..........................................................  
• Do not touch electrical parts, such as connectors or  
printed circuit boards. They could be damaged by static  
electricity.  
• Keep the toner container and the waste toner box  
out of the reach of children...................................  
• DO NOT attempt to perform any operations not  
explained in this handbook.  
• If toner happens to spill from the toner container  
or the waste toner box, avoid inhalation and  
ingestion, as well as contact with your eyes and  
skin.......................................................................  
• CAUTION : Use of controls or adjustments or  
performance of procedures other than those specified  
herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.  
.
If you do happen to inhale toner, move to a place with  
fresh air and gargle thoroughly with a large amount of  
water. If coughing develops, contact a physician.  
If you do happen to ingest toner, rinse your mouth out  
with water and drink 1 or 2 cups of water to dilute the  
contents of your stomach. If necessary, contact a  
physician.  
If you do happen to get toner in your eyes, flush them  
thoroughly with water. If there is any remaining  
tenderness, contact a physician.  
If toner does happen to get on your skin, wash with  
soap and water.  
• Do not look directly at the light from the scanning lamp  
as it may cause your eyes to feel tired or painful.  
.
.
.
• DO NOT attempt to force open or destroy the  
toner container or the waste toner box.................  
Other precautions  
• After use, ALWAYS dispose of the toner container and  
the waste toner box in accordance with Federal, State  
and Local rules and regulations.  
• Store all consumables in a cool, dark location.  
• If you will not be using the copier for a prolonged period  
of time, remove all paper from the drawer(s)[cassette(s)]  
and the multi-bypass tray and seal in its original  
packaging.  
1-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAFETY OF LASER BEAM  
1. Safety of laser beam  
This copier has been certified by the manufacturer to Class 1 level under the radiation performance standards established by the U.S.  
DHHS (Department of Health and Human Services) in 1968. This indicates that the product is safe to use during normal operation and  
maintenance. The laser optical system, enclosed in a protective housing and sealed within the external covers, never permits the laser  
beam to escape.  
2. The CDRH Act  
A laser-product-related act was implemented on Aug. 2, 1976, by the Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S.  
Food and Drug Administration (FDA). This act prohibits the sale of laser products in the U.S. without certification, and applies to laser  
products manufactured after Aug. 1, 1976.  
The label shown below indicates compliance with the CDRH regulations and must be attached to laser products marketed in the United  
States.  
On this copier, the label is on the right side.  
3. Optical unit  
When checking the optical unit, avoid direct exposure to the la-  
ser beam, which is invisible.  
Shown below is the label located on the cover of the optical unit.  
DANGER INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN.  
AVOIDO DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM.  
CAUTION NVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN.  
ACOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM.  
ATTENTION RAYONNEMENT LASER INVISIBLE SI OUVERT.  
DANGEREUX DE REGARDER A L'INTERIEUR.  
VORSICHT UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLEN WENN GEÖFFNET.  
NICHT HINENSEHEN.  
TYPE:2AV1301 MATSUSHITA  
WAVE LENGHT:770-795nm  
LASER SOURCE:5mW  
INPUT:24VDC/MAX2.0A  
5VDC/300mA  
4. Maintenance  
For safety of the service personnel, follow the maintenance instructions in the other section of this manual.  
5. Safety switch  
The power to the laser unit is cut off when the front cover is opened.  
1-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CAUTION!  
The power plug is the main isolation device! Other switches on the equipment are only  
functional switches and are not suitable for isolating the equipment from the power source.  
ATTENTION!  
Le débranchement de la fiche secteur est le seul moyen de mettre l’appareil hors tension.  
Les interrupteurs sur l’appareil ne sont que des interrupteurs de fonctionnement : ils ne  
mettent pas l’appareil hors tension.  
1-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NEW 3035/4035/5035 COPIER LIMITED WARRANTY  
Kyocera Mita America, Inc. and Kyocera Mita Canada, Ltd. (both referred to as “Kyocera Mita”)  
warrant the Customer’s new copier, and the new accessories installed with the initial installation  
of the copier, against any defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year, or  
400,000 copies/prints from date of installation by an Authorized Kyocera Mita Dealer for the  
3035, or 500,000 copies/prints from date of installation by an Authorized Kyocera Mita Dealer for  
the 4035 and the 5035, whichever first occurs. In the event the copier or an accessory is found  
to be defective within the warranty period, Kyocera Mita’s only obligation and the Customer’s  
exclusive remedy shall be replacement of any defective parts. It is understood that Kyocera Mita  
shall have no obligation to furnish labor.  
1.  
This warranty is valid only as to the original retail purchaser (referred to as the “Customer”) of a  
new Kyocera Mita copier in the United States of America, or Canada based upon the country of  
purchase.  
2.  
3.  
In order to obtain performance of this warranty, the Customer must immediately notify the  
Authorized Kyocera Mita Dealer from whom the product was purchased. If the Kyocera Mita  
Dealer is not able to provide service, write to Kyocera Mita at the address below for the name  
and address of the Authorized Kyocera Mita Dealer in your area.  
This warranty does not cover copiers or accessories: (a) which have become damaged due to  
operator negligence, misuse, accidents, improper storage or unusual physical or electrical  
stress, (b) which have used parts or supplies which are not genuine Kyocera Mita brand parts or  
supplies, (c) which have been serviced by a technician not employed by Kyocera Mita or an  
Authorized Kyocera Mita Dealer, or (d) which have had the serial number modified, altered, or  
removed.  
4.  
This warranty does not cover Maintenance Kits or the components of Maintenance Kits, which  
consist of the drum unit, the fixing unit, and the developing unit. Kyocera Mita shall give the  
Customer a separate warranty for these items.  
5.  
6.  
7.  
This warranty gives the Customer specific legal rights. The Customer may also have other rights,  
which vary from state to state, or province to province. Neither the seller, nor any other person is  
authorized to extend the time period, or expand this warranty on behalf of Kyocera Mita.  
THIS WARRANTY IS MADE IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES AND (CONDITIONS),  
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, AND KYOCERA MITA SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED  
WARRANTY (OR CONDITION) OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR  
PURPOSE. THIS WARRANTY SHALL NOT EXTEND TO, AND KYOCERA MITA SHALL NOT  
BE LIABLE FOR, ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTAL DAMAGES WHICH MAY ARISE  
OUT OF THE USE, OR INABILITY TO USE, THE COPIER.  
1-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WARNING  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B  
digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to  
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential  
installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency  
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may  
cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no  
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this  
equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which  
can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to  
try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:  
– Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
– Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
– Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the  
receiver is connected.  
– Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.  
CAUTION – The changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party  
responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the  
equipment.  
* The above warning is valid only in the United States of America.  
1-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 2 NAMES OF PARTS  
1. Main body  
1
5
2
6
4
3
7
8
9
1 Original cover (Option)  
(Open/close to set the original on the platen.)  
2 Operation panel  
(Contains the keys and indicators for operating the copier.)  
3 Left cover 1 handle  
(Pull up to open the left cover 1.)  
4 Left cover 1  
(Open when a paper misfeed occurs.)  
5 Platen  
(Set originals here for copying. Place originals face-down with the edges aligned with the size scales on the left and rear sides of the platen.)  
6 Original size scales  
(Be sure to align the original with these when setting the original on the platen.)  
7 Drawer[Cassette] 1  
(Holds up to 500 sheets of standard paper [standard paper specified by our company].)  
8 Drawer[Cassette] 2  
(Holds up to 500 sheets of standard paper [standard paper specified by our company].)  
9 Left cover 2  
(Open when a paper misfeed occurs inside the left cover 2.)  
2-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 2 NAMES OF PARTS  
8C  
7B  
H
A
0
9D  
0E  
F
J
I
K
G
0 Multi-bypass tray  
(Load paper here when copying onto small-size or special paper.)  
! Insert guides  
(Be sure to set the paper width when loading paper on the multi-bypass tray.)  
@ Toner container  
# Toner container release lever  
(Operate to replace the toner container.)  
$ Waste toner box  
% Cleaning shaft  
(Pull and push back in after toner container replacement or when copy images become soiled with toner.)  
^ Front cover  
(Open to replace the toner container or waste toner box.)  
& Power switch  
(Turn ON (I) before starting to make copies.)  
* Copy store section  
(Copied paper is stored here.)  
( Length adjustment plate  
(Adjust to the length of the paper to be set in the drawer[cassette].)  
) Width adjustment lever  
(Hold the lever and adjust the width guide to the width of the paper to be set in the drawer[cassette].)  
⁄ Handles for transport  
(Become handles when pulled out.)  
2-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 2 NAMES OF PARTS  
2. Operation panel  
@ ! 0  
(
*
&
^
%
6
5
4
7
2
#
$
8
1
3
9
1 [Start] key & indicator lamp  
@ [Printer] key, lamp & indicator  
(Press this key when the lamp in that key is lit green and you want  
to start copying.)  
(Press this key when you want to use the optional printer functions  
of this machine. The indicator to the right of the key will light when  
the machine is in the printer operation mode. The lamp to the left  
of the key will either light green or orange, or will flash one of those  
colors, depending upon the status of the machine. See page 9-3.)  
2 [Stop/Clear] key  
(Press this key when you want to stop copying or change the  
number of copies to be made.)  
# [Scanner] key, lamp & indicator  
3 [Reset] key  
(Press this key when you want to use the optional scanner  
functions of this machine. The indicator to the right of the key will  
light when the machine is in the scanner operation mode. The  
lamp to the left of the key will either light green or orange, or will  
flash one of those colors, depending upon the status of the  
machine. See page 9-3.)  
(Press this key to reset all functions to their initial mode settings.  
See “Initial mode” on page 2-4.)  
4 [Energy Saver] key & indicator lamp  
(Press this key when you want to turn the energy-saving mode ON.  
Press the same key again to turn the energy-saving mode OFF.  
See page 4-11.)  
$ [Fax] key, lamp & indicator  
(Press this key when you want to use the optional fax functions of  
this machine. The indicator to the right of the key will light when  
the machine is in the fax operation mode. The lamp to the left of  
the key will either light or flash green, depending upon the status  
of the machine. )  
5 [Interrupt] key & indicator lamp  
(Press this key to light the lamp in that key when you want to  
perform interrupt copying. See page 4-9.)  
6 [Management] key  
(When copy management is turned ON, press this key after  
copying in order to return to the department ID-code entry display.  
See page 7-1.)  
% [Auto Selection] key & indicator lamp  
(Press this key to light the lamp in that key when you want to use  
the auto selection mode. The optional Document Processor must  
be installed in your copier in order to use this mode.  
See page 8-3.)  
7 [Default Setting/Counter] key  
(Press this key when you want to perform default settings as well  
as those related to copy management, etc.)  
^ [Job Build] key & indicator lamp  
8 Keypad  
(Press this key to light the lamp in that key when you want to use  
the job build mode. See page 5-57.)  
(Use these keys when you want to set the number of copies to be  
made or enter other values.)  
& [Repeat Copy] key & indicator lamp  
9 Touch panel  
(Press this key to light the lamp in that key when you want to use  
the repeat copy mode. The optional Hard Disk must be installed on  
this copier in order to use this mode. See page 5-42.)  
(This panel displays such information as operation procedures,  
machine status, and the various function keys.)  
0 Brightness adjustment control dial  
(Turn this dial when you want to adjust the brightness of the touch  
panel.)  
* [Job Queue] key & indicator lamp  
(Press this key to light the lamp in that key when you want to use  
the output management functions of the copier. See page 6-20.)  
! [Copier] key, lamp & indicator  
( [Document Management] key & indicator lamp  
(Press this key to light the lamp in that key when you want to use  
the document management functions of the copier. The optional  
Hard Disk must be installed on this copier in order to use this  
function.See page 6-1.)  
(Press this key to light the indicator to the right of the key when you  
want to use the copier functions of this machine.)  
2-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 2 NAMES OF PARTS  
● Initial mode (at the end of warm-up or when the [Reset] key is  
pressed)  
In the default settings prepared at the factory, paper of the same size  
as the original is selected automatically and the copy magnification  
ratio is set to “100%” [1:1] (under the auto paper selection mode), the  
number of copies to be made is set to “1” and the image quality is set  
to the text+photo mode.  
NOTES  
• The default settings for the initial mode can be changed using the  
corresponding “copy default settings” procedure.  
• It is possible for you to change the default setting for the copy  
exposure in the initial mode from the “manual exposure mode” to the  
“auto exposure mode”. (See “Exposure mode” on page 7-63.)  
● Auto clear function  
Once a designated amount of time has passed after copying stops  
(between 10 and 270 seconds), the auto clear function will  
automatically engage and the copier will return to the same settings  
as those after warm up (initial mode settings). (However, the copy  
exposure mode and the image quality mode will not change.) Copies  
can continually be made using the same settings (copy mode,  
number of copies and exposure mode) if the next batch of copying is  
started before the auto clear function engages.  
● Automatic drawer[cassette] switching function  
If two drawers[cassettes] contain the same size of paper and the  
paper in one drawer[cassette] runs out during copying, the automatic  
drawer[cassette] switching function will switch to paper feed from the  
other drawer[cassette] that still contains paper.  
NOTES  
• The automatic drawer[cassette] switching function can be turned  
OFF. (See “Auto drawer[cassette] switching ON/OFF” on page  
7-42.)  
• Paper must be loaded in the same orientation in both  
drawers[cassettes].  
• Only drawers[cassettes] that are loaded with the same type of paper  
can be used with the automatic drawer[cassette] switching function.  
2-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 2 NAMES OF PARTS  
3. Touch panel  
Inch specifications  
3
1
2
Set  
Paper Size  
11x81/2  
Ready to copy.  
"
Combine  
11x81/2  
"
Plain  
Orig.image  
quality  
^
81/2x11"  
Color  
11x81/2  
Plain  
11x81/2  
Recycled  
Sort:Off  
AMS  
APS  
Reduce  
/Enlarge  
4
Auto  
Exposure  
"
"
Bypass  
Plain  
Sort:On  
Exposure  
mode  
Reduce  
/Enlarge  
Sort/  
Finished  
Basic  
User choice  
Function  
Program  
&
*
6 5 8  
(
9 7 ! ) @ 0#  
$ %  
Metric specifications  
3
1
2
Set  
Paper Size  
Ready to copy.  
Merge copy  
Image  
quality  
Plain  
^
Sort:Off  
AMS  
APS  
Colour  
Reduce/  
Enlarge  
4
Auto  
Exposure  
Bypass  
Plain  
Sort:On  
Plain  
Exposure  
mode  
Reduce/  
Enlarge  
Sort/  
Finished  
Recycled  
Basic  
User choice  
Function  
Program  
&
*
6 5 8  
(
9 7 ! ) @ 0#  
$ %  
2-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 2 NAMES OF PARTS  
1 This area displays messages on the machine's status and on  
operational procedures.  
* “User choice” tab  
(Touch this tab when you want to display the contents of the “User  
choice” tab.)  
2 This area displays information on the size of paper in the  
drawer[cassette] and the current copy magnification ratio.  
3 This area displays the current number of copies to be made.  
4 Paper size keys (Remaining paper volume icons)  
(Touch these keys when you want to change the currently selected  
drawer[cassette] in order to change the size of paper that will be  
used. The drawer[cassette] that holds the currently selected paper  
size and type of paper will be highlighted. Drawer[Cassette] No.3  
and drawer[cassette] No.4 will be displayed when the optional  
Paper Feeder is installed on your copier.)  
Inch specifications  
2 sided/  
Separation  
Select  
orig.size  
Orig.image  
quality  
Margin/  
Centering  
Border  
Erase  
Combine  
Basic  
User choice  
Function  
Program  
5 “APS” key  
(Touch this key until it is highlighted when you want to have the  
paper size selected automatically. See page 4-2.)  
6 “Bypass” key  
Metric specifications  
(Touch this key when you want to copy onto paper that is set on  
the multi-bypass tray. The type of paper registered for use on the  
multi-bypass tray will be indicated in the key.)  
7 Copy exposure adjustment keys / Copy exposure scale  
(Touch the appropriate key when you want to manually adjust the  
copy exposure. The copy exposure scale will indicate the currently  
selected setting. See page 4-2.)  
2-sided/  
Split  
Select  
size orig.  
Image  
quality  
Margin/  
Imag. shift  
Erase  
Mode  
Merge copy  
Basic  
User choice  
Function  
Program  
8 “Exposure mode” key  
( “Function” tab  
(Touch this key when you want to access the “Exposure Mode”  
screen.)  
9 “Auto Exposure” key  
(Touch this tab when you want to display the contents of the  
“Function” tab.)  
Inch specifications  
(Touch this key until it is highlighted when you want to select the  
auto exposure mode. In the auto exposure mode, the contrast of  
the original will be detected and the most suitable exposure level  
selected automatically. See page 4-2.)  
Paper size  
Set  
1
Ready to copy.  
11x8 /2  
"
Select  
paper  
2 sided/  
Separation  
Select  
orig. size  
Combine  
0 “AMS” key  
Exposure  
mode  
Reduce  
/Enlarge  
Auto  
Selection  
Batch  
scanning  
Up  
(Touch this key until it is highlighted when you want to have the  
copy magnification ratio selected automatically. See page 4-5.)  
! “Reduce/Enlarge” key  
(Touch this key when you want to manually change the copy  
magnification ratio. See page 4-6.)  
@ “100%” (same size) key  
Orig.image  
quality  
Margin/  
Centering  
Forms  
Overlay  
Page #  
Down  
Cover  
Mode  
Sort/  
Finished  
Border  
Erase  
Booklet  
Function  
Basic  
User choice  
Program  
Paper size  
Set  
1
Ready to copy.  
11x8 /2  
"
(Touch this key when you want to copy the original image at its  
actual size “100%”.)  
# “Sort:OFF” key  
Auto  
Rotation  
Memo  
pages  
OHP  
backing  
Proof Copy  
Invert  
Orig. set  
direction  
Eco Print  
Mirror  
Up  
Modify  
Copy  
Down  
(Touch this key when you want to make copies without sorting  
them.)  
Function  
$ “Sort:ON” key  
Basic  
User choice  
Program  
(Touch this key when you want to make copies in the sort mode.)  
% “Sort/Finish” key  
Metric specifications  
Paper size  
(Touch this key when you want to access the “Sort/Finish” screen.  
See page 5-29.)  
^ Registration keys  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
Select  
paper  
2-sided/  
Split  
Select  
size orig.  
Merge copy  
Exposure  
mode  
Reduce/  
Enlarge  
Auto  
selection  
Large # of  
originals  
(Touch the appropriate key when you want to access the  
corresponding function or mode. Any function or mode in the  
“Function” tab can be registered to be displayed as one of the  
registration key. See page 5-53.)  
Up  
Image  
quality  
Margin/  
Imag. shift  
Page  
numbering  
Form  
overlay  
Down  
Sort/  
Finished  
Erase  
Mode  
Cover  
Mode  
Booklet  
Function  
Basic  
User choice  
Program  
& “Basic” tab  
(Touch this tab when you want to return the display to the contents  
of the “Basic” tab.)  
Paper size  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
Auto  
Rotation  
Memo  
pages  
Test copy  
Invert  
OHP back  
Orig. set  
direction  
Eco Print  
Mirror  
Up  
Modify  
copy  
Down  
Function  
Basic  
User choice  
Program  
2-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 2 NAMES OF PARTS  
) “Program” tab  
NOTE  
(Touch this tab when you want to register the currently selected  
settings as a program, or to delete a previously registered  
program. See page 5-50.)  
You can change or add new keys to those displayed in the “Basic” and  
the “User choice” tabs by following the “Customize screen layout  
(Main functions)” procedure on page 7-85 or the “Customize screen  
layout (Add functions)” procedure on page 7-86, as appropriate.  
NOTE  
If you press any key that has an arrow (P) in its bottom right corner,  
the corresponding setting screen will be displayed.  
Inch specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
1
Ready to copy.  
11x8 /2  
"
Select  
paper  
2 sided/  
Separation  
Select  
orig. size  
Combine  
Exposure  
mode  
Reduce  
/Enlarge  
Auto  
Selection  
Batch  
scanning  
Up  
Orig.image  
quality  
Margin/  
Centering  
Forms  
Overlay  
Page #  
Down  
Cover  
Mode  
Sort/  
Finished  
Border  
Erase  
Booklet  
Function  
Basic  
User choice  
Program  
Metric specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
Select  
paper  
2-sided/  
Split  
Select  
size orig.  
Merge copy  
Exposure  
mode  
Reduce/  
Enlarge  
Auto  
selection  
Large # of  
originals  
Up  
Image  
quality  
Margin/  
Imag. shift  
Page  
numbering  
Form  
overlay  
Down  
Sort/  
Finished  
Erase  
Mode  
Cover  
Mode  
Booklet  
Function  
Basic  
User choice  
Program  
“Register” key  
(Touch this key when you want to register the currently selected  
function or mode under a registration key. See page 5-53.)  
“Back” key  
(Touch this key when you want to return the settings for the currently  
selected mode back to their previous values.)  
“Close” key  
(Touch this key when you want to return to the previous screen.)  
Inch specifications  
Paper size  
11x8 /2  
100%  
Set  
1
Ready to copy.  
"
Reduce/Enlarge  
Register  
Back  
Close  
(25~400)  
100  
154%  
77%  
11x17"➔8 /2x14"  
%
AMS  
1
1
1
1
5 /2x8 /2"➔8 /2x14"  
129%  
8 /2x11"➔11x17"  
64%  
11x17"➔8 /2x11"  
100%  
Standard  
Zoom  
1
1
400%  
121%  
8 /2x14"➔11x17"  
50%  
11x17"➔5 /2x8 /2  
XY Zoom  
1
1
1
"
78%  
8 /2x14"➔8 /2x11"  
25%  
200%  
1
1
1
1
#
keys  
5 /2x8 /2"➔11x17"  
Metric specifications  
Paper size  
100%  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
Reduce/Enlarge  
(25~400)  
Register  
Back  
Close  
141%  
127%  
106%  
90%  
A 4➔A 3  
75%  
70%  
50%  
25%  
100  
%
AMS  
A 5➔A 4  
11x15"➔A 4  
A 3➔A 4  
A 4➔A 5  
100%  
400%  
Standard  
Zoom  
Folio➔A 3  
XY Zoom  
11x15"➔A 3  
200%  
#-Keys  
A 5➔A 3  
Folio➔A 4  
Metric specifications (Asia Pacific)  
Paper size  
100%  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
Reduce/Enlarge  
Register  
Back  
Close  
(25~400)  
100  
141%  
122%  
A 4➔A 3  
81%  
70%  
50%  
25%  
B 4➔A 4  
%
AMS  
B 5➔B 4  
B 5➔A 5  
A 4➔B 4  
A 5➔B 5  
A 3➔A 4  
B 4➔B 5  
100%  
Standard  
Zoom  
400%  
200%  
115%  
86%  
B 4➔A 3  
B 5➔A 4  
XY Zoom  
A 3➔B 4  
#-Keys  
A 5➔A 3  
A 4➔B 5  
2-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 2 NAMES OF PARTS  
2-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 3 PREPARATIONS  
1. Loading paper  
Paper can be loaded into the two drawers[cassettes] and the multi-  
bypass tray.  
IMPORTANT!  
Using special paper  
In this copier, the type of paper loaded in each drawer[cassette] and  
on the multi-bypass tray can be specified under “Paper type  
(drawer[cassette] No.1 - No.4)” on page 7-44 and “(1) Paper size and  
type” on page 7-87, respectively.  
Among the special paper that can be use with this copier, there is a  
wide range in paper quality and construction, especially in those types  
of paper noted below. For that reason, there is a greater possibility of  
problems occurring during copying with these type of paper.  
Whenever you do use such special paper as noted here, it is  
recommended that you first make a test copy and verify the results.  
(1) Note when adding paper  
After taking new paper out of its packaging, be sure to fan through  
them a few times to separate the sheets and use a flat surface to align  
the leading edges of the paper before loading that paper into a  
drawer[cassette] or setting it on the multi-bypass tray.  
<Special paper for which extra caution is recommended>  
• Preprinted  
• Labels *1  
• Prepunched  
• Envelopes *2  
*1 When using label sheets, be absolutely certain that there is no  
possibility that the backing glue will come into contact with any part  
of the copier, and that none of the labels will come off the sheet  
during copying.  
Set the paper in the drawer[cassette] with the side that was facing  
upward when you opened the package facing upward.  
If glue does happen to come into contact with the drum or rollers,  
or one of the labels comes off inside the copier, it can be the cause  
of major damage.  
*2 The following types of envelopes should never be used:  
• Those on which the glue is exposed.  
• Those whereby glue will be exposed if the protective paper is  
removed. (If the paper protecting the glue comes off inside the  
copier it can be the cause of major damage.)  
• Those of special construction.  
• Those which have a round tab on the back and are closed with  
string.  
• Those which have an open window.  
• Those which have a transparent film window.  
IMPORTANT!  
NOTE  
• When copying onto used paper (paper which has already been  
copied onto at least one side), DO NOT use paper that is stapled or  
clipped together as this can be the cause of damage to the copier  
and/or create problems in the copy image.  
When using prepunched, preprinted or letterhead paper, refer to  
“Special paper action setting” on page 7-46-1.  
• If you use paper that is curled at all, straighten the paper out before  
loading it into a drawer[cassette] or setting it on the multi-bypass  
tray, or it can cause a paper jam.  
3-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 3 PREPARATIONS  
Set the paper flush against the left-hand wall of the  
drawer[cassette].  
(2) Loading paper into the drawer[cassette]  
4
Up to 500 sheets of standard paper (75 or 80 g/m2/standard paper as  
specified by our company) or colored paper can be loaded into the  
each drawer[cassette].  
The each drawer[cassette] can be set to hold paper of any desired  
size from 5 1/2" x 8 1/2", 8 1/2" x 11", 11" x 8 1/2", 8 1/2" x 13", 8 1/2" x  
14", 11" x 17", A5R, B5R, B5, A4R, A4, B4, A3, Folio, 8K and 16K.  
IMPORTANT!  
Set the type of paper (standard paper, recycled paper, etc.) to be  
loaded in the drawer[cassette] in “Paper type (drawer[cassette] No.1 -  
No. 4)” on page 7-44.  
IMPORTANT!  
• Make sure that there are no folds, etc., in the paper when it is set in  
a drawer[cassette]. Such paper may be the cause of paper jams.  
• There is a sticker (1 in the illustration) indicating paper capacity  
attached to the inside of the drawer[cassette]. Do not load paper  
above this limit.  
Pull the drawer[cassette] out toward you as far as it will go.  
* Do not pull more than one drawer[cassette] out at a time.  
1
• When you are loading paper into a drawer[cassette], make sure that  
the side facing upward when the package is opened is the side that  
is facing upward in the drawer[cassette].  
• Adjust the length adjustment plate and the width guide BEFORE  
loading paper into a drawer[cassette]. Failure to do so may result in  
skewed paper feed or a paper jam.  
• Make sure that the paper is set securely against the length  
adjustment plate and the width guide. If there is a gap between the  
paper and the adjustment plate or the width guide, readjust the plate  
and the guide to fit the paper snugly.  
Hold the width adjustment lever and move it to align the width  
guide with the required paper width.  
Paper sizes are marked inside the drawer[cassette].  
1
2
Hold the length adjustment plate and move it to align with the  
required paper length.  
3
3-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 3 PREPARATIONS  
Set the supplied paper size sheet so that the size of the  
paper loaded can be checked by looking at the front of the  
drawer[cassette].  
Open the multi-bypass tray.  
5
1
2
3
Adjust the insert guides to the size of the paper to be loaded.  
Gently push the drawer[cassette] back in.  
6
NOTE  
Before leaving the copier in disuse for a prolonged period of time,  
remove the paper from the drawer(s)[cassette(s)] and seal it in its  
original packaging to protect from moisture. Also, when storing paper  
in a high temperature and high humidity environment, seal it in a  
moisture-proof bag.  
(3) Loading paper into the multi-bypass tray  
Insert the paper along the guides as far as it will go.  
Up to 200 sheets of standard copy paper (75 g/m2 – 80 g/m2), of a  
size between 11" x 17" [A3] and 5 1/2" x 8 1/2" [A6R] can be set on the  
multi-bypass tray at one time. When copying onto special paper, be  
sure to use the multi-bypass tray.  
NOTE  
The types of special paper and the number of sheets that can be  
loaded in the multi-bypass tray are:  
• Transparencies: 25 sheets  
• Standard paper (120 g/m2): 130 sheets  
• Standard paper (160 g/m2): 100 sheets  
IMPORTANT!  
IMPORTANT!  
• When you are setting paper onto the multi-bypass tray, make sure  
that the side facing upward when the package is opened is the side  
that is facing upward on the multi-bypass tray as well. In addition, if  
the leading edge of the paper is curled at all, straighten it out before  
setting it on the multi-bypass tray.  
• When copying onto OHP transparencies, be sure to fan through  
them a few times to separate the sheets before setting them on the  
multi-bypass tray.  
• When copying onto non-standard size paper, perform the procedure  
in “(1) Paper size and type” on page 7-87 and select the paper size.  
• When setting special paper such as OHP transparencies and thick  
paper on the multi-bypass tray, the type of paper must be specified  
under “(1) Paper size and type” on page 7-87.  
• ALWAYS straighten out curled paper before setting it on the multi-  
bypass tray.  
• You can select to have the “Bypass setting” screen (see page 7-86)  
displayed whenever the “Bypass” key is touched. (See “Multi-bypass  
tray setting display ON/OFF” on page 7-45.)  
3-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 3 PREPARATIONS  
● Setting envelopes  
When using envelopes that are wider than they are tall, leave  
the flap closed and set the envelopes with the copy side  
facing upward and the flap facing towards the rear of the  
copier. Then slide the envelopes into the slot along the insert  
guides as far as they will go.  
3
Up to 20 envelopes can be set on the multi-bypass tray at a time.  
Refer to the following table for the types and sizes of envelopes that  
can be used in this machine.  
When using envelopes that are taller than they are wide,  
open the flap and set the envelopes with the copy side facing  
upward and the flap facing away from the direction of  
insertion. Then slide the envelopes into the slot along the  
insert guides as far as they will go.  
Acceptable envelope types  
Monarch  
Size  
3 1/8" x 7 1/2"  
3 3/8" x 9 1/2"  
Comm. #10  
Envelope DL  
Envelope C5  
Executive  
110 x 220 (mm)  
162 x 229 (mm)  
7 1/4" x 10 1/2"  
3 7/8" x 8 7/8"  
Copier  
Copier  
Comm. #9  
Comm. #6-3/4  
ISO B5  
3 5/8" x 6 1/2"  
176 x 250 (mm)  
229 x 324 (mm)  
200 x 148 (mm)  
162 x 114 (mm)  
234 x 105 (mm)  
Envelope C4  
Oufuku Hagaki  
YOUKEI 2  
NOTES  
• If the optional Printer Kit or Printer/scanner Kit is installed on your  
copier and you attempt to print from a computer onto envelopes that  
are wider than they are tall, be sure to leave the flap closed and set  
the envelopes with the side to be printed onto facing upward. Orient  
the edge with the flap towards the front of the copier and then slide  
the envelopes into the slot along the insert guides as far as they will  
go.  
YOUKEI 4  
Open the multi-bypass tray.  
1
Copier  
• The proper orientation will actually depend upon the type of  
envelope being used.  
• Incorrectly loading envelopes can result in printing in the wrong  
orientation or on the wrong side.  
Align the insert guides with the envelope size.  
2
• When setting envelopes on the multi-bypass tray, BE SURE to  
specify the type of envelopes that will be used under “3. Multi-  
bypass tray paper settings” on page 7-87.  
3-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 4 BASIC OPERATION  
1. Basic copying procedure  
Set  
Paper Size  
11x81/2  
Ready to copy.  
"
1
3
3
Com  
11x81  
Plain  
/2"  
Ori  
qua  
81  
/2x11"  
Sort:Off  
AMS  
APS  
Bypass  
Color  
Re  
/En  
11x81  
Plain  
/
2
"
"
Auto  
Exposure  
Sort:On  
Plain  
11x81  
/
2
Sort/  
Finished  
Exposure  
mode  
Reduce  
/Enlarge  
Recycled  
Basic  
User choice  
Function  
Program  
Inch specifications  
Set  
Paper Size  
Ready to copy.  
1. Warm-up  
Mer  
Turn the power switch ON ( | ). At the end of warm-up, “Ready to  
copy.” will be displayed.  
Plain  
Ima  
qua  
Sort:Off  
Sort:On  
AMS  
APS  
Colour  
Re  
En  
Auto  
Exposure  
Bypass  
Plain  
Plain  
Sort/  
Finished  
Exposure  
mode  
Reduce/  
Enlarge  
Recycled  
NOTE  
Basic  
User choice  
Function  
Program  
If you set the originals that you want to copy and press the [Start] key  
while the copier is still warming up, copying will begin as soon as  
warm-up is finished.  
Metric specifications  
3. Selecting the desired functions  
Select from among the copier’s various modes and functions.  
• Enlarging/reducing the copy image (Page 4-5.)  
• Interrupt copying (Page 4-9.)  
2
• Making 2-sided copies from various types of originals (Page 5-1.)  
• Copying each image of open-faced (books, magazines, etc.) or  
2-sided originals onto separate sheets (Page 5-4.)  
• Creating a margin on the copies (Page 5-6.)  
• Centering the copy image (Page 5-8.)  
• Adding a space next to the copy images for making notes  
(Page 5-9.)  
• Making copies with clean edges (Page 5-11.)  
• Fitting the image of either two or four originals onto a single copy  
page (Page 5-13.)  
• Printing page numbers on the copies (Page 5-16.)  
• Overlaying one image over another (Page 5-20.)  
• Making booklets from sheet originals (Page 5-22.)  
• Making booklets from book originals (Page 5-26.)  
• Automatic sorting of copy sets without the Document Finisher  
(Page 5-29.)  
• Automatic rotation of the copy image (Page 5-30.)  
• Adding a front and/or back cover to your copy sets (Page 5-31.)  
• Feeding paper as a backing sheet for OHP transparencies  
(Page 5-36.)  
2. Setting the originals  
Open the original cover and set the original that you want to copy  
face-down on the platen. Be sure to align originals with the upper left  
corner of the platen (towards the left-rear portion of the copier).  
NOTE  
See “4 How to set originals in the Document Processor” on page 8-2  
for instructions on how to set originals in your Document Processor  
(option).  
• Inverting black and white (Page 5-38.)  
• Making mirror image copies (Page 5-39.)  
• Making a test copy prior to large volume copying (Page 5-40.)  
• Making more of the same copies after a copy job is finished  
(Page 5-42.)  
• Copying a large volume of originals in one operation (Page 5-47.)  
• Easily add covers and insert sheets between various sets of  
originals in one operation (Page 5-57.)  
4-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 4 BASIC OPERATION  
Set  
Paper Size  
11x81/2  
Ready to copy.  
"
4
5
Com  
11x81  
Plain  
/2"  
Ori  
qua  
AMS  
APS  
Bypass  
81  
/2x11"  
Sort:Off  
AMS  
APS  
Bypass  
Color  
Re  
/En  
11x81  
Plain  
/
/
2
"
"
Auto  
Exposure  
Auto  
Exposure  
Sort:On  
Plain  
Plain  
11x81  
2
Sort/  
Finished  
Exposure  
mode  
Reduce  
/Enlarge  
Recycled  
Exposure  
mode  
Reduce  
/Enlarge  
Basic  
User choice  
Function  
Program  
Inch specifications  
Inch specifications  
Set  
Me  
Paper Size  
Ready to copy.  
4
5
Plain  
Ima  
qua  
AMS  
APS  
Sort:Off  
Sort:On  
AMS  
APS  
Colour  
Re  
En  
Auto  
Exposure  
Bypass  
Plain  
Auto  
Exposure  
Bypass  
Plain  
Plain  
Sort/  
Finished  
Exposure  
mode  
Reduce/  
Enlarge  
Recycled  
Exposure  
mode  
Reduce/  
Enlarge  
Basic  
User choice  
Function  
Program  
Metric specifications  
4. Selecting the paper size  
Metric specifications  
5. Adjusting the copy exposure  
When the “APS” key is highlighted on the touch panel, copy paper of  
the same size as the original will be automatically selected. In order to  
copy the original onto a different size of paper without changing the  
size of the image, touch the paper size key that corresponds to the  
paper size that you want to use.  
Adjustment of the copy exposure is generally accomplished manually.  
If you want to make the exposure darker, touch the right exposure  
adjustment key to move the arrow under the exposure scale to the  
right; If you want to make the exposure lighter, touch the left exposure  
adjustment key to move the arrow under the exposure scale to the  
left.  
If you want the copy exposure to be adjusted automatically, touch the  
“Auto Exposure” key until it is highlighted. The contrast of the original  
will be detected and the most suitable exposure level selected  
automatically.  
* It is also possible for you to adjust the copy exposure by touching  
the “Exposure Mode” key to access the “Exposure Mode” screen.  
Copy exposure adjustment can then be performed in this screen  
using the same methods as above.  
NOTES  
• You can stop the copier from automatically selecting the paper size.  
(See “Paper selection” on page 7-68.)  
• It is also possible for you to specify one drawer[cassette] that will be  
selected automatically regardless of the size of paper loaded in that  
drawer[cassette].  
(See “Default drawer[cassette]” on page 7-70.)  
Inch specifications  
Paper Size  
11x81  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
/
2"  
Register  
7
Back  
Close  
Exposurre Mode  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Auto  
Lighter  
Darker  
Manual  
Metric specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
Register  
Back  
Close  
Exposurre mode  
Auto  
Lighter  
Darker  
Manual  
NOTES  
• It is possible for you to make adjustments to the auto exposure  
mode if the overall copies come out too dark or too light.  
(See “Auto exposure adjustment” on page 7-73.)  
• It is also possible for you to change the default setting for the copy  
exposure to the auto exposure mode.  
(See “Exposure mode” on page 7-63.)  
4-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 4 BASIC OPERATION  
Paper size  
S
Set  
Paper Size  
11x81/2  
1
Ready to copy.  
11x8 /2  
"
"
6
6
7
Select  
paper  
2 sided/  
Separation  
Select  
orig. size  
Combine  
Exposure  
mode  
Reduce  
/Enlarge  
Auto  
Selection  
Batch  
scanning  
Up  
Combine  
Orig.image  
quality  
Margin/  
Centering  
Forms  
Overlay  
Page #  
Down  
Orig.image  
quality  
Cover  
Mode  
Sort/  
Finished  
Border  
Erase  
Booklet  
Sort:Off  
AMS  
Reduce  
/Enlarge  
Function  
Basic  
User choice  
Program  
S
t O  
Inch specifications  
Inch specifications  
Paper size  
S
Set  
Paper Size  
Ready to copy.  
7
Select  
paper  
2-sided/  
Split  
Select  
size orig.  
Merge copy  
Exposure  
mode  
Reduce/  
Enlarge  
Auto  
selection  
Large # of  
originals  
Up  
Merge copy  
Image  
quality  
Margin/  
Imag. shift  
Page  
numbering  
Form  
overlay  
Down  
Image  
quality  
Sort/  
Finished  
Erase  
Mode  
Cover  
Mode  
Booklet  
Sort:Off  
t O  
AMS  
Reduce/  
Enlarge  
Function  
Basic  
User choice  
Program  
A
S
Metric specifications  
Metric specifications  
6. Selecting the image quality  
The image quality is selected according to the type of original.  
Touch the “Function” tab and then the resulting “Orig. image quality”  
[“Image quality”] key that is displayed within that tab in order to access  
the “Orig.image quality” [“Image quality orig.”] screen.  
7. Setting the number of copies to be made  
Use the keypad to change the number of copies to be made that is  
displayed on the touch panel to the actual number that you want to  
make. Up to 999 copies can be made at one time.  
Inch specifications  
NOTE  
Paper Size  
11x81  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
/2"  
It is possible for you to limit the number of copies (or copy sets) that  
can be made at a time. (See “Copy limit” on page 7-82.)  
Register  
Back  
Close  
Orig.image quality  
Text Photo  
Photo  
Text Photo:Set this mode to copy orig.  
with mixed text and photo  
Photo:Add  
Text :Copy  
a
a
dimensional effect of photo  
pencil or fine line.  
Text  
8
Metric specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
Register  
Back  
Close  
Image quality orig.  
Text+Photo  
Photo  
Text+Photo:Set this mode to copy  
original mixed (text photo).  
dimensional effect of photo.  
Text :Copy pencil fine line clearly.  
&
Photo:Add  
a
&
Text  
8. Start copying  
Press the [Start] key. Once the lamp in the [Start] key is lit green and  
“Ready to copy.” is displayed, copying is possible.  
Text+photo mode: Touch the “Text+Photo” key until it is highlighted.  
Select this mode when the original contains a  
Inch specifications  
mixture of both text and photographs.  
Photo mode:  
Text mode:  
Touch the “Photo” key until it is highlighted. Select  
this mode to bring out the depth in photographs.  
Touch the “Text” key until it is highlighted. Select  
this mode especially to reproduce originals written  
in pencil of which contain thin lines.  
Now copying.  
Output  
Orig. page  
Count/Set  
11x81  
/2"  
11x81  
1 sided  
Sort  
/2"  
Plain  
1 sided  
APS  
Pause  
Inner tray  
Rear  
Job 1  
NOTES  
• It is possible for you to change the image quality mode that will be  
the default setting in the initial mode. (See “Original quality” onpage  
7-65.)  
Metric specifications  
Now copying.  
• It is also possible for you to adjust the copy exposure in each of  
the image quality modes. (See “Manual exposure adjustment  
(text+photo mode)” on page 7-75, “Manual exposure adjustment  
(text mode)” on page 7-76 and “Manual exposure adjustment  
(photo mode)” on page 7-77.)  
Output  
Original  
Count/set  
Plain  
Stop  
/ Change  
1-sided  
R top / rear  
APS  
1-sided  
Sort  
Inner tray  
Job 1  
4-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 4 BASIC OPERATION  
9
9. At the end of copying  
Finished copies will be ejected onto the copy store section.  
IMPORTANT!  
• Up to 250 copies can be stored on the copy store section.  
• If “The output tray exceeds capacity. Remove the paper.” [“Too much  
paper in output tray. Remove paper.”] is displayed, there are too  
many copies on the top tray. Remove the copies from the copy store  
section and then press the [Start] key to resume copying.  
• If ejected copies come out curled, or are otherwise not stored  
cleanly, remove the paper from the drawer[cassette] or the multi-  
bypass tray (whichever is currently being used), turn the paper over,  
set it again in that location and try to copy again.  
CAUTION  
If the copier will not be used for a short period of time  
(overnight, etc.), turn the power switch OFF (O).  
If it will not be used for an extended period of time  
(vacations, etc.), remove the power plug from the  
outlet for safety purposes during the time the copier  
is not in use.  
4-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 4 BASIC OPERATION  
2. Enlarging/reducing the copy image  
Select the size of paper that you want to copy onto by  
touching the appropriate paper size key.  
Touch the “AMS” key. The corresponding magnification ratio  
will be displayed.  
(1) Auto magnification selection mode  
2
With this mode, the original image is enlarged/reduced automatically  
according to the selected paper size.  
Inch specifications  
Set  
Paper Size  
11x81/2  
Ready to copy.  
"
Combine  
11x81  
Plain  
/2"  
Orig.image  
quality  
81  
/2x11"  
APS  
Bypass  
Sort:Off  
AMS  
Color  
Reduce  
/Enlarge  
11x81  
Plain  
/
2
"
"
Auto  
Exposure  
Sort:On  
Plain  
11x81  
/
2
Sort/  
Finished  
Exposure  
mode  
Reduce  
/Enlarge  
Recycled  
Basic  
User choice  
Function  
Program  
Metric specifications  
Set  
Paper Size  
Ready to copy.  
Merge copy  
Plain  
Image  
quality  
IMPORTANT!  
APS  
Sort:Off  
Sort:On  
AMS  
Colour  
Reduce/  
Enlarge  
Bypass  
Plain  
Auto  
Exposure  
Plain  
If you use this mode most often, select “AMS” under “Default  
magnification ratio” on page 7-72.  
Exposure  
mode  
Reduce/  
Enlarge  
Sort/  
Finished  
Recycled  
Basic  
User choice  
Function  
Program  
Press the [Start] key to begin the copying procedure.  
Set the original to be copied.  
The copier will automatically detect the size of the originals  
and select copy paper of that same size.  
3
1
Inch specifications  
Set  
Paper Size  
11x81/2  
Ready to copy.  
"
Combine  
11x81  
Plain  
/2"  
Orig.image  
quality  
81  
/2x11"  
Sort:Off  
AMS  
APS  
Bypass  
Color  
Reduce  
/Enlarge  
11x81  
Plain  
/
2
"
"
Auto  
Exposure  
Sort:On  
Plain  
11x81  
/
2
Sort/  
Finished  
Exposure  
mode  
Reduce  
/Enlarge  
Recycled  
Basic  
User choice  
Function  
Program  
Metric specifications  
Set  
Paper Size  
Ready to copy.  
Merge copy  
Plain  
Image  
quality  
Sort:Off  
Sort:On  
AMS  
APS  
Colour  
Reduce/  
Enlarge  
Auto  
Exposure  
Bypass  
Plain  
Plain  
Sort/  
Finished  
Exposure  
mode  
Reduce/  
Enlarge  
Recycled  
Basic  
User choice  
Function  
Program  
4-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 4 BASIC OPERATION  
Touch the “+” key or the “-” key to change the displayed  
magnification ratio to the desired setting.  
* The desired magnification ratio can also be entered directly  
by touching the “# keys” [“#-Keys”] key and then using the  
keypad.  
(2) Zoom mode  
3
With this mode, the magnification ratio can be set to any 1%  
increment between 25% and 400%.  
Inch specifications  
Paper size  
11x8 /2  
100%  
Set  
1
Ready to copy.  
"
25%  
Reduce/Enlarge  
Register  
Back  
Close  
(25~400)  
100  
154%  
77%  
11x17"➔8 /2x14"  
%
AMS  
1
1
1
1
5 /2x8 /2"➔8 /2x14"  
129%  
8 /2x11"➔11x17"  
64%  
11x17"➔8 /2x11"  
100%  
Standard  
Zoom  
1
1
400%  
121%  
8 /2x14"➔11x17"  
50%  
11x17"➔5 /2x8 /2  
XY Zoom  
1
1
1
"
78%  
8 /2x14"➔8 /2x11"  
25%  
200%  
1
1
1
1
#
keys  
5 /2x8 /2"➔11x17"  
400%  
Metric specifications  
Paper size  
100%  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
Set the original to be copied.  
Reduce/Enlarge  
(25~400)  
Register  
Back  
Close  
1
141%  
127%  
106%  
90%  
A 4➔A 3  
A 5➔A 4  
75%  
70%  
50%  
25%  
100  
%
AMS  
11x15"➔A 4  
A 3➔A 4  
A 4➔A 5  
100%  
400%  
Standard  
Zoom  
Touch the “Reduce/Enlarge” key. The “Reduce/Enlarge”  
screen will be displayed.  
Folio➔A 3  
2
XY Zoom  
11x15"➔A 3  
200%  
#-Keys  
A 5➔A 3  
Folio➔A 4  
Inch specifications  
Set  
Paper Size  
11x81/2  
Ready to copy.  
"
Metric specifications (Asia Pacific)  
Paper size  
100%  
Combine  
Set  
11x81  
Plain  
/2"  
Ready to copy.  
Orig.image  
quality  
81  
/2x11"  
Sort:Off  
AMS  
APS  
Bypass  
Reduce/Enlarge  
Register  
Back  
Close  
Color  
Reduce  
/Enlarge  
11x81  
Plain  
11x81  
/
/
2
"
"
(25~400)  
100  
Auto  
Exposure  
Sort:On  
Plain  
141%  
122%  
A 4➔A 3  
81%  
70%  
50%  
25%  
B 4➔A 4  
B 5➔A 5  
%
2
AMS  
B 5➔B 4  
Sort/  
Finished  
Exposure  
mode  
Reduce  
/Enlarge  
Recycled  
A 4➔B 4  
A 5➔B 5  
A 3➔A 4  
B 4➔B 5  
100%  
Standard  
Zoom  
Basic  
User choice  
Function  
Program  
400%  
200%  
115%  
86%  
B 4➔A 3  
B 5➔A 4  
XY Zoom  
A 3➔B 4  
#-Keys  
A 5➔A 3  
A 4➔B 5  
Metric specifications  
Set  
Paper Size  
Ready to copy.  
Press the [Start] key to begin the copying procedure.  
Merge copy  
4
Plain  
Image  
quality  
Sort:Off  
Sort:On  
AMS  
APS  
Colour  
Reduce/  
Enlarge  
Auto  
Exposure  
Bypass  
Plain  
Plain  
Sort/  
Finished  
Exposure  
mode  
Reduce/  
Enlarge  
Recycled  
Basic  
User choice  
Function  
Program  
4-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 4 BASIC OPERATION  
Touch the preset zoom key that corresponds to the  
magnification ratio that you want to use.  
(3) Preset zoom mode  
3
With this mode, the magnification ratio can be set to one of the pre-  
set ratios:  
Inch specifications  
Paper size  
11x8 /2  
100%  
Set  
1
Ready to copy.  
"
[Available magnification ratios]  
Reduce/Enlarge  
Register  
Back  
Close  
(25~400)  
100  
154%  
77%  
11x17"➔8 /2x14"  
Inch specification  
%
AMS  
1
1
1
1
5 /2x8 /2"➔8 /2x14"  
129%  
8 /2x11"➔11x17"  
64%  
11x17"➔8 /2x11"  
100%  
Reduction  
25%  
Standard  
Zoom  
1
1
400%  
121%  
8 /2x14"➔11x17"  
50%  
11x17"➔5 /2x8 /2  
50% (11" x 17" R 5 1/2" x 8 1/2")  
64% (11" x 17" R 8 1/2" x 11")  
77% (11" x 17" R 8 1/2" x 14")  
78% (8 1/2" x 14" R 8 1/2" x 11")  
XY Zoom  
1
1
1
"
78%  
25%  
200%  
1
1
1
1
#
keys  
5 /2x8 /2"➔11x17"  
8 /2x14"➔8 /2x11"  
Metric specifications  
Enlargement 121% (8 1/2" x 14" R 11" x 17")  
129% (8 1/2" x 11" R 11" x 17")  
154% (5 1/2" x 8 1/2" R 8 1/2" x 14")  
200% (5 1/2" x 8 1/2" R 11" x 17")  
400%  
Paper size  
100%  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
Reduce/Enlarge  
(25~400)  
Register  
Back  
Close  
141%  
127%  
106%  
90%  
A 4➔A 3  
75%  
70%  
50%  
25%  
100  
%
AMS  
A 5➔A 4  
11x15"➔A 4  
A 3➔A 4  
A 4➔A 5  
100%  
400%  
Standard  
Zoom  
Folio➔A 3  
Metric specification  
Reduction  
XY Zoom  
11x15"➔A 3  
200%  
25%  
#-Keys  
A 5➔A 3  
Folio➔A 4  
50%  
70% (A3 R A4, A4 R A5)  
75% (11" x 15" R A4)  
90% (Folio R A4)  
Metric specifications (Asia Pacific)  
Paper size  
100%  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
Enlargement 106% (11" x 15" R A3)  
127% (Folio R A3)  
Reduce/Enlarge  
Register  
Back  
Close  
(25~400)  
100  
141%  
122%  
A 4➔A 3  
B 5➔B 4  
81%  
70%  
50%  
25%  
B 4➔A 4  
B 5➔A 5  
%
AMS  
141% (A4 R A3, A5 R A4)  
200% (A5 R A3)  
400%  
A 4➔B 4  
A 5➔B 5  
A 3➔A 4  
B 4➔B 5  
100%  
Standard  
Zoom  
400%  
200%  
115%  
86%  
B 4➔A 3  
B 5➔A 4  
XY Zoom  
A 3➔B 4  
#-Keys  
A 5➔A 3  
A 4➔B 5  
Metric specification (Asia Pacific)  
Reduction  
25%  
50%  
NOTE  
70% (A3 R A4, B4 R B5)  
81% (B4 R A4, B5 R A5)  
86% (A3 R B4, A4 R B5)  
You can also change the magnification ratio in 1% increments by  
touching the “+” key or the “-” key, as appropriate.  
Enlargement 115% (B4 R A3, B5 R A4)  
122% (A4 R B4, A5 R B5)  
141% (A4 R A3, B5 R B4)  
200% (A5 R A3)  
Press the [Start] key to begin the copying procedure.  
4
400%  
Set the original to be copied.  
1
Touch the “Reduce/Enlarge” key.  
The “Reduce/Enlarge” screen will be displayed.  
2
Inch specifications  
Set  
Paper Size  
11x81/2  
Ready to copy.  
"
Combine  
11x81  
Plain  
/2"  
Orig.image  
quality  
81  
/2x11"  
Sort:Off  
Sort:On  
AMS  
APS  
Bypass  
Color  
Reduce  
/Enlarge  
11x81  
Plain  
/
2
"
"
Auto  
Exposure  
Plain  
11x81  
/
2
Sort/  
Finished  
Exposure  
mode  
Reduce  
/Enlarge  
Recycled  
Basic  
User choice  
Function  
Program  
Metric specifications  
Set  
Paper Size  
Ready to copy.  
Merge copy  
Plain  
Image  
quality  
Sort:Off  
AMS  
APS  
Colour  
Reduce/  
Enlarge  
Auto  
Exposure  
Bypass  
Plain  
Sort:On  
Plain  
Sort/  
Finished  
Exposure  
mode  
Reduce/  
Enlarge  
Recycled  
Basic  
User choice  
Function  
Program  
4-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 4 BASIC OPERATION  
Touch the “XY Zoom” key.  
The screen to select the magnification ratio will be displayed.  
(4) XY zoom mode  
3
With this mode, it is possible for you to select the length and width of  
the copy image separately. The magnification ratio can be set to any  
1% increment between 25% and 400%.  
Inch specifications  
Paper size  
11x8 /2  
100%  
Set  
1
Ready to copy.  
"
Reduce/Enlarge  
Register  
Back  
Close  
(25~400)  
100  
154%  
77%  
11x17"➔8 /2x14"  
%
AMS  
1
1
1
1
5 /2x8 /2"➔8 /2x14"  
129%  
8 /2x11"➔11x17"  
64%  
11x17"➔8 /2x11"  
100%  
Standard  
Zoom  
1
1
400%  
121%  
8 /2x14"➔11x17"  
50%  
11x17"➔5 /2x8 /2  
XY Zoom  
1
1
1
"
78%  
8 /2x14"➔8 /2x11"  
25%  
200%  
1
1
1
1
#
keys  
5 /2x8 /2"➔11x17"  
Y %  
M
M
Metric specifications  
Paper size  
100%  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
X %  
Reduce/Enlarge  
(25~400)  
Register  
Back  
Close  
141%  
127%  
106%  
90%  
A 4➔A 3  
75%  
70%  
50%  
25%  
100  
%
AMS  
A 5➔A 4  
11x15"➔A 4  
A 3➔A 4  
A 4➔A 5  
100%  
400%  
Standard  
Zoom  
Folio➔A 3  
XY Zoom  
Set the originals to be copied.  
11x15"➔A 3  
1
2
200%  
#-Keys  
A 5➔A 3  
Folio➔A 4  
Touch the “Reduce/Enlarge” key.  
The “Reduce/Enlarge” screen will be displayed.  
Metric specifications (Asia Pacific)  
Paper size  
100%  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
Inch specifications  
Reduce/Enlarge  
Register  
Back  
Close  
Set  
Paper Size  
11x81/2  
(25~400)  
100  
Ready to copy.  
"
141%  
122%  
A 4➔A 3  
81%  
70%  
50%  
25%  
B 4➔A 4  
B 5➔A 5  
%
AMS  
B 5➔B 4  
Combine  
A 4➔B 4  
A 5➔B 5  
A 3➔A 4  
B 4➔B 5  
100%  
Standard  
Zoom  
11x81  
Plain  
/2"  
Orig.image  
quality  
400%  
200%  
115%  
86%  
B 4➔A 3  
B 5➔A 4  
81  
/2x11"  
XY Zoom  
Sort:Off  
Sort:On  
AMS  
APS  
Bypass  
Color  
Reduce  
/Enlarge  
A 3➔B 4  
11x81  
Plain  
/
/
2
"
"
Auto  
Exposure  
#-Keys  
A 5➔A 3  
A 4➔B 5  
Plain  
11x81  
2
Sort/  
Finished  
Exposure  
mode  
Reduce  
/Enlarge  
Recycled  
Basic  
User choice  
Function  
Program  
Touch the “+” key or the “-” key, as appropriate, specify the  
desired magnification ratio for the width and then the length  
of the image. It is also possible for you to enter the desired  
ratio directly by touching the corresponding “# keys”  
[“#-Keys”] key and then using the keypad.  
4
Metric specifications  
Set  
Paper Size  
Ready to copy.  
Merge copy  
Plain  
Image  
quality  
Inch specifications  
Sort:Off  
AMS  
APS  
Colour  
Reduce/  
Enlarge  
Auto  
Exposure  
Bypass  
Sort:On  
Paper Size  
Set  
Plain  
Plain  
11x81  
X
/2"  
Ready to copy.  
Sort/  
Finished  
Exposure  
mode  
Reduce/  
Enlarge  
Y
Recycled  
Register  
Back  
Close  
Reduce/Enlarge  
Basic  
User choice  
Function  
Program  
Check direction  
Check direction of  
original top side.  
Y
X
Standard  
Zoom  
+
+
XY Zoom  
Left top  
corner  
Rear  
# keys  
# keys  
Metric specifications  
Paper size  
Y: X:  
Back  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
Register  
Close  
Reduce/Enlarge  
Check direction  
Check direction of  
original.  
Y
X
Standard  
Zoom  
XY Zoom  
Left top  
corner  
Back Edge  
#-Keys  
#-Keys  
Touch the appropriate key on the right side of the touch panel  
to specify the direction in which the original was set.  
5
6
Press the [Start] key to begin the copying procedure.  
4-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 4 BASIC OPERATION  
3. Interrupt copying  
Interrupt copying is useful if, during one copy job, you want to copy  
other originals at different settings. Once the rush job is completed,  
the interrupted copy job can be resumed at the same settings as  
before.  
When copying is completed, press the [Interrupt] key once  
again. The lamp in the [Interrupt] key will go out. Replace the  
newly copied originals with the ones removed before. Then,  
press the [Start] key. The interrupted copy job will be  
resumed.  
4
1 2 3 A  
1 2 A 3  
Press the [Interrupt] key to light the lamp in the [Interrupt]  
key. “Interrupt mode OK” will be displayed.  
1
Remove the originals that were currently being copied and  
put them aside.  
2
Set the new originals and perform the desired copy  
procedure.  
3
4-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 4 BASIC OPERATION  
4. Job reservation  
Copy jobs can be scheduled even while another copy job is in  
progress any time the “Reserve next copy” key is displayed.  
Touch the “Reserve next copy” key.  
The “Ready to copy. (Job reservation)” screen will be  
displayed.  
1
Inch specifications  
Inch specifications  
Memory usage  
30%  
Now copying.  
Memory usage  
30%  
Now copying.  
Output  
Orig. page  
Count/Set  
Reserve  
next copy  
Output  
Orig. page  
12  
1 sided  
Rear  
1/999  
Count/Set  
Reserve  
next copy  
11x81  
/
2
"
11x81  
1 sided  
Sort  
/2"  
100%  
APS  
Pause  
12  
1 sided  
Rear  
1/999  
11x81  
/
2"  
11x81  
1 sided  
Sort  
/2"  
Inner tray  
100%  
APS  
Pause  
Inner tray  
Metric specifications  
Metric specifications  
Now copying.  
Now copying.  
Output  
Original  
Count/set  
Reserve  
next copy  
Output  
Original  
Count/set  
12  
1-sided  
R top / rear  
1/999  
Reserve  
next copy  
100%  
APS  
Stop  
/Change  
12  
1-sided  
R top / rear  
1/999  
1-sided  
Sort  
Inner tray  
100%  
APS  
Stop  
/Change  
1-sided  
Sort  
Inner tray  
You can enter the corresponding copy settings and scan in the  
originals in preparation for your copy job even before the other job is  
completed.  
NOTE  
Once that job is finished and print out is possible, the operation for the  
reserved job will begin automatically.  
Job reservation is not available if the “Reserve next copy” key isn’t  
displayed.  
NOTES  
• The optional Hard Disk must be installed on your copier in order to  
use this function.  
• If the optional Fax Kit, Printer Kit or Printer/Scanner Kit are installed  
in your copier, job reservation will be possible during print out of  
both received fax jobs and print jobs.  
Set the originals to be copied.  
2
Select the settings and functions that you want to use for that  
copy job.  
3
Inch specifications  
Set  
Paper Size  
11x81/2  
Ready to copy. (Job reservation)  
"
Combine  
11x81  
Plain  
/2"  
Orig.image  
quality  
81  
/2x11"  
Sort:Off  
AMS  
APS  
Bypass  
Color  
Reduce  
/Enlarge  
11x81  
Plain  
/
2
"
"
Auto  
Exposure  
Sort:On  
Plain  
11x81  
/
2
Sort/  
Finished  
Exposure  
mode  
Reduce  
/Enlarge  
Recycled  
Finish Job  
res.  
Basic  
User choice  
Function  
Program  
Metric specifications  
Set  
Paper Size  
Ready to copy. (Jobreservation)  
Merge copy  
Plain  
Image  
quality  
Sort:Off  
Sort:On  
AMS  
APS  
Bypass  
Color  
Reduce/  
Enlarge  
Auto  
Exposure  
Plain  
Plain  
Sort/  
Finished  
Exposure  
mode  
Reduce/  
Enlarge  
Recycled  
Job resrv.  
finished  
Basic  
User choice  
Function  
Program  
Press the [Start] key. Scanning of the originals will start.  
Once all of the originals have been completely scanned,  
the touch panel will return to the screen in step 1.  
4
4-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 4 BASIC OPERATION  
5. Energy-saving modes  
If you press the [Energy Saver] key, even while the power switch is  
still turned ON, the copier will enter one of the following two energy-  
saving modes (a state of rest).  
The following two functions will also automatically cause the copier to  
enter the corresponding energy-saving mode if no operation is  
performed for a designated period of time.  
● Low power mode  
● Auto low power function  
The lamp in the [Energy Saver] key will be the only lit indication on the  
operation panel. To resume copying, press the [Energy Saver] key  
once again. It will take the copier less than 12 seconds to return to a  
copy-ready state.  
If no operation is performed on the copier for a designated period of  
time (adjustable between 1 and 240 minutes), the auto low power  
function will engage and cause the copier to automatically enter the  
Low power mode.  
The factory default setting is for 15 minutes.  
● Sleep mode  
● Auto sleep function  
Just like with the Low power mode, the lamp in the [Energy Saver] key  
will be the only lit indication on the operation panel, but even less  
power will be consumed in this mode. To resume copying, press the  
[Energy Saver] key once again. It will take the copier less than 25  
seconds to return to a copy-ready state.  
If no operation is performed on the copier for a designated period of  
time (adjustable between 1 and 240 minutes), the auto sleep function  
will engage and automatically turn the power switch OFF (O). When  
you want to make copies again, simply turn the power switch back ON  
( | ).  
The factory default setting is for 60 minutes.  
Energy Saver  
r
e
v
Energy Sa  
upt  
Interr  
t
n
e
m
e
g
a
n
a
M
ault Setting  
ef  
C
/
D
ounter  
/
p
Reset  
to  
r
a
S
le  
C
3
2
6
1
t
r
5
ta  
S
9
4
8
#
7
0
*
NOTES  
Copiers are generally in a standby mode more than they are in actual  
operation, so power consumption in the standby mode occupies a  
large part of overall consumption. Having the copier enter a rest state  
after a certain amount of time, or turning the power completely OFF  
(O), reduces unnecessary power consumption in the standby mode  
and as a result can save on electricity bills.  
• If the optional Printer Kit or Printer/Scanner Kit is installed in your  
copier, you can switch between the energy-saving modes (Low  
power mode and Sleep mode) that will be entered into when the  
[Energy Saver] key is pressed. To change the energy-saving mode,  
see “Changing the energy-saving mode” on page 7-58.  
• If you are using a standard copier, or if the optional Fax Kit is  
installed in your copier, you can press the [Energy Saver] key to  
engage the Low power mode.  
• If the optional Fax Kit, Printer Kit or Printer/Scanner Kit are installed  
in your copier and a received fax job or a print job is detected while  
the copier is in one of the energy-saving modes, it will automatically  
return to a copy-ready state and print out the corresponding job.  
NOTES  
• The auto low power function will not engage when the copier is in  
the sleep mode.  
• In order to change the amount of time that will elapse before the  
auto low power function engages, see “Auto low power time” on  
page 7-48.  
• In order to change the amount of time that will elapse before the  
auto sleep function engages, see “Auto sleep time” on page 7-47. In  
order to disable the auto sleep function, see “Auto sleep ON/OFF”  
on page 7-57.  
• If the optional Printer Kit or Printer/Scanner Kit is installed in your  
copier, the copier will enter the Sleep mode whenever the auto sleep  
function engages. In this state, when the copier detects data for a  
print job, it will automatically recover to a print-ready state and print  
out of the corresponding information will begin.  
• If the optional Fax Kit is installed in your copier, the copier will be  
automatically turned OFF (O) whenever the auto sleep function  
engages. In this state, when the copier receives an incoming fax, it  
will automatically recover to a print-ready state and print out of the  
corresponding information will begin.  
4-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 4 BASIC OPERATION  
4-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS  
1. Making 2-sided copies from various types of originals [2-sided copy modes]  
With these modes, 2-sided copies can be made from a variety of  
originals including open-faced (books, etc.) or 2-sided originals.  
(2) Making 2-sided copies from an  
open-faced (books, etc.) original  
(1) Making 2-sided copies from a 2-sided original  
With this mode, the two facing pages of a book or magazine are  
copied separately onto the front and back sides of the copy paper by  
simply pressing the [Start] key.  
With this mode, a 2-sided original is copied and the front and back  
sides of the copy paper are used so that the copy looks just like the  
original.  
<Finished copy>  
<Original>  
“Book / Duplex”  
“Left”  
<Original>  
“Left/Right”  
<Finished copy>  
“Left/Right”  
1
1
2
2
1
2
1
2
“Book / Book”  
“Left”  
1
2
“Left/Right”  
“Top”  
1
2
1
2
“Book / Duplex”  
“Right”  
“Top”  
1
“Left/Right”  
2
1
1
2
1
2
2
“Book / Book”  
“Right”  
“Top”  
“Top”  
2
1
1
1
2
2
NOTE  
Only 8 1/2" x 11", 11" x 17", A5R, B5R, A4R, B4 and A3 size originals  
can be used in this mode.  
NOTES  
• Only paper sizes between 5 1/2" x 8 1/2", 8 1/2" x 11", 11" x 8 1/2",  
8 1/2" x 13", 8 1/2" x 14", 11" x 17", A5R, B5R, B5, A4R, A4, B4, A3  
and Folio can be used in this mode.  
• The Document Processor (option) must be installed on your copier  
in order to use this mode.  
5-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS  
Set the originals to be copied.  
(3) Making 2-sided copies from one-sided originals  
1
2
With this mode, multiple one-sided originals are copied onto the front  
and back sides of the copy paper. If you are copying an odd number  
of originals, the back side of the last copy page will be blank.  
Touch the “Function” tab. The content of the “Function” tab  
will be displayed.  
Touch the “2 sided/Separation” [“2-sided/Split”] key.  
The “2 sided/Separation” [“2-sided/Split”] screen will be  
displayed.  
Inch specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
5
5
1
Ready to copy.  
11x8 /2  
"
4
3
3
2
Select  
2 sided/  
Separation  
Select  
orig. size  
1
Combine  
1
paper  
Exposure  
mode  
Reduce  
/Enlarge  
Auto  
Selection  
Batch  
scanning  
Up  
Orig.image  
quality  
Margin/  
Centering  
Forms  
Overlay  
Page #  
Down  
Cover  
Mode  
Sort/  
Finished  
Border  
Erase  
Booklet  
Function  
Basic  
User choice  
Program  
Metric specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
NOTE  
Select  
paper  
2-sided/  
Split  
Select  
size orig.  
Merge copy  
Exposure  
mode  
Reduce/  
Enlarge  
Auto  
selection  
Large # of  
originals  
The image that is copied onto the back side of the copies can also be  
rotated 180 degrees.  
Up  
Image  
quality  
Margin/  
Imag. shift  
Page  
numbering  
Form  
overlay  
Down  
1 If you chose the “Left/Right” [“Left/Right binding”] setting for  
finished copies:  
Sort/  
Finished  
Erase  
Mode  
Cover  
Mode  
Booklet  
Function  
Basic  
User choice  
Program  
The back side of the copies will be created with the same  
orientation as the originals.  
If you are copying from 2-sided originals, touch the  
2 If you chose the “Top” [“Top binding”] setting for finished copies:  
The image that is copied onto the back side of the copies will be  
rotated 180 degrees. If you then bind the copy set at the top, the  
images will be oriented in the same direction when flipped up like  
a calendar, etc.  
3
“2 sided / 2 sided” [“2-sided / 2-sided”] key. If you are  
copying from open-faced originals, touch the “Book / 2  
sided” [“Book / 2-sided”] key. If you are copying from 1-  
sided originals, touch the “1 sided / 2 sided” [“1-sided / 2-  
sided”] key.  
If you selected “2 sided / 2 sided” [“2-sided / 2-sided”] or  
“Book / 2 sided” [“Book / 2-sided”], go to the next step.  
If you selected “1 sided / 2 sided” [“1-sided / 2-sided”], go  
directly to step 5.  
ghi  
abc  
ghi  
def  
Inch specifications  
abc  
Paper size  
Set  
1
Ready to copy.  
11x8 /2  
"
ghi  
Register  
Back  
Close  
2 sided/Separation  
abc  
def  
1 sided  
➔1 sided  
1 sided  
➔2 sided  
Able to copy 1 sided (separate) or  
2 sided copy using 1 sided original,  
Book original or 2 sided original.  
2 sided  
➔1 sided  
2 sided  
➔2 sided  
Book  
➔1 sided  
Book  
➔2 sided  
Metric specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
Register  
Back  
Close  
2-sided / Split  
1-sided  
R2-sided  
1-sided  
R1-sided  
2-sided  
R1-sided  
Able to copy 1-sided (separate) or  
2-sided copy using 1-sided original,  
book original or 2-sided original.  
2-sided  
R2-sided  
Book  
Book  
R2-sided  
R1-sided  
5-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS  
Specify the binding direction of the originals.  
Inch specifications  
Follow the instructions on the right side of the touch panel  
and verify the direction in which the originals were set.  
4
6
<for 2-sided originals>  
to copy.  
<for open-faced originals>  
IMPORTANT!  
to copy.  
If the designation for the direction that the originals are set is not  
correct, copying may be accomplished incorrectly.  
ion  
Register  
Finished  
ion  
Register  
Finished  
Original  
Original  
Inch specifications  
Book➔  
Duplex  
1 sided  
➔2 sided  
1 sided  
➔2 sided  
Open from  
left  
Open from  
left/right  
Open from  
left/right  
<
for 1-sided or 2-sided originals  
>
<for open-faced originals>  
Open from  
right  
Open from  
top  
Open from  
top  
2 sided  
➔2 sided  
Book➔  
Book  
2 sided  
➔2 sided  
Paper size  
Set  
Paper size  
Set  
Book  
➔2 sided  
Book  
➔2 sided  
1
11x8 /2"  
Register  
Back  
Check direction  
Set book original top  
side direction to back.  
Close  
Register  
Finished  
Back  
Close  
Finished  
Check direction  
Check direction of  
original top side.  
Metric specifications  
<for 2-sided originals>  
to copy.  
<for open-faced originals>  
BookR  
Duplex  
Open from  
left/right  
Open from  
top  
BookR  
Book  
to copy.  
Left top  
corner  
Rear  
Register  
Register  
Original  
Finished  
Original  
Finished  
Metric specifications  
for 1-sided or 2-sided originals  
1-sided  
R2-sided  
Left/Right  
binding  
Left/Right  
binding  
1-sided  
R2-sided  
Left  
binding  
BookR  
Duplex  
2-sided  
R2-sided  
Top  
binding  
Top  
binding  
Right  
binding  
2-sided  
R2-sided  
BookR  
Book  
<
>
<for open-faced originals>  
Paper size  
Book  
Set  
Book  
R2-sided  
Paper size  
Set  
R2-sided  
Register  
Back  
Close  
Register  
Back  
Check direction  
Set book original top  
side direction to back.  
Close  
Finished  
Check direction  
Check direction of  
original.  
Finished  
Select the binding direction you want for the finished copies.  
Inch specifications  
5
Left/Right  
binding  
BookR  
Duplex  
Top  
binding  
BookR  
Book  
<
for 1-sided or 2-sided originals  
>
<for open-faced originals>  
opy.  
Left top  
Corner  
Back Edge  
Paper siz  
11x  
Register  
Finished  
Back  
Register  
Finished  
Bac  
Original  
Original  
Check direction  
Check  
Check direction  
original top side  
Set t  
top s  
Press the [Start] key.  
Scanning of the originals will start.  
Book➔  
Duplex  
Open from  
left  
Open from  
right  
Open from  
left/right  
Open from  
top  
Open from  
left/right  
Open from  
top  
d
d
d
7
Book➔  
Book  
Rear  
If you set the originals in the optional Document Processor,  
copying will start automatically.  
If you set an original on the platen, a message will appear  
telling you to set the next original. In this case, go to the next  
step.  
Metric specifications  
for 1-sided or 2-sided originals  
<
>
<for open-faced originals>  
Paper s  
copy.  
Register  
Ba  
Register  
Back  
Che  
Se  
sid  
Original  
Finished  
Original  
Finished  
Check direc  
Check dire  
original.  
Left  
binding  
BookR  
Duplex  
Left/Right  
binding  
Left/Right  
binding  
d
Right  
binding  
BookR  
Book  
Top  
binding  
Top  
binding  
d
Back Edge  
ed  
Replace the first original with the next one and press the  
[Start] key. Scanning of that next original will start.  
8
9
Once you have finished scanning all of the originals, touch  
the “Scanning finished” key. Copying will start.  
5-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS  
2. Copying two-page originals onto separate sheets  
[Page separation/Split copy modes]  
Set the originals to be copied.  
(1) Page separation/Split copy from book originals  
1
With this mode, the two facing pages of an open-faced original such  
as a book, a magazine, and the like are each copied onto a separate  
sheet of paper.  
12  
21  
1 2  
12  
Touch the “Function” tab. The content of the “Function” tab  
will be displayed.  
2
3
NOTES  
Touch the “2 sided/Separation” [“2-sided/Split”] key.  
The “2 sided/Separation” [“2-sided/Split”] screen will be  
displayed.  
Inch specifications  
• Only 8 1/2" x 11", 11" x 17", A5R, B5R, A4R, B4 and A3 size  
originals and 11" x 8 1/2" size copy paper can be used in this mode.  
Depending upon the size of the originals, the image will be enlarged  
or reduced to fit the size of the copy paper.  
Inch specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
1
Ready to copy.  
11x8 /2  
"
Select  
paper  
2 sided/  
Separation  
Select  
orig. size  
Combine  
Metric specifications  
Exposure  
mode  
Reduce  
/Enlarge  
Auto  
Selection  
Batch  
scanning  
• Only A5R, B5R, A4R, B4, A3, 8 1/2" x 11" and 11" x 17" size  
originals and A4 size copy paper can be used in this mode.  
Depending upon the size of the originals, the image will be enlarged  
or reduced to fit the size of the copy paper.  
Up  
Orig.image  
quality  
Margin/  
Centering  
Forms  
Overlay  
Page #  
Down  
Cover  
Mode  
Sort/  
Finished  
Border  
Erase  
Booklet  
Function  
Basic  
User choice  
Program  
Metric specifications (Asia Pacific)  
Metric specifications  
• Only A5R, B5R, A4R, B4, A3, 8 1/2" x 11" and 11" x 17" size  
originals and B5 or A4 size copy paper can be used in this mode.  
Depending upon the size of the originals, the image will be enlarged  
or reduced to fit the size of the copy paper.  
Paper size  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
Select  
paper  
2-sided/  
Split  
Select  
size orig.  
Merge copy  
Exposure  
mode  
Reduce/  
Enlarge  
Auto  
selection  
Large # of  
originals  
Up  
Image  
quality  
Margin/  
Imag. shift  
Page  
numbering  
Form  
overlay  
Down  
Sort/  
Finished  
Erase  
Mode  
Cover  
Mode  
Booklet  
(2) Page separation/Split copy from 2-sided originals  
Function  
Basic  
User choice  
Program  
With this mode, the two sides of a 2-sided original are each copied  
onto a separate sheet of paper.  
1
1
1
1
2
2
NOTE  
The Document Processor (option) must be installed on your copier in  
order to use this mode.  
5-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS  
Touch the “2 sided / 1 sided” [“2-sided / 1-sided”] key or  
the “Book / 1 sided” [“Book / 1-sided”] key, as appropriate  
to the type of originals being copied and the type of finished  
copies to be made.  
Follow the instructions on the right side of the touch panel  
and verify the direction in which the originals were set.  
4
6
IMPORTANT!  
Inch specifications  
If the designation for the direction that the originals are set is not  
correct, copying may be accomplished incorrectly.  
Paper size  
Set  
1
Ready to copy.  
11x8 /2  
"
Register  
Back  
Close  
2 sided/Separation  
Inch specifications  
<
for 1-sided or 2-sided originals  
>
<for open-faced originals>  
1 sided  
➔1 sided  
1 sided  
➔2 sided  
Able to copy 1 sided (separate) or  
2 sided copy using 1 sided original,  
Book original or 2 sided original.  
Paper size  
Set  
Paper size  
Set  
1
1
2 sided  
➔1 sided  
2 sided  
➔2 sided  
11x8 /2  
"
11x8 /2  
"
Book  
➔1 sided  
Book  
➔2 sided  
Register  
Back  
Close  
Register  
Back  
Check direction  
Close  
Check direction  
Check direction of  
original top side.  
Set the book original  
top side direct to back.  
Metric specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
Left top  
corner  
Rear  
Register  
Back  
Close  
2-sided / Split  
1-sided  
1-sided  
R1-sided  
Metric specifications  
for 1-sided or 2-sided originals  
Able to copy 1-sided (separate) or  
2-sided copy using 1-sided original,  
book original or 2-sided original.  
R2-sided  
2-sided  
R1-sided  
2-sided  
R2-sided  
<
>
<for open-faced originals>  
Book  
Book  
R1-sided  
R2-sided  
Paper size  
Set  
Paper size  
Set  
Register  
Back  
Close  
Register  
Back  
Check direction  
Set book original top  
side direction to back.  
Close  
Check direction  
Check direction of  
original.  
Specify the binding direction of the originals.  
Inch specifications  
5
<for 2-sided originals>  
ady to copy.  
<for open-faced originals>  
Left top  
corner  
Back Edge  
to copy.  
Separation  
Registe  
on  
Register  
Original  
Original  
Open from  
left/right  
1 sided  
➔2 sided  
1 sided  
➔2 sided  
Open from  
left  
d
d
d
Open from  
top  
2 sided  
➔2 sided  
Open from  
right  
2 sided  
➔2 sided  
Press the [Start] key. Scanning of the originals will start.  
7
Book  
➔2 sided  
Book  
➔2 sided  
If you set the originals in the optional Document Processor,  
copying will start automatically.  
Metric specifications  
If you set an original on the platen, a message will appear  
telling you to set the next original. In this case, go to the next  
step.  
<for 2-sided originals>  
<for open-faced originals>  
to copy.  
Ready to copy.  
Register  
R
ided / Split  
Original  
Original  
-sided  
R2-sided  
Left  
binding  
ed  
sided  
1-sided  
R2-sided  
Left/Right  
binding  
-sided  
R2-sided  
Right  
binding  
Top  
binding  
ed  
sided  
2-sided  
R2-sided  
Book  
k
Book  
R2-sided  
R2-sided  
sided  
Replace the first original with the next one and press the  
[Start] key. Scanning of that next original will start.  
8
9
Once you have finished scanning all of the originals, touch  
the “Scanning finished” key. Copying will start.  
5-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS  
3. Making a margin space on the copies [Margin mode]  
(1) Standard margin  
(2) Separate front and back margin settings  
Inch specifications  
Inch specifications  
The image of the original can be shifted to the left or right and up or  
down to make a margin (blank) space on the copy. The width of each  
margin can be set to any 1/8" increment between 1/8" and 3/4".  
A setting of “0” will leave no margin space.  
When you are making 2-sided copies, the margin positions and widths  
can be selected separately for the front and back sides. The width of  
each margin can be set to any 1/8" increment between 1/8" and 3/4".  
A setting of “0” will leave no margin space.  
Metric specifications  
Metric specifications  
The image of the original can be shifted to the left or right and up or  
down to make a margin (blank) space on the copy. The width of each  
margin can be set to any 1 mm increment between 1 mm and 18 mm.  
A setting of “0” will leave no margin space.  
When you are making 2-sided copies, the margin positions and widths  
can be selected separately for the front and back sides. The width of  
each margin can be set to any 1 mm increment between 1 mm and 18  
mm. A setting of “0” will leave no margin space.  
A
A
B
Set the originals to be copied.  
1
IMPORTANT!  
Set originals so that the top edge is facing either the back or the left of  
the copier. Setting them in the wrong direction may cause the margin  
to be created in the incorrect position.  
Touch the “Function” tab. The content of the “Function” tab  
will be displayed.  
2
Touch the “Margin/Centering” [“Margin/Imag.shift”] key.  
The “Margin/Centering” [“Margin/Image shift”] screen will be  
displayed.  
NOTES  
3
• It is also possible for you to select the default setting for the location  
and width of the margins. (See “Margin width” on page 7-80.)  
• If you select to have a left margin created during 2-sided copying  
and the location for the back side margin is set to “Auto”, a right  
margin that is the same width as the margin on the front side will be  
automatically created on the back side of the copies.  
Inch specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
1
Ready to copy.  
11x8 /2  
"
Select  
paper  
2 sided/  
Separation  
Select  
orig. size  
Combine  
Exposure  
mode  
Reduce  
/Enlarge  
Auto  
Selection  
Batch  
scanning  
Up  
Orig.image  
quality  
Margin/  
Centering  
Forms  
Overlay  
Page #  
Down  
Cover  
Mode  
Sort/  
Finished  
Border  
Erase  
Booklet  
Function  
Basic  
User choice  
Program  
Metric specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
Select  
paper  
2-sided/  
Split  
Select  
size orig.  
Merge copy  
Exposure  
mode  
Reduce/  
Enlarge  
Auto  
selection  
Large # of  
originals  
Up  
Image  
quality  
Margin/  
Imag. shift  
Page  
numbering  
Form  
overlay  
Down  
Sort/  
Finished  
Erase  
Mode  
Cover  
Mode  
Booklet  
Function  
Basic  
User choice  
Program  
5-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS  
Touch the “Margin” key. The screen to set the front side  
margin will be displayed.  
If you want to create a margin on the back side of the copies  
4
7
that lines up with that on the front side, touch the “Auto” key.  
If you want to set the margins for the front and back sides  
separately, touch the “Front/Back margin” key. The screen to  
set the back side margin will be displayed.  
Inch specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
1
Ready to copy.  
11x8 /2  
"
Register  
Back  
Close  
Margin/Centering  
Inch specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
1
Ready to copy.  
11x8 /2  
"
None  
Reposition image to left/right or  
top/bottom, and also center image  
on paper.  
Back  
Check direction  
Close  
Back page margin  
Margin  
Check direction of  
original top side.  
Centering  
If "AUTO" is selected for duplex  
copying, rear will have same margin  
setting as that for the front page.  
Auto  
Front/Back  
margin  
Metric specifications  
Left top  
corner  
Rear  
Paper size  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
Register  
Back  
Close  
Margin/Image shift  
Metric specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
Reposition image to left/right or  
top/bottom and center image on paper.  
None  
Back  
Close  
Back page margin  
Margin  
Check direction  
Check direction of  
original.  
Image  
shift  
If "AUTO" is selected at the duplex  
Auto  
copying, back side will have same margin  
setting as that for the front page.  
Front/Back  
margin  
Use the up/down and left/right cursor keys to select the  
desired location and width of each margin.  
5
Left top  
corner  
Back Edge  
Inch specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
1
Ready to copy.  
11x8 /2  
"
Use the up/down and left/right cursor keys to select the  
desired location and width of each margin.  
Register  
Back  
Check direction  
Check direction of  
original top side.  
Close  
Margin/Centering  
8
Front page  
3
(0~ /4  
)
Inch specifications  
"
0
None  
Paper size  
Set  
3
(0~ /4  
)
1
Ready to copy.  
11x8 /2  
"
Margin  
Centering  
Auto  
1
"
Left  
Left top  
corner  
/
4
Back page  
margin  
Rear  
Back  
Check direction  
Check direction of  
original top side.  
Close  
Back page margin  
Back page  
3
(0~ /4  
)
"
0
Metric specifications  
Auto  
3
Front/Back  
margin  
(0~ /4)  
Paper size  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
"
0
Left top  
corner  
Rear  
Margin/Image shift  
Front page  
Register  
Back  
Close  
Check direction  
Check direction of  
original.  
Metric specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
None  
Ready to copy.  
Margin  
Auto  
Left  
Back  
Close  
Back page margin  
Back page  
Image  
shift  
Back page  
margin  
Left top  
corner  
Back Edge  
Check direction  
Check direction of  
original.  
Auto  
If you are making 2-sided copies, touch the “Back page  
margin” key. The “Back page margin” screen will be  
displayed.  
Front/Back  
margin  
6
Left top  
corner  
Back Edge  
Inch specifications  
Follow the instructions on the right side of the touch panel  
and verify the direction in which the originals were set.  
Paper size  
Set  
9
1
Ready to copy.  
11x8 /2  
"
Register  
Back  
Check direction  
Check direction of  
original top side.  
Close  
Margin/Centering  
Front page  
3
(0~ /4  
)
IMPORTANT!  
1
"
Top  
/
4
None  
If the designation for the direction that the originals are set is not  
correct, copying may be accomplished incorrectly.  
3
(0~ /4  
)
Margin  
Auto  
1
"
Left  
Left top  
corner  
/
2
Back page  
margin  
Rear  
Centering  
Metric specifications  
Ready to copy.  
Paper size  
Press the [Start] key.  
Copying will start.  
Set  
10  
Margin/Image shift  
Front page  
Register  
Back  
Close  
Check direction  
Check direction of  
original.  
Top  
None  
Margin  
Auto  
Left  
Image  
shift  
Back page  
margin  
Left top  
corner  
Back Edge  
5-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS  
4. Centering the copy image [Centering/Image shift mode]  
With this mode you can center the image on the copy paper when you  
copy onto a paper size that is larger than that of the original.  
Touch the “Centering” [“Imag.shift”] key.  
4
Inch specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
1
Ready to copy.  
11x8 /2  
"
Register  
Back  
Close  
Margin/Centering  
None  
Reposition image to left/right or  
top/bottom, and also center image  
on paper.  
Margin  
Centering  
Metric specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
Register  
Back  
Close  
Margin/Image shift  
Set the originals to be copied.  
1
Reposition image to left/right or  
top/bottom and center image on paper.  
None  
Margin  
Image  
shift  
IMPORTANT!  
Set originals so that the top edge is facing either the back or the left of  
the copier. Setting them in the wrong direction may cause the image  
to be copied in the incorrect position.  
Follow the instructions on the right side of the touch panel  
and verify the direction in which the originals were set.  
5
Inch specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
1
Ready to copy.  
11x8 /2  
"
Touch the “Function” tab. The content of the “Function” tab  
will be displayed.  
2
Register  
Back  
Check direction  
Check direction of  
original top side.  
Close  
Margin/Centering  
None  
Touch the “Margin/Centering” [“Margin/Imag.shift”] key. The  
“Margin/Centering” [“Margin/Image shift”] screen will be  
displayed.  
3
Margin  
Able to center scanned image on paper.  
Left top  
corner  
Centering  
Rear  
Inch specifications  
Metric specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
Paper size  
Set  
1
Ready to copy.  
Ready to copy.  
11x8 /2  
"
Select  
paper  
2 sided/  
Separation  
Select  
orig. size  
Margin/Image shift  
Register  
Back  
Close  
Combine  
Check direction  
Exposure  
mode  
Check direction of  
original.  
Reduce  
/Enlarge  
Auto  
Selection  
Batch  
scanning  
Up  
Orig.image  
quality  
Margin/  
Centering  
Forms  
Overlay  
Page #  
Down  
None  
Cover  
Mode  
Sort/  
Finished  
Border  
Erase  
Able to center scanned image on paper.  
Margin  
Booklet  
Left top  
corner  
Image  
shift  
Back Edge  
Function  
Basic  
User choice  
Program  
Metric specifications  
IMPORTANT!  
Paper size  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
If the designation for the direction that the originals are set is not  
correct, copying may be accomplished incorrectly.  
Select  
paper  
2-sided/  
Split  
Select  
size orig.  
Merge copy  
Exposure  
mode  
Reduce/  
Enlarge  
Auto  
selection  
Large # of  
originals  
Up  
Image  
quality  
Margin/  
Imag. shift  
Page  
numbering  
Form  
overlay  
Down  
Sort/  
Finished  
Erase  
Mode  
Cover  
Mode  
Booklet  
Press the [Start] key.  
Copying will start.  
Function  
Basic  
User choice  
Program  
6
5-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS  
5. Adding a space next to the copy images for making notes [Memo mode]  
With this mode you can leave a space for adding notes next to the  
copied image. It is also possible to fit the images of 2 originals onto  
the same copy page along with a blank space for each.  
Set the originals to be copied.  
1
2
Touch the “Function” tab and then the “N Down” key.  
The content of the next portion of the “Function” tab will be  
displayed.  
● Copying one original onto one copy page (layout A)  
Touch the “Memo pages” key. The “Memo pages” screen will  
be displayed.  
3
Inch specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
1
Ready to copy.  
11x8 /2  
"
Auto  
Rotation  
Memo  
pages  
OHP  
backing  
Proof Copy  
Invert  
Orig. set  
direction  
Eco Print  
Mirror  
Up  
Modify  
Copy  
Down  
Function  
Basic  
User choice  
Program  
● Copying two originals onto one copy page (layout B)  
Metric specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
Auto  
Memo  
pages  
Test copy  
Invert  
OHP back  
Rotation  
Orig. set  
Eco Print  
Mirror  
Up  
direction  
Modify  
copy  
Down  
Function  
Basic  
User choice  
Program  
Touch the “Layout A” key or the “Layout B” key, as  
appropriate. The screen to make the layout settings will be  
displayed.  
4
NOTE  
Inch specifications  
Paper size  
11x8 /2  
50%  
Set  
Only 8 1/2" x 11", 11" x 8 1/2", 11" x 17", B5R, B5, A4R, A4, B4 and A3  
size copy paper can be used in this mode.  
1
Ready to copy.  
"
Register  
Back  
Check direction  
Check direction of  
original top side.  
Close  
Memo pages  
Layout  
Border line  
None  
None  
Solid  
Dotted  
Layout A  
Layout B  
Left top  
corner  
Borders  
Rear  
Metric specifications  
Ready to copy.  
Set  
Paper size  
Back  
Check direction  
Check direction of  
original.  
Close  
Memo pages  
Layout  
Register  
Border line  
None  
None  
Solid  
Dotted  
Layout A  
Layout B  
Left top  
corner  
Cropmark  
Back Edge  
5-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS  
Select the desired direction of the layout.  
5
Inch specifications  
<Layout A>  
<Layout B>  
to copy.  
to copy.  
Register  
Register  
Layout  
Layout  
Border line  
Border line  
None  
None  
Solid  
Solid  
Dotted  
Dotted  
Borders  
Borders  
Metric specifications  
<Layout A>  
to copy.  
<Layout B>  
to copy.  
Register  
Register  
Layout  
Layout  
Border line  
Border line  
None  
None  
Solid  
Solid  
Dotted  
Dotted  
Cropmark  
Cropmark  
Select the type of the borderline that you want to use to  
separate the different areas.  
6
7
Press the [Start] key.  
Scanning of the originals will start.  
If you set the originals in the optional Document Processor,  
copying will start automatically.  
If you set an original on the platen, a message will appear  
telling you to set the next original. In this case, go to the next  
step.  
Replace the first original with the next one and press the  
[Start] key. Scanning of that next original will start.  
8
9
Once you have finished scanning all of the originals, touch  
the “Scanning finished” key. Copying will start.  
5-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS  
6. Making copies with clean edges [Border erase modes]  
(1) Erasing blemishes from edges of copies  
(Sheet erase mode)  
(2) Erasing blemishes from the edges and middle of  
copies made from books (Book erase mode)  
Inch specifications  
Inch specifications  
With this mode, shadows, lines, etc., that occur around the edges of  
copies made from sheet originals can be erased. A border of equal  
width will be erased around all sides of the copied image. The width of  
the border to be erased can be set to any 1/8" increment between  
1/8" and 3/4". A setting of “0” will result in no border being erased.  
(The areas that will be erased are shown as a in the illustration.)  
Metric specifications  
With this mode, shadows, lines, etc., that occur around the edges of  
copies made from sheet originals can be erased. A border of equal  
width will be erased around all sides of the copied image. The width of  
the border to be erased can be set to any 1 mm increment between  
1 mm and 18 mm. A setting of “0” will result in no border being erased.  
(The areas that will be erased are shown as a in the illustration.)  
With this mode, you can make clean copies, even from thick books.  
The width of the outside border to be erased can be set to any 1/8"  
increment between 1/8" and 3/4". The width of the center area to be  
erased can be set to any 1/8" increment between 1/8" and 1 1/2".  
A setting of “0” will result in no border being erased.  
(The area that will be erased as the outside border is shown as a in  
the illustration, while that of the center area is shown as b.)  
Metric specifications  
With this mode, you can make clean copies, even from thick books.  
The width of the outside border to be erased can be set to any 1 mm  
increment between 1 mm and 18 mm. The width of the center area to  
be erased can be set to any 1 mm increment between 1 mm and  
36 mm. A setting of “0” will result in no border being erased.  
(The area that will be erased as the outside border is shown as a in  
the illustration, while that of the center area is shown as b.)  
abcdefghijk  
abcdefghijk  
abcdefghijk  
abcdefghijk  
abcdefghijk  
abcdefghijk  
abcdefghijk  
abcdefghijk  
abcdefghijk  
abcdefghijk  
abcdefghijk  
abcdefghijk  
abcdefghijk  
abcdefghijk  
abcdefghijk  
abcdefghijk  
abcdefghijk  
a
a
a
b
a
NOTE  
It is possible for you to change the default setting for the width of the  
erased border. (See “Erased border width” on page 7-81.)  
NOTE  
It is possible for you to change the default setting for the width of the  
erased borders. (See “Erased border width” on page 7-81.)  
5-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS  
Set the original to be copied.  
(3) Erasing blemishes from the edges of copies using  
individual border settings (Individual border erase  
mode)  
1
Inch specifications  
With this mode, shadows, lines, etc., that occur around the edges of  
copies made from sheet originals can be erased, but in this case you  
can designate separate widths for each of the top, bottom, left and  
right borders. The width of each border to be erased can be set to any  
1/8" increment between 0 and 2".  
(The area that will be erased as the top border is shown as a, the  
bottom border is shown as b, the left border as c, and the right  
border as d, in the illustration.)  
Metric specifications  
With this mode, shadows, lines, etc., that occur around the edges of  
copies made from sheet originals can be erased, but in this case you  
can designate separate widths for each of the top, bottom, left and  
right borders. The width of each border to be erased can be set to any  
1 mm increment between 0 and 50 mm.  
(The area that will be erased as the top border is shown as a, the  
bottom border is shown as b, the left border as c, and the right  
border as d, in the illustration.)  
Touch the “Function” tab. The content of the “Function” tab  
will be displayed.  
2
3
Touch the “Border Erase” [“Erase Mode”] key. The “Border  
Erase” [“Erase Mode”] screen will be displayed.  
Inch specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
1
Ready to copy.  
11x8 /2  
"
Select  
paper  
2 sided/  
Separation  
Select  
orig. size  
Combine  
Exposure  
mode  
Reduce  
/Enlarge  
Auto  
Selection  
Batch  
scanning  
Up  
Orig.image  
quality  
Margin/  
Centering  
Forms  
Overlay  
Page #  
Down  
Cover  
Mode  
Sort/  
Finished  
Border  
Erase  
Booklet  
Function  
Basic  
User choice  
Program  
Metric specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
Select  
paper  
2-sided/  
Split  
Select  
size orig.  
Merge copy  
Exposure  
mode  
Reduce/  
Enlarge  
Auto  
selection  
Large # of  
originals  
Up  
Image  
quality  
Margin/  
Imag. shift  
Page  
numbering  
Form  
overlay  
Down  
NOTE  
Sort/  
Finished  
Erase  
Mode  
Cover  
Mode  
Booklet  
The default settings for the border widths are the same values as that  
set for the sheet erase mode.  
Function  
Basic  
User choice  
Program  
If you want to select the sheet erase mode or the book erase  
mode, go to the next step.  
If you want to select the individual border erase mode, go  
directly to step 6.  
5-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS  
Touch the “Sheet Erase” [“Border erase”] key or the “Book  
Erase” key, as appropriate. The screen to set the outside  
border and the center area will be displayed.  
Touch the “Individual BordrErase” [“Individual Erase Mode”]  
key. The screen to set the top, bottom, left or right border will  
be displayed.  
4
6
Inch specifications  
Inch specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
Paper size  
Set  
1
Ready to copy.  
1
Ready to copy.  
11x8 /2"  
11x8 /2  
"
Register  
Back  
Close  
Border Erase  
Register  
Back  
Close  
Border Erase  
Erase the border shadow of original  
or shadow from centor of book.  
Erase the border shadow of original  
or shadow from centor of book.  
None  
None  
Sheet  
Erase  
Individual  
BordrErase  
Sheet  
Erase  
Individual  
BordrErase  
Book  
Erase  
Book  
Erase  
Metric specifications  
Metric specifications  
Paper size  
Paper size  
Set  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
Ready to copy.  
Register  
Back  
Close  
Register  
Back  
Close  
Erase Mode  
Erase Mode  
Erase edge of original or center of book  
and copy.  
Erase edge of original or center of book  
and copy.  
None  
None  
Border  
erase  
Individual  
Erase Mode  
Border  
erase  
Individual  
Erase Mode  
Book  
erase  
Book  
erase  
Touch the “+” key or the “–” key to change the displayed  
border width to that desired.  
* In metric specification copiers, the desired border width can  
also be entered directly by touching the “#-Keys” key and  
then using the keypad.  
Touch the key that corresponds to the border whose width  
you want to change. The screen to set that border width will  
be displayed.  
5
7
Inch specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
1
Ready to copy.  
11x8 /2  
"
Inch specifications  
Register  
2 "  
Back  
Check direction  
Check direction of  
original top side.  
Close  
Border Erase  
Paper size  
Set  
1
Ready to copy.  
11x8 /2  
"
2 "  
2 "  
Register  
Center  
Back  
"
Close  
Border Erase  
Top  
Left  
Bottom  
3
1
None  
(0~ /4  
)
(0~1 /2  
)
1
1
Sheet  
Erase  
Individual  
BordrErase  
"
Border  
/4  
/
2
2 "  
Book  
Erase  
Left top  
corner  
None  
Right  
Rear  
Sheet  
Erase  
Individual  
BordrErase  
Book  
Erase  
Metric specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
Metric specifications  
Register  
6 mm  
Back  
Close  
Erase Mode  
Paper size  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
Check direction  
Check direction of  
original.  
6 mm  
Register  
Center  
Back  
Close  
Erase Mode  
Top  
Bottom  
None  
(0~18)  
(0~36)  
Border  
erase  
Individual  
Erase Mode  
Border  
6
12  
6 mm  
6 mm  
Book  
erase  
Left top  
Corner  
Left  
Right  
None  
Back Edge  
Border  
erase  
Individual  
Erase Mode  
Book  
erase  
#-Keys  
#-Keys  
Go directly to step 10.  
5-12-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS  
Touch the “+” key or the “–” key to change the displayed  
border width to that desired.  
* In metric specification copiers, the desired border width can  
also be entered directly by touching the “#-Keys” key and  
then using the keypad.  
8
Inch specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
1
Ready to copy.  
11x8 /2  
"
Back  
Check direction  
Close  
Individual Border Erase  
(0~2)  
Check direction of  
original top side.  
1
Top  
"
/
4
Left top  
corner  
Rear  
Metric specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
Back  
Close  
Individual Erase Mode  
(0~50)  
Check direction  
Check direction of  
original.  
Top  
6
Left top  
Corner  
#-Keys  
Back Edge  
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 7.  
If you want to change the width of any of the other borders,  
repeat steps 7 through 9.  
9
Press the [Start] key.  
Copying will start.  
10  
5-12-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS  
7. Fitting the image of either two or four originals onto a single copy page  
[Combine/Merge Copy modes]  
With this mode, the images from either 2 or 4 originals can be  
reduced and then combined onto a single copy. The borderline of  
(2) 4 in 1  
each original can also be marked with either a solid line or a dotted  
line.  
Use this mode when you want to copy four originals onto one sheet.  
This mode can also be used in conjunction with the 2-sided copy  
modes in order to copy eight originals onto one sheet.  
(When setting the originals on the platen, be sure to set the originals  
in the correct order: 1, 2, 3 and then 4.)  
1
3
2
4
2
4
1
3
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
NOTE  
Only 8 1/2" x 11", 11" x 8 1/2", 11" x 17", B5R, B5, A4R, A4, B4 and A3  
size copy paper can be used in this mode.  
3
4
1
2
(1) 2 in 1  
Use this mode when you want to copy two originals onto one sheet.  
This mode can also be used in conjunction with the 2-sided copy  
modes in order to copy four originals onto one sheet.  
(When setting the originals on the platen, be sure to set the originals  
in the correct order: 1 and then 2.)  
1
2
2
1
2
1
1
2
2
1
5-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS  
Set the originals to be copied.  
Touch the “2 in 1” [“2-in-1”] key or the “4 in 1” [“4-in-1”] key, as  
appropriate.  
The screen to make the layout settings will be displayed.  
1
4
Touch the “Function” tab. The content of the “Function” tab  
will be displayed.  
2
Inch specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
1
Ready to copy.  
11x8 /2  
"
Inch specifications  
Set  
Register  
Back  
Close  
Paper Size  
11x81/2  
Combine  
Ready to copy.  
"
Combine  
11x81  
Plain  
/2"  
2 or 4 original pages can combine on  
one page.  
Orig.image  
quality  
None  
81  
/2x11"  
Sort:Off  
AMS  
APS  
Bypass  
Color  
Reduce  
/Enlarge  
11x81  
Plain  
11x81  
/
/
2
"
"
Auto  
Exposure  
Sort:On  
Plain  
2
Sort/  
Finished  
Exposure  
mode  
Reduce  
/Enlarge  
Recycled  
Basic  
User choice  
Function  
Program  
Metric specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
Metric specifications  
Set  
Paper Size  
Merge copy  
Register  
Back  
Close  
Ready to copy.  
Merge copy  
2
or  
4
originals can be printed  
Plain  
Image  
quality  
None  
2-in-1  
on one page.  
Sort:Off  
Sort:On  
AMS  
APS  
Colour  
Reduce/  
Enlarge  
Auto  
Exposure  
Bypass  
Plain  
4-in-1  
Plain  
Sort/  
Finished  
Exposure  
mode  
Reduce/  
Enlarge  
Recycled  
Basic  
User choice  
Function  
Program  
Select the desired direction of the layout.  
Inch specifications  
5
Touch the “Combine” [“Merge copy”] key. The “Combine”  
[“Merge copy”] screen will be displayed.  
3
to copy.  
to copy.  
Inch specifications  
Register  
Register  
Layout  
Layout  
Border line  
Border line  
Paper size  
Set  
1
Ready to copy.  
11x8 /2  
"
None  
None  
Select  
paper  
2 sided/  
Separation  
Select  
orig. size  
Solid  
Solid  
Combine  
Dotted  
Dotted  
Borders  
Exposure  
mode  
Reduce  
/Enlarge  
Auto  
Selection  
Batch  
scanning  
Up  
Borders  
Orig.image  
quality  
Margin/  
Centering  
Forms  
Overlay  
Page #  
Down  
Cover  
Mode  
Sort/  
Finished  
Border  
Erase  
Booklet  
Metric specifications  
to copy.  
Function  
Basic  
User choice  
Program  
to copy.  
Metric specifications  
Register  
Register  
Layout  
Border line  
Layout  
Border line  
Paper size  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
None  
None  
Solid  
Solid  
Select  
paper  
2-sided/  
Split  
Select  
size orig.  
Merge copy  
Dotted  
Cropmark  
Dotted  
Cropmark  
Exposure  
mode  
Reduce/  
Enlarge  
Auto  
selection  
Large # of  
originals  
Up  
Image  
quality  
Margin/  
Imag. shift  
Page  
numbering  
Form  
overlay  
Down  
Sort/  
Finished  
Erase  
Mode  
Cover  
Mode  
Booklet  
Function  
Basic  
User choice  
Program  
Select the type of the borderline that you want to use to  
separate the images.  
6
5-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS  
Press the [Start] key.  
Scanning of the originals will start.  
7
If you set the originals in the optional Document Processor,  
copying will start automatically.  
If you set an original on the platen, a message will appear  
telling you to set the next original. In this case, go to the next  
step.  
Replace the first original with the next one and press the  
[Start] key. Scanning of that next original will start.  
8
9
Once you have finished scanning all of the originals, touch  
the “Scanning finished” key. Copying will start.  
5-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS  
8. Printing page numbers on copies [Print page numbers mode]  
When you make copies from multiple originals, you can have page  
numbers printed on the corresponding copies in numerical order from  
the first original. There are three styles of page numbers to choose  
from: “-1-”, “P.1” and “1/n”.  
* If you select “1/n” as the style of page numbers, the denominator will  
indicate the total number of pages.  
Touch the “Page #” [“Page numbering”] key. The “Page #”  
[“Page numbering”] screen will be displayed.  
3
Inch specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
1
Ready to copy.  
11x8 /2  
"
Select  
paper  
2 sided/  
Separation  
Select  
orig. size  
Combine  
Exposure  
mode  
Reduce  
/Enlarge  
Auto  
Selection  
Batch  
scanning  
Up  
Orig.image  
quality  
Margin/  
Centering  
Forms  
Overlay  
Page #  
Down  
A
B
C
D
E
-1-  
-2-  
-3-  
-4-  
-5-  
Cover  
Mode  
Sort/  
Finished  
Border  
Erase  
Booklet  
Function  
Basic  
User choice  
Program  
Metric specifications  
A
B
C
D
E
Paper size  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
Select  
paper  
2-sided/  
Split  
Select  
size orig.  
-1-  
-2-  
Merge copy  
A
B
A
Exposure  
mode  
Reduce/  
Enlarge  
Auto  
selection  
Large # of  
originals  
Up  
C
B
D
C
C
E
D
D
Image  
quality  
Margin/  
Imag. shift  
Page  
numbering  
Form  
overlay  
E
E
Down  
-1-  
-2-  
A
-3-  
B
Erase  
Mode  
Cover  
Mode  
Sort/  
Finished  
Booklet  
Function  
Basic  
User choice  
Program  
P. 1  
P. 2  
A
P. 3  
B
P. 4  
C
Touch the key that corresponds to the style of page numbers  
that you want to use. The screen to make settings for that  
style will be displayed.  
P. 5  
D
4
E
1/5  
2/5  
3/5  
Inch specifications  
4/5  
5/5  
Paper size  
Set  
1
Ready to copy.  
11x8 /2  
"
Register  
Back  
Close  
Page #  
Page # can be added on bottom of copy.  
None  
NOTE  
Metric specifications  
Page numbers will be printed relative to the middle of the bottom of  
the page. (The arrow in the illustration indicates the direction in which  
the originals are set.)  
Paper size  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
Register  
Page  
Back  
Close  
Page numbering  
Abcde  
None  
-1-  
P. 1  
1/n  
#
can be added on bottom of copy.  
-1-  
Abcde  
-1-  
Set the originals to be copied.  
1
Touch the “Function” tab. The content of the “Function” tab  
will be displayed.  
2
5-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS  
If you want printing of the page numbers to be started from a  
page other than the first page, touch the “Setting 1st page”  
key.  
If you want the first page number that is printed to be  
5
8
something other than “1”, touch the “Setting start #” [“Setting  
Start page”] key. The “Setting start #” screen will be  
displayed.  
The “Setting 1st page” screen will be displayed.  
Inch specifications  
Inch specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
Paper size  
Set  
1
1
Ready to copy.  
Ready to copy.  
11x8 /2  
"
11x8 /2"  
Register  
Start #  
Back  
Check direction  
Close  
Register  
Start #  
Back  
Check direction  
Close  
Page #  
Page #  
Start page #  
Start page #  
Check direction of  
original top side.  
Check direction of  
original top side.  
Setting  
start #  
Setting  
start #  
Setting  
1st page  
Setting  
1st page  
None  
None  
Finish Page #  
Last page  
Denominator #  
Auto  
Finish Page #  
Last page  
Denominator #  
Auto  
Setting  
last page  
Set denom-  
inator #  
Setting  
last page  
Set denom-  
inator #  
Left top  
corner  
Left top  
corner  
Rear  
Rear  
Metric specifications  
Metric specifications  
Paper size  
Paper size  
Set  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
Ready to copy.  
Page numbering  
Register  
Back  
Close  
Page numbering  
Register  
Back  
Close  
Check direction  
Check direction of  
original.  
Check direction  
Check direction of  
original.  
Start  
1
#
Start  
1
#
Start page  
1
#
Start page  
1
#
Setting  
Setting  
Setting  
Setting  
1st page  
Start page  
1st page  
Start page  
None  
-1-  
P. 1  
1/n  
None  
-1-  
P. 1  
1/n  
Last page  
#
Denominator #  
Auto  
Last page  
#
Denominator #  
Auto  
Last page  
Last page  
Setting  
last page  
Set  
Denomin.  
Left top  
corner  
Setting  
last page  
Set  
Denomin.  
Left top  
corner  
Back Edge  
Back Edge  
#
#
Touch the “+” key or the “-” key to select from which page  
printing of the page numbers will start.  
Touch the “+” key or the “-” key to select the first page  
number that will be printed.  
* The desired page number can also be entered directly by  
touching the “# keys” [“#-Keys”] key and then using the  
keypad.  
6
9
Inch specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
1
Ready to copy.  
11x8 /2  
"
Back  
Check direction  
Close  
Inch specifications  
Setting 1st page  
Check direction of  
original top side.  
Paper size  
Set  
Page  
1
Ready to copy.  
8 /2x11"  
+
Back  
Close  
Setting start #  
Check direction  
Check direction of  
original top side.  
Left top  
corner  
Rear  
+
Metric specifications  
Left top  
corner  
Rear  
# keys  
Paper size  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
Back  
Close  
Setting 1st page  
Metric specifications  
Check direction  
Check direction of  
original.  
Paper size  
Set  
Page  
Ready to copy.  
Back  
Close  
Setting start #  
Check direction  
Check direction of  
original.  
Left top  
corner  
Back Edge  
Left top  
corner  
Back Edge  
#-Keys  
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 5.  
7
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 8.  
10  
5-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS  
If you want the last page number that is printed to be on a  
copy other than that for the last original, touch the “Setting  
last page” key. The “Setting last page” screen will be  
displayed.  
Touch the “+” key or the “-” key to select, counting from the  
final copy, how many pages you do NOT want to have page  
numbers printed on.  
11  
13  
Inch specifications  
Inch specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
1
Ready to copy.  
11x8 /2  
"
Paper size  
Set  
1
Ready to copy.  
11x8 /2  
"
Back  
Check direction  
Check direction of  
original top side.  
Close  
Setting last page  
Register  
Start #  
Back  
Check direction  
Close  
Page #  
Page  
Start page #  
Check direction of  
original top side.  
Last page  
+
Setting  
start #  
Setting  
1st page  
Manual  
None  
Finish Page #  
Last page  
Denominator #  
Auto  
Left top  
corner  
Rear  
Setting  
last page  
Set denom-  
inator #  
Left top  
corner  
Rear  
Metric specifications  
Metric specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
Paper size  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
Back  
Close  
Setting last page  
Check direction  
Check direction of  
original.  
Page numbering  
Register  
Back  
Close  
Page  
Check direction  
Check direction of  
original.  
Start  
1
#
Start page  
1
#
Last page  
Manual  
Setting  
1st page  
Setting  
Start page  
None  
-1-  
P. 1  
1/n  
Last page  
#
Denominator #  
Auto  
Left top  
corner  
Back Edge  
Last page  
Setting  
last page  
Set  
Denomin.  
Left top  
corner  
Back Edge  
#
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 11.  
If you selected the “1/n” style, the “Set denominator #”  
[“Set Denomin. #”] key will be displayed.  
14  
15  
Touch the “Manual” key.  
The screen to designate the last page will be displayed.  
12  
Inch specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
1
Ready to copy.  
11x8 /2  
"
If you want to manually select the denominator for the page  
numbers, touch the “Set denominator #” [“Set Denomin. #”]  
key. The “Setting denominator #” screen will be displayed.  
Back  
Check direction  
Check direction of  
original top side.  
Close  
Setting last page  
Last page  
Manual  
Inch specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
1
Ready to copy.  
Left top  
corner  
11x8 /2  
"
Rear  
Register  
Start #  
Back  
Check direction  
Check direction of  
original top side.  
Close  
Page #  
Start page #  
Metric specifications  
Setting  
start #  
Setting  
1st page  
Paper size  
Set  
None  
Ready to copy.  
Finish Page #  
Last page  
Denominator #  
Auto  
Back  
Close  
Setting last page  
Setting  
last page  
Set denom-  
inator #  
Left top  
corner  
Rear  
Check direction  
Check direction of  
original.  
Last page  
Manual  
Metric specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
Left top  
corner  
Back Edge  
Page numbering  
Register  
Back  
Close  
Check direction  
Check direction of  
original.  
Start  
1
#
Start page  
1
#
Setting  
Setting  
1st page  
Start page  
None  
-1-  
P. 1  
1/n  
Last page  
#
Denominator #  
Auto  
Last page  
Setting  
last page  
Set  
Denomin.  
Left top  
corner  
Back Edge  
#
5-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS  
Touch the “Manual” key.  
The screen to designate the denominator will be displayed.  
Follow the instructions on the right side of the touch panel  
and verify the direction in which the originals were set.  
16  
18  
Inch specifications  
Inch specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
Paper size  
Set  
Paper size  
Set  
1
1
11x8 /2  
"
1
11x8 /2"  
Ready to copy.  
11x8 /2  
"
Register  
Finished  
Back  
Close  
Register  
Finished  
Back  
Check direction  
Set the book original  
top side direct to back.  
Close  
Back  
Check direction  
Check direction of  
original top side.  
Close  
Setting denominator #  
Check direction  
Check direction of  
original top side.  
Open from  
left/right  
Book➔  
Duplex  
Auto  
Open from  
top  
Book➔  
Book  
Manual  
Left top  
corner  
Left top  
corner  
Rear  
Rear  
Metric specifications  
Metric specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
Paper size  
Set  
Paper size  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
Register  
Back  
Close  
Register  
Back  
Check direction  
Set book original top  
side direction to back.  
Close  
Back  
Close  
Setting denominator #  
Finished  
Check direction  
Check direction of  
original.  
Finished  
Check direction  
Check direction of  
original.  
Left/Right  
binding  
BookR  
Duplex  
Auto  
Top  
binding  
BookR  
Book  
Manual  
Left top  
Corner  
Back Edge  
Left top  
corner  
Back Edge  
Press the [Start] key.  
Copying will start.  
Touch the “+” key or the “-” key to select the desired  
denominator for the page numbers.  
* The desired denominator can also be entered directly by  
touching the “# keys” [“#-Keys”] key and then using the  
keypad.  
19  
17  
Inch specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
1
Ready to copy.  
8 /2x11"  
Back  
Close  
Setting denominator #  
Check direction  
Check direction of  
original top side.  
Auto  
+
Manual  
Left top  
corner  
Rear  
# keys  
Metric specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
Back  
Close  
Setting denominator #  
Check direction  
Check direction of  
original.  
Auto  
Manual  
Left top  
corner  
Back Edge  
#-Keys  
5-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS  
9. Overlaying one image over another [Form overlay mode]  
This mode can be used to scan the first original (the “form”) into  
memory and have its image overlaid onto copies made from  
subsequent originals. If the optional Hard Disk is installed on your  
copier, it is also possible to register and store in memory, in advance,  
the images that you want to use as original forms.  
Touch the “On” key.  
The screen to set the shading level of the form image will be  
displayed.  
3
Inch specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
1
Ready to copy.  
11x8 /2  
"
Register  
Back  
Close  
Forms Overlay  
Off  
On  
Overlay first scanned image onto  
the scanned image or on registered from.  
A
B
C
A
B
C
Metric specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
Register  
Back  
Close  
Form overlay  
Overlay 1st image on the scanned  
image or on registered form.  
Of  
NOTE  
On  
Refer to “(2) Form registration” on page 6-1 for the procedure to  
register images as forms.  
Touch the “+” key or the “-” key to select the level of shading  
that you want to use for the original form.  
The desired shading level can be set to any 10% increment  
between 10% and 100%.  
4
Touch the “Function” tab. The content of the “Function” tab  
will be displayed.  
1
* A sample of the effect that the selected shading level will  
produce will be displayed to the right of the entry field.  
Touch the “Forms Overlay” [“Form overlay”] key. The “Forms  
Overlay” [“Form overlay”] screen will be displayed.  
2
Inch specifications  
Place from first then press start.  
Inch specifications  
Back  
Close  
Forms Overlay  
Paper size  
Set  
1
Ready to copy.  
11x8 /2  
"
(10~100)  
Exposure  
50  
%
Select  
paper  
2 sided/  
Separation  
Select  
orig. size  
Combine  
Off  
On  
Exposure  
mode  
Reduce  
/Enlarge  
Auto  
Selection  
Batch  
scanning  
Up  
Scan form once  
Orig.image  
quality  
Margin/  
Centering  
Forms  
Overlay  
Form  
Selected  
Page #  
Down  
Cover  
Mode  
Sort/  
Finished  
Border  
Erase  
Booklet  
Function  
Basic  
User choice  
Program  
Metric specifications  
Set form.  
Press Start Key.  
Metric specifications  
Register  
Form overlay  
(10 100)  
Back  
Close  
Paper size  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
Exposure  
50  
%
Select  
paper  
2-sided/  
Split  
Select  
size orig.  
Merge copy  
Off  
On  
Exposure  
mode  
Reduce/  
Enlarge  
Auto  
selection  
Large # of  
originals  
Up  
Scan form once  
Image  
quality  
Margin/  
Imag. shift  
Page  
numbering  
Form  
overlay  
Form  
selection  
Down  
Sort/  
Finished  
Erase  
Mode  
Cover  
Mode  
Booklet  
Function  
Basic  
User choice  
Program  
If the optional Hard Disk is installed on your copier, it is also  
possible to register and store in memory, in advance, the  
images that you want to use as original forms. If you want to  
use a previously registered image as the form, touch the  
“Form Selected” [“Form selection”] key and go to the next  
step.  
5
If you want to scan in a new image, go directly to step 9.  
5-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS  
Touch the “Loading Form” key.  
A list of registered forms will be displayed.  
If you are using the optional Document Processor, make sure  
that the original that you want to use as the form is on top of  
the originals that you want to copy.  
6
9
Inch specifications  
If you are using the platen, set the original that you want to  
use as the form.  
Back  
Close  
Select Form  
Scan form  
once  
Loading  
Form  
Press the [Start] key.  
Copying will start.  
Overlay first scanned image onto  
the scanned image or on registered from.  
10  
If a message appears telling you to set the next original, go  
to the next step.  
Metric specifications  
Back  
Close  
Form selection  
Replace the first original with the next one and press the  
[Start] key. Scanning of that next original will start.  
11  
12  
Scan form  
once  
Loading  
Form  
Overlay 1st image on the scanned  
image or on registered form.  
Once you have finished scanning all of the originals, touch  
the “Scanning finished” key. Copying will start.  
Select from that list the image that you want to use and then  
touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 4.  
7
Inch specifications  
Close  
Back  
Up  
Select Form  
Form  
Form 005  
600dpi  
1
11x8 /2  
"
1
Form 004  
Form 003  
Form 002  
Form 001  
11x8 /2  
"
Scan form  
once  
1
8 /2x11"  
Loading  
Form  
1
11x8 /2  
"
1
Down  
11x8 /2  
"
The arrow means direction of registered form.  
Set original and form directions.  
Metric specifications  
Form selection  
Back  
Up  
Close  
600dpi  
Form  
Form006  
Form005  
Form004  
Form003  
Form002  
Scan form  
once  
Loading  
Form  
Down  
The arrow means direction of registered form.  
Set original and form directions.  
Set the originals that you want to copy and go directly to step  
10.  
8
5-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS  
10. Making booklets from sheet originals [Booklet/Stitching mode]  
With this mode, you can use 1-sided or 2-sided originals to make  
open-faced, two-sided copies in such a way that the finished copies  
can be stacked and folded into a booklet format. You can also select  
to have color paper or relatively thick paper fed as front and/or back  
covers to the copy sets.  
3 If “Top” is selected as the binding direction...  
Copying will be performed so that the stacked and folded pages of the  
finished copies read from top to bottom.  
NOTES  
1
2
2
3
4
4
5
6
7
8
• Only 8 1/2" x 11", 11" x 8 1/2", 11" x 17", B5R, B5, A4R, A4, B4 and  
A3 size copy paper can be used in this mode.  
• It is possible for you to change the drawer[cassette] that will be used  
to feed the cover sheets. (See “Cover drawer[cassette]” on  
page 7-71.)  
8
5
7
Inch specifications  
• If the optional Document Finisher with Center Bind & Fold Unit is  
installed on your copier, you will be able to select center binding  
(stapling) and folding. Only 8 1/2" x 11" and 11" x 17" size copy paper  
can be center folded and stapled.  
4 It is possible for you to select whether or not to copy onto the  
Metric specifications  
front and/or back cover sheets.  
• If the optional Document Finisher with Center Bind & Fold Unit is  
installed on your copier, you will be able to select center binding  
(stapling) and folding. Only A4R, B4 and A3 size copy paper can be  
center folded and stapled.  
Front cover  
Back cover  
Do NOT copy  
Copy on outside  
Copy on inside  
a
b
a
b
1 If “Left” is selected as the binding direction...  
Copy on both sides  
Copying will be performed so that the stacked and folded pages of the  
finished copies read from left to right.  
2 If “Right” is selected as the binding direction...  
Copying will be performed so that the stacked and folded pages of the  
finished copies read from right to left.  
NOTES  
• The asterisk “ ” indicates the side of the cover on which copying  
will be accomplished.  
• The illustrations above are an example of when “Left” is selected as  
the binding direction.  
1
1
2
7
2
3
4
5
4
4
5
6
7
8
2
7
2
5
5-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS  
Set the first original to be copied.  
Specify the binding direction of both the originals and the  
1
2
5
finished copies.  
Inch specifications  
2 sided mode.  
Touch the “Function” tab. The content of the “Function” tab  
will be displayed.  
Paper size  
Set  
1
11x8 /2  
"
Register  
Stitching  
Back  
Check direction  
Check direction of  
original top side.  
Close  
Booklet  
Original  
Finishing  
Touch the “Booklet” key. The “Booklet” screen will be  
displayed.  
Off  
3
Open from  
left  
Stitching  
Front cvr  
None  
1 sided  
2-sided  
Left/Right  
Open from  
right  
Inch specifications  
Booklet  
None  
Left top  
corner  
Book  
➔Booklet  
2-sided  
Top/Bottom  
Open from  
top  
Saddle  
Stitch  
Rear  
Paper size  
Set  
1
Ready to copy.  
11x8 /2  
"
Select  
paper  
2 sided/  
Separation  
Select  
orig. size  
Combine  
Metric specifications  
Exposure  
mode  
Reduce  
/Enlarge  
Auto  
Selection  
Batch  
scanning  
Up  
Paper size  
Set  
Duplex Mode.  
Orig.image  
quality  
Margin/  
Centering  
Forms  
Overlay  
Page #  
Down  
Register  
Back  
Close  
Booklet  
Cover  
Mode  
Sort/  
Finished  
Border  
Erase  
Booklet  
Stitching  
Check direction  
Check direction of  
original.  
Original  
Finished  
Function  
Basic  
User choice  
Program  
Off  
Stitching  
Front cov.  
Left  
binding  
None  
1-sided  
2-sided  
Left/Right  
Right  
binding  
Metric specifications  
Booklet  
None  
2-sided  
Top/Bottom  
Top  
binding  
Center  
Staple  
Left top  
corner  
Book  
RBooklet  
Back Edge  
Paper size  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
Select  
paper  
2-sided/  
Split  
Select  
size orig.  
Merge copy  
Exposure  
mode  
Reduce/  
Enlarge  
Auto  
selection  
Large # of  
originals  
Up  
If “It is impossible to copy in present setting mode. Change  
setting of original and finishing mode.” appears, check (on  
the right side of the touch panel) whether both the orientation  
of the originals and the finish mode setting are correct or not.  
6
Image  
quality  
Margin/  
Imag. shift  
Page  
numbering  
Form  
overlay  
Down  
Sort/  
Finished  
Erase  
Mode  
Cover  
Mode  
Booklet  
Function  
Basic  
User choice  
Program  
Inch specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
It is impossible to copy in present setting mode.  
Change setting of original and finishing mode.  
1
11x8 /2  
"
Touch the “Booklet” key. The screen to specify the binding  
direction of the originals and the finished copies will be  
displayed.  
4
Register  
Back  
Check direction  
Check direction of  
original top side.  
Close  
Booklet  
Original  
1 sided  
Finishing  
Stitching  
Off  
Open from  
left  
Stitching  
Front cvr  
Inch specifications  
None  
2-sided  
Left/Right  
Open from  
right  
Booklet  
Paper size  
Set  
None  
1
Ready to copy.  
11x8 /2  
"
Left top  
corner  
Book  
➔Booklet  
2-sided  
Top/Bottom  
Open from  
top  
Saddle  
Stitch  
Rear  
Register  
Back  
Close  
Booklet  
Metric specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
Edit one or two sided original pages  
and out put book.  
Use Book-booklet for book original.  
None  
It is impossible to copy in present setting mode.  
Change setting of original and finishing mode.  
a
Booklet  
Register  
Back  
Close  
Booklet  
Book  
➔Booklet  
Stitching  
Check direction  
Original  
Finished  
Check direction of  
original.  
Off  
Stitching  
Front cov.  
Metric specifications  
Left  
binding  
None  
1-sided  
2-sided  
Left/Right  
Right  
binding  
Booklet  
Paper size  
None  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
2-sided  
Top/Bottom  
Top  
binding  
Center  
Staple  
Left top  
corner  
Book  
RBooklet  
Back Edge  
Register  
Back  
Close  
Booklet  
Edit 1- and 2-sided originals  
and output as book.  
None  
Use BookRbooklet for book original.  
Booklet  
Book  
RBooklet  
5-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS  
If the optional Document Finisher with Center Bind & Fold  
Unit is installed on your copier, the “Saddle Stitch” [“Center  
If you want to add covers, touch the “Stitching Front cvr”  
[“Stitching Front cov.”] key and go to the next step.  
If you do NOT want to add covers, go directly to step 11.  
7
9
Staple”] key will be displayed and you will be able to select  
center binding (stapling) and folding of the copy sets. In this  
case, if you DO want the center stapling and folding  
operation to be performed, touch the “Saddle Stitch” [“Center  
Staple”] key and go to the next step.  
Inch specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
1
2 sided mode.  
11x8 /2  
"
Register  
Stitching  
Back  
Check direction  
Check direction of  
original top side.  
Close  
Booklet  
Original  
1 sided  
Finishing  
If you do NOT want the stapling and folding operation to be  
performed, go directly to step 9.  
Off  
Open from  
left  
Stitching  
Front cvr  
None  
2-sided  
Left/Right  
Open from  
right  
Booklet  
None  
Inch specifications  
Book  
➔Booklet  
2-sided  
Top/Bottom  
Open from  
top  
Left top  
corner  
Saddle  
Stitch  
Rear  
Paper size  
Set  
1
2 sided mode.  
11x8 /2  
"
Metric specifications  
Register  
Stitching  
Back  
Check direction  
Check direction of  
original top side.  
Close  
Booklet  
Original  
1 sided  
Finishing  
Paper size  
Set  
Duplex Mode.  
Off  
Open from  
left  
Stitching  
Front cvr  
None  
Register  
Back  
Close  
Booklet  
2-sided  
Left/Right  
Open from  
right  
Stitching  
Check direction  
Check direction of  
original.  
Original  
Finished  
Booklet  
None  
Book  
➔Booklet  
2-sided  
Top/Bottom  
Open from  
top  
Left top  
corner  
Saddle  
Stitch  
Off  
Rear  
Stitching  
Front cov.  
Left  
binding  
None  
1-sided  
2-sided  
Left/Right  
Right  
binding  
Booklet  
None  
Metric specifications  
2-sided  
Top/Bottom  
Top  
binding  
Center  
Staple  
Left top  
corner  
Book  
RBooklet  
Back Edge  
Paper size  
Set  
Duplex Mode.  
Register  
Back  
Close  
Booklet  
Stitching  
Check direction  
Original  
Finished  
Touch the “Cover” key and select whether or not (and where)  
to copy on each of the front and back covers.  
Check direction of  
original.  
Off  
10  
Stitching  
Front cov.  
Left  
binding  
Right  
binding  
None  
1-sided  
2-sided  
Left/Right  
Booklet  
Inch specifications  
None  
2-sided  
Top/Bottom  
Top  
binding  
Center  
Staple  
Left top  
corner  
Book  
RBooklet  
Back Edge  
Paper size  
Set  
1
2 sided mode.  
11x8 /2  
"
Back  
Close  
Front cover  
Touch the “Bind & Fold” key.  
* It is possible for you to center staple and fold, up to 10 copy  
sheets (40 layout pages) at one time.  
Front cover  
Rear cover  
8
Back copy  
Back copy  
No cover  
Cover  
Blank  
Blank  
2 sided  
copy  
2 sided  
copy  
Front copy  
Front copy  
Inch specifications  
Pape  
Set  
1
2 sided mode.  
8/2x11"  
100%  
Metric specifications  
Saddle Stitch  
Back  
Close  
Paper size  
Set  
Duplex Mode.  
Off  
Stitch. front cover.  
Back  
Close  
Bind &  
Fold  
Back cover  
Front cover  
Back copy  
Back copy  
No cover  
Cover  
Blank  
Blank  
2-sided  
copy  
2-sided  
copy  
Front copy  
Front copy  
Metric specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
Duplex Mode.  
Saddle Stitch  
Back  
Close  
Off  
Bind  
& Fold  
5-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS  
Press the [Start] key.  
Scanning of the originals will start.  
11  
If you set the originals in the optional Document Processor,  
copying will start automatically.  
If you set an original on the platen, a message will appear  
telling you to set the next original. In this case, go to the next  
step.  
Replace the first original with the next one and press the  
[Start] key. Scanning of that next original will start.  
12  
13  
Once you have finished scanning all of the originals, touch  
the “Scanning finished” key. Copying will start.  
5-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS  
11. Making booklets from book originals [Book to Booklet mode]  
With this mode, you can add covers, and either copy onto them or not,  
so that the finished copy sets will appear like a magazine, etc.  
● With a cover  
The original that will be used as the cover will be scanned first so that,  
when the finished copies are folded, that page will act as the front and  
back cover to the copy set.  
NOTES  
• Only 8 1/2" x 11", 11" x 8 1/2", 11" x 17", A5R, B5R, A4R, B4 and A3  
size originals and 8 1/2" x 11", 11" x 8 1/2", 11" x 17", B5R, B5, A4R,  
A4, B4 and A3 size copy paper can be used in this mode.  
• It is possible for you to change the drawer[cassette] that will be used  
to feed the cover sheets. (See “Cover drawer[cassette]” on page  
7-71.)  
2
5
2
5
6
A
A
Inch specifications  
B
B
• If the optional Document Finisher with Center Bind & Fold Unit is  
installed on your copier, you will be able to select center binding  
(stapling) and folding. Only 8 1/2" x 11" and 11" x 17" size copy paper  
can be center folded and stapled.  
Metric specifications  
● Without a cover  
• If the optional Document Finisher with Center Bind & Fold Unit is  
installed on your copier, you will be able to select center binding  
(stapling) and folding. Only A4R, B4 and A3 size copy paper can be  
center folded and stapled.  
When the finished copies are folded, the front and back of the copy  
set will be blank.  
2
5
2
5
6
A
A
A
B
B
B
Set the open-faced (book, etc.) original to be copied.  
1
2
Touch the “Function” tab. The content of the “Function” tab  
will be displayed.  
5-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS  
Touch the “Booklet” key. The “Booklet” screen will be  
displayed.  
Specify the binding direction of both the originals and the  
finished copies.  
3
5
Inch specifications  
Inch specifications  
Paper size  
Paper size  
Set  
Set  
Set first page.  
Press "Start" key.  
1
1
Ready to copy.  
11x8 /2  
"
11x8 /2  
"
Select  
paper  
2 sided/  
Separation  
Select  
orig. size  
Register  
Back  
Check direction  
Set the book original  
Close  
Booklet  
Original  
Combine  
Finishing  
Copy front  
Exposure  
mode  
Reduce  
/Enlarge  
Auto  
Selection  
Batch  
scanning  
Up  
Off  
top side direct to back.  
Orig.image  
quality  
Margin/  
Centering  
Forms  
Overlay  
Book  
Open from  
left  
Copy on  
front cvr  
Page #  
Down  
None  
Left  
Book  
Open from  
right  
Cover  
Mode  
Booklet  
Right  
Sort/  
Finished  
Border  
Erase  
None  
Booklet  
Saddle  
Stitch  
Book  
➔Booklet  
Function  
Basic  
User choice  
Program  
Metric specifications  
Metric specifications  
Paper size  
Paper size  
Set  
Set  
Set first page.  
Press "START" button.  
Ready to copy.  
Select  
paper  
2-sided/  
Split  
Select  
size orig.  
Register  
Back  
Check direction  
Close  
Booklet  
Merge copy  
Original  
Finished  
Copy front  
Set book original top  
side direction to back.  
Exposure  
mode  
Reduce/  
Enlarge  
Auto  
selection  
Large # of  
originals  
Up  
Off  
Image  
quality  
Margin/  
Imag. shift  
Page  
numbering  
Left  
binding  
Copy on  
front cov.  
Book  
Form  
overlay  
Down  
None  
Left  
Book  
Right  
binding  
Booklet  
Right  
Sort/  
Finished  
Erase  
Mode  
Cover  
Mode  
None  
Booklet  
Book  
RBooklet  
Center  
Staple  
Function  
Basic  
User choice  
Program  
Touch the “Book / Booklet” key. The screen to specify the  
binding direction of the originals and the finished copies will  
be displayed.  
If the optional Document Finisher with Center Bind & Fold  
Unit is installed on your copier, the “Saddle Stitch” [“Center  
Staple”] key will be displayed and you will be able to select  
center binding (stapling) and folding of the copy sets. In this  
case, if you DO want the center stapling and folding  
operation to be performed, touch the “Saddle Stitch” [“Center  
Staple”] key and go to the next step.  
4
6
Inch specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
1
Ready to copy.  
11x8 /2  
"
Register  
Back  
Close  
Booklet  
If you do NOT want the stapling and folding operation to be  
performed, go directly to step 8.  
Edit one or two sided original pages  
and out put book.  
Use Book-booklet for book original.  
None  
a
Booklet  
Inch specifications  
Book  
➔Booklet  
Paper size  
Set  
Set first page.  
Press "Start" key.  
1
11x8 /2  
"
Metric specifications  
Register  
Back  
Check direction  
Set the book original  
Close  
Booklet  
Original  
Finishing  
Copy front  
Paper size  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
Off  
top side direct to back.  
Book  
Left  
Open from  
left  
Copy on  
front cvr  
None  
Register  
Back  
Close  
Booklet  
Book  
Right  
Open from  
right  
Booklet  
None  
Saddle  
Stitch  
Book  
➔Booklet  
Edit 1- and 2-sided originals  
and output as book.  
None  
Use BookRbooklet for book original.  
Booklet  
Metric specifications  
Book  
RBooklet  
Paper size  
Set  
Set first page.  
Press "START" button.  
Register  
Back  
Check direction  
Close  
Booklet  
Original  
Finished  
Copy front  
Set book original top  
side direction to back.  
Off  
Left  
binding  
Copy on  
front cov.  
Book  
None  
Left  
Book  
Right  
binding  
Booklet  
Right  
None  
Book  
RBooklet  
Center  
Staple  
5-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS  
Touch the “Bind & Fold” key.  
* It is possible for you to center staple and fold, up to 10 copy  
sheets (40 layout pages) at one time.  
Touch the “On” key.  
Inch specifications  
7
9
Paper size  
Set  
Set first page.  
Press "Start" key.  
1
11x8 /2  
"
Inch specifications  
Back  
Check direction  
Set the book original  
Close  
Copy on front cover  
Pape  
Set  
Set first page.  
Press "Start" key.  
1
8/2x11"  
100%  
top side direct to back.  
Saddle Stitch  
Back  
Close  
When selecting "ON" for copying on the  
Off  
On  
front cover, follow the instruction.  
1. Scan front cover book original  
2. Start scan book originals  
Off  
Bind &  
Fold  
Metric specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
Set first page.  
Press "START" button.  
Metric specifications  
Back  
Check direction  
Set book original top  
side direction to back.  
Close  
Copy on front cover  
Paper size  
Set  
Set first page.  
Press "START" button.  
Saddle Stitch  
Back  
Close  
When selecting "ON" for copying on the  
Off  
On  
front cover, follow the instruction.  
1. Scan front cover book original.  
2. Start scan book originals.  
Off  
Bind  
& Fold  
IMPORTANT!  
If you want to add covers, touch the “Copy on front cvr”  
[“Copy on front cov.”] key. The “Copy on front cover” screen  
will be displayed.  
8
If you DO want to copy onto the covers, be absolutely certain to set  
the original that you want to have copied onto the cover first.  
At this point, if you do NOT want to copy onto the covers, go  
directly to step 10.  
Inch specifications  
Press the [Start] key.  
Scanning of the original will start.  
10  
Paper size  
Set  
Set first page.  
Press "Start" key.  
1
11x8 /2  
"
Register  
Back  
Check direction  
Set the book original  
Close  
Booklet  
When a message appears telling you to set the next original,  
go to the next step.  
Original  
Finishing  
Copy front  
Off  
top side direct to back.  
Book  
Left  
Open from  
left  
Copy on  
front cvr  
None  
Book  
Right  
Open from  
right  
Booklet  
None  
Saddle  
Stitch  
Book  
➔Booklet  
Metric specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
Set first page.  
Press "START" button.  
Register  
Back  
Check direction  
Close  
Booklet  
Original  
Finished  
Copy front  
Set book original top  
side direction to back.  
Off  
Left  
binding  
Copy on  
front cov.  
Book  
None  
Left  
Book  
Right  
binding  
Booklet  
Right  
None  
Book  
RBooklet  
Center  
Staple  
Replace the first original with the next one and press the  
[Start] key. Scanning of that next original will start.  
11  
Once you have finished scanning all of the originals, touch  
the “Scanning finished” key. Copying will start.  
12  
5-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS  
12. Automatic sorting of copy sets without the Document Finisher  
[Sort/Finished mode]  
Since copying in this mode is performed after multiple originals are  
scanned and memorized, copies can be sorted into the required  
number of sets even without the optional Document Finisher.  
Touch the “Sort/Finished” key. The “Sort/Finished” screen will  
be displayed.  
3
Inch specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
1
Ready to copy.  
11x8 /2  
"
When “Sort:ON” and “On” [“1 set”] are  
Select  
paper  
2 sided/  
Separation  
Select  
orig. size  
Combine  
selected  
3
2
Exposure  
mode  
Reduce  
/Enlarge  
Auto  
Selection  
Batch  
scanning  
Up  
1
Orig.image  
quality  
Margin/  
Centering  
Forms  
Overlay  
Page #  
Down  
3
2
Cover  
Mode  
Sort/  
Finished  
Border  
Erase  
Booklet  
1
Function  
Basic  
User choice  
Program  
3
2
Metric specifications  
1
Paper size  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
Select  
paper  
2-sided/  
Split  
Select  
size orig.  
Merge copy  
When “Sort:OFF” and “On” [“Output each  
Exposure  
mode  
Reduce/  
Enlarge  
Auto  
selection  
Large # of  
originals  
Up  
page”] are selected  
1
1
Image  
quality  
Margin/  
Imag. shift  
Page  
numbering  
Form  
overlay  
Down  
1
Sort/  
Finished  
Erase  
Mode  
Cover  
Mode  
Booklet  
3
2
Function  
Basic  
User choice  
Program  
1
Touch the “Sort:ON” key.  
Inch specifications  
3
3
4
3
Paper size  
Set  
1
Ready to copy.  
11x8 /2  
"
Sort/Finished  
Register  
Back  
Close  
(when there is paper loaded of the same  
size but different orientation)  
Sort  
Offset  
Sort:Off  
Sort:On  
Off  
On  
Rear  
NOTES  
Metric specifications  
• If you do not have paper of the same size but different orientations  
available for paper feed, copies will be ejected without being  
“sorted” in this way.  
Paper size  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
Register  
Back  
Close  
Sort/Finished  
Sort  
Group  
• You can also select whether or not the Sort and/or the Finished  
modes will be the default setting in the initial mode. (See “Sort/  
Finished mode ON/OFF” on page 7-78.)  
Sort:Off  
Sort:On  
Off  
1 set  
Set the originals to be copied.  
Touch the “On” [“1 set”] key.  
1
5
6
Touch the “Function” tab. The content of the “Function” tab  
will be displayed.  
Use the keypad to set the number of copies to be made.  
2
Press the [Start] key.  
Copying will start.  
7
5-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS  
13. Auto rotation function  
If the orientation of the original is different from that of the paper  
loaded in the drawers[cassettes], the image will be automatically  
turned 90 degrees counter-clockwise for copying. No special setting is  
required in order to use this function.  
Touch the “Auto Rotation” key. The “Auto Rotation” screen  
will be displayed.  
2
Inch specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
1
Ready to copy.  
11x8 /2  
"
Auto  
Rotation  
Memo  
pages  
OHP  
backing  
Proof Copy  
Invert  
Orig. set  
direction  
Eco Print  
Mirror  
Up  
Modify  
Copy  
Down  
Function  
Basic  
User choice  
Program  
Metric specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
Auto  
Memo  
pages  
Test copy  
Invert  
OHP back  
Rotation  
Orig. set  
Eco Print  
Mirror  
Up  
direction  
Modify  
copy  
Down  
NOTES  
Function  
Basic  
User choice  
Program  
• This function will only work with 5 1/2" x 8 1/2", 8 1/2" x 11",  
11" x 8 1/2", A6R, B6R, A5R, B5R, B5, A4R and A4 size copy paper.  
• You can also select whether or not the Auto Rotation mode will be  
the default setting in the initial mode. (See “Auto Rotation mode ON/  
OFF” on page 7-79.)  
Touch the “No Rotate” key.  
Inch specifications  
3
Paper size  
Set  
1
Ready to copy.  
11x8 /2  
"
If you want to disengage the auto rotation function, perform the  
following procedure.  
Auto Rotation  
Register  
Back  
Close  
No Rotate  
Rotate  
When original and paper have different  
direction, image will be rotated.  
Touch the “Function” tab and then the “▼ Down” key.  
1
The content of the next portion of the “Function” tab will be  
displayed.  
Metric specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
Register  
Back  
Close  
Auto Rotation  
No rotate  
Rotate  
When original and paper have different  
direction, original will be rotated  
automatically.  
5-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS  
14. Adding a front and/or back cover to your copy sets [Cover mode]  
With this mode, you can select to have color paper or relatively thick paper fed as front and/or back covers to your copy sets.  
NOTE  
It is possible for you to change the drawer[cassette] that will be used to feed the cover sheets. (See “Cover drawer[cassette]” on page 7-71.)  
You can select separately whether you want both sides or only one side of both the front and back covers to be copied onto, or to have either or  
both of them left completely blank. Select also whether or not you even want to include a back cover at all.  
Front cover  
Back cover  
2 sided copy[Duplex Copy]*  
Front copy  
Back copy*  
Blank  
No back cover  
* The illustrations above show the result when sets of 2-sided copies are being made.  
If you are making sets of 1-sided copies, copying will not be performed on the rear side of the covers even if the 2-sided copy [Duplex Copy] or  
Back copy settings are selected.  
5-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS  
Set the originals to be copied.  
Select the desired settings for the front cover.  
5
Inch specifications  
1
Paper size  
Set  
Touch the “Function” tab. The content of the “Function” tab  
will be displayed.  
1
Ready to copy.  
11x8 /2  
"
2
Cover Mode  
Front cover  
Register  
Back  
Close  
Rear cover  
Touch the “Cover Mode” key. The “Cover Mode” screen will be  
displayed.  
3
No cover  
Cover  
No cover  
Cover  
Blank  
Back copy  
2 sided  
copy  
Front copy  
Inch specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
1
Ready to copy.  
11x8 /2  
"
Metric specifications  
Select  
paper  
2 sided/  
Separation  
Select  
orig. size  
Combine  
Paper size  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
Exposure  
mode  
Reduce  
/Enlarge  
Auto  
Selection  
Batch  
scanning  
Up  
Register  
Back  
Close  
Cover Mode  
Orig.image  
quality  
Margin/  
Centering  
Forms  
Overlay  
Page #  
Down  
Front cover  
Back cover  
Cover  
Mode  
Sort/  
Finished  
Border  
Erase  
Booklet  
Function  
Basic  
User choice  
Program  
No cover  
Cover  
Blank  
Back copy  
No cover  
Cover  
Duplex  
Copy  
Front copy  
Metric specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
Select  
paper  
2-sided/  
Split  
Select  
size orig.  
Merge copy  
Touch the “Cover” key or the “No cover” key, as appropriate,  
to select whether or not you want to include a back cover.  
If you selected “Cover”, the screen to make the back cover  
settings will be displayed.  
Exposure  
mode  
Reduce/  
Enlarge  
Auto  
selection  
Large # of  
originals  
6
Up  
Image  
quality  
Margin/  
Imag. shift  
Page  
numbering  
Form  
overlay  
Down  
Sort/  
Finished  
Erase  
Mode  
Cover  
Mode  
Booklet  
Function  
Basic  
User choice  
Program  
Inch specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
1
Ready to copy.  
11x8 /2  
"
Touch the “Cover” key. The screen to make the front cover  
settings will be displayed.  
4
Cover Mode  
Front cover  
Register  
Back  
Close  
Rear cover  
Inch specifications  
No cover  
Cover  
No cover  
Cover  
Blank  
Back copy  
Paper size  
Set  
1
Ready to copy.  
11x8 /2  
"
2 sided  
copy  
Front copy  
Cover Mode  
Front cover  
Register  
Back  
Close  
Metric specifications  
No cover  
Cover  
Insert Color or Thick, etc paper  
as a front/back cover.  
Able to copy on same paper.  
Set the cover paper for specify  
drawer.  
Paper size  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
Register  
Back  
Close  
Cover Mode  
Front cover  
Back cover  
Metric specifications  
No cover  
Cover  
Blank  
Back copy  
No cover  
Cover  
Paper size  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
Duplex  
Copy  
Front copy  
Register  
Back  
Close  
Cover Mode  
Front cover  
No cover  
Cover  
Insert front  
Thick etc...) to head  
&
back cover paper (Colour/  
end of copy.  
&
Select the desired settings for the back cover.  
Inch specifications  
7
Set cover paper in dedignated  
paper cassette.  
Paper size  
Set  
1
Ready to copy.  
11x8 /2  
"
Cover Mode  
Front cover  
Register  
Back  
Close  
Rear cover  
No cover  
Cover  
No cover  
Cover  
Blank  
Back copy  
Blank  
Back copy  
2 sided  
copy  
2 sided  
copy  
Front copy  
Front copy  
Metric specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
Register  
Back  
Close  
Cover Mode  
Front cover  
Back cover  
No cover  
Cover  
Blank  
Back copy  
Blank  
Front copy  
Back copy  
No cover  
Cover  
Duplex  
Copy  
Duplex  
Copy  
Front copy  
5-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS  
Press the [Start] key.  
Scanning of the originals will start.  
8
If you set the originals in the optional Document Processor,  
copying will start automatically.  
If you set an original on the platen, a message will appear  
telling you to set the next original. In this case, go to the next  
step.  
Replace the first original with the next one and press the  
[Start] key. Scanning of that next original will start.  
9
Once you have finished scanning all of the originals, touch  
the “Scanning finished” key. Copying will start.  
10  
5-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS  
15. Original size selection mode  
With this mode, if you manually select a size for the original, only that  
size image will be scanned for copying. Use this mode as well when  
copying from originals of non-standard sizes.  
Touch the “Select orig. size” [“Select size orig.”] key. The  
“Select original size” [“Select size original”] screen will be  
displayed.  
3
Inch specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
1
Ready to copy.  
11x8 /2  
"
Select  
paper  
2 sided/  
Separation  
Select  
orig. size  
Combine  
Exposure  
mode  
Reduce  
/Enlarge  
Auto  
Selection  
Batch  
scanning  
Up  
8 1/2" x 11"  
Orig.image  
quality  
Margin/  
Centering  
Forms  
Overlay  
Page #  
Down  
A4  
Cover  
Mode  
Sort/  
Finished  
Border  
Erase  
Booklet  
B
Function  
Basic  
User choice  
Program  
Metric specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
Select  
paper  
2-sided/  
Split  
Select  
size orig.  
Merge copy  
Exposure  
mode  
Reduce/  
Enlarge  
Auto  
selection  
Large # of  
originals  
Up  
NOTES  
Image  
quality  
Margin/  
Imag. shift  
Page  
numbering  
Form  
overlay  
Down  
• You can register the size of non-standard originals that you often  
use as a custom original size. (See “4. Original size registration” on  
page 7-90.)  
Sort/  
Finished  
Erase  
Mode  
Cover  
Mode  
Booklet  
Function  
Basic  
User choice  
Program  
• ALWAYS set non-standard sized originals on the platen.  
• Once you select the original size under this mode, you can copy with  
originals set on the platen even with the optional Document  
Processor open.  
• If this mode is used in combination with the Centering/Image shift  
mode, you can, for example, have the image of non-standard sized  
originals centered on standard sized copy paper. (See “4. Centering/  
Image shift mode” on page 5-8.)  
Select the size of the originals.  
4
If you want to select a standard scanning size, touch the key  
that corresponds to the desired size and then go directly to  
step 9.  
If you want to select a standard size other than those  
displayed, go to the next step.  
If you want to select the dimensions of the scan area  
manually, go directly to step 7.  
Inch specifications  
Set the originals to be copied.  
Paper size  
Set  
1
1
Ready to copy.  
11x8 /2  
"
Select original size  
Register  
Back  
Close  
Touch the “Function” tab. The content of the “Function” tab  
will be displayed.  
User regist.  
2
1
8 /2 x 14"  
11 x 15"  
1
1
Auto  
5 /2 x 5 /2  
"
Select  
size  
1
1
1
1
A4  
A4  
11 x 17"  
5 /2 x 8 /2"  
8 /2 x 8 /2  
"
1
1
1
Input size  
8 /2 x 5 /2  
"
11 x 11"  
9 x 9"  
8 /2 x 11"  
Other  
stand. Size  
1
11 x 8 /2  
"
Metric specifications  
Set  
Paper size  
Ready to copy.  
Select size original  
Register  
Back  
Close  
Use regist  
Auto  
100X100mm  
150X150mm  
200X200mm  
120X120mm  
Select  
size  
Input size  
Others  
stand. Size  
Folio  
NOTE  
If you have registered a custom original size, you will be able to select  
that size for use in this mode. (See “4. Original size registration” on  
page 7-90.)  
5-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS  
Touch the “Other stand. Size” [“Others stand.Size”] key.  
5
6
Select the size of the originals and then proceed to step 9.  
Inch specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
1
Ready to copy.  
11x8 /2  
"
Select original size  
Register  
Back  
Close  
A3  
B4  
B5  
B5  
B6  
B5  
8K  
Select  
size  
Folio  
A5  
16K  
1
Input size  
A5  
A6  
8 /2 x 13"  
Other  
stand. Size  
P. Card  
Metric specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
Select size original  
Register  
Back  
Close  
1
11 x 17"  
8 /2 x 13"  
Select  
1
8 /2 x 14"  
size  
Pstcard  
8K  
1
1
Input size  
5 /2 x 8 /2  
"
"
Others  
stand. Size  
1
1
16K  
8 /2 x 5 /2  
Touch the “Input size” key. The screen to set the dimensions  
of the scan area will be displayed.  
7
8
Based on the left rear corner of the platen being a setting of  
“0”, touch the “+” key or the “-” key to change the dimensions  
of the scan area to the desired setting.  
* In metric specification copiers, the dimensions can also be  
entered directly by touching the “#-Keys” key and then  
using the keypad.  
Inch specifications  
Paper Size  
Set  
1
Ready to copy.  
11x8 /2  
"
Register  
17  
Back  
Close  
Select original size  
5
2
11 /8  
2
2
"
2
"
Select  
size  
Set original on platen and input  
scanning range. (Y side,  
X
side)  
Input size  
Other  
stand. Size  
Metric specifications  
Paper size  
Back  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
Register  
Close  
Select size original  
Scanning range can be set with  
X-Y direction when original is  
placed at left rear corner.  
Select size  
Input size  
Others  
#-Keys  
#-Keys  
stand. Size  
Press the [Start] key.  
Copying will start.  
9
5-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS  
16. Feeding paper as a backing sheet for OHP transparencies  
[Transparency + backing sheet mode]  
Set the originals to be copied.  
When 2 or 3 transparencies are piled on top of one another, static  
electricity can cause problems. This mode automatically places a  
backing sheet between the transparencies during copying for easy  
handling.You can also select whether or not to have the image of the  
original copied onto the backing sheet, or even make multiple copies  
from the same original.  
1
2
Set the transparency film on the multi-bypass tray.  
IMPORTANT!  
When copying onto transparencies, ALWAYS use the multi-bypass  
tray.  
IMPORTANT!  
• Fan through the transparencies before setting them.  
• Up to 25 transparencies can be set on the multi-bypass tray at one  
time.  
• Make sure that paper of the same size and orientation as the  
transparencies has been loaded into a drawer[cassette].  
B
A
Touch the “Function” tab and then the “▼ Down” key.  
The content of the next portion of the “Function” tab will be  
displayed.  
● Copying onto the backing sheet  
3
With this setting, after the original is copied onto the transparency, the  
same image will be copied onto the backing sheet as well. (The  
asterisk “*” in the illustration indicates the transparencies.)  
Touch the “OHP backing” [“OHP back”] key. The “OHP  
backing” [“OHP back”] screen will be displayed.  
4
Inch specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
1
Ready to copy.  
11x8 /2  
"
Auto  
Rotation  
Memo  
pages  
OHP  
backing  
Proof Copy  
Invert  
Orig. set  
direction  
Eco Print  
Mirror  
Up  
Modify  
Copy  
Down  
Function  
Basic  
User choice  
Program  
Metric specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
● Leaving the backing sheet blank  
With this setting, the original will be copied onto the transparency but  
the backing sheet will be left blank. (The asterisk “*” in the illustration  
indicates the transparencies.)  
Auto  
Memo  
pages  
Test copy  
Invert  
OHP back  
Rotation  
Orig. set  
Eco Print  
Mirror  
Up  
direction  
Modify  
copy  
Down  
Function  
Basic  
User choice  
Program  
5-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS  
Touch the “Copy” key or the “Blank” key, as appropriate.  
Inch specifications  
5
Paper Size  
Set  
1
Ready to copy.  
11x8 /2  
"
Register  
Back  
Close  
OHP baacking  
None  
Copy  
Insert  
OHP film, or copy to  
a
blank paper between piece of  
OHP back paper.  
a
Place the OHP film in the bypass.  
Blank  
Metric specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
Register  
Back  
Close  
OHP back  
None  
Copy  
Insert blank paper between OHP films or  
copy to OHP back paper.  
Place OHP film on bypass.  
Blank  
Press the [Start] key.  
Copying will start.  
6
5-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS  
17. Inverting black and white [Invert mode]  
With this mode, you can make copies where the black and white  
Touch the “On” key.  
Inch specifications  
5
areas of the image are inverted (or reversed).  
* If multiple inverted copies are being made, “Please wait Now  
cleaning” may be displayed.  
Paper Size  
Set  
1
Ready to copy.  
11x8 /2  
"
Register  
Back  
Close  
Invert  
Off  
On  
Copy the scanned image with reversing  
black and white parts.  
Metric specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
Register  
Back  
Close  
Invert  
Off  
On  
Copy scanned image with  
black and white parts reversed.  
Set the originals to be copied.  
1
Touch the “Function” tab. The content of the “Function” tab  
will be displayed.  
Press the [Start] key.  
Copying will start.  
2
6
Touch the “▼ Down” key. The content of the next portion of  
the “Function” tab will be displayed.  
3
Touch the “Invert” key. The “Invert” screen will be displayed.  
4
Inch specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
1
Ready to copy.  
11x8 /2  
"
Auto  
Rotation  
Memo  
pages  
OHP  
backing  
Proof Copy  
Invert  
Orig. set  
direction  
Eco Print  
Mirror  
Up  
Modify  
Copy  
Down  
Function  
Basic  
User choice  
Program  
Metric specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
Auto  
Memo  
pages  
Test copy  
Invert  
OHP back  
Rotation  
Orig. set  
Eco Print  
Mirror  
Up  
direction  
Modify  
copy  
Down  
Function  
Basic  
User choice  
Program  
5-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS  
18. Making mirror image copies [Mirror image mode]  
With this mode, you can make mirror image copies.  
Touch the “On” key.  
Inch specifications  
5
Paper Size  
Set  
1
Ready to copy.  
11x8 /2  
"
Register  
Back  
Close  
Mirror  
Off  
On  
Reverse scanned image left to right,  
mirror image.  
Metric specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
Register  
Back  
Close  
Mirror  
Set the originals to be copied.  
1
Off  
On  
Reversed scanned image left to right  
as reflection in the mirror.  
a
Touch the “Function” tab. The content of the “Function” tab  
2
will be displayed.  
Touch the “▼ Down” key. The content of the next portion of  
the “Function” tab will be displayed.  
3
Press the [Start] key.  
Copying will start.  
6
Touch the “Mirror” key. The “Mirror” screen will be displayed.  
4
Inch specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
1
Ready to copy.  
11x8 /2  
"
Auto  
Rotation  
Memo  
pages  
OHP  
backing  
Proof Copy  
Invert  
Orig. set  
direction  
Eco Print  
Mirror  
Up  
Modify  
Copy  
Down  
Function  
Basic  
User choice  
Program  
Metric specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
Auto  
Memo  
pages  
Test copy  
Invert  
OHP back  
Rotation  
Orig. set  
Eco Print  
Mirror  
Up  
direction  
Modify  
copy  
Down  
Function  
Basic  
User choice  
Program  
5-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS  
19. Making a test copy prior to large volume copying [Proof mode]  
With this mode, you can use the same settings to create a single set  
of test copies in order to verify the results prior to actually starting to  
make a large number of copies or copy sets. This way, if there is a  
problem with the copies, you can cancel print out in order to change  
the settings and eliminate a great majority of miss-copying.  
Touch the “On” key.  
Inch specifications  
5
Paper  
Set  
1
Ready to copy.  
8/2x11  
Close  
Register  
Back  
Proof Copy  
Off  
On  
When "On" is selected, copying stops  
after one set is ejected.  
This is useful for checking finishing.  
Metric specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
Test copy  
Register  
Back  
Close  
Off  
On  
If "On" is selected, copying stops after  
one set is ejected.  
Finishing result can then be checked.  
Set the originals to be copied.  
1
Touch the “Function” tab. The content of the “Function” tab  
will be displayed.  
Press the [Start] key.  
Copying will start.  
2
6
If a message appears telling you to set the next original, go  
to the next step.  
Touch the “▼ Down” key. The content of the next portion of  
the “Function” tab will be displayed.  
3
Replace the first original with the next one and press the  
[Start] key. Scanning of that next original will start.  
Touch the “Proof Copy” [“Test copy”] key. The “Proof Copy”  
[“Test copy”] screen will be displayed.  
7
8
4
Inch specifications  
Once you have finished scanning all of the originals, touch  
the “Scanning finished” key. Copying of the test copy set will  
start.  
Paper size  
Set  
1
Ready to copy.  
11x8 /2  
"
Auto  
Rotation  
Memo  
pages  
OHP  
backing  
Proof Copy  
Invert  
Orig. set  
direction  
Eco Print  
Mirror  
Up  
Modify  
Copy  
Down  
Function  
Basic  
User choice  
Program  
Metric specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
Auto  
Memo  
pages  
Test copy  
Invert  
OHP back  
Rotation  
Orig. set  
Eco Print  
Mirror  
Up  
direction  
Modify  
copy  
Down  
Function  
Basic  
User choice  
Program  
5-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS  
Once the test copy set is complete, a screen will be  
displayed in order to verify whether or not you want to make  
the initially designated number of copy sets at the present  
settings, and the copier will enter a waiting-to-copy state.  
Check the test copies.  
9
Inch specifications  
Check proof copy.  
To stop and retry, press "Cancel" key.  
To continue to print, press "Start" key.  
Orig. page  
Count/Set  
Output  
1
1
11x8 /2  
"
11x8 /2  
2 sided  
Sort  
"
100%  
APS  
1 sided  
Rear  
Cancel  
Inner tray  
Change  
Preset  
Job130  
Metric specifications  
Check test copy.  
To stop and retry  
,
press "Cancel" key.  
To continue to print, press "Start" key.  
Original  
Count  
/
set  
Output  
A4  
1-sided  
Rtop/Rear  
A4  
2-sided  
Sort  
100%  
APS  
Cancel  
Inner tray  
Change  
Preset  
JOB130  
● If there is no problem with the copies…  
Press the [Start] key and copying of the initially designated  
number of copy sets will start.  
If you want to change the number of copies to be made,  
touch the “Change Preset” key and enter the actual number  
of copies you do want to make.  
● If there is some problem with the copies…  
Touch the “Cancel” key to cancel the copy job and start the  
procedure from the beginning.  
5-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS  
20. Making more of the same copies after a copy job is finished  
[Repeat copy mode]  
With this mode, if you think you might want to make another set of the  
same copies even after the initial copy job is finished, simply turn the  
repeat copy mode ON and you can make the necessary number of  
additional copies later. In order to maintain privacy, you can make it  
necessary to enter a security code in order to use the repeat copy  
mode so that, if the entered code doesn’t match the registered  
security code, it will not be possible to use the repeat copy mode.  
Touch the “Modify Copy” key. The “Modify Copy” screen will  
be displayed.  
4
Inch specifications  
Ready to copy.  
Paper size  
Set  
1
11x8 /2  
"
Auto  
Rotation  
Memo  
pages  
OHP  
backing  
Proof Copy  
Invert  
Orig. set  
direction  
Eco Print  
Mirror  
Up  
Modify  
Copy  
Down  
Function  
Basic  
User choice  
Program  
Metric specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
Auto  
Memo  
pages  
Test copy  
Invert  
OHP back  
Rotation  
Orig. set  
Eco Print  
Mirror  
Up  
direction  
Modify  
copy  
Down  
Function  
Basic  
User choice  
Program  
NOTES  
Touch the “On” key.  
Inch specifications  
Ready to copy.  
5
• The optional Hard Disk must be installed on this copier in order to  
use this mode.  
• All data for repeat copying will be deleted when the power switch is  
turned OFF.  
• Repeat copying registration is not available for print out under  
document management or with the form overlay mode.  
• You can prohibit repeat copying as well as make repeat copying the  
default setting in the initial mode. (See “Repeat copying ON/OFF” on  
page 7-83.)  
Paper Size  
Set  
1
11x8 /2  
"
Close  
Register  
Back  
Modify Copy  
Security  
Off  
When select [On], data can be saved.  
You can recall and re-print at anytime.  
You can set the password to secure  
saved document.  
# keys  
On  
Metric specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
(1) Registering a copy job for repeat copying  
Close  
Modify copy  
Security  
Register  
Back  
Set the originals to be copied.  
1
When select [On], job can be saved.  
You can recall and re-print at anytime.  
Off  
#-Keys  
You can set  
document.  
a
password to secure saved  
On  
Touch the “Function” tab. The content of the “Function” tab  
will be displayed.  
2
If you want to register a security code, go to the next step.  
Touch the “▼ Down” key. The content of the next portion of  
the “Function” tab will be displayed.  
If you do NOT want to register a security code, go directly to  
step 7.  
3
5-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS  
Touch the “# keys” [“#-Keys”] key to highlight that key and  
then enter the security code that will enable repeat copying  
for these originals.  
(2) Printing out with the repeat copy mode  
6
Once you press the [Repeat Copy] key, the “Modify copy” list will be  
displayed so that you can verify the copy jobs that are registered for  
repeat copying. It is possible to reprint, check the contents of, and  
delete the copy jobs that are registered in this list.  
Inch specifications  
Paper Size  
Set  
1
Ready to copy.  
11x8 /2  
"
Register  
Modify Copy  
Security  
Back  
Close  
1Reprinting a registered copy job  
Press the [Repeat Copy] key. The “Modify copy” list will be  
displayed.  
Off  
When select [On], data can be saved.  
You can recall and re-print at anytime.  
You can set the password to secure  
saved document.  
# keys  
1
On  
Metric specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
Register  
Back  
Close  
Modify copy  
Security  
When select [On], job can be saved.  
You can recall and re-print at anytime.  
Off  
#-Keys  
You can set  
document.  
a
password to secure saved  
On  
NOTES  
Select the copy job that you want to reprint and touch the  
“Reprint” key.  
2
• The security code can be between 1 and 8 digits long.  
• If you forget the security code that you enter here, repeat copying  
will not be possible for these originals. Be sure to keep some sort of  
record of the security code.  
Inch specifications  
End  
Modify copy  
Job  
119  
120  
121  
122  
Input source  
Copy  
Original  
Set  
1
Registration  
10/10 22:37  
10/10 22:40  
10/10 22:45  
10/10 22:50  
Type  
7
3
Norm. copy  
Norm. copy  
Norm. copy  
Norm. copy  
Copy  
5
Copy  
10  
1
2
Copy  
6
Press the [Start] key.  
Copying will start.  
Check  
details  
Reprint  
Delete  
7
Modify Copy  
10/10 22:50  
If a message appears telling you to set the next original, go  
to the next step.  
Metric specifications  
End  
Modify copy  
Job  
119  
120  
121  
122  
Input source  
Copy  
Original  
Set  
1
Type  
Registration  
10/10 22:37  
10/10 22:40  
10/10 22:45  
10/10 22:50  
Norm. copy  
7
3
Replace the first original with the next one and press the  
[Start] key. Scanning of that next original will start.  
Copy  
5
Norm. copy  
Norm. copy  
Norm. copy  
8
Copy  
10  
1
2
Copy  
6
Check  
details  
Reprint  
Delete  
Once you have finished scanning all of the originals, touch  
the “Scanning finished” key. Copying will start.  
Modify copy  
10/10 22:50  
9
If you designated a security code when you registered the  
copy job for repeat copying, the code input screen will be  
displayed. In this case, go to the next step.  
If you did NOT designate a security code when you  
registered the copy job for repeat copying, the screen to  
select the number of copies or copy sets to be made will be  
displayed. In this case, go directly to step 4.  
5-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS  
Use the keypad to enter the appropriate security code and  
the touch the “Enter” key. If the entered code matches the  
registered one, the screen to select the number of copies or  
copy sets to be made will be displayed.  
2Checking the contents of registered copy jobs  
3
Press the [Repeat Copy] key. The “Modify copy” list will be  
1
displayed.  
Inch specifications  
Stop  
Enter the re-print code.  
(Enter by #key)  
Clear  
Enter  
Metric specifications  
Stop  
Enter the re-print code.  
Select the copy job that you want to check the content of and  
touch the “Check detail” key.  
2
(Enter #-key)  
Clear  
Inch specifications  
Enter  
End  
Modify copy  
Job  
119  
120  
121  
122  
Input source  
Copy  
Original  
Set  
1
Registration  
10/10 22:37  
10/10 22:40  
10/10 22:45  
10/10 22:50  
Type  
7
3
Norm. copy  
Norm. copy  
Norm. copy  
Norm. copy  
Copy  
5
Copy  
10  
1
2
NOTES  
Copy  
6
Check  
details  
Reprint  
Delete  
• To reenter a mistaken security code, touch the “Clear” key.  
• If you touch the “Stop” key, the touch panel will return to the screen  
in step 2.  
Modify Copy  
10/10 22:50  
Metric specifications  
End  
Modify copy  
Job  
119  
120  
121  
122  
Input source  
Copy  
Original  
Set  
1
Type  
Registration  
10/10 22:37  
10/10 22:40  
10/10 22:45  
10/10 22:50  
Touch the “+” key or the “-” key to set the number of copies or  
copy sets to be made.  
Norm. copy  
7
3
4
Copy  
5
Norm. copy  
Norm. copy  
Norm. copy  
Copy  
10  
1
2
Copy  
6
Inch specifications  
Check  
details  
Reprint  
Delete  
Reprint  
Stop  
Modify copy  
10/10 22:50  
If you designated a security code when you registered the  
copy job for repeat copying, the code input screen will be  
displayed. In this case, go to the next step.  
Set  
Printing  
If you did NOT designate a security code when you  
registered the copy job for repeat copying, the “Check  
details / Reprint” screen will be displayed. In this case,  
go directly to step 4.  
Metric specifications  
Reprint  
Stop  
Set  
Printing  
Touch the “Printing” key.  
Print out will start.  
5
5-44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS  
3Deleting a registered copy jobs  
Use the keypad to enter the appropriate security code and  
the touch the “Enter” key. If the entered code matches the  
registered one, the “Check details / Reprint” screen will be  
displayed.  
3
Press the [Repeat Copy] key. The “Modify copy” list will be  
1
displayed.  
Inch specifications  
Stop  
Enter the re-print code.  
(Enter by #key)  
Clear  
Enter  
Metric specifications  
Stop  
Enter the re-print code.  
Select the copy job that you want to delete and touch the  
“Delete” key. A verification screen will be displayed.  
2
(Enter #-key)  
Clear  
Inch specifications  
Enter  
End  
Modify copy  
Job  
119  
120  
121  
122  
Input source  
Copy  
Original  
Set  
1
Registration  
10/10 22:37  
10/10 22:40  
10/10 22:45  
10/10 22:50  
Type  
7
3
Norm. copy  
Norm. copy  
Norm. copy  
Norm. copy  
Check the contents of the selected job. You can also check  
the content of the first page of the copy job by touching the  
“Print from 1st” [“Head print”] key.  
Copy  
5
4
Copy  
10  
1
2
Copy  
6
Check  
details  
Reprint  
Delete  
Inch specifications  
Modify Copy  
10/10 22:50  
Check details / Reprint  
Item  
Close  
Metric specifications  
Details  
Orig. page  
Set  
Print size  
3
5
Print  
from 1st  
End  
Modify copy  
1
11 x 8  
/2"  
copy  
10/10 22:40  
Input source  
Registration date  
Job  
119  
120  
121  
122  
Input source  
Copy  
Original  
Set  
1
Type  
Registration  
10/10 22:37  
10/10 22:40  
10/10 22:45  
10/10 22:50  
Norm. copy  
7
3
Copy  
5
Norm. copy  
Norm. copy  
Norm. copy  
Copy  
10  
1
2
Job120  
Copy  
6
Check  
details  
Reprint  
Delete  
Metric specifications  
Modify copy  
10/10 22:50  
Check details / Reprint  
Item  
Close  
Details  
Original  
Set  
Print size  
Input source  
Registration date  
3
5
Head  
print  
A4  
Copy  
10/10 22:40  
Job120  
Once you have finished checking the content of the copy job,  
touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 2.  
5
If you want to check the contents of another registered copy  
job, repeat steps 2 through 5.  
6
7
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
contents of the “Basic” tab.  
5-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS  
Touch the “Yes” key or the “No” key, as appropriate.  
3
Inch specifications  
Stop  
117  
Job # :  
Delete this job. Do you really want to delete?  
Yes  
No  
Metric specifications  
Stop  
117  
Job # :  
Delete this job. Do you really want to delete?  
Yes  
No  
If you selected “Yes”, the selected copy job will be canceled  
and the touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.  
If you selected “No”, the touch panel will return to the screen  
in step 2 without canceling the selected job.  
If you want to cancel another registered copy job, repeat  
steps 2 through 3.  
4
5
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
contents of the “Basic” tab.  
5-46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS  
21. Copying a large volume of originals in one operation  
[Batch scanning mode]  
With this mode, you can scan multiple sets of originals and then have  
them all copied at the same time. Scan one set of originals of the  
same type and then register that as a single step in the copy job, and  
you can copy an extremely large volume of originals in one batch.  
Touch the “On” key.  
4
Inch specifications  
Paper Size  
Set  
Place originals then press Start key.  
1
11x8 /2  
"
Register  
Back  
Close  
Continuous scanning  
Copy scanned images off.  
Platen as one job or scanned originals  
using document processor.  
Off  
On  
C
A B C  
B
Metric specifications  
A
Paper size  
Set  
Set original.  
Press Start key.  
Register  
Back  
Close  
Multiple scanning  
Originals scanned through the platen  
and Document Processor can be  
processed as one copy job.  
Off  
On  
Set the originals to be copied.  
1
2
Touch the “Function” tab. The content of the “Function” tab  
will be displayed.  
Press the [Start] key.  
Scanning of the originals will start.  
5
Touch the “Batch scanning” [“Large # of originals”] key.  
The “Continuous scanning” [“Multiple scanning”] screen will  
be displayed.  
3
Inch specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
1
Ready to copy.  
11x8 /2  
"
Select  
paper  
2 sided/  
Separation  
Select  
orig. size  
Combine  
Exposure  
mode  
Reduce  
/Enlarge  
Auto  
Selection  
Batch  
scanning  
Up  
Orig.image  
quality  
Margin/  
Centering  
Forms  
Overlay  
Page #  
Down  
Cover  
Mode  
Sort/  
Finished  
Border  
Erase  
Booklet  
Function  
Basic  
User choice  
Program  
Replace the first originals with the next set and press the  
[Start] key. Scanning of those next originals (the next step in  
the copy job) will start.  
Metric specifications  
6
7
Paper size  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
Select  
paper  
2-sided/  
Split  
Select  
size orig.  
Merge copy  
Exposure  
mode  
Reduce/  
Enlarge  
Auto  
selection  
Large # of  
originals  
Once you have finished scanning all of the originals, touch  
the “Scanning finished” key. Copying will start.  
Up  
Image  
quality  
Margin/  
Imag. shift  
Page  
numbering  
Form  
overlay  
Down  
Sort/  
Finished  
Erase  
Mode  
Cover  
Mode  
Booklet  
Function  
Basic  
User choice  
Program  
5-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS  
22. Saving on toner use [Eco print mode]  
With this mode, you can reduce the amount of toner that is used to  
make the copies.  
Use this mode with, for example making test copies, when you do not  
especially need to print out high quality copies.You can also make  
the eco print mode the default setting in the initial mode. (See “Eco  
print mode ON/OFF” on page 7-66.)  
Touch the “Eco Print” key. The “Eco Print” screen will be  
displayed.  
4
Inch specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
1
Ready to copy.  
11x8 /2  
"
Auto  
Rotation  
Memo  
pages  
OHP  
backing  
Proof Copy  
Invert  
* Images will be printed out relatively lighter than normal.  
Orig. set  
direction  
Eco Print  
Mirror  
Up  
Modify  
Copy  
Down  
With the eco print  
mode turned ON  
With the eco print  
mode turned OFF  
Function  
Basic  
User choice  
Program  
Metric specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
Auto  
Memo  
pages  
Test copy  
Invert  
OHP back  
Rotation  
Orig. set  
Eco Print  
Mirror  
Up  
direction  
Modify  
copy  
Down  
Function  
Basic  
User choice  
Program  
Set the originals to be copied.  
1
2
Touch the “Off” key or the “On” key, as appropriate.  
5
Touch the “Function” tab. The content of the “Function” tab  
will be displayed.  
Inch specifications  
Paper Size  
Set  
1
Ready to copy.  
11 x 8  
/2"  
Register  
Back  
Close  
Eco Print  
Touch the “▼ Down” key. The content of the next portion of  
the “Function” tab will be displayed.  
Eco Print  
It is possible to reduce  
toner consumption.  
3
Image is light.  
Eco print is saving toner consumption,  
and it is economically.  
Off  
On  
Metric specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
Eco Print  
Register  
Back  
Close  
Eco Print  
Toner consumption  
can be reduced.  
Image resolution reduced.  
Eco Print enables toner consumption  
reduction.  
Off  
On  
Press the [Start] key.  
Copying will start.  
6
5-48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS  
23. Original set direction  
It is necessary to specify the direction in which the originals were set  
whenever you use the 2-sided copy modes, the page separation/split  
copy modes, the margin mode, the centering/image shift mode, the  
memo mode, the border erase modes, the combine/merge copy  
modes, the print page numbers mode, the booklet/stitching mode, the  
auto selection/filing mode (optional), the staple mode (optional) and  
the punch mode (optional).You can also use the following procedure  
to perform the setting as well.  
Touch the “Rear” [“Back Edge”] key or the “Left top corner”  
key, as appropriate.  
4
Inch specifications  
Paper Size  
11 x 8  
Set  
1
Ready to copy.  
/2"  
Orig. set direction  
Register  
Back  
Check direction  
Close  
Check direction of  
original top side.  
"Check direction original" can be shown  
at right side of display.  
Follow the steps. If setting mode is  
wrong, incorrect copy will result.  
Touch the “Function” tab. The content of the “Function” tab  
Left top  
corner  
Rear  
1
will be displayed.  
Metric specifications  
Touch the “▼ Down” key. The content of the next portion of  
the “Function” tab will be displayed.  
Paper size  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
2
Register  
Back  
Close  
Orig. set direction  
Check direction  
Check direction of  
original.  
Touch the “Orig.set direction” key. The “Orig.set direction”  
screen will be displayed.  
3
"Check direction original" can be shown  
at right side of display.  
Follow the steps. If setting mode is  
wrong, incorrect copy will result.  
Inch specifications  
Left top  
corner  
Back Edge  
Paper size  
Set  
1
Ready to copy.  
11x8 /2  
"
Auto  
Rotation  
Memo  
pages  
OHP  
backing  
Proof Copy  
Invert  
Orig. set  
direction  
Eco Print  
Mirror  
Up  
Modify  
Copy  
Down  
Function  
Basic  
User choice  
Program  
Metric specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
Auto  
Memo  
pages  
Test copy  
Invert  
OHP back  
Rotation  
Orig. set  
Eco Print  
Mirror  
Up  
direction  
Modify  
copy  
Down  
Function  
Basic  
User choice  
Program  
5-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS  
24. Memorizing frequently used settings [Program function]  
Up to eight combinations of copy modes and other functions displayed  
on the operation panel can be registered as a single program using  
this function.You can also register a name for each registered  
program.  
Use the displayed keyboard to enter the desired name and  
then touch the “End” key.  
5
Inch specifications  
Stop  
End  
Name to display  
Catalog A  
Limit:16 letters including #  
AllDel.  
Del. prev  
(1) Registering a program  
1
2
z
3
x
4
c
5
v
6
b
7
n
8
9
0
-
/
=
`
q
w
e
r
t
y
u
i
o
p
[
]
\
a
s
d
f
g
h
j
k
l
;
'
Set the desired copy modes, etc., to be registered.  
1
m
,
.
Capital  
Letter  
Num./Sym.  
Space  
Touch the “Program” tab. The content of the “Program” tab  
will be displayed.  
2
Metric specifications  
Stop  
End  
Name to display  
Catalog A  
Touch the “Register” key.  
Limit: 16 letters inc. # key  
AllDel.  
3
Del. prev  
Inch specifications  
1
2
3
x
4
c
5
v
6
b
7
n
8
9
0
-
/
=
`
Paper Size  
11 x 8  
Set  
1
Ready to copy.  
/2"  
q
w
e
r
t
y
u
i
o
p
[
]
\
`
a
s
d
f
g
h
j
k
l
;
'
Reg./delete  
Recall  
z
m
,
.
Register  
Capital  
Letter  
Symbol 1  
Symbol 2  
Space  
Delete  
Change  
name  
Program  
Basic  
User choice  
Function  
NOTE  
Metric specifications  
Refer to “11. Entering characters” on page 7-104 for information on  
entering characters.  
Paper size  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
Recall  
Reg./delete  
Register  
Delete  
Touch the “Yes” key or the “No” key, as appropriate.  
Change  
name  
6
If you selected “Yes”, the selected program will be registered  
and the touch panel will return to the screen in step 3.  
Copying is now possible using the settings that were  
registered under that program.  
Basic  
User choice  
Function  
Program  
Inch specifications  
Touch any key that is marked “No registration” and that  
4
corresponds to the program key (1 – 8) under which you  
want to register the settings. The screen to register a name  
for that program will be displayed.  
Stop  
Register program.  
Program # : 1  
Inch specifications  
Program name :Catalog A  
The set program is registered. Is it correct?  
End  
Register present setting  
Select program number.  
Yes  
No  
No registration  
No registration  
No registration  
No registration  
No registration  
No registration  
No registration  
No registration  
Metric specifications  
Stop  
Register program.  
Program # : 1  
Program name : Catalog  
Metric specifications  
A
The set program is registered. Is it correct?  
End  
Register present setting  
Select program number.  
Yes  
No  
No registration  
No registration  
No registration  
No registration  
No registration  
No registration  
No registration  
No registration  
5-50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS  
Touch the program key (1 – 8) for which you want to change  
the registered name.  
The screen to register a name for that program will be  
displayed.  
(2) Using programmed settings to make copies  
3
Touch the “Program” tab. The content of the “Program” tab  
1
will be displayed.  
Inch specifications  
Touch the program key under which the settings that you  
want to use are registered.  
End  
Registration name change  
2
Select the number for changing name.  
Inch specifications  
File A  
Catalog A  
Catalog B  
Catalog C  
Catalog D  
Paper Size  
11 x 8  
Set  
File B  
1
Ready to copy.  
/
2"  
No registration  
Recall  
Catalog A  
Catalog B  
Reg./delete  
List A  
File A  
File B  
Register  
Delete  
Catalog C  
Catalog D  
Metric specifications  
Change  
name  
List A  
End  
Registration name change  
Basic  
User choice  
Function  
Program  
Select the number for changing name.  
Metric specifications  
Catalog A  
Catalog B  
Catalog C  
Catalog D  
File A  
Paper size  
Set  
File B  
Ready to copy.  
No registration  
Recall  
Reg./delete  
Register  
List A  
File A  
File B  
Catalog A  
Catalog B  
Delete  
Catalog C  
Catalog D  
Change  
name  
List A  
Once you have deleted the old name and entered the new  
one, press the “End” key.  
Basic  
User choice  
Function  
Program  
4
Inch specifications  
Set the originals to be copied and press the [Start] key.  
Copying will start using the settings that were registered  
under that program.  
Stop  
End  
Name to display  
Catalog A  
3
Limit:16 letters including #  
AllDel.  
Del. prev  
1
2
z
3
x
4
c
5
v
6
b
7
n
8
9
0
-
/
=
`
q
w
e
r
t
y
u
i
o
p
[
]
\
a
s
d
f
g
h
j
k
l
;
'
m
,
.
(3) Changing a registered program name  
Capital  
Letter  
Num./Sym.  
Space  
Touch the “Program” tab. The content of the “Program” tab  
will be displayed.  
Metric specifications  
1
Stop  
End  
Name to display  
Catalog A  
Limit: 16 letters inc. # key  
AllDel.  
Touch the “Change name” key.  
Del. prev  
2
Inch specifications  
1
2
3
x
4
c
5
v
6
b
7
n
8
9
0
-
/
=
`
q
w
e
r
t
y
u
i
o
p
[
]
\
`
Paper Size  
11 x 8  
Set  
1
Ready to copy.  
/
2"  
a
s
d
f
g
h
j
k
l
;
'
z
m
,
.
Recall  
Catalog A  
Catalog B  
Reg./delete  
Capital  
Letter  
Symbol 1  
Symbol 2  
Space  
File A  
File B  
Register  
Delete  
Catalog C  
Catalog D  
Change  
name  
List A  
Basic  
User choice  
Function  
Program  
NOTE  
Refer to “11. Entering characters” on page 7-104 for information on  
entering characters.  
Metric specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
Recall  
Reg./delete  
Register  
File A  
File B  
Catalog A  
Catalog B  
Delete  
Once “The set program is registered. Is it correct?” is  
displayed, check the entered name and, if it is correct, touch  
the “Yes” key.  
Catalog C  
Catalog D  
5
Change  
name  
List A  
Basic  
User choice  
Function  
Program  
The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.  
5-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS  
Touch the “Yes” key or the “No” key, as appropriate.  
(4) Deleting a registered program  
4
Inch specifications  
Touch the “Program” tab. The content of the “Program” tab  
will be displayed.  
Stop  
Delete program.  
1
Program  
#
Program name  
Catalog  
A
Touch the “Delete” key.  
This program will be deleted. Are you sure?  
2
Inch specifications  
Yes  
No  
Paper Size  
11 x 8  
Set  
1
Ready to copy.  
/2"  
Recall  
Catalog A  
Catalog B  
Reg./delete  
Metric specifications  
File A  
File B  
Register  
Delete program.  
Stop  
Delete  
Catalog C  
Catalog D  
Change  
name  
List A  
Program  
#
Basic  
User choice  
Function  
Program  
Program name  
Catalog  
A
This program will be deleted. Are you sure?  
Metric specifications  
YES  
NO  
Paper size  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
Recall  
Reg./delete  
Register  
If you selected “Yes”, the selected program will be deleted and the  
touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.  
File A  
File B  
Catalog A  
Catalog B  
Delete  
If you selected “No”, the touch panel will return to the screen in step 3  
without deleting the selected program.  
Catalog C  
Catalog D  
Change  
name  
List A  
Basic  
User choice  
Function  
Program  
Touch the program key (1 – 8) that corresponds to the  
program that you want to delete.  
3
lnch specifications  
End  
Delete registration  
Select the number of program to delete.  
File A  
Catalog A  
Catalog B  
File B  
Catalog C  
Catalog D  
No registration  
List A  
Metric specifications  
End  
Delete registration  
Select the number of program to delete.  
File A  
File B  
Catalog A  
Catalog B  
Catalog C  
Catalog D  
No registration  
List A  
5-52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS  
25. Registration keys  
You can register up to 3 functions and/or modes, from among those  
displayed in the “Function” tab, under the registration keys. The  
functions and modes in the “Basic” tab and the “User choice” tab can  
be registered under registration keys as well.  
Touch the “4 in 1” key and then the “Register” key.  
3
Inch specifications  
Paper size  
11x8 /2  
50%  
Set  
1
Ready to copy.  
"
Register  
Back  
Check direction  
Close  
Combine  
(1) Registering a function or mode under a function  
key  
Layout  
Border line  
Check direction of  
original top side.  
None  
None  
Solid  
Perform the following procedure when you want to register a function  
or mode under a registration key.  
Dotted  
Borders  
Left top  
corner  
Rear  
To register a function or mode under a registration key, refer to the  
following sample procedure (which shows how to register the “4 in 1”  
combine/merge copy mode under a registration key).  
Metric specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
Register  
Back  
Close  
Merge copy  
Check direction  
Layout  
Border line  
Check direction of  
original.  
IMPORTANT!  
None  
None  
Solid  
In order to register functions and/or modes under registration keys,  
you must first turn the setting ON under “Registration keys ON/OFF”  
on page 7-84.  
2-in-1  
4-in-1  
Dotted  
Cropmark  
Left top  
corner  
Back Edge  
In the “Register” screen, touch the “Register” key once again.  
The screen to register functions and/or modes under  
registration keys will be displayed.  
4
Touch the “Function” tab. The content of the “Function” tab  
will be displayed.  
1
Inch specifications  
Touch the “Combine” [“Merge copy”] key. The “Combine”  
[“Merge copy”] screen will be displayed.  
2
Select item.  
Register  
End  
lnch specifications  
Register  
Paper size  
Set  
1
Ready to copy.  
11x8 /2  
"
Delete  
Select  
paper  
2 sided/  
Separation  
Select  
orig. size  
Combine  
Exposure  
mode  
Reduce  
/Enlarge  
Auto  
Selection  
Batch  
scanning  
Up  
Orig.image  
quality  
Margin/  
Centering  
Forms  
Overlay  
Page #  
Down  
Metric specifications  
Cover  
Mode  
Sort/  
Finished  
Border  
Erase  
Booklet  
Function  
Basic  
User choice  
Program  
Select item.  
Register  
End  
Metric specifications  
Register  
Delete  
Paper size  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
Select  
paper  
2-sided/  
Split  
Select  
size orig.  
Merge copy  
Exposure  
mode  
Reduce/  
Enlarge  
Auto  
selection  
Large # of  
originals  
Up  
Image  
quality  
Margin/  
Imag. shift  
Page  
numbering  
Form  
overlay  
Down  
Sort/  
Finished  
Erase  
Mode  
Cover  
Mode  
Booklet  
Function  
Basic  
User choice  
Program  
5-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS  
Touch the registration key under which you want to register  
the function. “Register this selecting mode. OK?” will be  
displayed.  
NOTE  
5
If, in the screen to register functions and/or modes under registration  
keys, you select a previously registered key, the following screen will  
be displayed.  
Inch specifications  
Register present setting  
End  
Inch specifications  
Select the number of program to registered.  
Register this function.  
Stop  
No  
registrat.  
This number is already registered.  
No  
registrat.  
No  
registrat.  
Register No.  
1
Register this selecting mode. OK?  
Yes No  
Metric specifications  
Register present setting  
End  
Metric specifications  
Select the number of program to registered.  
Register this function.  
Stop  
No  
registrat.  
This number is already registered  
No  
registrat.  
No  
registrat.  
Register No.  
1
Register this selecting mode. OK?  
YES  
NO  
Touch the “Yes” key. The “Combine” [“Merge copy”] screen  
will be displayed again.  
6
If you selected “Yes”, the selected function will be registered under the  
registration key.  
If you selected “No”, the touch panel will return to the screen in step 5  
without registering the selected function.  
Inch specifications  
Stop  
Register this function.  
Register No.  
1
Register this selecting mode. OK?  
Touch the “Close” key. The “Combine” [“Merge copy”] key will  
now appear on the right side of the touch panel as a  
registration key.  
Yes  
No  
7
Metric specifications  
Inch specifications  
Register this function.  
Stop  
Paper size  
Set  
1
Ready to copy.  
8 /2x11"  
Select  
paper  
2 sided/  
Separation  
Select  
orig. size  
Combine  
Combine  
Exposure  
mode  
Reduce  
/Enlarge  
Auto  
Selection  
Batch  
scanning  
Register No.  
1
Up  
Register this selecting mode. OK?  
Orig.image  
quality  
Margin/  
Centering  
Forms  
Overlay  
Page #  
Down  
Sort/  
Finished  
Border  
Erase  
Cover  
Mode  
YES  
NO  
Booklet  
Function  
Basic  
User choice  
Program  
Metric specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
Select  
paper  
2-sided/  
Split  
Select  
size original  
Merge copy  
Merge copy  
Exposure  
mode  
Reduce/  
Enlarge  
Auto  
selection  
Large # of  
originals  
Up  
Image  
quality orig.  
Margin/  
Imag. shift  
Page  
numbering  
Form  
overlay  
Down  
Sort/  
Finished  
Erase  
Mode  
Cover  
Mode  
Booklet  
Function  
Basic  
User choice  
Program  
NOTE  
The functions and modes in the “Basic” tab and the “User choice” tab  
can be registered under registration keys as well. A “Register” key will  
be displayed in the screen for those function and modes which can be  
registered under the registration keys.  
5-54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS  
In the “Register” screen, touch the “Delete” key once again.  
The screen to delete registration keys will be displayed.  
(2) Deleting a registration key  
3
Perform the following procedure when you want to delete a  
registration key.  
Inch specifications  
Select item.  
Touch the registration (to the right of the “Basic” tab) that you  
want to delete. (Example: “Combine” [“Merge copy”])  
1
Register  
End  
Register  
lnch specifications  
Delete  
Set  
Paper Size  
11x81/2  
Ready to copy.  
"
Combine  
11x81  
Plain  
/2"  
Orig.image  
quality  
81  
/2x11"  
Sort:Off  
AMS  
APS  
Bypass  
Color  
Reduce  
/Enlarge  
Metric specifications  
11x81  
Plain  
/
2
"
"
Auto  
Exposure  
Sort:On  
Plain  
11x81  
/
2
Sort/  
Finished  
Exposure  
mode  
Reduce  
/Enlarge  
Select item.  
Recycled  
Basic  
User choice  
Function  
Program  
Register  
End  
Register  
Delete  
Metric specifications  
Set  
Paper Size  
Ready to copy.  
Merge copy  
Plain  
Image  
quality  
Sort:Off  
Sort:On  
AMS  
APS  
Colour  
Reduce/  
Enlarge  
Auto  
Exposure  
Bypass  
Plain  
Plain  
Touch the registration key (1 – 3) that corresponds to the  
program that you want to delete. “Are you sure you want to  
delete?” will be displayed.  
Sort/  
Finished  
Exposure  
mode  
Reduce/  
Enlarge  
4
Recycled  
Basic  
User choice  
Function  
Program  
Inch specifications  
In the resulting screen for that function or mode (example:  
the “Combine” [“Merge copy”] screen), touch the “Register”  
key. The “Register” screen will be displayed.  
Delete registration  
End  
2
Select the number of program to delete.  
Combine  
Orig. Image  
quality  
lnch specifications  
Reduce  
/Enlarge  
Paper size  
11x8 /2  
50%  
Set  
1
Ready to copy.  
"
Register  
Back  
Check direction  
Close  
Combine  
Layout  
Border line  
Check direction of  
original top side.  
None  
Metric specifications  
None  
Solid  
Delete registration  
End  
Dotted  
Borders  
Select the number of program to delete.  
Left top  
corner  
Rear  
Merge copy  
Image  
quality  
Metric specifications  
Reduce/  
Enlarge  
Paper size  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
Register  
Back  
Close  
Merge copy  
Check direction  
Layout  
Border line  
Check direction of  
original.  
None  
None  
Solid  
2-in-1  
4-in-1  
Dotted  
Cropmark  
Left top  
corner  
Back Edge  
5-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS  
Touch the “Yes” key. The “Combine” [“Merge copy”] screen  
will be displayed again.  
5
Inch specifications  
Delete registration.  
Stop  
Register No.  
1
Are you sure you want to delete?  
Yes  
No  
Metric specifications  
Delete registration.  
Stop  
Register No.  
1
Are you sure you want to delete?  
YES  
NO  
Touch the “Close” key. The “Combine” [“Merge copy”] key will  
be deleted from on the right side of the touch panel.  
6
Inch specifications  
Set  
Paper Size  
11x81/2  
Ready to copy.  
"
11x81  
Plain  
/2"  
Orig.image  
quality  
81  
/2x11"  
Sort:Off  
AMS  
APS  
Bypass  
Color  
Reduce  
/Enlarge  
11x81  
Plain  
11x81  
/
/
2
"
"
Auto  
Exposure  
Sort:On  
Plain  
2
Sort/  
Finished  
Exposure  
mode  
Reduce  
/Enlarge  
Recycled  
Basic  
User choice  
Function  
Program  
Metric specifications  
Set  
Paper Size  
Ready to copy.  
Plain  
Image  
quality  
Sort:Off  
Sort:On  
AMS  
APS  
Colour  
Reduce/  
Enlarge  
Auto  
Exposure  
Bypass  
Plain  
Plain  
Sort/  
Finished  
Exposure  
mode  
Reduce/  
Enlarge  
Recycled  
Basic  
User choice  
Function  
Program  
5-56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS  
26. Easily add covers and insert sheets between various sets of originals in  
one operation [Job build mode]  
The job build function enables you to scan different sets of originals  
into memory in separate steps and then copy them all at one time.  
NOTE  
This procedure will assume that the color paper to be used as the  
front cover and the middle insert (originals “A” and “C”), as well as for  
the back cover, will be set on the multi-bypass, and that there is plain  
copy paper loaded in drawer[cassette] No.1.  
Each set of scanned originals is then seen as one step in the copy  
process and you can select different copy modes for each step  
(enlarge/reduce, border erase, original type [2-sided originals, 1-sided  
originals or open-faced book originals]).You can choose to have a  
blank sheet of paper fed in between each set of originals, as well as  
have front and rear covers included for the full set, AND do this all  
during 2-sided copying!  
● Step 1: Accessing the “Job build” screen  
Press the [Job build] key.  
The “Job build” screen will be displayed.  
1
C-2  
B-3  
A-1  
B-1  
A-3  
A-1  
B-1  
C-1  
● Making the settings that apply to all steps  
First, the settings for the 2-sided copy modes and the repeat copy  
mode must be made.  
(1) Using the job build mode  
The following procedure shows one way of using the job build mode  
and explains how to perform that operation under the situation  
indicated in the examples below.  
NOTES  
[Example]  
<Finished copies>  
(The asterisk “*” in the illustration indicates the blank sheets.)  
• The repeat copy mode is used to enable you to make an additional  
number of copy sets later.  
• It is also possible to select other settings and functions, as desired,  
besides those given in the example procedure. (See “(2) Selecting  
the settings and functions” on page 5-62.)  
2-1  
1-1 2  
Touch the “1 sided/2 sided” key.  
The “1 sided/2 sided” screen will be displayed.  
2
Inch specifications  
1
Set  
Ready to Job build.  
Place originals then press Start key.  
Job Build - Step1  
End  
1
1 sided  
Original  
type  
AMS  
1 sided copy  
11x8/  
Select  
paper  
2
”
Insert  
page  
1 sided/  
2 sided  
1 sided copy-Left  
Finished page #:0  
<Originals>  
Back Edge  
Offset  
Reduce  
/Enlarge  
Orig. set  
direction  
Finished  
Basic  
Quality  
Edit  
A
B
C
D
Metric specifications  
Set  
Ready to Job build.  
1-2  
1-1  
2-2  
2-1  
Set original. Press Start key.  
Job Build-Step 1  
End  
1
2
1-sided  
1-sided Copy  
Insert  
blank page  
Select  
paper  
Original  
type  
1-sided/  
2-sided  
1-sided Copy-Left  
Finished page #: 0  
Back Edge  
Group  
AMS  
Reduce/  
Enlarge  
Orig. set  
direction  
Finished  
Basic  
Quality  
Edit  
5-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS  
Touch the “2 sided copy” key and then touch the “Open from  
left” [“Left binding”] key. Finally, touch the “Close” key. The  
touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.  
Touch the “On” key.  
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 4.  
3
5
Inch specifications  
Inch specifications  
Set  
Set  
Ready to Job build.  
Ready to Job build.  
Place originals then press Start key.  
Place originals then press Start key.  
Back  
Close  
Back  
Close  
1 sided/ 2 sided copy  
Modify Copy  
Finished  
Check direction  
Check direction of  
original top side.  
1 sided  
copy  
Open from  
left  
When select [On], data can be saved.  
You can recall and re-print at anytime.  
You can set the password to secure  
saved document.  
Off  
On  
2 sided  
copy  
Open from  
right  
Open from  
top  
Left top  
corner  
Rear  
Metric specifications  
Metric specifications  
Set  
Set  
Ready to Job build.  
Ready to Job build.  
Set original. Press Start key.  
Set original. Press Start key.  
Back  
Close  
Back  
Close  
1-sided / 2-sided Copy  
Finished  
Modify copy  
Check direction  
Check direction of  
original.  
1-sided  
Copy  
Left  
binding  
Off  
On  
When select [On], job can be saved.  
When the mode is set [On], it can  
You can recall and re-print at anytime.  
2-sided  
Copy  
Right  
binding  
save a job data and reprint it anytime.  
You can set a password to secure saved  
And you can set that other user are not  
document.  
Top  
binding  
Left top  
corner  
able to reprint.  
Back Edge  
Touch the “Edit” key. Then, in the resulting screen, touch the  
“Modify Copy” key. The “Modify Copy” screen will be  
displayed.  
● Making the settings for the first original (“A” in the illustration on  
page 5-57.)  
The multi-bypass is to be selected for color paper feed under the  
“Select paper” screen.  
4
Inch specifications  
Set  
Touch the “Select paper” key. The “Select paper” screen will  
be displayed.  
Ready to Job build.  
Place originals then press Start key.  
6
Job Build - Step1  
End  
Inch specifications  
Off  
Auto  
Select  
orig.size  
Off  
Modify  
Copy  
Insert page  
Border  
Erase  
Set  
2 sided copy-Left  
Finished page # : 0  
Print from  
Rear page  
Ready to Job build.  
None  
None  
Place originals then press Start key.  
Margin/  
Centering  
Page #  
Quality  
Job Build - Step1  
End  
Basic  
Edit  
1
1-sided  
Original  
type  
AMS  
2 sided copy  
11x8/  
Select  
paper  
2
”
Insert  
page  
1 sided/  
2 sided  
2 sided copy-Left  
Finished page #:0  
Print from  
Rear page  
Back Edge  
Offset  
Metric specifications  
Reduce  
/Enlarge  
Orig. set  
direction  
Finished  
Basic  
Set  
Ready to Job build.  
Quality  
Edit  
Set original. Press Start key.  
Job Build - Step1  
End  
Metric specifications  
Off  
Erase  
Mode  
None  
Auto  
Select  
size orig.  
None  
Insert  
blank page  
Modify  
copy  
Set  
2-sided Copy-Left  
Finished page #: 0  
Print from  
rear page  
Ready to Job build.  
None  
Set original. Press Start key.  
Margin/  
Imag.shift  
Page  
numbering  
Job Build-Step 1  
End  
Basic  
Quality  
Edit  
1-sided  
2-sided Copy  
Insert  
blank page  
Select  
paper  
Original  
type  
1-sided/  
2-sided  
2-sided Copy-Left  
Finished page #: 0  
Print from  
rear page  
Back Edge  
Group  
AMS  
Reduce/  
Enlarge  
Orig. set  
direction  
Finished  
Basic  
Quality  
Edit  
5-58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS  
Touch the “Bypass” key.  
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 6.  
● Step 3: Making the settings for the second originals (“B” in the  
illustration on page 5-57.)  
Drawer[Cassette] No.1 is to be selected for plain paper feed under the  
“Select paper” screen.  
7
Inch specifications  
Set  
Touch the “Select paper” key. The “Select paper” screen will  
be displayed.  
Ready to Job build.  
10  
Place originals then press Start key.  
Back  
Close  
Select paper  
Inch specifications  
1
11x8 /  
2
”
”
”
Plain  
Scan next original(s).  
Place the originals and press start key.  
Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy.  
Set  
1
11x8 /  
2
Plain  
1
11x8 /  
2
Bypass  
Plain  
Job Build - Step3  
Cancel  
Color  
1
8 /2x14”  
Plain  
1
1 sided  
Original  
type  
AMS  
2 sided copy  
11x8/  
2”  
Insert  
page  
Select  
paper  
1 sided/  
2 sided  
2 sided copy-Left  
Finished page #:2  
Next copy page: Front  
Print from  
Rear page  
Back Edge  
Offset  
Metric specifications  
Reduce  
/Enlarge  
Orig. set  
direction  
Finished  
Basic  
Scanning  
finished  
Set  
Ready to Job build.  
Quality  
Edit  
Set original. Press Start key.  
Select paper  
Back  
Close  
Metric specifications  
Plain  
Plain  
Scan next original(s).  
Place the originals and press start key.  
Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy.  
Set  
Bypass  
Plain  
Job Build - Step3  
Cancel  
Colour  
Plain  
1-sided  
Original  
type  
AMS  
2-sided Copy  
Insert  
blank page  
Select  
paper  
1-sided/  
2-sided  
2-sided Copy-Left  
Finished page #: 2  
Next copy page: Front  
Print from  
rear page  
Back Edge  
Group  
Reduce/  
Enlarge  
Orig. set  
direction  
Finished  
Basic  
Scanning  
finished  
Set the first original (“A”) to be copied. Press the [Start] key.  
Scanning of the originals will start.  
Quality  
Edit  
8
Touch the key that corresponds to drawer[cassette] No. 1.  
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 10.  
● Step 2: Leaving the back side of the first original (“A”) blank  
11  
Touch the “Print from Front page” key.  
9
Leaving the back side of the original blank will allow the next  
Inch specifications  
copy to start on the front side of the next page.  
Scan next original(s).  
Set  
Place the originals and press start key.  
Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy.  
Inch specifications  
Back  
Close  
Select paper  
Scan next original(s).  
Place the originals and press start key.  
Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy.  
Set  
1
11x8 /  
Plain  
1
2
”
”
”
Job Build - Step2  
Cancel  
11x8 /  
Plain  
1
2
1
1 sided  
Original  
type  
AMS  
2 sided copy  
11x8/  
2
”
Insert  
11x8 /  
Color  
1
2
Bypass  
Plain  
page  
Select  
paper  
1 sided/  
2 sided  
8 /2x14”  
Plain  
2 sided copy-Left  
Finished page #:1  
Next copy page: Rear  
Print from  
Front page  
Back Edge  
Offset  
Reduce  
/Enlarge  
Orig. set  
direction  
Finished  
Basic  
Scanning  
finished  
Quality  
Edit  
Metric specifications  
Metric specifications  
Scan next original(s).  
Place the originals and press start key.  
Set  
Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy.  
Scan next original(s).  
Set  
Place the originals and press start key.  
Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy.  
Select paper  
Back  
Close  
Job Build- Step2  
Cancel  
Plain  
1-sided  
Original  
type  
AMS  
2-sided Copy  
Insert  
blank page  
Select  
paper  
1-sided/  
2-sided  
Plain  
Bypass  
2-sided Copy-Left  
Finished page #: 1  
Next copy page: Rear  
Print from  
front page  
Colour  
Plain  
Plain  
Back Edge  
Group  
Reduce/  
Enlarge  
Orig. set  
direction  
Finished  
Basic  
Scanning  
finished  
Quality  
Edit  
Set the second originals (“B”) to be copied. Press the [Start]  
key.  
Scanning of the originals will start.  
12  
5-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS  
● Step 4: Making the settings for the third original (“C” in the  
illustration on page 5-57.)  
The multi-bypass is to be selected for color paper feed under the  
“Select paper” screen.  
● Step 5: Leaving the back side of the third original (“C”) blank  
Touch the “Print from Front page” key.  
16  
Leaving the back side of the original blank will allow the next  
copy to start on the front side of the next page.  
Touch the “Select paper” key. The “Select paper” screen will  
be displayed.  
Inch specifications  
13  
Scan next original(s).  
Place the originals and press start key.  
Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy.  
Set  
Inch specifications  
Job Build - Step5  
Cancel  
Scan next original(s).  
Set  
Place the originals and press start key.  
Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy.  
1
1 sided  
Original  
type  
AMS  
2 sided copy  
11x8/  
2”  
Insert  
page  
Select  
1 sided/  
2 sided  
Job Build - Step4  
Cancel  
paper  
Offset  
2 sided copy-Left  
Finished page #:5  
Next copy page: Rear  
Print from  
Front page  
Back Edge  
1
1 sided  
Original  
type  
AMS  
2 sided copy  
11x8/  
2
”
Insert  
page  
Reduce  
/Enlarge  
Orig. set  
direction  
Finished  
Basic  
Select  
paper  
1 sided/  
2 sided  
Scanning  
finished  
2 sided copy-Left  
Finished page #:4  
Next copy page: Front  
Print from  
Rear page  
Quality  
Edit  
Back Edge  
Offset  
Reduce  
/Enlarge  
Orig. set  
direction  
Finished  
Basic  
Scanning  
finished  
Quality  
Edit  
Metric specifications  
Scan next original(s).  
Set  
Place the originals and press start key.  
Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy.  
Metric specifications  
Job Build - Step5  
Cancel  
Scan next original(s).  
Set  
Place the originals and press start key.  
1-sided  
Original  
type  
AMS  
2-sided Copy  
Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy.  
Insert  
blank page  
Select  
paper  
1-sided/  
2-sided  
Job Build- Step4  
Cancel  
2-sided Copy-Left  
Finished page #: 5  
Next copy page: Rear  
Print from  
front page  
Back Edge  
Group  
1-sided  
2-sided Copy  
Insert  
blank page  
Reduce/  
Enlarge  
Orig. set  
direction  
Finished  
Basic  
1-sided/  
2-sided  
Original type  
Select paper  
Scanning  
finished  
2-sided Copy-Left  
Finished page #: 4  
Next copy page: Front  
Print from  
rear page  
Quality  
Edit  
Back Edge  
Group  
AMS  
Reduce/  
Enlarge  
Orig. set  
direction  
Finished  
Scanning  
finished  
Basic  
Quality  
Edit  
● Step 6: Making the settings for the fourth originals (“D” in the  
illustration on page 5-57.)  
Drawer[Cassette] No.1 is to be selected for plain paper feed under  
the “Select paper” screen.  
Touch the “Bypass” key.  
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 13.  
14  
Touch the “Select paper” key. The “Select paper” screen will  
be displayed.  
Inch specifications  
17  
Scan next original(s).  
Place the originals and press start key.  
Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy.  
Set  
Inch specifications  
Back  
Close  
Select paper  
Scan next original(s).  
Set  
Place the originals and press start key.  
Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy.  
1
11x8 /  
Plain  
1
2
”
”
”
Job Build - Step6  
Cancel  
11x8 /  
Plain  
1
2
1
1 sided  
Original  
type  
AMS  
2 sided copy  
11x8/  
2
”
Insert  
page  
11x8 /  
Color  
1
2
Bypass  
Plain  
Select  
paper  
1 sided/  
2 sided  
8 /2x14”  
Plain  
2 sided copy-Left  
Finished page #:6  
Next copy page: Front  
Print from  
Rear page  
Back Edge  
Offset  
Reduce  
/Enlarge  
Orig. set  
direction  
Finished  
Basic  
Scanning  
finished  
Quality  
Edit  
Metric specifications  
Scan next original(s).  
Set  
Place the originals and press start key.  
Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy.  
Metric specifications  
Select paper  
Back  
Close  
Scan next original(s).  
Set  
Place the originals and press start key.  
Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy.  
Plain  
Job Build - Step6  
Cancel  
Plain  
1-sided  
Original  
type  
AMS  
2-sided Copy  
Insert  
blank page  
Bypass  
Plain  
Select  
paper  
1-sided/  
2-sided  
Colour  
Plain  
2-sided Copy-Left  
Finished page #: 6  
Next copy page: Front  
Print from  
rear page  
Back Edge  
Group  
Reduce/  
Enlarge  
Orig. set  
direction  
Finished  
Basic  
Scanning  
finished  
Quality  
Edit  
Set the third original (“C”) to be copied. Press the [Start] key.  
Scanning of the original will start.  
15  
5-60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS  
Touch the key that corresponds to drawer[cassette] No. 1.  
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 17.  
Touch the “Bypass” key.  
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 20.  
18  
21  
Inch specifications  
Inch specifications  
Scan next original(s).  
Scan next original(s).  
Set  
Set  
Place the originals and press start key.  
Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy.  
Place the originals and press start key.  
Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy.  
Back  
Close  
Back  
Close  
Select paper  
Select paper  
1
1
11x8 /  
Plain  
1
2
”
”
”
11x8 /  
Plain  
1
2
”
”
”
11x8 /  
Plain  
1
2
11x8 /  
Plain  
1
2
11x8 /  
Color  
1
2
Bypass  
Plain  
11x8 /  
Color  
1
2
Bypass  
Plain  
8 /2x14”  
Plain  
8 /2x14”  
Plain  
Metric specifications  
Metric specifications  
Scan next original(s).  
Scan next original(s).  
Set  
Set  
Place the originals and press start key.  
Place the originals and press start key.  
Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy.  
Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy.  
Select paper  
Back  
Close  
Select paper  
Back  
Close  
Plain  
Plain  
Plain  
Plain  
Bypass  
Bypass  
Colour  
Plain  
Plain  
Colour  
Plain  
Plain  
Touch the “Insert page” [“Insert blank page”] key.  
Inch specifications  
22  
Set the fourth originals (“D”) to be copied. Press the [Start]  
key.  
Scanning of the originals will start.  
19  
Scan next original(s).  
Place the originals and press start key.  
Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy.  
Set  
Job Build - Step7  
Cancel  
1
1 sided  
Original  
type  
AMS  
2 sided copy  
11x8/  
2”  
Insert  
page  
● Step 7: Making the settings for a blank rear cover  
The multi-bypass is to be selected for color paper feed under the  
“Select paper” screen.  
Select  
paper  
1 sided/  
2 sided  
2 sided copy-Left  
Finished page #:8  
Next copy page: Front  
Print from  
Rear page  
Back Edge  
Offset  
Reduce  
/Enlarge  
Orig. set  
direction  
Finished  
Basic  
Scanning  
finished  
Quality  
Edit  
Touch the “Select paper” key. The “Select paper” screen will  
be displayed.  
20  
Metric specifications  
Inch specifications  
Scan next original(s).  
Place the originals and press start key.  
Set  
Scan next original(s).  
Place the originals and press start key.  
Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy.  
Set  
Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy.  
Job Build - Step7  
Cancel  
Job Build - Step7  
Cancel  
1-sided  
Original  
type  
AMS  
2-sided Copy  
Insert  
blank page  
1-sided/  
2-sided  
Select paper  
1
1 sided  
Original  
type  
AMS  
2 sided copy  
11x8/  
2
”
Insert  
page  
2-sided Copy-Left  
Finished page #: 8  
Next copy page: Front  
Select  
paper  
1 sided/  
2 sided  
Print from  
rear page  
Back Edge  
Group  
2 sided copy-Left  
Finished page #:8  
Next copy page: Front  
Reduce/  
Enlarge  
Orig. set  
direction  
Print from  
Rear page  
Finished  
Back Edge  
Offset  
Scanning  
finished  
Reduce  
/Enlarge  
Orig. set  
direction  
Finished  
Basic  
Basic  
Quality  
Edit  
Scanning  
finished  
Quality  
Edit  
The job build set-up procedure is complete. Touch the  
“Scanning finished” key. Copying will start.  
Metric specifications  
23  
Scan next original(s).  
Place the originals and press start key.  
Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy.  
Set  
Inch specifications  
Job Build - Step7  
Cancel  
Scan next original(s).  
Set  
Place the originals and press start key.  
Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy.  
1-sided  
Original  
type  
AMS  
2-sided Copy  
Insert  
blank page  
1-sided/  
2-sided  
Job Build - Step8  
Cancel  
Select paper  
2-sided Copy-Left  
Finished page #: 8  
Next copy page: Front  
Print from  
rear page  
Back Edge  
Group  
1
1 sided  
Original  
type  
AMS  
2 sided copy  
11x8/  
2
”
Insert  
Reduce/  
Enlarge  
Orig. set  
direction  
page  
Select  
paper  
1 sided/  
2 sided  
Finished  
Scanning  
finished  
2 sided copy-Left  
Finished page #:10  
Next copy page: Front  
Print from  
Rear page  
Basic  
Quality  
Edit  
Offset  
Back Edge  
Reduce  
/Enlarge  
Orig. set  
direction  
Finished  
Basic  
Scanning  
finished  
Quality  
Edit  
Metric specifications  
Scan next original(s).  
Set  
Place the originals and press start key.  
Press "Scanning finished" key when starting copy.  
Job Build - Step8  
Cancel  
1-sided  
Original  
type  
AMS  
2-sided Copy  
Insert  
blank page  
Select  
paper  
1-sided/  
2-sided  
2-sided Copy-Left  
Finished page #: 10  
Next copy page: Front  
Print from  
rear page  
Back Edge  
Group  
Reduce/  
Enlarge  
Orig. set  
direction  
Finished  
Basic  
Scanning  
finished  
Quality  
Edit  
5-61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS  
If there are no problems with the copy set you made, then  
you can use the repeat copy mode to make any additional  
number of copy sets as desired (see “(2) Printing out with the  
repeat copy mode” on page 5-43).  
2 Specifying the type of originals  
This procedure specifies the type of originals being copied between  
1-sided, 2-sided and open-faced.  
24  
With the content of the “Basic” tab displayed, touch the  
“Original type” key. The “Original type” screen will be  
displayed.  
1
(2) Selecting the settings and functions  
Inch specifications  
Set  
1 Selecting the paper  
This procedure selects the size of the copy paper.  
Ready to Job build.  
Place originals then press Start key.  
Job Build - Step1  
End  
1
1 sided  
Original  
type  
AMS  
1 sided copy  
11x8/  
Select  
paper  
2
”
Insert  
page  
With the content of the “Basic” tab displayed, touch the  
“Select paper” key. The “Select paper” screen will be  
displayed.  
1 sided/  
2 sided  
1
1 sided copy-Left  
Finished page #:0  
Back Edge  
Offset  
Reduce  
/Enlarge  
Orig. set  
direction  
Finished  
Basic  
Quality  
Edit  
Inch specifications  
Set  
Ready to Job build.  
Place originals then press Start key.  
Metric specifications  
Job Build - Step1  
End  
Set  
Ready to Job build.  
1
1 sided  
Original  
type  
AMS  
1 sided copy  
11x8/  
2
”
Insert  
page  
Set original. Press Start key.  
Select  
paper  
1 sided/  
2 sided  
Job Build-Step 1  
End  
Insert  
1 sided copy-Left  
Finished page #:0  
Back Edge  
Offset  
1-sided  
1-sided Copy  
Reduce  
/Enlarge  
Orig. set  
direction  
Finished  
Basic  
blank page  
Select  
paper  
Original  
type  
1-sided/  
2-sided  
1-sided Copy-Left  
Finished page #: 0  
Quality  
Edit  
Back Edge  
Group  
AMS  
Reduce/  
Enlarge  
Orig. set  
direction  
Finished  
Basic  
Quality  
Edit  
Metric specifications  
Set  
Ready to Job build.  
Set original. Press Start key.  
Select between “1 sided”, “2 sided” and “Book”, in  
accordance with the originals being copied.  
Job Build-Step 1  
End  
2
1-sided  
1-sided Copy  
Insert  
blank page  
Select  
paper  
Original  
type  
1-sided/  
2-sided  
Inch specifications  
1-sided Copy-Left  
Finished page #: 0  
Back Edge  
Group  
AMS  
Set  
Reduce/  
Enlarge  
Orig. set  
direction  
Ready to Job build.  
Finished  
Place originals then press Start key.  
Basic  
Quality  
Edit  
Back  
Close  
Original type  
1 sided  
2 sided  
Book  
Touch the key that corresponds to the drawer[cassette] which  
contains the desired size of copy paper, and then touch the  
“Close” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step  
1.  
2
Metric specifications  
Inch specifications  
Set  
Ready to Job build.  
Set original. Press Start key.  
Set  
Ready to Job build.  
Place originals then press Start key.  
Back  
Close  
Original type  
Back  
Close  
Select paper  
1
11x8 /  
Plain  
1
2
”
”
”
1 sided  
2-sided  
11x8 /  
Plain  
1
2
11x8 /  
Color  
1
2
Bypass  
Plain  
Book  
8 /2x14”  
Plain  
Metric specifications  
NOTES  
Set  
Ready to Job build.  
• If you selected “1 sided”, verify the direction in which the originals  
were set.  
Set original. Press Start key.  
Select paper  
Back  
Close  
• If you selected “2 sided”, specify the binding direction of the originals  
and then verify the direction in which the originals were set.  
• If you selected “Book”, specify the binding direction of the originals.  
Plain  
Plain  
Bypass  
Plain  
Colour  
Plain  
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 1.  
3
5-62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS  
3 Selecting between 1-sided or 2-sided copies  
This procedure selects the type of finished copies to be made  
between 1-sided and 2-sided.  
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 1.  
3
With the content of the “Basic” tab displayed, touch the “1  
sided/2 sided” key. The “1 sided/2 sided” screen will be  
displayed.  
4 Selecting how to finished up the copy sets  
If the optional Document Finisher is installed on your copier, this  
procedure lets you select whether to staple or hole punch the finished  
copy sets.  
1
Inch specifications  
Set  
With the content of the “Basic” tab displayed, touch the  
“Finished” key. The “Finished” screen will be displayed.  
Ready to Job build.  
Place originals then press Start key.  
1
Job Build - Step1  
End  
1
Inch specifications  
1 sided  
Original  
type  
AMS  
1 sided copy  
11x8/  
Select  
paper  
2
”
Insert  
page  
1 sided/  
2 sided  
Set  
1 sided copy-Left  
Finished page #:0  
Ready to Job build.  
Back Edge  
Offset  
Place originals then press Start key.  
Reduce  
/Enlarge  
Orig. set  
direction  
Finished  
Basic  
Job Build - Step1  
End  
Quality  
Edit  
1
1 sided  
Original  
type  
AMS  
1 sided copy  
11x8/  
Select  
paper  
2
”
Insert  
page  
1 sided/  
2 sided  
1 sided copy-Left  
Finished page #:0  
Back Edge  
Offset  
Metric specifications  
Reduce  
/Enlarge  
Orig. set  
direction  
Finished  
Basic  
Set  
Ready to Job build.  
Quality  
Edit  
Set original. Press Start key.  
Job Build-Step 1  
End  
Metric specifications  
1-sided  
1-sided Copy  
Insert  
blank page  
Select  
paper  
Original  
type  
1-sided/  
2-sided  
Set  
1-sided Copy-Left  
Finished page #: 0  
Ready to Job build.  
Back Edge  
Group  
AMS  
Set original. Press Start key.  
Reduce/  
Enlarge  
Orig. set  
direction  
Finished  
Job Build-Step 1  
End  
Basic  
Quality  
Edit  
1-sided  
1-sided Copy  
Insert  
blank page  
Select  
paper  
Original  
type  
1-sided/  
2-sided  
1-sided Copy-Left  
Finished page #: 0  
Back Edge  
Group  
AMS  
Reduce/  
Enlarge  
Orig. set  
direction  
Finished  
NOTE  
Basic  
Quality  
Edit  
The setting in regard to making either 1-sided or 2-sided copies can  
only be made in the first step of the job build mode and will apply to all  
steps in the copy job.  
NOTE  
The setting in regard to how the copy sets will be finished can only be  
made in the first step of the job build mode and will apply to all steps  
in the copy job.  
Touch the “1 sided” key or the “2 sided” key, as appropriate,  
and then select the binding direction you want for the  
finished copies.  
2
Follow the instructions on the right side of the touch panel  
and verify the direction in which the originals were set.  
Inch specifications  
Set  
Ready to Job build.  
Place originals then press Start key.  
Back  
Close  
1 sided/ 2 sided copy  
Finished  
Check direction  
Check direction of  
original top side.  
1 sided  
copy  
Open from  
left  
2 sided  
copy  
Open from  
right  
Open from  
top  
Left top  
corner  
Rear  
Metric specifications  
Set  
Ready to Job build.  
Set original. Press Start key.  
Back  
Close  
1-sided / 2-sided Copy  
Finished  
Check direction  
Check direction of  
original.  
1-sided  
Copy  
Left  
binding  
2-sided  
Copy  
Right  
binding  
Top  
binding  
Left top  
corner  
Back Edge  
IMPORTANT!  
If the designation for the direction that the originals are set is not  
correct, copying may be accomplished incorrectly.  
5-63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS  
Select how you want the copy sets to be finished by touching  
the “Staple mode” key, the “Saddle Stitch” [“Center Staple” ]  
key or the “Punch mode” key, as appropriate.  
Select the desired magnification ratio.  
If you want to have the copy magnification ratio selected  
automatically, touch the “AMS” key.  
2
2
Follow the instructions on the right side of the touch panel  
and verify the direction in which the originals were set.  
If you want to manually set the magnification ratio, touch the  
“# keys” [“#-Keys”] key and then enter the desired ratio with  
the keypad, or touch the “+” key or the “-” key to change the  
displayed magnification ratio to the desired setting in 1%  
increments.  
Inch specifications  
Set  
Ready to Job build.  
Place originals then press Start key.  
You can also select the magnification ratio by touching the  
preset zoom ratio keys at the right that corresponds to the  
desired ratio.  
Back  
Close  
Finished  
Staple  
Check direction  
Check direction of  
original top side.  
Offset  
Punch  
No cover  
No cover  
Staple  
mode  
Punch  
mode  
Off  
On  
Inch specifications  
None  
Saddle  
Stitch  
Set  
Left top  
corner  
Ready to Job build.  
Rear  
Place originals then press Start key.  
Back  
Close  
Reduce/Enlarge  
Metric specifications  
Ready to Job build.  
(25 400)  
100  
154 %  
77 %  
%
AMS  
1
1
1
1
5 /2x8 /2"R8 /2x14"  
11x17" R8 /2x14"  
Set  
129 %  
64 %  
11x17" R8 /2x11"  
Standard  
Zoom  
100 %  
1
1
Set original. Press Start key.  
Finished  
8 /2x11" R11x17"  
121 %  
50 %  
11x17" R5 /2x8 /2"  
400 %  
XY Zoom  
Back  
Close  
1
1
1
1
8 /2x14" R8 /2x17"  
Group  
78 %  
25 %  
Staple  
Punch  
Check direction  
200 %  
1
1
# keys  
1
1
8 /2x14" R8 /2x11"  
5 /2x8 /2"R11x17"  
Check direction of original.  
Staple  
Mode  
None  
Punch  
Mode  
Off  
Metric specifications  
1 set  
Center  
Staple  
Set  
Left top  
Ready to Job build.  
Back Edge  
corner  
Set original. Press Start key.  
Back  
Close  
Reduce/Enlarge  
(25~400)  
141%  
A 4➔A3  
75%  
100  
%
AMS  
IMPORTANT!  
A 5➔A4  
11x15"➔A 4  
127%  
106%  
90%  
70%  
50%  
25%  
A3➔A4  
A4➔A5  
Standard  
Zoom  
100%  
400%  
Folio➔A3  
If the designation for the direction that the originals are set is not  
correct, copying may be accomplished incorrectly.  
XY Zoom  
11x15"➔A3  
200%  
#-Keys  
A 5➔A 3  
Folio➔A4  
Metric specifications (Asia Pacific)  
Set  
Ready to Job build.  
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 1.  
Set original. Press Start key.  
3
Back  
Close  
Reduce/Enlarge  
(25~400)  
141%  
122%  
A 4➔A 3  
81%  
70%  
50%  
25%  
B 4➔A 4  
100  
%
AMS  
B 5➔B 4  
B 5➔A 5  
A 4➔B 4  
A 5➔B 5  
Standard  
Zoom  
100%  
A 3➔A 4  
B 4➔B 5  
5 Making copies at an enlarged or reduced magnification ratio  
This procedure selects the magnification ratio of the finished copies.  
400%  
200%  
115%  
86%  
B 4➔A 3  
B 5➔A 4  
XY Zoom  
A 3➔B 4  
#-Keys  
A 5➔A 3  
A 4➔B 5  
With the content of the “Basic” tab displayed, touch the  
“Reduce/Enlarge” key. The “Reduce/Enlarge” screen will be  
displayed.  
1
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 1.  
3
Inch specifications  
Set  
Ready to Job build.  
Place originals then press Start key.  
Job Build - Step1  
End  
1
1 sided  
Original  
type  
AMS  
1 sided copy  
11x8/  
Select  
paper  
2
”
Insert  
page  
1 sided/  
2 sided  
1 sided copy-Left  
Finished page #:0  
Back Edge  
Offset  
Reduce  
/Enlarge  
Orig. set  
direction  
Finished  
Basic  
Quality  
Edit  
Metric specifications  
Set  
Ready to Job build.  
Set original. Press Start key.  
Job Build-Step 1  
End  
1-sided  
1-sided Copy  
Insert  
blank page  
Select  
paper  
Original  
type  
1-sided/  
2-sided  
1-sided Copy-Left  
Finished page #: 0  
Back Edge  
Group  
AMS  
Reduce/  
Enlarge  
Orig. set  
direction  
Finished  
Basic  
Quality  
Edit  
5-64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS  
6 Specifying the direction that the originals were set  
7 Setting the scanning density  
This procedure specifies the direction of the set originals.  
This procedure sets the copy exposure for the finished copies.  
With the content of the “Basic” tab displayed, touch the  
“Orig.set direction” key. The “Orig.set direction” screen will be  
displayed.  
Touch the “Quality” key. Then, in the resulting screen, touch  
the “Exposure mode” key. The “Exposure mode” screen will  
be displayed.  
1
1
Inch specifications  
Inch specifications  
Set  
Set  
Ready to Job build.  
Ready to Job build.  
Place originals then press Start key.  
Place originals then press Start key.  
Job Build - Step1  
End  
Job Build - Step1  
End  
1
1 sided  
Original  
type  
AMS  
1 sided copy  
Density 4  
Text+Photo  
Off  
11x8/  
Select  
paper  
2
”
Insert  
page  
Insert  
page  
Exposure  
mode  
Orig. image  
quality  
1 sided/  
2 sided  
Eco Print  
1 sided copy-Left  
Finished page #:0  
1 sided copy-Left  
Finished page # : 0  
Back Edge  
Offset  
Reduce  
/Enlarge  
Orig. set  
direction  
Finished  
Basic  
Quality  
Edit  
Basic  
Quality  
Edit  
Metric specifications  
Metric specifications  
Set  
Set  
Ready to Job build.  
Ready to Job build.  
Set original. Press Start key.  
Set original. Press Start key.  
Job Build-Step 1  
End  
Job Build - Step1  
End  
1-sided  
Select  
paper  
1-sided Copy  
Manual 4  
Text + Photo  
Off  
Insert  
blank page  
Insert  
blank page  
Image  
quality  
Original  
type  
Exposure  
mode  
1-sided/  
2-sided  
Eco Print  
1-sided Copy-Left  
Finished page #: 0  
1-sided Copy-Left  
Finished page #: 0  
Back Edge  
Group  
AMS  
Reduce/  
Enlarge  
Orig. set  
direction  
Finished  
Basic  
Quality  
Edit  
Basic  
Quality  
Edit  
Touch the “Rear” [“Back Edge”] key or the “Left top corner”  
key, as appropriate, according to the direction of the  
originals.  
If you want to have the copy exposure selected  
automatically, touch the “Auto” key.  
If you want to manually set the exposure, touch the “Manual”  
key and then touch the “Lighter” key or the “Darker” key to  
move the cursor on the exposure scale and adjust the  
exposure as desired.  
2
2
Inch specifications  
Set  
Ready to Job build.  
Place originals then press Start key.  
Back  
Close  
Inch specifications  
Org. set direction  
Check direction  
Check direction of  
original top side.  
Set  
Ready to Job build.  
Place originals then press Start key.  
"Check direction original" can be shown  
at right side of display.  
Back  
Close  
Exposure mode  
Follow the steps. If setting mode is  
wrong, incorrect copy will result.  
Left top  
corner  
Rear  
Auto  
Manual  
Lighter  
Darker  
Metric specifications  
Set  
Ready to Job build.  
Set original. Press Start key.  
Metric specifications  
Back  
Close  
Orig. set direction  
Check direction  
Check direction of  
original.  
Set  
Ready to Job build.  
Set original. Press Start key.  
"Check direction original" can be shown  
at right side of display.  
Back  
Close  
Exposure mode  
Follow the steps. If setting mode is  
wrong, incorrect copy will result.  
Left top  
corner  
Back Edge  
Auto  
Manual  
Lighter  
Darker  
IMPORTANT!  
If the designation for the direction that the originals are set is not  
correct, copying may be accomplished incorrectly.  
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 1.  
3
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 1.  
3
5-65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS  
8 Setting the image quality  
9 Turning the eco print mode ON  
This procedure sets the image quality according to the type of  
originals being copied.  
This procedure allows you to turn the eco print mode ON in order to  
save on toner use.  
Touch the “Quality” key. Then, in the resulting screen, touch  
the “Orig. image quality” key. The “Orig. image quality”  
screen will be displayed.  
Touch the “Quality” key. Then, in the resulting screen, touch  
the “Eco Print” key. The “Eco Print” screen will be displayed.  
1
1
Inch specifications  
Inch specifications  
Set  
Ready to Job build.  
Place originals then press Start key.  
Set  
Ready to Job build.  
Job Build - Step1  
End  
Place originals then press Start key.  
Job Build - Step1  
End  
Density 4  
Text+Photo  
Off  
Insert  
page  
Exposure  
mode  
Orig. image  
quality  
Eco Print  
Density 4  
Text+Photo  
Off  
Insert  
page  
1 sided copy-Left  
Finished page # : 0  
Exposure  
mode  
Orig. image  
quality  
Eco Print  
1 sided copy-Left  
Finished page # : 0  
Basic  
Quality  
Edit  
Basic  
Quality  
Edit  
Metric specifications  
Metric specifications  
Set  
Ready to Job build.  
Set original. Press Start key.  
Set  
Ready to Job build.  
Job Build - Step1  
End  
Set original. Press Start key.  
Job Build - Step1  
End  
Manual 4  
Text + Photo  
Off  
Insert  
blank page  
Image  
quality  
Exposure  
mode  
Eco Print  
Manual 4  
Text + Photo  
Off  
Insert  
blank page  
1-sided Copy-Left  
Finished page #: 0  
Image  
quality  
Exposure  
mode  
Eco Print  
1-sided Copy-Left  
Finished page #: 0  
Basic  
Quality  
Edit  
Basic  
Quality  
Edit  
NOTE  
Select the image quality mode by touching the “Manual” key  
and then touching the “Text+Photo” key, the “Photo” key or  
the “Text” key, as appropriate.  
The setting in regard to whether or not to use the eco print mode can  
only be made in the first step of the job build mode and will apply to all  
steps in the copy job.  
2
Inch specifications  
Set  
Ready to Job build.  
Place originals then press Start key.  
Touch the “On” key to turn the eco print mode ON.  
Back  
Close  
Orig.image quality  
2
Inch specifications  
Text+Photo : Set this mode to copy orig.  
with mixed text and photo  
Photo : Add a dimensional effect of photo  
Text : Copy a pencil or fine line.  
Set  
Text+Photo  
Photo  
Ready to Job build.  
Place originals then press Start key.  
Back  
Close  
Eco Print  
Text  
Eco Print  
It is possible to reduce  
toner consumption.  
Image is  
a
little light.  
Metric specifications  
Eco Print is saving toner consumption,  
and it is economically.  
Set  
Ready to Job build.  
Set original. Press Start key.  
Off  
On  
Back  
Close  
Image quality orig.  
Metric specifications  
Text+Photo: Set this mode to copy  
original mixed (text & photo).  
Photo: Add a dimensional effect of photo.  
Text : Copy pencil & fine line clearly.  
Set  
Text+Photo  
Photo  
Ready to Job build.  
Set original. Press Start key.  
Back  
Eco Print  
Close  
Eco Print  
Text  
Toner consumption  
can be reduced.  
Image resolution reduced.  
Eco Print enables toner consumption  
reduction.  
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 1.  
3
Off  
On  
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 1.  
3
5-66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS  
0 Selecting the sheet erase mode  
This procedure selects the sheet erase mode in order to erase the  
shadows, lines, etc., that can occur around the edges of copies.  
! Manually selecting the size of the originals  
This procedure allow you to select the size of the originals manually  
using the touch panel.  
Touch the “Edit” key. Then, in the resulting screen, touch the  
“Border Erase” [“Erase Mode”] key. The “Border Erase”  
[“Erase Mode”] screen will be displayed.  
1
Touch the “Edit” key. Then, in the resulting screen, touch the  
“Select orig. size” [“Select size orig.”] key. The “Select original  
size” [“Select size original”] screen will be displayed.  
1
Inch specifications  
Inch specifications  
Set  
Ready to Job build.  
Place originals then press Start key.  
Set  
Ready to Job build.  
Job Build - Step1  
End  
Place originals then press Start key.  
Job Build - Step1  
End  
Off  
Auto  
Select  
orig.size  
Off  
Modify  
Copy  
Insert page  
Border  
Erase  
Off  
Auto  
Select  
orig.size  
Off  
Modify  
Copy  
Insert page  
2 sided copy-Left  
Finished page # : 0  
Border  
Erase  
None  
None  
Margin/  
Centering  
2 sided copy-Left  
Finished page # : 0  
Page #  
Quality  
None  
None  
Margin/  
Centering  
Page #  
Quality  
Basic  
Edit  
Basic  
Edit  
Metric specifications  
Metric specifications  
Set  
Ready to Job build.  
Set original. Press Start key.  
Set  
Ready to Job build.  
Job Build - Step1  
End  
Set original. Press Start key.  
Job Build - Step1  
End  
Off  
Erase  
Mode  
None  
Auto  
Select  
size orig.  
None  
Insert  
blank page  
Modify  
copy  
Off  
Erase  
Mode  
None  
Auto  
Select  
size orig.  
None  
Insert  
blank page  
2-sided Copy-Left  
Finished page #: 0  
Modify  
copy  
None  
Margin/  
Imag.shift  
Page  
numbering  
2-sided Copy-Left  
Finished page #: 0  
None  
Margin/  
Imag.shift  
Page  
numbering  
Basic  
Quality  
Edit  
Basic  
Quality  
Edit  
Touch the “Sheet Erase” [“Border erase”] key or “Individual  
BordrErase” [“Individual Erase Mode”] key and then set the  
desired border width.  
2
If you want the size of the originals to be detected  
2
automatically, touch the “Auto” key. If you want to select a  
standard original size, touch the key that corresponds to the  
desired size.  
If you want to select another standard original size, touch the  
“Other stand. Size” [“Others stand. Size”] key and select the  
desired size.  
Inch specifications  
Set  
Ready to Job build.  
Place originals then press Start key.  
Back  
Close  
Border Erase  
If you want to select the dimensions of the originals manually,  
touch the “Input size” key and then set the corresponding  
dimensions.  
Erase the border shadow of original.  
None  
Sheet  
Erase  
Individual  
BordrErase  
Inch specifications  
Set  
Ready to Job build.  
Metric specifications  
Place originals then press Start key.  
Back  
Close  
User regist.  
Select original size  
Set  
Ready to Job build.  
Set original. Press Start key.  
1
Auto  
8 /2 x 14"  
11 x 15"  
A 4  
10 x 10"  
9 x 9"  
Back  
Close  
Erase Mode  
Select  
size  
1
1
11 x 17"  
5
8
/
2
2
x 8  
x 5  
/2  
"
"
1
1
1
Input size  
8 /2 x 11"  
/
/2  
A 4  
8 x 8"  
Other  
stand. Size  
Erase edge of original copy.  
1
None  
11 x 8 /2  
"
12 x 12"  
Border  
erase  
Individual  
Erase Mode  
Metric specifications  
Set  
Ready to Job build.  
Set original. Press Start key.  
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 1.  
3
Back  
Close  
Select size original  
Use regist.  
Auto  
215x400mm  
Select  
size  
215x400mm  
215x400mm  
215x400mm  
Input size  
Others  
stand. Size  
Folio  
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 1.  
3
5-67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS  
@ Selecting the repeat copy mode  
This procedure allow you to select the repeat copy mode so that you  
can make any necessary number of additional copies later.  
# Selecting the margin mode or the centering/image shift mode  
This procedure selects the margin mode or the centering/image shift  
mode in order to create a margin space or center the copy image.  
Touch the “Edit” key. Then, in the resulting screen, touch the  
“Modify Copy” key. The “Modify Copy” screen will be  
displayed.  
Touch the “Edit” key. Then, in the resulting screen, touch the  
“Margin/Centering” [“Margin/Imag. shift”] key. The “Margin/  
Centering” [“Margin/Imag. shift”] screen will be displayed.  
1
1
Inch specifications  
Inch specifications  
Set  
Set  
Ready to Job build.  
Ready to Job build.  
Place originals then press Start key.  
Place originals then press Start key.  
Job Build - Step1  
End  
Job Build - Step1  
End  
Off  
Auto  
Select  
orig.size  
Off  
Modify  
Copy  
Off  
Auto  
Select  
orig.size  
Off  
Modify  
Copy  
Insert page  
Insert page  
Border  
Erase  
Border  
Erase  
2 sided copy-Left  
Finished page # : 0  
2 sided copy-Left  
Finished page # : 0  
None  
None  
None  
None  
Margin/  
Centering  
Margin/  
Centering  
Page #  
Quality  
Page #  
Quality  
Basic  
Edit  
Basic  
Edit  
Metric specifications  
Metric specifications  
Set  
Set  
Ready to Job build.  
Ready to Job build.  
Set original. Press Start key.  
Set original. Press Start key.  
Job Build - Step1  
End  
Job Build - Step1  
End  
Off  
Erase  
Mode  
None  
Auto  
Select  
size orig.  
None  
Off  
Erase  
Mode  
None  
Auto  
Select  
size orig.  
None  
Insert  
blank page  
Insert  
blank page  
Modify  
copy  
Modify  
copy  
2-sided Copy-Left  
Finished page #: 0  
2-sided Copy-Left  
Finished page #: 0  
None  
None  
Margin/  
Imag.shift  
Page  
numbering  
Margin/  
Imag.shift  
Page  
numbering  
Basic  
Quality  
Edit  
Basic  
Quality  
Edit  
NOTES  
NOTE  
• To make additional copies with the repeat copy mode, refer to  
“(2) Printing out with the repeat copy mode” on page 5-43.  
• The setting in regard to whether or not to use the repeat copy mode  
can only be made in the first step of the job build mode and will  
apply to all steps in the copy job.  
The setting in regard to the margin mode or the centering/image shift  
mode can only be made in the first step of the job build mode and will  
apply to all steps in the copy job.  
Touch the “Margin” key or the “Centering” [“Imag.shift”] key,  
as appropriate.  
For more detailed information on these two settings, refer to  
the explanation for the margin mode on page 5-6 or the  
centering/image shift mode on page 5-8, as appropriate.  
2
Touch the “On” key to select the repeat copy mode.  
2
Inch specifications  
Set  
Ready to Job build.  
Inch specifications  
Place originals then press Start key.  
Back  
Close  
Modify Copy  
Set  
Ready to Job build.  
Place originals then press Start key.  
Back  
Close  
Margin/Centering  
When select [On], data can be saved.  
You can recall and re-print at anytime.  
You can set the password to secure  
saved document.  
Off  
On  
None  
Reposition image to left/right or  
top/bottom, and also center image  
on paper.  
Margin  
Centering  
Metric specifications  
Set  
Ready to Job build.  
Metric specifications  
Set original. Press Start key.  
Back  
Close  
Modify copy  
Set  
Ready to Job build.  
Set original. Press Start key.  
Back  
Close  
Margin/Image shift  
Off  
On  
When select [On], job can be saved.  
When the mode is set [On], it can  
You can recall and re-print at anytime.  
save a job data and reprint it anytime.  
You can set a password to secure saved  
And you can set that other user are not  
document.  
able to reprint.  
None  
Reposition image to left/right or  
Margin  
top/bottom and center image on paper.  
Image  
shift  
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 1.  
3
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 1.  
3
5-68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS  
$ Selecting the print page numbers mode  
This procedure selects the print page numbers mode in order to have  
page numbers printed on the corresponding copies.  
Touch the “Edit” key. Then, in the resulting screen, touch the  
“Page #” [“Page numbering”] key. The “Page #” [“Page  
numbering”] screen will be displayed.  
1
Inch specifications  
Set  
Ready to Job build.  
Place originals then press Start key.  
Job Build - Step1  
End  
Off  
Auto  
Select  
orig.size  
Off  
Modify  
Copy  
Insert page  
Border  
Erase  
2 sided copy-Left  
Finished page # : 0  
None  
None  
Margin/  
Centering  
Page #  
Quality  
Basic  
Edit  
Metric specifications  
Set  
Ready to Job build.  
Set original. Press Start key.  
Job Build - Step1  
End  
Off  
Erase  
Mode  
None  
Auto  
Select  
size orig.  
None  
Insert  
blank page  
Modify  
copy  
2-sided Copy-Left  
Finished page #: 0  
None  
Margin/  
Imag.shift  
Page  
numbering  
Basic  
Quality  
Edit  
NOTE  
The setting in regard to the print page numbers mode can only be  
made in the first step of the job build mode and will apply to all steps  
in the copy job.  
For more detailed information on this setting, refer to the  
explanation for the print page numbers mode on page 5-16.  
2
Inch specifications  
Set  
Ready to Job build.  
Place originals then press Start key.  
Back  
Close  
Page #  
None  
-1-  
P. 1  
1/n  
Page # can be added on bottom of copy.  
Metric specifications  
Set  
Ready to Job build.  
Set original. Press Start key.  
Back  
Close  
Page numbering  
None  
-1-  
P. 1  
1/n  
Page # can be added on bottom of copy.  
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 1.  
3
5-69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5 OTHER CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS  
5-70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT  
FUNCTIONS  
1. Document management functions  
(2) Form registration  
NOTE  
The optional Hard Disk must be installed on this copier in order to use  
this function.  
1Registering a form  
Perform the following procedure when you want to register an images  
as a “form” for use in the form overlay mode.  
Set the document that you want to register as a form.  
(1) What are the “document management” functions?  
1
“Document management” functions refer to those functions that  
enable you to scan and save documents onto the copier’s hard disk,  
and then use that data for copying purposes.  
Each function has it’s own separate “box” (the area where document  
data is saved) on the hard disk and all data for that particular function  
is saved into that specific box.  
Press the [Document Management] key. The “Document  
Management” screen will be displayed.  
2
The following “document management” functions are available with  
this copier:  
● Form registration (pages 6-1 through 6-4)  
You can store in a box on the copier’s hard disk, and you can then  
manage the use of, those images that will be used as the “form” in the  
form overlay mode.  
● Shared data box (pages 6-4 through 6-8)  
If you register data that will be shared by all users in the shared data  
box, it will be possible for each user to print out that data at their own  
convenience. This is useful, for example, for registering business  
forms and the like that are frequently used my many people. The data  
that you register here will be stored permanently until the procedure to  
delete it is performed.  
Touch the “Form reg.” [“Form registr.”] key. The “Form  
registration” screen will be displayed.  
3
Inch specifications  
Select function.  
25/10/'01 19:20  
Document Management  
End  
● Synergy print boxes (pages 6-9 through 6-19)  
Shared Data Box  
Synergy Print Box  
Form box  
If you store multiple sets of documents in a synergy print box, you can  
print out up to 10 of these sets at one time.  
Form  
reg.  
Document  
reg.  
Document  
printing  
Document  
reg.  
Document  
printing  
Box  
Editing  
Box  
Editing  
Box  
Editing  
Metric specifications  
Select function.  
25/10/'01 19:20  
End  
Document Management  
Shared Data Box  
Synergy Print Box  
Form box  
Document  
registr.  
Document  
printing  
Document  
registr.  
Document  
printing  
Form  
registr.  
Box  
Editing  
Box  
Editing  
Box  
Editing  
6-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
Touch the “Change name” key and then enter a name for the  
form data.  
If you do not want to register a name for the form data,  
go directly to the next step.  
2Checking registered forms and changing form names  
4
Perform the following procedure when you want to verify the name of  
a registered form, the size of the original document or the date and  
time it was stored in memory, or when you want to print out the  
document in order to check it.You can also use this procedure to  
change the registered form name.  
Inch specifications  
Original  
11x81  
Register  
81  
2x11"  
Ready to register form(s).  
/
2
"
/
Place originals then press Start key.  
25/10/'01 19:20  
Press the [Document Management] key. The “Document  
Management” screen will be displayed.  
Cancel  
Form registration  
1
Form box  
Documents  
Form006  
Auto  
Select  
orig. size  
Auto size  
100%  
Back Edge  
Reduce  
/Enlarge  
Orig. set  
direction  
Select  
regi. size  
Change  
name  
Basic  
Edit  
Quality  
Metric specifications  
Original  
A4  
Register  
A4  
Ready to register form(s).  
Set original. Press Start key.  
25/10/'01 19:20  
Job cancel  
Form registration  
Form box  
Auto  
Documents  
FORM006  
Select  
size orig.  
Auto size  
100%  
Back Edge  
Reduce/  
Enlarge  
Orig. set  
direction  
Select  
regi. size  
Change  
name  
Basic  
Edit  
Quality  
Touch the “Box Editing” key under “Form box”.  
The “Box editing” screen will be displayed.  
2
NOTE  
Inch specifications  
Refer to “11. Entering characters” on page 7-104 for information on  
entering characters.  
Select function.  
25/10/'01 19:20  
Document Management  
End  
Shared Data Box  
Synergy Print Box  
Form box  
Form  
reg.  
Document  
reg.  
Document  
printing  
Document  
reg.  
Document  
printing  
Touch the “Select orig. size” [“Select size orig.”], “Select regi.  
5
Box  
Editing  
Box  
Editing  
Box  
Editing  
size”, “Reduce/Enlarge” and/or “Orig. set direction” keys if  
you want to perform the corresponding settings for the  
originals being used.  
If you want to access the “Scanning density” key and/or the  
“Orig. image quality” [“Image quality”] key to make those  
settings, touch the “Quality” key.  
If you want to set access the “Border Erase” [“Erase Mode”]  
key to make those settings, touch the “Edit” key.  
Metric specifications  
Select function.  
25/10/'01 19:20  
End  
Document Management  
Shared Data Box  
Synergy Print Box  
Form box  
Document  
registr.  
Document  
printing  
Document  
registr.  
Document  
printing  
Form  
registr.  
Press the [Start] key. Scanning of the document will start.  
Once the document has been completely scanned, the touch  
panel will return to the screen in step 3.  
If you want to register another form, repeat steps 3  
through 6.  
Box  
Editing  
Box  
Editing  
Box  
Editing  
6
Select the form that you want to check and then touch the  
“Conf/Crrt. details” [“Check/Rev. details”] key. The “Check/  
Correct details” [“Check/revise details”] screen will be  
displayed.  
3
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the  
contents of the “Basic” tab.  
7
Inch specifications  
Close  
Box editing  
Form  
Order of  
indication  
Up  
11x81/2  
11x81/2  
"
Form 005  
01/04/19  
01/04/19  
Conf/Crrt.  
details  
Form 004  
Form 003  
"
81/2x11"  
01/04/19  
01/04/19  
01/04/19  
Form 002  
Form 001  
11x81/2  
11x81/2  
"
Down  
Delete  
"
001/005  
Document Management - Form box  
Metric specifications  
Close  
Box editing  
Form  
Order of  
indication  
Up  
A4  
A4  
A4  
Form 007  
Form 006  
25/10/01  
25/10/01  
Check/Rev.  
details  
25/10/01  
25/10/01  
25/10/01  
Form 005  
Form 004  
Form 003  
A4  
A4  
Down  
Delete  
001/007  
Document Management - Form box  
6-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
3Deleting a registered form  
NOTE  
Perform the following procedure when you want to delete a registered  
form.  
It is possible to change the order of display for the registered forms.  
To do so, touch the “Order of indication” key, and then touch the “Sort  
by date” key (and select either “New R Old” or “Old R New”) or the  
“Sort by name” key (and select either “A R Z” or “Z R A”), as  
appropriate.  
Press the [Document Management] key. The “Document  
Management” screen will be displayed.  
1
Check the displayed information.  
If you want to print out the selected form, touch the “Print  
Form” key.  
4
If you want to change the name of the selected form, touch  
the “Change form name” key and then enter the new name.  
Inch specifications  
Close  
Check/Correct details  
Details  
Item  
User name  
Document name  
Size  
- - - - - - - - - - -  
Form 001  
11x17"  
Change  
form name  
Touch the “Box Editing” key under “Form Box”.  
The “Box editing” screen will be displayed.  
2
Orig. set direction  
Input source  
Resolution  
Back Edge  
Copy  
600dpi  
Print  
Form  
Registration date  
25/10/'01 14:06  
Inch specifications  
Document Management - Form box - Box editing  
Select function.  
25/10/'01 19:20  
End  
Metric specifications  
Document Management  
Close  
Shared Data Box  
Synergy Print Box  
Form box  
Check/revice details  
Details  
- - - - - - - - - - -  
Item  
Form  
reg.  
Document  
reg.  
Document  
printing  
Document  
reg.  
Document  
printing  
User name  
Change  
Document name  
Size  
Orig. set direction  
Input source  
Resolution  
FORM007  
A4  
Back Edge  
Copy  
form name  
Box  
Editing  
Box  
Editing  
Box  
Editing  
Print  
Form  
600dpi  
Registration date  
25/10/'01 14:06  
Metric specifications  
Document Management - Form box - Box editing  
Select function.  
25/10/'01 19:20  
End  
Document Management  
NOTE  
Shared Data Box  
Synergy Print Box  
Form box  
Refer to “11. Entering characters” on page 7-104 for information on  
entering characters.  
Document  
registr.  
Document  
printing  
Document  
registr.  
Document  
printing  
Form  
registr.  
Box  
Editing  
Box  
Editing  
Box  
Editing  
Once you have finished checking the information for that  
form, touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 3.  
If you want to check the information for another registered  
form, repeat steps 3 through 5.  
5
Select the form that you want to delete and then touch the  
“Delete” key. A verification screen will be displayed.  
3
Inch specifications  
Close  
Box editing  
Form  
Order of  
indication  
Up  
11x81/2  
11x81/2  
"
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return  
to the screen in step 2.  
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the  
contents of the “Basic” tab.  
Form 005  
01/04/19  
01/04/19  
Conf/Crrt.  
details  
6
Form 004  
Form 003  
"
81/2x11"  
01/04/19  
01/04/19  
01/04/19  
Form 002  
Form 001  
11x81/2  
11x81/2  
"
Down  
Delete  
"
001/005  
Document Management - Form box  
Metric specifications  
Close  
Box editing  
Form  
Order of  
indication  
Up  
A4  
A4  
A4  
Form 007  
Form 006  
25/10/01  
25/10/01  
Check/Rev.  
details  
25/10/01  
25/10/01  
25/10/01  
Form 005  
Form 004  
Form 003  
A4  
A4  
Down  
Delete  
001/007  
Document Management - Form box  
6-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
(3) Shared data box  
NOTE  
It is possible to change the order of display for the stored documents.  
To do so, touch the “Order of indication” key, and then touch the “Sort  
by date” key (and select either “New R Old” or “Old R New”) or the  
“Sort by name” key (and select either “A R Z” or “Z R A”), as  
appropriate.  
1Storing documents in the box  
Perform the following procedure when you want to register a set of  
documents in the shared data box.  
* Up to 100 sets of documents can be saved in the shared data box.  
Set the documents to be stored.  
1
Touch the “Yes” key or the “No” key, as appropriate.  
4
Press the [Document Management] key. The “Document  
Management” screen will be displayed.  
Inch specifications  
2
Stop  
Form name : Form 001  
This form will be deleted. Do you really want to delete it?  
Yes  
No  
Metric specifications  
Stop  
Form name : FORM007  
This form will be deleted. Are you sure?  
Touch the “Document reg.” [“Document registr.”] key under  
“Shared Data Box”. The “Document registration” screen will  
be displayed.  
3
Yes  
No  
Inch specifications  
If you selected “Yes”, the selected form will be deleted and  
the touch panel will return to the screen in step 3.  
If you selected “No”, the touch panel will return to the screen  
in step 3 without deleting the selected form.  
Select function.  
25/10/'01 19:20  
Document Management  
End  
Shared Data Box  
Synergy Print Box  
Form box  
Form  
reg.  
Document  
reg.  
Document  
printing  
Document  
reg.  
Document  
printing  
If you want to delete another registered form, repeat steps 3  
and 4.  
Box  
Editing  
Box  
Editing  
Box  
Editing  
5
6
Metric specifications  
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 2.  
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the  
contents of the “Basic” tab.  
Select function.  
25/10/'01 19:20  
End  
Document Management  
Shared Data Box  
Synergy Print Box  
Form box  
Document  
registr.  
Document  
printing  
Document  
registr.  
Document  
printing  
Form  
registr.  
Box  
Editing  
Box  
Editing  
Box  
Editing  
6-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
Touch the “Change name” key and then enter a name for the  
documents.  
If you do not want to register a name for the documents, go  
directly to the next step.  
2Printing out stored documents  
4
Perform the following procedure when you want to print out  
documents that are stored in a shared data box.  
Press the [Document Management] key. The “Document  
Management” screen will be displayed.  
Inch specifications  
1
Original  
11x81  
25/10/'01 19:20  
Register  
81  
2x11"  
Ready to register document(s).  
/
2"  
/
Place originals then press Start key.  
Cancel  
Document registration  
Shared Data Box  
Auto  
1 sided  
Documents  
Select  
orig. size  
Original  
type  
Job006  
Auto size  
100%  
Back Edge  
Select  
regi. size  
Orig. set  
direction  
Reduce  
/Enlarge  
Change  
name  
Basic  
Edit  
Quality  
Metric specifications  
Original  
A4  
Register  
A4  
Ready to register document(s).  
Set original. Press Start key.  
25/10/'01 19:20  
Job cancel  
Document registration  
Shared Data Box  
Auto  
1-sided  
Documents  
Select  
size orig.  
Original  
type  
Job001  
Touch the “Document printing” key under “Shared Data Box”.  
The “Document printing” screen will be displayed.  
Auto size  
100%  
Back Edge  
Reduce/  
Enlarge  
Orig. set  
direction  
Select  
regi. size  
2
Change  
name  
Basic  
Edit  
Quality  
Inch specifications  
Select function.  
25/10/'01 19:20  
Document Management  
End  
NOTE  
Shared Data Box  
Synergy Print Box  
Form box  
Refer to “11. Entering characters” on page 7-104 for information on  
entering characters.  
Form  
reg.  
Document  
reg.  
Document  
printing  
Document  
reg.  
Document  
printing  
Box  
Editing  
Box  
Editing  
Box  
Editing  
Metric specifications  
Touch the “Select orig. size” [“Select size orig.”] key, the  
5
“Select regi. size” key, the “Original type” key, the “Reduce/  
Enlarge” key and/or the “Orig.set direction” key, if you want to  
perform the corresponding settings.  
Select function.  
25/10/'01 19:20  
End  
Document Management  
Shared Data Box  
Synergy Print Box  
Form box  
If you want to access the “Scanning density” key and/or the  
“Orig.image quality” [“Image quality”] key to make those  
settings, touch the “Quality” key.  
If you want to set access the “Border Erase” [“Erase Mode”]  
key and/or the “Continuous scanning” [“Multiple scanning”]  
key to make those settings, touch the “Edit” key.  
Document  
registr.  
Document  
printing  
Document  
registr.  
Document  
printing  
Form  
registr.  
Box  
Editing  
Box  
Editing  
Box  
Editing  
Select the documents to be printed out and then touch the  
“Finish selecting” key.  
3
Press the [Start] key. Scanning of the documents will start.  
Once all of the documents have been completely scanned,  
the touch panel will return to the screen in step 3.  
If you want to register another document, repeat steps 3  
through 6.  
6
Inch specifications  
Cancel  
Document printing  
Document data box  
Order of  
indication  
Up  
Job 005  
Job 004  
1
1
25/10/01  
25/10/01  
Conf/Crrt.  
details  
Job 003  
Job 002  
Job 001  
1
1
1
25/10/01  
25/10/01  
25/10/01  
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the  
contents of the “Basic” tab.  
7
Down  
Finish  
selecting  
001/010  
Document Management - Shared Data Box  
Metric specifications  
Job cancel  
Document printing  
Document data box  
Order of  
indication  
Up  
1
1
1
JOB003  
JOB002  
25/10/01  
Check/Rev.  
details  
25/10/01  
25/10/01  
JOB001  
Down  
Finish  
Selecting  
001/003  
Document Management - Shared Data Box  
6-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
3Checking stored documents and changing their names  
NOTE  
Perform the following procedure when you want to verify the name of  
stored documents, the size of the original documents or the date and  
time they were stored in the shared data box, or when you want to  
print out the first page of those document in order to check them.You  
can also use this procedure to change the registered name for the  
documents.  
It is possible to change the order of display for the stored documents.  
To do so, touch the “Order of indication” key, and then touch the “Sort  
by date” key (and select either “New R Old” or “Old R New”) or the  
“Sort by name” key (and select either “A R Z” or “Z R A”), as  
appropriate.  
Press the [Document Management] key. The “Document  
Management” screen will be displayed.  
1
Touch the “Select paper” key, the “Sort/Finished” key and/or  
the “1 sided/ 2 sided” key, to perform the corresponding  
settings.  
4
If you want to access the “Form Overlay” key, the “Margin”  
key, the “Cover Mode” key, the “Page #” [“Page numbering”]  
key, the “Booklet” key and/or the “Select of Output” key to  
make those settings, touch the “Edit” key.  
Press the [Start] key.  
Print out will start.  
5
Touch the “Document printing” key or the “Box Editing” key  
under “Shared Data Box”. The “Document printing” screen or  
the “Box editing” screen, as appropriate, will be displayed.  
2
Inch specifications  
Select function.  
25/10/'01 19:20  
Document Management  
End  
Shared Data Box  
Synergy Print Box  
Form box  
Form  
reg.  
Document  
reg.  
Document  
printing  
Document  
reg.  
Document  
printing  
Box  
Editing  
Box  
Editing  
Box  
Editing  
Metric specifications  
Select function.  
25/10/'01 19:20  
End  
Document Management  
Shared Data Box  
Synergy Print Box  
Form box  
Document  
registr.  
Document  
printing  
Document  
registr.  
Document  
printing  
Form  
registr.  
Box  
Editing  
Box  
Editing  
Box  
Editing  
6-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
Select the documents that you want to check and then touch  
Once you have finished checking the information for those  
documents, touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return  
to the screen in step 3.  
If you want to check the information for other stored  
documents, repeat steps 3 through 5.  
3
5
the “Cont/Crrt. details” [“Check/Rev. details”] key.  
The “Check/Correct details” [“Check/revice details”] screen  
will be displayed.  
Inch specifications  
Close  
Box editing  
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return  
to the screen in step 2.  
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the  
contents of the “Basic” tab.  
Order of  
indication  
Document data box  
Up  
6
Job 005  
Job 004  
1
1
25/10/01  
25/10/01  
Cont/Crrt.  
details  
Job 003  
Job 002  
Job 001  
1
1
1
25/10/01  
25/10/01  
25/10/01  
Down  
Delete  
001/010  
Document Management - Shared Data Box  
Metric specifications  
Close  
Box editing  
Document data box  
Order of  
indication  
Up  
1
1
1
JOB003  
JOB002  
25/10/01  
Check/Rev.  
details  
25/10/01  
25/10/01  
JOB001  
Down  
Delete  
001/003  
Document Management - Shared Data Box  
NOTE  
It is possible to change the order of display for the stored documents.  
To do so, touch the “Order of indication” key, and then touch the “Sort  
by date” key (and select either “New R Old” or “Old R New”) or the  
“Sort by name” key (and select either “A R Z” or “Z R A”), as  
appropriate.  
Check the displayed information.  
If you want to print out the first page of the selected  
documents, touch the “Print from 1st” [“Head Print”] key.  
If you want to change the name of the selected documents,  
touch the “Change doc.name” key and then enter the new  
name.  
4
Inch specifications  
Close  
Check/Correct details  
Item  
Details  
--------------------  
User name  
Change  
doc. name  
Document name  
Registration size  
Orig. set direction  
page #  
Job005  
11x15"  
Back Edge  
1
Copy  
600dpi  
'25/10/01 14:39  
Input source  
Resolution  
Registration date  
Print  
from 1st  
Document Management - Shared Data Box - Box editing  
Metric specifications  
Close  
Check/revise details  
Item  
User name  
Details  
--------------------  
Job006  
Change  
doc. name  
Document name  
Registration size  
Orig. set direction  
page #  
A4  
Back Edge  
1
Copy  
600dpi  
Input source  
Head  
print  
Resolution  
Registration date  
'25/10/01 14:39  
Document Management - Shared Data Box - Box editing  
NOTE  
Refer to “11. Entering characters” on page 7-104 for information on  
entering characters.  
6-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
4Deleting stored documents  
NOTE  
Perform the following procedure when you want to delete stored  
documents.  
It is possible to change the order of display for the stored documents.  
To do so, touch the “Order of indication” key, and then touch the “Sort  
by date” key (and select either “New R Old” or “Old R New”) or the  
“Sort by name” key (and select either “A R Z” or “Z R A”), as  
appropriate.  
Press the [Document Management] key. The “Document  
Management” screen will be displayed.  
1
Touch the “Yes” key or the “No” key, as appropriate.  
4
Inch specifications  
Stop  
Document name : JOB 005  
This document(s) will be deleted. Do you want to delete it?  
Yes  
No  
Touch the “Box Editing” key under “Shared Data Box”.  
The “Box editing” screen will be displayed.  
2
Metric specifications  
Stop  
Inch specifications  
Select function.  
25/10/'01 19:20  
Document Management  
End  
Document name :JOB002  
This document will be deleted. Are you sure?  
Shared Data Box  
Synergy Print Box  
Form box  
Yes  
No  
Form  
reg.  
Document  
reg.  
Document  
printing  
Document  
reg.  
Document  
printing  
Box  
Editing  
Box  
Editing  
Box  
Editing  
If you selected “Yes”, the selected documents will be deleted  
and the touch panel will return to the screen in step 3.  
If you selected “No”, the touch panel will return to the screen  
in step 3 without deleting the selected documents.  
Metric specifications  
Select function.  
25/10/'01 19:20  
End  
Document Management  
Shared Data Box  
Synergy Print Box  
Form box  
If you want to delete other stored documents, repeat steps 3  
and 4.  
5
6
Document  
registr.  
Document  
printing  
Document  
registr.  
Document  
printing  
Form  
registr.  
Box  
Editing  
Box  
Editing  
Box  
Editing  
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 2.  
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the  
contents of the “Basic” tab.  
Select the documents that you want to delete and then touch  
the “Delete” key. A verification screen will be displayed.  
3
Inch specifications  
Close  
Box editing  
Order of  
indication  
Document data box  
Up  
Job 005  
Job 004  
1
1
25/10/01  
25/10/01  
Cont/Crrt.  
details  
Job 003  
Job 002  
Job 001  
1
1
1
25/10/01  
25/10/01  
25/10/01  
Down  
Delete  
001/010  
Document Management - Shared Data Box  
Metric specifications  
Close  
Box editing  
Document data box  
Order of  
indication  
Up  
1
1
1
JOB003  
JOB002  
25/10/01  
Check/Rev.  
details  
25/10/01  
25/10/01  
JOB001  
Down  
Delete  
001/003  
Document Management - Shared Data Box  
6-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
Either touch the synergy print box in which you want to  
register the documents, or enter its number using the  
keypad. Then touch the “Enter” key. The “Document  
registration” screen will be displayed.  
(4) Synergy print boxes  
4
1Storing documents in a box  
Perform the following procedure when you want to register a set of  
documents in a synergy print box.  
Inch specifications  
Document registration  
Select box No.  
Cancel  
Box No.  
(with #key)  
Set the documents to be stored.  
001 ABCD_0000001 006 UVWX_0000006 011 QRST_0000105 016 MNOP_0200104  
002 EFGH_0000002 007 ABCD_0000101 012 UVWX_0000106 017 QRST_0200105  
003 IJKL_0200003 008 EFGH_0000102 013 ABCD_0200101 018 UVWX_0200106  
004 MNOP_0000004 009 IJKL_0000103 014 EFGH_0200102 019 ABCD_050010  
005 QRST_0000005 010 MNOP_0000104 015 IJKL_0200103 020 EFGH_0500102  
1
0
0
7
Press the [Document Management] key. The “Document  
Management” screen will be displayed.  
2
Enter  
1/5  
Document Management - Synergy Print Box  
Metric specifications  
Document registration  
Select box No.  
Job cancel  
Box No.  
(with # key)  
001 ABCD_0000001 006 UVWX_0000006 011 QRST_0000105 016 MNOP_0200104  
002 EFGH_0000002 007 ABCD_0000101 012 UVWX_0000106 017 QRST_0200105  
003 IJKL_0200003 008 EFGH_0000102 013 ABCD_0200101 018 UVWX_0200106  
004 MNOP_0000004 009 IJKL_0000103 014 EFGH_0200102 019 ABCD_050010  
005 QRST_0000005 010 MNOP_0000104 015 IJKL_0200103 020 EFGH_0500102  
0
0
7
Enter  
1/ 5  
Document Management - Synergy Print Box  
Touch the “Change name” key and then enter a name for the  
documents.  
If you do not want to register a name for the documents, go  
directly to the next step.  
Touch the “Document reg.” [“Document registr.”] key under  
“Synergy Print Box”. The screen to select the synergy print  
box will be displayed.  
5
3
Inch specifications  
Inch specifications  
Original  
11x81  
25/10/'01 19:20  
Register  
81  
2x11"  
Select function.  
Ready to register document(s).  
25/10/'01 19:20  
/
2"  
/
Place originals then press Start key.  
Document Management  
End  
Cancel  
Document registration  
Shared Data Box  
Synergy Print Box  
Form box  
007  
Auto  
1 sided  
Documents  
Select  
orig. size  
Original  
type  
Form  
reg.  
Job001  
Document  
reg.  
Document  
printing  
Document  
reg.  
Document  
printing  
Back Eage  
Auto size  
100%  
Select  
regi. size  
Reduce  
/Enlarge  
Orig. set  
direction  
Box  
Editing  
Box  
Editing  
Box  
Editing  
Change  
name  
Basic  
Edit  
Quality  
Metric specifications  
Metric specifications  
Original  
A4  
25/10/'01 19:20  
Register  
A4  
Select function.  
25/10/'01 19:20  
End  
Ready to register document(s).  
Set original. Press Start key.  
Document Management  
Document registration  
Job cancel  
Shared Data Box  
Synergy Print Box  
Form box  
007  
1-sided  
Auto  
Documents  
Select  
size orig.  
Original  
type  
Document  
registr.  
Document  
printing  
Document  
registr.  
Document  
printing  
Job001  
Form  
registr.  
100%  
Back Edge  
Auto size  
Reduce/  
Enlarge  
Orig. set  
direction  
Select  
regi. size  
Box  
Editing  
Box  
Editing  
Box  
Editing  
Change  
name  
Basic  
Edit  
Quality  
NOTE  
Refer to “11. Entering characters” on page 7-104 for information on  
entering characters.  
6-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
Touch the “Select orig. size” [“Select size orig.”] key, the  
“Select regi. size” key, the “Original type” key, the “Reduce/  
Enlarge” key and/or the “Orig.set direction” key, if you want to  
perform the corresponding settings.  
2Combining and printing out stored documents  
6
Perform the following procedure when you want to combine and print  
out documents that are stored in a synergy print box.  
If you want to access the “Scanning density” key and/or the  
“Orig.image quality” [“Image quality”] key to make those  
settings, touch the “Quality” key.  
If you want to set access the “Border Erase” [“Erase Mode”]  
key and/or the “Continuous scanning” [“Multiple scanning”]  
key to make those settings, touch the “Edit” key.  
Press the [Document Management] key. The “Document  
Management” screen will be displayed.  
1
Press the [Start] key. Scanning of the documents will start.  
Once all of the documents have been completely scanned,  
the touch panel will return to the screen in step 3.  
If you want to register another document, repeat steps 3  
through 7.  
7
8
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the  
contents of the “Basic” tab.  
Touch the “Document printing” key under “Synergy Print  
Box”. The screen to select the synergy print box will be  
displayed.  
2
Inch specifications  
Select function.  
25/10/'01 19:20  
Document Management  
End  
Shared Data Box  
Synergy Print Box  
Form box  
Form  
reg.  
Document  
reg.  
Document  
printing  
Document  
reg.  
Document  
printing  
Box  
Editing  
Box  
Editing  
Box  
Editing  
Metric specifications  
Select function.  
25/10/'01 19:20  
End  
Document Management  
Shared Data Box  
Synergy Print Box  
Form box  
Document  
registr.  
Document  
printing  
Document  
registr.  
Document  
printing  
Form  
registr.  
Box  
Editing  
Box  
Editing  
Box  
Editing  
6-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
Either touch the synergy print box that contains the  
Select the document sets in order of how you want them  
printed. Up to 10 sets of documents can be selected.  
3
4
documents to be printed out, or enter its number using the  
keypad. Then touch the “Enter” key. The “Document printing”  
screen will be displayed.  
Inch specifications  
Inch specifications  
Cancel  
Document printing  
Cancel  
Document printing  
Select box No.  
Order of  
indication  
Print once  
all data  
007  
Select:  
2
Up  
Box No.  
(with #key)  
JOB005  
1
1
1
WED 15:32 2  
WED 15:33 1  
WED 15:34  
Conf/Crrt.  
details  
001 ABCD_0000001 006 UVWX_0000006 011 QRST_0000105 016 MNOP_0200104  
002 EFGH_0000002 007 ABCD_0000101 012 UVWX_0000106 017 QRST_0200105  
003 IJKL_0200003 008 EFGH_0000102 013 ABCD_0200101 018 UVWX_0200106  
004 MNOP_0000004 009 IJKL_0000103 014 EFGH_0200102 019 ABCD_0500101  
005 QRST_0000005 010 MNOP_0000104 015 IJKL_0200103 020 EFGH_0500102  
JOB004  
JOB003  
0
0
7
JOB002  
JOB001  
1
1
WED 15:35  
WED 15:37  
001/005  
Select/  
Cancel  
Down  
Finish  
selecting  
Enter  
Document Management - Synergy Print Box  
1/ 5  
Document Management - Synergy Print Box  
Metric specifications  
Metric specifications  
Document printing  
Job cancel  
Document Printineg  
Select box No.  
Job cancel  
Order of  
indication  
Print once  
all data  
007 Box ABCDEFGHIJK  
Select :  
2
2
1
Up  
Box No.  
(with # key)  
1
1
1
JOB005  
WED 15:32  
WED 15:33  
Check/ Rev.  
details  
001 ABCD_0000001 006 UVWX_0000006 011 QRST_0000105 016 MNOP_0200104  
002 EFGH_0000002 007 ABCD_0000101 012 UVWX_0000106 017 QRST_0200105  
003 IJKL_0200003 008 EFGH_0000102 013 ABCD_0200101 018 UVWX_0200106  
004 MNOP_0000004 009 IJKL_0000103 014 EFGH_0200102 019 ABCD_0500101  
005 QRST_0000005 010 MNOP_0000104 015 IJKL_0200103 020 EFGH_0500102  
JOB004  
0
0
7
WED 15:34  
JOB003  
JOB002  
JOB001  
1
1
WED 15:35  
WED 15:37  
Select/  
Cancel  
Down  
Finish  
selecting  
001/005  
Enter  
Document Management - Synergy Print Box  
1/ 5  
Document Management - Synergy Print Box  
NOTES  
NOTES  
• It is possible to change the order of display for the stored  
• If that box was registered with a password, the password entry  
screen will be displayed.  
Enter the registered password with the keypad and then touch the  
“Enter” key.  
documents. To do so, touch the “Order of indication” key, and then  
touch the “Sort by date” key (and select either “New R Old” or “Old  
R New”) or the “Sort by name” key (and select either “A R Z” or “Z  
R A”), as appropriate.  
• If you want to print out more than one set of documents, they must  
all be of the same size.  
Inch specifications  
Enter password.  
Stop  
Touch the “Select paper” key, the “Sort/Finished” key and/or  
the “1 sided/ 2 sided” key, to perform the corresponding  
settings.  
Password  
(Enter by #key)  
********  
5
Clear  
Enter  
If you want to access the “Form Overlay” key, the “Margin”  
key, the “Cover Mode” key, the “Page #” key, the “Booklet”  
key and/or the “Select of Output” key to make those settings,  
touch the “Edit” key.  
007  
Metric specifications  
Stop  
Enter password.  
Press the [Start] key.  
Print out will start.  
6
Password  
(Enter #-key)  
********  
Clear  
Enter  
007 Box Name ABCDEFG  
• Refer to “7 Registering a password for a box” on page 6-18 for  
information on registering the password.  
6-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
3Printing out the full contents of a box  
NOTES  
Perform the following procedure when you want to print out all of the  
documents that are stored in a synergy print box at one time.  
• If that box was registered with a password, the password entry  
screen will be displayed.  
Enter the registered password with the keypad and then touch the  
“Enter” key.  
Press the [Document Management] key. The “Document  
Management” screen will be displayed.  
1
Inch specifications  
Enter password.  
Stop  
Password  
(Enter by #key)  
********  
Clear  
Enter  
007  
Metric specifications  
Stop  
Enter password.  
Password  
(Enter #-key)  
********  
Touch the “Document printing” key under “Synergy Print  
Box”. The screen to select the synergy print box will be  
displayed.  
2
Clear  
Enter  
007 Box Name ABCDEFG  
Inch specifications  
• Refer to “7 Registering a password for a box” on page 6-18 for  
information on registering the password.  
Select function.  
25/10/'01 19:20  
End  
Document Management  
Shared Data Box  
Synergy Print Box  
Form box  
Form  
reg.  
Document  
reg.  
Document  
printing  
Document  
reg.  
Document  
printing  
Touch the “Print once all data” key. Print out will start.  
Once printing is completed, the touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 2.  
Box  
Editing  
Box  
Editing  
Box  
Editing  
4
Metric specifications  
Inch specifications  
Cancel  
Select function.  
Document printing  
25/10/'01 19:20  
End  
Order of  
indication  
Print once  
all data  
Document Management  
007  
Select :  
0
Up  
Job 005  
Job 004  
Job 003  
1
1
1
WED 15:32  
WED 15:33  
WED 15:34  
Shared Data Box  
Synergy Print Box  
Form box  
Conf/Crrt.  
details  
Document  
registr.  
Document  
printing  
Document  
registr.  
Document  
printing  
Form  
registr.  
Job 002  
Job 001  
1
1
WED 15:35  
WED 15:37  
Select/  
Cancel  
Down  
Finish  
selecting  
Box  
Editing  
Box  
Editing  
Box  
Editing  
001/005  
Document Management - Synergy Print Box  
Metric specifications  
Either touch the synergy print box that contains the  
documents to be printed out, or enter its number using the  
keypad. Then touch the “Enter” key. The “Document printing”  
screen will be displayed.  
Job cancel  
Document printing  
3
Order of  
indication  
Print once  
all data  
007 Box ABCDEFGHIJK  
Select : 0  
WED 15:32  
Up  
1
1
1
JOB005  
Check/ Rev.  
details  
WED 15:33  
JOB004  
WED 15:34  
JOB003  
Inch specifications  
JOB002  
JOB001  
1
1
WED 15:35  
WED 15:37  
Select/  
Cancel  
Down  
Finish  
selecting  
001/005  
Cancel  
Document printing  
Select box No.  
Box No.  
(with #key)  
Document Management - Synergy Print Box  
001 ABCD_0000001 006 UVWX_0000006 011 QRST_0000105 016 MNOP_0200104  
002 EFGH_0000002 007 ABCD_0000101 012 UVWX_0000106 017 QRST_0200105  
003 IJKL_0200003 008 EFGH_0000102 013 ABCD_0200101 018 UVWX_0200106  
004 MNOP_0000004 009 IJKL_0000103 014 EFGH_0200102 019 ABCD_0500101  
005 QRST_0000005 010 MNOP_0000104 015 IJKL_0200103 020 EFGH_0500102  
0
0
7
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the  
contents of the “Basic” tab.  
5
Enter  
1/ 5  
Document Management - Synergy Print Box  
Metric specifications  
Document Printineg  
Select box No.  
Job cancel  
Box No.  
(with # key)  
001 ABCD_0000001 006 UVWX_0000006 011 QRST_0000105 016 MNOP_0200104  
002 EFGH_0000002 007 ABCD_0000101 012 UVWX_0000106 017 QRST_0200105  
003 IJKL_0200003 008 EFGH_0000102 013 ABCD_0200101 018 UVWX_0200106  
004 MNOP_0000004 009 IJKL_0000103 014 EFGH_0200102 019 ABCD_0500101  
005 QRST_0000005 010 MNOP_0000104 015 IJKL_0200103 020 EFGH_0500102  
0
0
7
Enter  
1/ 5  
Document Management - Synergy Print Box  
6-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
4Checking stored documents and changing their names  
Either touch the synergy print box that contains the  
documents to be printed out, or enter its number using the  
keypad. Then touch the “Enter” key. The “Document printing”  
screen or the “Box editing” screen, as appropriate, will be  
displayed.  
3
Perform the following procedure when you want to verify the name of  
stored documents, the size of the original documents or the date and  
time they were stored in the synergy print box, or when you want to  
print out the first page of those document in order to check them.You  
can also use this procedure to change the registered name for the  
documents.  
Inch specifications  
Cancel  
Box editing  
Select box No.  
Box No.  
(with #key)  
001 ABCD_0000001 006 UVWX_0000006 011 QRST_0000105 016 MNOP_0200104  
002 EFGH_0000002 007 ABCD_0000101 012 UVWX_0000106 017 QRST_0200105  
003 IJKL_0200003 008 EFGH_0000102 013 ABCD_0200101 018 UVWX_0200106  
004 MNOP_0000004 009 IJKL_0000103 014 EFGH_0200102 019 ABCD_0500101  
005 QRST_0000005 010 MNOP_0000104 015 IJKL_0200103 020 EFGH_0500102  
Press the [Document Management] key. The “Document  
Management” screen will be displayed.  
1
Enter  
1/ 5  
Document Management - Synergy Print Box  
Metric specifications  
Job cancel  
Box editing  
Select box No.  
Box No.  
(with # key)  
001 ABCD_0000001 006 UVWX_0000006 011 QRST_0000105 016 MNOP_0200104  
002 EFGH_0000002 007 ABCD_0000101 012 UVWX_0000106 017 QRST_0200105  
003 IJKL_0200003 008 EFGH_0000102 013 ABCD_0200101 018 UVWX_0200106  
004 MNOP_0000004 009 IJKL_0000103 014 EFGH_0200102 019 ABCD_0500101  
005 QRST_0000005 010 MNOP_0000104 015 IJKL_0200103 020 EFGH_0500102  
Enter  
1/ 5  
Document Management - Synergy Print Box  
Touch the “Document printing” key or the “Box Editing” key  
under “Synergy Print Box”. The screen to select the synergy  
print box will be displayed.  
2
NOTES  
• If that box was registered with a password, the password entry  
screen will be displayed.  
Inch specifications  
Enter the registered password with the keypad and then touch the  
“Enter” key.  
Select function.  
25/10/'01 19:20  
Document Management  
End  
Inch specifications  
Shared Data Box  
Synergy Print Box  
Form box  
Enter password.  
Stop  
Form  
reg.  
Document  
reg.  
Document  
printing  
Document  
reg.  
Document  
printing  
Box  
Editing  
Box  
Editing  
Box  
Editing  
Password  
(Enter by #key)  
********  
Clear  
Metric specifications  
Enter  
007  
Select function.  
25/10/'01 19:20  
End  
Document Management  
Metric specifications  
Shared Data Box  
Synergy Print Box  
Form box  
Stop  
Enter password.  
Document  
registr.  
Document  
printing  
Document  
registr.  
Document  
printing  
Form  
registr.  
Box  
Editing  
Box  
Editing  
Box  
Editing  
Password  
(Enter #-key)  
********  
Clear  
Enter  
007 Box Name ABCDEFG  
• Refer to “7 Registering a password for a box” on page 6-18 for  
information on registering the password.  
6-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
Select the documents that you want to check and then touch  
the “Conf/Correct details” [“Check/Rev. details”] key. The  
“Check/Correct details” [“Check/revise details”] screen will be  
displayed.  
NOTE  
4
Refer to “11. Entering characters” on page 7-104 for information on  
entering characters.  
Inch specifications  
Box editing  
End  
Once you have finished checking the information for those  
documents, touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return  
to the screen in step 4.  
If you want to check the information for other stored  
documents, repeat steps 4 through 6.  
Order of  
indication  
Delete all  
data / box  
007  
Up  
6
7
JOB005  
1
1
1
WED 15:32  
WED 15:33  
WED 15:34  
Conf/Crrt  
details  
Box  
Password  
JOB004  
JOB003  
JOB002  
JOB001  
1
1
WED 15:35  
WED 15:37  
Down  
Delete  
001/005  
Document Management - Synergy Print Box  
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 2.  
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the  
contents of the “Basic” tab.  
Metric specifications  
Box editing  
End  
Order of  
indication  
Delete all  
box data  
007 Box ABCDEFGHIJK  
Up  
1
1
1
JOB005  
WED 15:32  
Check/ Rev.  
details  
Box  
Password  
WED 15:33  
JOB004  
WED 15:34  
JOB003  
JOB002  
JOB001  
1
1
WED 15:35  
WED 15:37  
Down  
Delete  
001/005  
Document Management - Synergy Print Box  
NOTE  
It is possible to change the order of display for the stored documents.  
To do so, touch the “Order of indication” key, and then touch the “Sort  
by date” key (and select either “New R Old” or “Old R New”) or the  
“Sort by name” key (and select either “A R Z” or “Z R A”), as  
appropriate.  
Check the displayed information.  
If you want to print out the first page of the selected  
documents, touch the “Print from 1st” [“Head print”] key.  
If you want to change the name of the selected documents,  
touch the “Change doc.name” key and then enter the new  
name.  
5
Inch specifications  
Close  
Check/Correct details  
Item  
Details  
--------------------  
User name  
Change  
doc. name  
Document name  
Registration size  
Orig. set direction  
page #  
Job006  
1
11x8 /2  
"
Back Edge  
1
Input source  
Resolution  
Copy  
600dpi  
'25/10/01 14:39  
Print  
from 1st  
Registration date  
Document Management - Synergy Print Box - Box editing  
Metric specifications  
Close  
Check/revise details  
Item  
Details  
User name  
--------------------  
Job006  
Change  
doc. name  
Document name  
Registration size  
Orig. set direction  
page #  
A4  
Back Edge  
1
Copy  
600dpi  
'25/10/01 14:39  
Input source  
Head  
print  
Resolution  
Registration date  
Document Management - Synergy Print Box - Box editing  
6-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
5Deleting stored documents from a box  
NOTES  
Perform the following procedure when you want to delete stored  
documents.  
• If that box was registered with a password, the password entry  
screen will be displayed.  
Enter the registered password with the keypad and then touch the  
“Enter” key.  
Press the [Document Management] key. The “Document  
Management” screen will be displayed.  
1
Inch specifications  
Enter password.  
Stop  
Password  
(Enter by #key)  
********  
Clear  
Enter  
007  
Metric specifications  
Stop  
Enter password.  
Password  
(Enter #-key)  
********  
Touch the “Box Editing” key under “Synergy Print Box”. The  
screen to select the synergy print box will be displayed.  
2
Clear  
Enter  
Inch specifications  
007 Box Name ABCDEFG  
Select function.  
25/10/'01 19:20  
• Refer to “7 Registering a password for a box” on page 6-18 for  
Document Management  
End  
information on registering the password.  
Shared Data Box  
Synergy Print Box  
Form box  
Form  
reg.  
Document  
reg.  
Document  
printing  
Document  
reg.  
Document  
printing  
Box  
Editing  
Box  
Editing  
Box  
Editing  
Select the documents that you want to delete and then touch  
the “Delete” key. A verification screen will be displayed.  
4
Metric specifications  
Inch specifications  
Select function.  
Box editing  
End  
25/10/'01 19:20  
End  
Order of  
indication  
Delete all  
data / box  
007  
Document Management  
Up  
JOB005  
1
1
1
WED 15:32  
WED 15:33  
WED 15:34  
Shared Data Box  
Synergy Print Box  
Form box  
Conf/Crrt  
details  
Box  
JOB004  
JOB003  
Password  
JOB002  
JOB001  
1
1
WED 15:35  
WED 15:37  
Document  
registr.  
Document  
printing  
Document  
registr.  
Document  
printing  
Form  
registr.  
Down  
Delete  
Box  
Editing  
Box  
Editing  
Box  
Editing  
001/005  
Document Management - Synergy Print Box  
Metric specifications  
Either touch the synergy print box that contains the  
documents to be deleted, or enter its number using the  
keypad. Then touch the “Enter” key. The “Box editing” screen  
will be displayed.  
Box editing  
End  
3
Order of  
indication  
Delete all  
box data  
007 Box ABCDEFGHIJK  
Up  
1
1
1
JOB005  
WED 15:32  
Check/ Rev.  
details  
Box  
WED 15:33  
JOB004  
Password  
WED 15:34  
JOB003  
Inch specifications  
JOB002  
JOB001  
1
1
WED 15:35  
WED 15:37  
Down  
Delete  
001/005  
Cancel  
Box editing  
Select box No.  
Box No.  
(with #key)  
Document Management - Synergy Print Box  
001 ABCD_0000001 006 UVWX_0000006 011 QRST_0000105 016 MNOP_0200104  
002 EFGH_0000002 007 ABCD_0000101 012 UVWX_0000106 017 QRST_0200105  
003 IJKL_0200003 008 EFGH_0000102 013 ABCD_0200101 018 UVWX_0200106  
004 MNOP_0000004 009 IJKL_0000103 014 EFGH_0200102 019 ABCD_0500101  
005 QRST_0000005 010 MNOP_0000104 015 IJKL_0200103 020 EFGH_0500102  
NOTE  
Enter  
It is possible to change the order of display for the stored documents.  
To do so, touch the “Order of indication” key, and then touch the “Sort  
by date” key (and select either “New R Old” or “Old R New”) or the  
“Sort by name” key (and select either “A R Z” or “Z R A”), as  
appropriate.  
1/ 5  
Document Management - Synergy Print Box  
Metric specifications  
Job cancel  
Box editing  
Select box No.  
Box No.  
(with # key)  
001 ABCD_0000001 006 UVWX_0000006 011 QRST_0000105 016 MNOP_0200104  
002 EFGH_0000002 007 ABCD_0000101 012 UVWX_0000106 017 QRST_0200105  
003 IJKL_0200003 008 EFGH_0000102 013 ABCD_0200101 018 UVWX_0200106  
004 MNOP_0000004 009 IJKL_0000103 014 EFGH_0200102 019 ABCD_0500101  
005 QRST_0000005 010 MNOP_0000104 015 IJKL_0200103 020 EFGH_0500102  
Enter  
1/ 5  
Document Management - Synergy Print Box  
6-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
Touch the “Yes” key or the “No” key, as appropriate.  
Inch specifications  
6Deleting the full contents of a box  
5
Perform the following procedure when you want to delete the full  
contents of a synergy print box in one step.  
Stop  
Press the [Document Management] key. The “Document  
Management” screen will be displayed.  
1
Document name : Job 005  
This document(s) will be deleted. Do you want to delete it?  
Yes  
No  
Metric specifications  
Stop  
Document name : JOB005  
This document will be deleted. Are you sure?  
Yes  
No  
Touch the “Box editing” key under “Synergy Print Box”. The  
screen to select the synergy print box will be displayed.  
2
If you selected “Yes”, the selected documents will be deleted  
and the touch panel will return to the screen in step 4.  
If you selected “No”, the touch panel will return to the screen  
in step 4 without deleting the selected documents.  
Inch specifications  
Select function.  
25/10/'01 19:20  
Document Management  
End  
If you want to delete other stored documents, repeat steps 4  
and 5.  
Shared Data Box  
Synergy Print Box  
Form box  
6
7
Form  
reg.  
Document  
reg.  
Document  
printing  
Document  
reg.  
Document  
printing  
Box  
Editing  
Box  
Editing  
Box  
Editing  
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 2.  
Touch the “End” key once again. The touch panel will return  
to the contents of the “Basic” tab.  
Metric specifications  
Select function.  
25/10/'01 19:20  
End  
Document Management  
Shared Data Box  
Synergy Print Box  
Form box  
Document  
registr.  
Document  
printing  
Document  
registr.  
Document  
printing  
Form  
registr.  
Box  
Editing  
Box  
Editing  
Box  
Editing  
Either touch the synergy print box that contains the  
documents to be deleted, or enter its number using the  
keypad. Then touch the “Enter” key. The “Box editing” screen  
will be displayed.  
3
Inch specifications  
Cancel  
Box editing  
Select box No.  
Box No.  
(with #key)  
001 ABCD_0000001 006 UVWX_0000006 011 QRST_0000105 016 MNOP_0200104  
002 EFGH_0000002 007 ABCD_0000101 012 UVWX_0000106 017 QRST_0200105  
003 IJKL_0200003 008 EFGH_0000102 013 ABCD_0200101 018 UVWX_0200106  
004 MNOP_0000004 009 IJKL_0000103 014 EFGH_0200102 019 ABCD_0500101  
005 QRST_0000005 010 MNOP_0000104 015 IJKL_0200103 020 EFGH_0500102  
Enter  
1/ 5  
Document Management - Synergy Print Box  
Metric specifications  
Job cancel  
Box editing  
Select box No.  
Box No.  
(with # key)  
001 ABCD_0000001 006 UVWX_0000006 011 QRST_0000105 016 MNOP_0200104  
002 EFGH_0000002 007 ABCD_0000101 012 UVWX_0000106 017 QRST_0200105  
003 IJKL_0200003 008 EFGH_0000102 013 ABCD_0200101 018 UVWX_0200106  
004 MNOP_0000004 009 IJKL_0000103 014 EFGH_0200102 019 ABCD_0500101  
005 QRST_0000005 010 MNOP_0000104 015 IJKL_0200103 020 EFGH_0500102  
Enter  
1/ 5  
Document Management - Synergy Print Box  
6-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
Touch the “Yes” key or the “No” key, as appropriate.  
NOTES  
5
Inch specifications  
• If that box was registered with a password, the password entry  
screen will be displayed.  
Stop  
Enter the registered password with the keypad and then touch the  
“Enter” key.  
Document Number: 10  
Inch specifications  
All data in box will be deleted. Do you want to delete?  
Enter password.  
Stop  
Yes  
No  
Password  
(Enter by #key)  
********  
Metric specifications  
Clear  
Stop  
Enter  
007  
Document Number :  
5
Metric specifications  
All data in box will be deleted. Are you sure?  
Are you sure?  
Stop  
Enter password.  
Yes  
No  
Password  
(Enter #-key)  
********  
Clear  
If you selected “Yes”, the entire contents of the selected box  
will be deleted and the touch panel will return to the screen in  
step 4.  
Enter  
007 Box Name ABCDEFG  
If you selected “No”, the touch panel will return to the screen  
in step 4 without deleting any documents.  
• Refer to “7 Registering a password for a box” on page 6-18 for  
information on registering the password.  
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 2.  
Touch the “End” key once again. The touch panel will return  
to the contents of the “Basic” tab.  
6
Touch the “Delete all data / box” [“Delete all box data”] key. A  
verification screen will be displayed.  
4
Inch specifications  
Box editing  
End  
Order of  
indication  
Delete all  
data / box  
007  
Up  
JOB005  
1
1
1
WED 15:32  
WED 15:33  
WED 15:34  
Conf/Crrt  
details  
Box  
Password  
JOB004  
JOB003  
JOB002  
JOB001  
1
1
WED 15:35  
WED 15:37  
Down  
Delete  
001/005  
Document Management - Synergy Print Box  
Metric specifications  
Box editing  
End  
Order of  
indication  
Delete all  
box data  
007 Box ABCDEFGHIJK  
Up  
1
1
1
JOB005  
WED 15:32  
Check/ Rev.  
details  
Box  
Password  
WED 15:33  
JOB004  
WED 15:34  
JOB003  
JOB002  
JOB001  
1
1
WED 15:35  
WED 15:37  
Down  
Delete  
001/005  
Document Management - Synergy Print Box  
6-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
7Registering a password for a box  
Either touch the synergy print box that you want to set the  
3
password for, or enter its number using the keypad. Then  
touch the “Enter” key. The “Box editing” screen will be  
displayed.  
For security and privacy purposes, you can register a password for  
each synergy print box. In this case, it will be necessary to enter the  
registered password in order to print out, check or delete any  
documents stored in that box. Perform the following procedure when  
you want to change the password settings for any box.  
Inch specifications  
Cancel  
Box editing  
Select box No.  
Box No.  
(with #key)  
001 ABCD_0000001 006 UVWX_0000006 011 QRST_0000105 016 MNOP_0200104  
002 EFGH_0000002 007 ABCD_0000101 012 UVWX_0000106 017 QRST_0200105  
003 IJKL_0200003 008 EFGH_0000102 013 ABCD_0200101 018 UVWX_0200106  
004 MNOP_0000004 009 IJKL_0000103 014 EFGH_0200102 019 ABCD_0500101  
005 QRST_0000005 010 MNOP_0000104 015 IJKL_0200103 020 EFGH_0500102  
Press the [Document Management] key. The “Document  
Management” screen will be displayed.  
1
Enter  
1/ 5  
Document Management - Synergy Print Box  
Metric specifications  
Job cancel  
Box editing  
Select box No.  
Box No.  
(with # key)  
001 ABCD_0000001 006 UVWX_0000006 011 QRST_0000105 016 MNOP_0200104  
002 EFGH_0000002 007 ABCD_0000101 012 UVWX_0000106 017 QRST_0200105  
003 IJKL_0200003 008 EFGH_0000102 013 ABCD_0200101 018 UVWX_0200106  
004 MNOP_0000004 009 IJKL_0000103 014 EFGH_0200102 019 ABCD_0500101  
005 QRST_0000005 010 MNOP_0000104 015 IJKL_0200103 020 EFGH_0500102  
Enter  
1/ 5  
Document Management - Synergy Print Box  
Touch the “Box Editing” key under “Synergy Print Box”. The  
screen to select the synergy print box will be displayed.  
2
NOTE  
Inch specifications  
If that box was registered with a password, the password entry screen  
will be displayed.  
Enter the registered password with the keypad and then touch the  
“Enter” key.  
Select function.  
25/10/'01 19:20  
Document Management  
End  
Shared Data Box  
Synergy Print Box  
Form box  
Inch specifications  
Form  
reg.  
Document  
reg.  
Document  
printing  
Document  
reg.  
Document  
printing  
Enter password.  
Stop  
Box  
Editing  
Box  
Editing  
Box  
Editing  
Password  
(Enter by #key)  
********  
Metric specifications  
Clear  
Enter  
Select function.  
25/10/'01 19:20  
End  
007  
Document Management  
Shared Data Box  
Synergy Print Box  
Form box  
Metric specifications  
Document  
registr.  
Document  
printing  
Document  
registr.  
Document  
printing  
Form  
registr.  
Stop  
Enter password.  
Box  
Editing  
Box  
Editing  
Box  
Editing  
Password  
(Enter #-key)  
********  
Clear  
Enter  
007 Box Name ABCDEFG  
6-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
Touch the “Box Password” key. A verification screen will be  
displayed.  
4
Inch specifications  
Box editing  
End  
Order of  
indication  
Delete all  
data / box  
007  
Up  
JOB005  
JOB004  
1
1
1
WED 15:32  
WED 15:33  
WED 15:34  
Conf/Crrt  
details  
Box  
Password  
JOB003  
JOB002  
JOB001  
1
1
WED 15:35  
WED 15:37  
Down  
Delete  
001/005  
Document Management - Synergy Print Box  
Metric specifications  
Box editing  
End  
Order of  
indication  
Delete all  
box data  
007 Box ABCDEFGHIJK  
Up  
1
1
1
JOB005  
WED 15:32  
Check/ Rev.  
details  
Box  
Password  
WED 15:33  
JOB004  
WED 15:34  
JOB003  
JOB002  
JOB001  
1
1
WED 15:35  
WED 15:37  
Down  
Delete  
001/005  
Document Management - Synergy Print Box  
Use the keypad to enter the new password for that box and  
then touch the “Enter” key. The new password will be  
registered and the touch panel will return to the screen in  
step 4.  
5
Inch specifications  
Stop  
Box Password  
Enter password.  
(Enter by #key)  
New password  
Clear  
Enter  
007  
Metric specifications  
Stop  
Box Password  
Enter password  
(Enter #-key)  
New password  
********  
Clear  
Enter  
007 Box Name ABCDEFG  
NOTES  
• The password can be between 1 and 8 digits long.  
• If you decide not to register a password for that box, touch the  
“Clear” key and then, with nothing entered in the password field,  
touch the “Enter” key.  
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 2.  
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the  
contents of the “Basic” tab.  
6
6-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
2. Output management functions  
(1) What are the “output management” functions?  
The “Output management” functions use the “Print status” screen to manage printing conditions.  
Objective  
Procedure  
When you want to know how many jobs are  
scheduled to be printed before yours.  
You can verify the documents that are waiting to be printed by checking the “Print status” screen.  
The jobs in the list are printed in order from the top down, so you can easily see in which order  
your documents will be printed.  
* The optional Hard Disk must be installed on this copier in order to perform this operation.  
When you want to know whether or not your  
job (scheduled using the job reservation  
function) was printed.  
Check the “Print status” screen. If your job IS in the “Print status” screen, that job has not yet  
been printed.  
* The optional Hard Disk must be installed on this copier in order to perform this operation.  
When you are using the printer functions of  
this copier to print out data from a computer,  
or using the fax functions of this copier to  
receive fax data, and you want know the  
status of your print job.  
With the “output management functions”, jobs using the printer functions of this copier to print out  
data from a computer or using the fax functions of this copier to receive fax data are displayed  
just like any other copy job. These print jobs can be verified just like copy jobs by checking the  
“Print status” screen. (A “ ” icon under the “Job” heading indicates a copy job, a “ ” icon  
indicates a print job, and a “  
” icon indicates a fax job.)  
When you want to check the contents of a  
copy job that is waiting to be printed.  
The number of originals, number of copies to be made, the date the job was scheduled, and the  
status of printing can all be verified in the “Print status” screen. In addition, if you need even more  
detailed information on any particular job, just select that job and touch the “Conf/Crrt. details”  
[“Check/ Correct details”] key to display the e size of the paper the job will be output to and, if it  
has been designated, the location of ejection of the finished copies.  
* The optional Hard Disk must be installed on this copier in order to perform this operation.  
When you want to force-print a copy job that  
is waiting to be printed immediately.  
Select the job that you want to print immediately in the “Print status” screen and touch the “Move  
ahead” [“Move up”] key to move that job upwards to the top of the list.  
* It is only possible to change the printing order for copy jobs. It is not possible to move copy jobs  
ahead of print and fax jobs.  
* The optional Hard Disk must be installed on this copier in order to perform this operation.  
OR, select the job that you want to print immediately in the “Print status” screen and touch the  
“Interrupt print” key to stop the job that is currently being printed and start print out for the  
selected job.  
* The optional Hard Disk must be installed on this copier in order to force-print a copy job.  
When you want to cancel a copy job that is  
waiting to be printed.  
Select the job that you want to cancel in the “Print status” screen and touch the “Cancel/Delete”  
key. The selected job will be canceled.  
* The optional Hard Disk must be installed on this copier in order to perform this operation.  
6-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
The following operations can be managed.  
● When the optional Hard Disk is NOT installed  
Check print  
Change the  
print order  
Interrupt  
printing  
Cancel / Delete  
Check job  
contents  
status  
(force-print)  
Copy job  
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
Print or Fax job  
● When the optional Hard Disk IS installed  
Check print  
status  
Change the  
print order  
Interrupt  
printing  
Cancel / Delete  
Check job  
contents  
(force-print)  
1
Copy job  
*
Print or Fax job  
✕
✕
✕
*1 Print or fax jobs will automatically be moved to a position immediately after the job currently being printed. It is not possible to move copy jobs  
ahead of print and fax jobs.  
(2) Display of the output management functions  
Press the [Job Queue] key. The “Print status” screen will be displayed.  
Inch specifications  
Print management  
End  
Job  
Input source  
Copy  
Printer  
Original  
100  
Set  
100  
Registration  
10/10 23:00  
State  
123  
Printing  
124  
127  
128  
_ _ _  
_ _ _  
1
_ _ _  
_ _ _  
5
_ _ _  
_ _ _  
Waiting  
Waiting  
Waiting  
Fax  
Copy  
10/10 23:00  
interrupt  
print  
Cancel/  
Delete  
Move  
ahead  
Move  
behind  
Conf/Crrt.  
details  
10/10 23:50  
Prt status  
Metric specifications  
Print management  
End  
Job  
123  
Input source  
Copy  
Original  
100  
Set  
Registration  
State  
10/10 23:00  
100  
Printing  
124  
127  
128  
Printer  
Fax  
_ _ _  
_ _ _  
1
_ _ _  
_ _ _  
5
_ _ _  
_ _ _  
Waiting  
Waiting  
Waiting  
Copy  
10/10 23:00  
Move  
up  
Move  
down  
interrupt  
print  
Cancel /  
Delete  
Check/ Rev.  
details  
Prnt status  
10/10 23:50  
6-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 6 DOCUMENT AND OUTPUT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
(3) The “Print status” screen  
This screen displays the currently set printing conditions and the job queue of documents waiting to be printed.  
Inch specifications  
Metric specifications  
1
8
7
1
8
7
Print management  
End  
Print management  
End  
Job  
123  
Input source  
Copy  
Original  
100  
Set  
100  
Registration  
10/10 23:00  
State  
Job  
123  
Input source  
Copy  
Original  
100  
Set  
100  
Registration  
State  
10/10 23:00  
Printing  
Printing  
124  
127  
128  
Printer  
Fax  
_ _ _  
_ _ _  
1
_ _ _  
_ _ _  
5
_ _ _  
_ _ _  
Waiting  
Waiting  
Waiting  
124  
127  
128  
Printer  
Fax  
_ _ _  
_ _ _  
1
_ _ _  
_ _ _  
5
_ _ _  
_ _ _  
Waiting  
Waiting  
Waiting  
Copy  
10/10 23:00  
Copy  
10/10 23:00  
interrupt  
print  
Cancel/  
Delete  
Move  
up  
Move  
down  
interrupt  
print  
Cancel /  
Delete  
Check/ Rev.  
details  
Move  
ahead  
Move  
behind  
Conf/Crrt.  
details  
Prnt status  
10/10 23:50  
Prt status  
10/10 23:50  
2
3
4
5
6
2
3
4
5
6
1 Job queue  
Displays information about each job in the queue.  
6 “Conf/Crrt.details” [“Check/Rev. details”] key  
Touching this key displays the “Check/Correct details” [“Check/  
revise details”] screen, enabling you, for example, to check the  
contents of, or change the number of copies to be made for, the  
currently selected (highlighted) job. (This is only available when  
the optional Hard Disk is installed on this copier.)  
The job at the top of the list is that job that is currently being  
printed. The rest of the jobs will be printed in order from the top  
down.  
A “ ” icon under the “Job” heading indicates a copy job, a “  
”
icon indicates a print job, and a “  
2 “Move ahead” key  
” icon indicates a fax job.  
Inch specifications  
Touching this key moves the currently selected (highlighted) job  
Check/Correct details  
Close  
upward in the job queue. A job can be moved as far as the second  
highest position in the list. In this case, print out for that job will  
begin as soon as the current job is completed. (This is only  
available when the optional Hard Disk is installed on this copier.)  
3 “Move behind” [“Move down”] key  
Item  
Details  
1
1
Orig. page  
Set  
1
11x8  
Copy  
11/01 15:31  
/2"  
Print size  
Input source  
Registration date  
Change  
Preset  
Touching this key moves the currently selected (highlighted) job  
downward in the job queue. (This is only available when the  
optional Hard Disk is installed on this copier.)  
Job 5  
Metric specifications  
4 “Interrupt print” key  
Close  
Check/revise details  
Touching this key interrupts the job that is currently being printed  
and start print out for the currently selected (highlighted) job. (The  
selected job will be moved to the top of the list.)  
Item  
Details  
1
1
Original  
Set  
A4  
Copy  
11/01 15:31  
Print size  
Input source  
Registration date  
5 “Cancel/Delete” key  
Touching this key cancels the currently selected (highlighted) job  
and deletes it from the job queue. (This is only available when the  
optional Hard Disk is installed on this copier.)  
Change  
Preset  
Job 5  
7 “M” and “N” cursor keys  
Use these keys to select a job from the job queue.  
8 “End” key  
Touching this key quits the output management function. In this  
case, the touch panel will return to the contents of the “Basic” tab.  
6-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
1. Copy management mode  
By registering a different department ID-code for each individual department that uses the copier, the copy management function will help you  
manage the overall number of copies made by each department.  
The copy management function in this copier offers the following features.  
• Manage use of all optional functions (printer, scanner and fax) utilized by the same department ID-code.  
• Manage up to 100 individual departments. (Up to 1000 when the optional Hard Disk is installed on this copier.)  
• Register department ID-codes of up to 8 digits (between 0 and 99999999).  
• Check the total number of copies made under all department ID-codes as a whole or by each individual department.  
• Set copy limits to any 1-page increment up to 999,999.  
• Clear the copy counts for all department ID-codes at one time or for each individual department.  
• Check copy counts for your own department without the need to enter the management code. Just enter the corresponding department ID-code.  
IMPORTANT!  
In order to access the “Change restrictions for use” procedure under “Editing copy management information”, it is necessary to select “On” under  
“Copier function management ON/OFF”. When the optional Printer Kit, Printer/Scanner Kit or Fax Kit are installed in your copier, it is necessary to  
select “On” under the corresponding “Printer function management ON/OFF”, “Scanner function management ON/OFF” or “Fax function  
management ON/OFF” procedure. (See “(6) Changing the copy management default settings” on page 7-25.)  
7-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
(1) Copy management procedures  
Procedure  
Description  
Reference  
page  
Editing copy management  
information  
• Register new department ID-codes  
7-4  
Perform this procedure when you want to register a new department ID-code and set the  
restrictions for using the copier under that ID-code. Up to 100 department ID-codes can  
be registered. (When the optional Hard Disk is installed on this copier, up to 1000  
department ID-codes can be registered.)  
• Delete department ID-codes  
Perform this procedure when you want to delete registered department ID-codes.  
7-16  
7-17  
• Change registered information  
Perform this procedure when you want to change a department name or the  
corresponding ID-code.  
• Change restrictions for use  
Perform this procedure when you want to change the restrictions for using the copier  
under each department ID-code.  
7-20  
7-21  
Checking the copy management  
counts  
• Check all departments  
Perform this procedure when you want to check the total number of copies made under  
all department ID-codes as a whole, print out a copy management report and clear the  
copy counts for all of the registered department ID-codes.  
• Check individual departments  
7-23  
Perform this procedure when you want to check the total number of copies made under  
each individual department ID-code and/or clear the copy counts for individual  
departments as well.  
Turning the copy management  
function ON/OFF  
Perform this procedure and touch the “On” key when you want to turn the copy  
management function ON, or touch the “Off” key to turn the copy management function  
OFF.  
7-25  
7-25  
Changing the copy management  
default settings  
Perform this procedure when you want to change the default settings for the copy  
management function.  
7-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
Use the numeric keys on the keypad to enter the 4-digit  
management code.  
(2) Accessing the copy management menu screen  
3
Perform the following procedure in order to access the copy  
management menu screen.  
The factory default management code for 30 cpm copiers is  
“3000”, for 40 cpm copiers is “4000” and for 50 cpm copiers  
is “5000”.  
If the entered management code matches the currently  
registered one, the copy management menu screen will be  
displayed.  
With the content of the “Basic” tab displayed, press the  
[Default Setting/Counter] key.  
The “Default setting”screen will be displayed.  
1
Inch specifications  
Close  
Enter the administrator number  
Metric specifications  
Close  
Enter the administrator number  
Touch the “Management” key on the right side of the touch  
panel.  
2
Inch specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting  
End  
Copy  
default  
Language  
Management  
Touch the key that corresponds to the desired procedure.  
The setting screen for that procedure will be displayed.  
Bypass  
setting  
BOX  
Management  
Counter  
check  
4
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
Inch specifications  
Close  
Management  
Metric specifications  
Managem. Total  
Register/Sett.  
Management  
Default setting / Counter  
Management  
total  
Each Mgt.  
Total  
Management  
edit  
Management  
Def. Set.  
Default setting  
End  
Off  
On  
Copy  
Language  
default  
Management  
Default setting  
Bypass  
setting  
Hard Disk  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
Metric specifications  
Close  
Management  
Managem. Total  
Register/Sett.  
Management  
Management  
total  
Each Mgt.  
Total  
Management  
edit  
Management  
Def. Set.  
Off  
On  
Default setting  
NOTES  
• It is possible for you to change the 4-digit management code. (See  
“Changing the management code” on page 7-56.)  
• Perform the following procedure that corresponds to the desired  
setting.  
7-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
Touch the “Register” key.  
The “New register” screen will be displayed.  
(3) Editing copy management information  
3
Inch specifications  
● Register new department ID-codes  
Close  
Management edit  
Perform the following procedure when you want to register  
department ID-codes (up to 8-digits per ID-code) and the  
corresponding department name, and set certain restrictions for using  
the copier under that ID-code.  
Order of  
indication  
Department  
Up  
01  
02  
0001  
0014  
00000015  
00000016  
00000017  
1st Sales Dept.  
2nd Sales Dept.  
3rd Sales Dept.  
4th Sales Dept.  
5th Sales Dept.  
6th Sales Dept.  
7th Sales Dept.  
Mgt. Inf.  
correction  
Limit  
in use  
Delete  
Down  
Access the copy management menu screen.  
Register  
001/010  
1
(See “Accessing the copy management menu screen”.)  
Default setting - Management  
Inch specifications  
Metric specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Close  
Management edit  
Default setting  
End  
Order of  
indication  
Department  
Up  
Copy  
default  
Language  
Management  
01  
02  
0001  
0014  
00000015  
00000016  
00000017  
1st Sales Dept.  
2nd Sales Dept.  
3rd Sales Dept.  
4th Sales Dept.  
5th Sales Dept.  
6th Sales Dept.  
7th Sales Dept.  
Mgt. Inf.  
correction  
Limit  
in use  
Bypass  
setting  
BOX  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
Delete  
Down  
Register  
001/010  
Default setting - Management  
Metric specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Select “ID-code” under the “Setting item” column on the left  
side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.  
The “ID-code” screen will be displayed.  
4
Default setting  
End  
Copy  
Language  
default  
Management  
Bypass  
setting  
Hard Disk  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Inch specifications  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
Cancel  
New register  
Setting item  
Value  
(No register)  
(No register)  
ID-code  
Name to display  
Touch the “Management edit” key.  
The “Management edit” screen will be displayed.  
Change #  
2
Next  
Default setting - Management - Management edit  
Inch specifications  
Close  
Management  
Metric specifications  
Managem. Total  
Register/Sett.  
Management  
Job cancel  
New register  
Setting item  
Value  
(No register)  
(No register)  
Management  
total  
Each Mgt.  
Total  
Management  
edit  
Management  
Def. Set.  
ID-code  
Off  
On  
Name to display  
Default setting  
Change #  
Next  
Default setting - Management - Management edit  
Metric specifications  
Close  
Management  
Managem. Total  
Register/Sett.  
Management  
Management  
total  
Each Mgt.  
Total  
Management  
edit  
Management  
Def. Set.  
Off  
On  
Default setting  
7-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
Use the numeric keys on the keypad to enter the department  
ID-code that you want to register (up to 8 digits).  
You can enter any number between “0” and “99999999”.  
Enter the name for that department, and then touch the  
“End” key.  
The touch panel will return to the screen in step 4.  
5
8
Inch specifications  
Inch specifications  
Back  
Close  
Stop  
End  
ID-code  
Name to display  
1st Sales Dept.  
Limit:32 letters including #  
AllDel.  
Del. prev  
(0~99999999)  
0007  
1
2
z
3
x
4
c
5
v
6
b
7
n
8
9
0
-
/
=
`
ID-code  
q
w
e
r
t
y
u
i
o
p
[
]
\
Clear  
a
s
d
f
g
h
j
k
l
;
'
m
,
.
Capital  
Letter  
Num./Sym.  
Space  
Management - Management edit - New register  
Metric specifications  
Metric specifications  
Back  
Close  
Stop  
End  
ID-code  
Name to display  
1st Sales Dept.  
Limit: 32 letters inc. # key  
AllDel.  
Del. prev  
(0~99999999)  
1
2
3
x
4
c
5
v
6
b
7
n
8
9
0
-
/
=
`
ID-code  
0007  
q
w
e
r
t
y
u
i
o
p
[
]
\
`
Clear  
a
s
d
f
g
h
j
k
l
;
'
z
m
,
.
Capital  
Letter  
Symbol 1  
Symbol 2  
Space  
Management - Management edit - New register  
NOTE  
Touch the “Close” key.  
The touch panel will return to the screen in step 4.  
6
7
For information on how to enter the department name, refer to  
“11. Entering characters” on page 7-104.  
Select “Name to display” under the “Setting item” column on  
the left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #”  
key.  
The “Name to display” screen will be displayed.  
Once you are finished registering that department's ID-code  
and name, touch the “Next” key.  
9
Inch specifications  
Cancel  
New register  
Inch specifications  
Setting item  
Value  
Cancel  
New register  
ID-code  
Name to display  
0007  
(No register)  
Setting item  
Value  
ID-code  
Name to display  
0007  
1st Sales Dept.  
Change #  
Next  
Change #  
Default setting - Management - Management edit  
Next  
Default setting - Management - Management edit  
Metric specifications  
Job cancel  
New register  
Metric specifications  
Setting item  
Value  
Job cancel  
ID-code  
Name to display  
0007  
(No register)  
New register  
Setting item  
Value  
Change #  
ID-code  
Name to display  
0007  
1st Sales Dept.  
Next  
Default setting - Management - Management edit  
Change #  
Next  
Default setting - Management - Management edit  
NOTES  
• Be sure to register both of the setting items above, If you do not, an  
error will occur and you will be unable to continue to the next step.  
• If you attempt to register a department ID-code or a department  
name that is already registered, an error will occur and you will be  
unable to continue to the next step. In this case, select a different ID-  
code and/or name, as appropriate.  
7-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
Set the restrictions for using the copier under that  
department ID-code.  
Touch the “Close” key.  
The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.  
10  
12  
Inch specifications  
Inch specifications  
Close  
Cancel  
Management edit  
New register  
1st Sales Dept.  
Setting item  
0007  
Order of  
indication  
Department  
Up  
Value  
01  
02  
0001  
0007  
0014  
00000015  
00000016  
1st Sales Dept.  
2nd Sales Dept.  
3rd Sales Dept.  
1st Sales Dept.  
4th Sales Dept.  
5th Sales Dept.  
6th Sales Dept.  
Mgt. Inf.  
correction  
Limit  
in use  
Copy limitation  
Printer limitation  
Output limitation  
Scanner limitation  
Fax Transm. Limitation  
On  
No limit  
No limit  
No limit  
No limit  
Delete  
Change #  
Down  
Registr.  
Register  
001/011  
Default setting - Management - Management edit  
Default setting - Management  
Metric specifications  
Metric specifications  
Close  
Job cancel  
Management edit  
New register  
1st Sales Dept.  
Setting item  
0007  
Order of  
indication  
Department  
Up  
Value  
01  
02  
0001  
0007  
0014  
00000015  
00000016  
1st Sales Dept.  
2nd Sales Dept.  
3rd Sales Dept.  
1st Sales Dept.  
4th Sales Dept.  
5th Sales Dept.  
6th Sales Dept.  
Mgt. Inf.  
correction  
Limit  
in use  
Copy limitation  
Printer limitation  
Output limitation  
Scanner limitation  
Fax Transm. Limitation  
On  
No limit  
No limit  
No limit  
No limit  
Delete  
Change #  
Down  
Registr.  
Register  
001/011  
Default setting - Management - Management edit  
Default setting - Management  
NOTE  
NOTE  
For information on how to set restrictions, refer to “Setting the  
restrictions for use” on page 7-7.  
If you want to register an ID-code for a new department, touch the  
“Register” key and repeat steps 4 through 12.  
Once you are finished setting the restrictions for that  
department ID-code, touch the “Registr.” key.  
The touch panel will return to the screen in step 3.  
Touch the “Close” key.  
11  
13  
Inch specifications  
Cancel  
New register  
1st Sales Dept.  
Setting item  
0007  
Value  
Copy limitation  
On  
Printer limitation  
Output limitation  
Scanner limitation  
Fax Transm. Limitation  
No limit  
No limit  
No limit  
No limit  
Change #  
Registr.  
Default setting - Management - Management edit  
Metric specifications  
Job cancel  
New register  
1st Sales Dept.  
Setting item  
0007  
Value  
Copy limitation  
On  
Printer limitation  
Output limitation  
Scanner limitation  
Fax Transm. Limitation  
No limit  
No limit  
No limit  
No limit  
Change #  
Registr.  
Default setting - Management - Management edit  
7-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
● Setting the restrictions for use  
Perform the following procedure when you want to set certain restrictions for using the copier under each department ID-code.  
The setting items available for restriction will differ depending upon whether you have selected “All” or “Each” as the “Copy/Printer output  
management” setting. (See “Copy/Printer output management” on page 7-30.)  
The following settings are available.  
If “All” is selected as the “Copy/Printer output management” setting (“All” is the factory default setting)  
Copier  
Printer  
Scanning  
Fax  
transmission  
Reference  
page  
Copying privileges ON/OFF  
Printing privileges ON/OFF  
Output limitation  
●
7-8  
7-9  
●
m
m
7-10  
7-11  
7-12  
Scanning restrictions  
Fax transmission restrictions  
: The available settings are “No limit”, “Counter limit” and “Is not permitted”  
m: The available settings are “No limit” and “Counter limit”  
●: The available settings are “Can use” and “Is not permitted”  
If “Each” is selected as the “Copy/Printer output management” setting  
Copier  
Printer  
Scanning  
Fax  
transmission  
Reference  
page  
Copying restrictions  
7-13  
7-14  
7-11  
7-12  
Printing restrictions  
Scanning restrictions  
Fax transmission restrictions  
: The available settings are “No limit”, “Counter limit” and “Is not permitted”  
7-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
Copying privileges ON/OFF  
To allow copying privileges for this ID-code, touch the “Can  
use” key. To cancel copying privileges completely, touch the  
“Is not permitted” key.  
3
Perform the following procedure when you want to turn copying  
privileges ON or OFF for the corresponding department ID-code.  
Inch specifications  
NOTE  
Back  
Close  
Copy limitation  
This setting will only be available when “On” is selected as the “Copier  
function management ON/OFF” setting.  
Can use  
Is not  
permitted  
Management - Management edit - New register  
Access the screen that contains the copy restriction setting  
1
items. (See “Register new department ID-codes” on page 7-4  
or “Change restrictions for use” on page 7-20.)  
Metric specifications  
Back  
Close  
Copy limitation  
Inch specifications  
Close  
Management edit  
Department  
Order of  
indication  
Up  
Can use  
01  
02  
0001  
0014  
00000015  
00000016  
00000017  
1st Sales Dept.  
2nd Sales Dept.  
3rd Sales Dept.  
4th Sales Dept.  
5th Sales Dept.  
6th Sales Dept.  
7th Sales Dept.  
Is not  
permited  
Mgt. Inf.  
correction  
Limit  
in use  
Delete  
Down  
Management - Management edit - New register  
Register  
001/010  
Default setting - Management  
NOTE  
Metric specifications  
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the  
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.  
Close  
Management edit  
Order of  
indication  
Department  
Up  
01  
02  
0001  
0014  
00000015  
00000016  
00000017  
1st Sales Dept.  
2nd Sales Dept.  
3rd Sales Dept.  
4th Sales Dept.  
5th Sales Dept.  
6th Sales Dept.  
7th Sales Dept.  
Mgt. Inf.  
correction  
Limit  
in use  
Delete  
Down  
Touch the “Close” key.  
4
Register  
001/010  
The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.  
Default setting - Management  
Select “Copy limitation” under the “Setting item” column on  
the left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #”  
key.  
2
The “Copy limitation” screen will be displayed.  
Inch specifications  
Close  
Limit in use  
0007  
1st Sales Dept.  
Setting item  
Value  
Copy limitation  
On  
Printer limitation  
On  
Output limitation  
Scanner limitation  
Fax Transm. Limitation  
No limit  
No limit  
No limit  
Change #  
Default setting - Management - Management edit  
Metric specifications  
Close  
Limit in use  
1st Sales Dept.  
Setting item  
0007  
Value  
Copy limitation  
On  
Printer limitation  
On  
Output limitation  
Scanner limitation  
Fax Transm. Limitation  
No limit  
No limit  
No limit  
Change #  
Default setting - Management - Management edit  
7-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
Printing privileges ON/OFF  
To allow printing privileges for this ID-code, touch the “Can  
use” key. To cancel printing privileges completely, touch the  
“Is not permitted” key.  
3
Perform the following procedure when the optional Printer Kit or  
Printer/Scanner Kit is installed in your copier and you want to turn  
printing privileges ON or OFF for the corresponding department ID-  
code.  
Inch specifications  
Back  
Close  
Printer limitation  
NOTE  
Can use  
This setting will only be available when “On” is selected as the “Printer  
function management ON/OFF” setting.  
Is not  
permitted  
Management - Management edit - New register  
Metric specifications  
Access the screen that contains the copy restriction setting  
items.  
(See “Register new department ID-codes” on page 7-4 or  
“Change restrictions for use” on page 7-20.)  
1
Back  
Close  
Printer limitation  
Inch specifications  
Can use  
Is not  
permited  
Close  
Management edit  
Order of  
indication  
Department  
Up  
Management - Management edit - New register  
01  
02  
0001  
0014  
00000015  
00000016  
00000017  
1st Sales Dept.  
2nd Sales Dept.  
3rd Sales Dept.  
4th Sales Dept.  
5th Sales Dept.  
6th Sales Dept.  
7th Sales Dept.  
Mgt. Inf.  
correction  
Limit  
in use  
Delete  
Down  
NOTE  
Register  
001/010  
Default setting - Management  
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the  
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.  
Metric specifications  
Close  
Management edit  
Order of  
indication  
Department  
Up  
Touch the “Close” key.  
The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.  
01  
02  
0001  
0014  
00000015  
00000016  
00000017  
1st Sales Dept.  
2nd Sales Dept.  
3rd Sales Dept.  
4th Sales Dept.  
5th Sales Dept.  
6th Sales Dept.  
7th Sales Dept.  
4
Mgt. Inf.  
correction  
Limit  
in use  
Delete  
Down  
Register  
001/010  
Default setting - Management  
Select “Printer limitation” under the “Setting item” column on  
the left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #”  
key.  
2
The “Printer limitation” screen will be displayed.  
Inch specifications  
Close  
Limit in use  
0007  
1st Sales Dept.  
Setting item  
Value  
Copy limitation  
On  
Printer limitation  
On  
Output limitation  
Scanner limitation  
Fax Transm. Limitation  
No limit  
No limit  
No limit  
Change #  
Default setting - Management - Management edit  
Metric specifications  
Close  
Limit in use  
1st Sales Dept.  
Setting item  
0007  
Value  
Copy limitation  
On  
Printer limitation  
On  
Output limitation  
Scanner limitation  
Fax Transm. Limitation  
No limit  
No limit  
No limit  
Change #  
Default setting - Management - Management edit  
7-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
Output limitation  
Select “Output limitation” under the “Setting item” column on  
the left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #”  
key.  
2
Perform the following procedure when you want to set the maximum  
number of copies and printouts that can be made under the  
corresponding department ID-code. If the optional Printer Kit or  
Printer/Scanner Kit is installed in your copier, this limit will apply to the  
number of copies AND printouts that can be made in total.  
The “Output limitation” screen will be displayed.  
Inch specifications  
Close  
Limit in use  
0007  
1st Sales Dept.  
Setting item  
Value  
NOTE  
Copy limitation  
On  
Printer limitation  
On  
This setting will not be available when “Is not permitted” is selected for  
both the “Copying privileges ON/OFF” and the “Printing privileges ON/  
OFF” settings, or when “Is not permitted” is selected as the “Copying  
privileges ON/OFF” setting and the optional Printer Kit or Printer/  
Scanner Kit is NOT installed in your copier.  
Output limitation  
Scanner limitation  
Fax Transm. Limitation  
No limit  
No limit  
No limit  
Change #  
Default setting - Management - Management edit  
Metric specifications  
Close  
Limit in use  
1st Sales Dept.  
Setting item  
0007  
Access the screen that contains the copy restriction setting  
items.  
Value  
1
Copy limitation  
Printer limitation  
On  
On  
Output limitation  
Scanner limitation  
Fax Transm. Limitation  
No limit  
No limit  
No limit  
(See “Register new department ID-codes” on page 7-4 or  
“Change restrictions for use” on page 7-20.)  
Change #  
Inch specifications  
Default setting - Management - Management edit  
Close  
Management edit  
Order of  
indication  
Department  
Up  
01  
02  
0001  
0014  
00000015  
00000016  
00000017  
1st Sales Dept.  
2nd Sales Dept.  
3rd Sales Dept.  
4th Sales Dept.  
5th Sales Dept.  
6th Sales Dept.  
7th Sales Dept.  
To set the maximum limit for copying and printing under this  
ID-code, touch the “Counter limit” key and proceed to the  
next step.  
Mgt. Inf.  
correction  
Limit  
in use  
3
Delete  
Down  
To allow unlimited copying and printing, touch the “No limit”  
key and then proceed to step 5.  
Register  
001/010  
Default setting - Management  
Inch specifications  
Metric specifications  
Back  
Close  
Output limitation  
Close  
Management edit  
Order of  
indication  
Department  
Up  
01  
02  
0001  
0014  
00000015  
00000016  
00000017  
1st Sales Dept.  
2nd Sales Dept.  
3rd Sales Dept.  
4th Sales Dept.  
5th Sales Dept.  
6th Sales Dept.  
7th Sales Dept.  
No limit  
Mgt. Inf.  
correction  
Limit  
in use  
Counter  
limit  
Delete  
Down  
Register  
Management - Management edit - New register  
001/010  
Default setting - Management  
Metric specifications  
Back  
Close  
Output limitation  
No limit  
Counter  
limit  
Management - Management edit - New register  
NOTE  
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the  
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.  
7-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
Use the numeric keys on the keypad to enter the maximum  
number of copies and printouts that can be made in total  
under this ID-code. The limit can be set to any 1-page  
increment up to 999,999.  
Scanning restrictions  
4
Perform the following procedure when you want to set the maximum  
number of originals that can be scanned under the corresponding  
department ID-code when the optional Printer/Scanner Kit is installed  
in your copier.  
Inch specifications  
Back  
Close  
Output limitation  
NOTE  
(1~999,999)  
This setting will only be available when “On” is selected as the  
“Scanner function management ON/OFF” setting.  
Limited value  
999,999  
Clear  
No limit  
Counter  
limit  
Management - Management edit - New register  
Access the screen that contains the copy restriction setting  
items.  
(See “Register new department ID-codes” on page 7-4 or  
“Change restrictions for use” on page 7-20.)  
1
Metric specifications  
Back  
Close  
Output limitation  
(1~999,999)  
Inch specifications  
Limited value  
999,999  
Clear  
No limit  
Close  
Management edit  
Counter  
limit  
Order of  
indication  
Department  
Up  
01  
02  
0001  
0014  
00000015  
00000016  
00000017  
1st Sales Dept.  
2nd Sales Dept.  
3rd Sales Dept.  
4th Sales Dept.  
5th Sales Dept.  
6th Sales Dept.  
7th Sales Dept.  
Mgt. Inf.  
correction  
Limit  
in use  
Management - Management edit - New register  
Delete  
Down  
Register  
001/010  
Touch the “Close” key.  
The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.  
5
Default setting - Management  
Metric specifications  
Close  
Management edit  
Order of  
indication  
Department  
Up  
01  
02  
0001  
0014  
00000015  
00000016  
00000017  
1st Sales Dept.  
2nd Sales Dept.  
3rd Sales Dept.  
4th Sales Dept.  
5th Sales Dept.  
6th Sales Dept.  
7th Sales Dept.  
Mgt. Inf.  
correction  
Limit  
in use  
Delete  
Down  
Register  
001/010  
Default setting - Management  
Select “Scanner limitation” under the “Setting item” column  
on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the  
“Change #” key.  
2
The “Scanner limitation” screen will be displayed.  
Inch specifications  
Close  
Limit in use  
0007  
1st Sales Dept.  
Setting item  
Value  
Copy limitation  
On  
Printer limitation  
On  
Output limitation  
Scanner limitation  
Fax Transm. Limitation  
No limit  
No limit  
No limit  
Change #  
Default setting - Management - Management edit  
Metric specifications  
Close  
Limit in use  
1st Sales Dept.  
Setting item  
0007  
Value  
Copy limitation  
On  
Printer limitation  
On  
Output limitation  
Scanner limitation  
Fax Transm. Limitation  
No limit  
No limit  
No limit  
Change #  
Default setting - Management - Management edit  
7-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
Fax transmission restrictions  
To set the maximum number of originals that can be scanned  
under this ID-code, touch the “Counter limit” key and proceed  
to the next step.  
To allow unlimited scanning, touch the “No limit” key, and to  
cancel scanning privileges completely, touch the “Is not  
permitted” key and proceed to step 5.  
3
Perform the following procedure when you want to set the maximum  
number of documents that can be transmitted under the  
corresponding department ID-code when the optional Fax Kit is  
installed in your copier.  
Inch specifications  
NOTE  
Back  
Close  
Scanner limitation  
This setting will only be available when “On” is selected as the “Fax  
function management ON/OFF” setting.  
No limit  
Counter  
limit  
Is not  
permitted  
Access the screen that contains the copy restriction setting  
items.  
(See “Register new department ID-codes” on page 7-4 or  
“Change restrictions for use” on page 7-20.)  
1
Management - Management edit - New register  
Metric specifications  
Back  
Close  
Inch specifications  
Scanner limitation  
Close  
Management edit  
Order of  
indication  
Department  
Up  
No limit  
01  
02  
0001  
0014  
00000015  
00000016  
00000017  
1st Sales Dept.  
2nd Sales Dept.  
3rd Sales Dept.  
4th Sales Dept.  
5th Sales Dept.  
6th Sales Dept.  
7th Sales Dept.  
Mgt. Inf.  
correction  
Limit  
in use  
Counter  
limit  
Is not  
permited  
Delete  
Down  
Management - Management edit - New register  
Register  
001/010  
Default setting - Management  
NOTE  
Metric specifications  
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the  
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.  
Close  
Management edit  
Order of  
indication  
Department  
Up  
01  
02  
0001  
0014  
00000015  
00000016  
00000017  
1st Sales Dept.  
2nd Sales Dept.  
3rd Sales Dept.  
4th Sales Dept.  
5th Sales Dept.  
6th Sales Dept.  
7th Sales Dept.  
Mgt. Inf.  
correction  
Limit  
in use  
Delete  
Down  
Use the numeric keys on the keypad to enter the maximum  
4
Register  
001/010  
number of originals that can be scanned under this ID-code.  
Default setting - Management  
The scanning limit can be set to any 1-page increment up to  
999,999.  
Inch specifications  
Select “Fax transm. Limitation” under the “Setting item”  
column on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the  
“Change #” key.  
2
Back  
Close  
Scanner limitation  
(1~999,999)  
The “Fax transm. Limitation” screen will be displayed.  
Limited value  
999,999  
Clear  
No limit  
Inch specifications  
Counter  
limit  
Close  
Is not  
permitted  
Limit in use  
0007  
1st Sales Dept.  
Management - Management edit - New register  
Setting item  
Value  
Copy limitation  
On  
Printer limitation  
Output limitation  
Scanner limitation  
Fax Transm. Limitation  
On  
Metric specifications  
No limit  
No limit  
No limit  
Change #  
Back  
Close  
Scanner limitation  
Default setting - Management - Management edit  
(1~999,999)  
Limited value  
999,999  
Clear  
No limit  
Metric specifications  
Counter  
limit  
Is not  
permited  
Close  
Limit in use  
1st Sales Dept.  
Setting item  
0007  
Management - Management edit - New register  
Value  
Copy limitation  
On  
Printer limitation  
On  
Output limitation  
Scanner limitation  
Fax Transm. Limitation  
No limit  
No limit  
No limit  
Touch the “Close” key.  
The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.  
Change #  
5
Default setting - Management - Management edit  
7-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
To set the maximum number of documents that can be  
transmitted under this ID-code, touch the “Counter limit” key  
and proceed to the next step.  
To allow unlimited fax transmission, touch the “No limit” key,  
and to cancel fax transmission privileges completely, touch  
the “Is not permitted” key and proceed to step 5.  
Copying restrictions  
3
Perform the following procedure when you want to set the maximum  
number of copies that can be made under the corresponding  
department ID-code.  
NOTES  
Inch specifications  
• This setting will only be available when “On” is selected as the  
“Copier function management ON/OFF” setting.  
Back  
Close  
Fax Transm. Limitation  
No limit  
Counter  
limit  
Access the screen that contains the copy restriction setting  
items.  
(See “Register new department ID-codes” on page 7-4 or  
“Change restrictions for use” on page 7-20.)  
Is not  
permitted  
1
Management - Management edit - New register  
Metric specifications  
Inch specifications  
Back  
Close  
Fax Transm. Limitation  
Close  
Management edit  
Order of  
indication  
Department  
Up  
01  
02  
0001  
0014  
00000015  
00000016  
00000017  
1st Sales Dept.  
2nd Sales Dept.  
3rd Sales Dept.  
4th Sales Dept.  
5th Sales Dept.  
6th Sales Dept.  
7th Sales Dept.  
Mgt. Inf.  
correction  
Limit  
in use  
No limit  
Counter  
limit  
Delete  
Is not  
permited  
Down  
Register  
001/010  
Management - Management edit - New register  
Default setting - Management  
Metric specifications  
NOTE  
Close  
Management edit  
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the  
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.  
Order of  
indication  
Department  
Up  
01  
02  
0001  
0014  
00000015  
00000016  
00000017  
1st Sales Dept.  
2nd Sales Dept.  
3rd Sales Dept.  
4th Sales Dept.  
5th Sales Dept.  
6th Sales Dept.  
7th Sales Dept.  
Mgt. Inf.  
correction  
Limit  
in use  
Delete  
Down  
Register  
Use the numeric keys on the keypad to enter the maximum  
number of documents that can be transmitted under this ID-  
001/010  
4
Default setting - Management  
code. The document limit can be set to any 1-page increment  
up to 999,999.  
Select “Copy limitation” under the “Setting item” column on  
the left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change  
#” key.  
Inch specifications  
2
Back  
Close  
Fax Transm. Limitation  
The “Copy limitation” screen will be displayed.  
(1~999,999)  
Inch specifications  
Limited value  
999,999  
Clear  
No limit  
Counter  
limit  
Close  
Limit in use  
0007  
Is not  
permitted  
1st Sales Dept.  
Setting item  
Value  
Management - Management edit - New register  
Copy limitation  
Printer limitation  
Scanner limitation  
Fax Transm. Limitation  
No limit  
No limit  
No limit  
No limit  
Metric specifications  
Change #  
Back  
Close  
Fax Transm. Limitation  
Default setting - Management - Management edit  
(1~999,999)  
Limited value  
999,999  
Clear  
Metric specifications  
No limit  
Counter  
limit  
Close  
Limit in use  
Is not  
permited  
1st Sales Dept.  
Setting item  
0007  
Value  
Management - Management edit - New register  
Copy limitation  
Printer limitation  
Scanner limitation  
Fax Transm. Limitation  
No limit  
No limit  
No limit  
No limit  
Change #  
Touch the “Close” key.  
The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.  
5
Default setting - Management - Management edit  
7-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
To set the maximum number of copies that can be made  
under this ID-code, touch the “Counter limit” key and proceed  
to the next step.  
To allow unlimited copies, touch the “No limit” key, and to  
cancel copying privileges completely, touch the “Is not  
permitted” key and proceed to step 5.  
Printing restrictions  
3
Perform the following procedure when the optional Printer Kit or  
Printer/Scanner Kit is installed in your copier and you want to set the  
maximum number of printouts that can be made under the  
corresponding department ID-code.  
Inch specifications  
NOTE  
Back  
Close  
Copy limitation  
This setting will only be available when “On” is selected as the “Printer  
function management ON/OFF” setting.  
No limit  
Counter  
limit  
Is not  
permitted  
Access the screen that contains the copy restriction setting  
items.  
(See “Register new department ID-codes” on page 7-4 or  
“Change restrictions for use” on page 7-20.)  
1
Management - Management edit - New register  
Metric specifications  
Back  
Close  
Copy limitation  
Inch specifications  
Close  
Management edit  
Order of  
indication  
Department  
Up  
No limit  
01  
02  
0001  
0014  
00000015  
00000016  
00000017  
1st Sales Dept.  
2nd Sales Dept.  
3rd Sales Dept.  
4th Sales Dept.  
5th Sales Dept.  
6th Sales Dept.  
7th Sales Dept.  
Counter  
limit  
Mgt. Inf.  
correction  
Limit  
in use  
Is not  
permited  
Delete  
Down  
Management - Management edit - New register  
Register  
001/010  
Default setting - Management  
NOTE  
Metric specifications  
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the  
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.  
Close  
Management edit  
Order of  
indication  
Department  
Up  
01  
02  
0001  
0014  
00000015  
00000016  
00000017  
1st Sales Dept.  
2nd Sales Dept.  
3rd Sales Dept.  
4th Sales Dept.  
5th Sales Dept.  
6th Sales Dept.  
7th Sales Dept.  
Mgt. Inf.  
correction  
Limit  
in use  
Delete  
Use the numeric keys on the keypad to enter the maximum  
Down  
4
Register  
number of copies that can be made under this ID-code. The  
001/010  
Default setting - Management  
copy limit can be set to any 1-page increment up to 999,999.  
Inch specifications  
Back  
Close  
Copy limitation  
(1~999,999)  
Limited value  
999,999  
Clear  
No limit  
Counter  
limit  
Is not  
permitted  
Management - Management edit - New register  
Metric specifications  
Back  
Close  
Copy limitation  
(1~999,999)  
Limited value  
999,999  
Clear  
No limit  
Counter  
limit  
Is not  
permited  
Management - Management edit - New register  
Touch the “Close” key.  
The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.  
5
7-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
Select “Printer limitation” under the “Setting item” column on  
the left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change  
#” key.  
Use the numeric keys on the keypad to enter the maximum  
number of printouts that can be made under this ID-code.  
The printing limit can be set to any 1-page increment up to  
999,999.  
2
4
The “Printer limitation” screen will be displayed.  
Inch specifications  
Inch specifications  
Back  
Close  
Close  
Printer limitation  
Limit in use  
1st Sales Dept.  
Setting item  
0007  
Value  
(1~999,999)  
Copy limitation  
Printer limitation  
Scanner limitation  
Fax Transm. Limitation  
No limit  
No limit  
No limit  
No limit  
Limited value  
999,999  
Clear  
No limit  
Counter  
limit  
Change #  
Is not  
permitted  
Default setting - Management - Management edit  
Management - Management edit - New register  
Metric specifications  
Metric specifications  
Back  
Close  
Printer limitation  
Close  
Limit in use  
1st Sales Dept.  
Setting item  
0007  
(1~999,999)  
Value  
Copy limitation  
Printer limitation  
Scanner limitation  
Fax Transm. Limitation  
No limit  
No limit  
No limit  
No limit  
Limited value  
999,999  
Clear  
No limit  
Counter  
limit  
Change #  
Is not  
permited  
Management - Management edit - New register  
Default setting - Management - Management edit  
Touch the “Close” key.  
The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.  
To set the maximum number of printouts that can be made  
under this ID-code, touch the “Counter limit” key and proceed  
to the next step.  
5
3
To allow unlimited printing, touch the “No limit” key, and to  
cancel printing privileges completely, touch the “Is not  
permitted” key and proceed to step 5.  
Inch specifications  
Back  
Close  
Printer limitation  
No limit  
Counter  
limit  
Is not  
permitted  
Management - Management edit - New register  
Metric specifications  
Back  
Close  
Printer limitation  
No limit  
Counter  
limit  
Is not  
permited  
Management - Management edit - New register  
NOTE  
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the  
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.  
7-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
● Delete department ID-codes  
Select the department ID-code that you want to delete, and  
then touch the “Delete” key.  
3
Perform the following procedure when you want to delete registered  
department ID-codes.  
Inch specifications  
Close  
Management edit  
Access the copy management menu screen.  
1
(See “(2) Accessing the copy management menu screen” on  
page 7-3.)  
Order of  
indication  
Department  
Up  
01  
02  
0001  
0014  
00000015  
00000016  
00000017  
1st Sales Dept.  
2nd Sales Dept.  
3rd Sales Dept.  
4th Sales Dept.  
5th Sales Dept.  
6th Sales Dept.  
7th Sales Dept.  
Mgt. Inf.  
correction  
Limit  
in use  
Inch specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Delete  
Down  
Register  
001/010  
Default setting - Management  
Default setting  
End  
Copy  
default  
Language  
Management  
Metric specifications  
Bypass  
setting  
BOX  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Close  
Management edit  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
Order of  
indication  
Department  
Up  
01  
02  
0001  
0014  
00000015  
00000016  
00000017  
1st Sales Dept.  
2nd Sales Dept.  
3rd Sales Dept.  
4th Sales Dept.  
5th Sales Dept.  
6th Sales Dept.  
7th Sales Dept.  
Mgt. Inf.  
correction  
Limit  
in use  
Metric specifications  
Delete  
Down  
Default setting / Counter  
Register  
001/010  
Default setting - Management  
Default setting  
End  
Copy  
Language  
default  
Management  
Bypass  
setting  
Hard Disk  
Management  
Counter  
check  
NOTE  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
It is possible for you to change the order of how the list of ID-codes is  
displayed.  
To so, touch the “Order of indication” key and then touch the “Sort by  
code” key (and select either “1 / 9” or “9 / 1”) or the “Sort by Name”  
key (and select either “A / Z” or “Z / A”), as appropriate.  
Touch the “Management edit” key.  
The “Management edit” screen will be displayed.  
2
Inch specifications  
Close  
Management  
Managem. Total  
Register/Sett.  
Management  
Management  
total  
Each Mgt.  
Total  
Management  
edit  
Management  
Def. Set.  
Off  
On  
Default setting  
Metric specifications  
Close  
Management  
Managem. Total  
Register/Sett.  
Management  
Management  
total  
Each Mgt.  
Total  
Management  
edit  
Management  
Def. Set.  
Off  
On  
Default setting  
7-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
Verify that this is the ID-code that you want to delete, and  
touch the “Yes” key.  
The touch panel will return to the screen in step 3.  
● Change registered information  
4
Perform the following procedure when you want to change a  
previously registered department name or the corresponding ID-code.  
Inch specifications  
Access the copy management menu screen.  
(See “(2) Accessing the copy management menu screen” on  
page 7-3.)  
1
Stop  
Inch specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
ID-code: 0007  
1st Sales Dept.  
Name to display:  
Are you sure you want to delete this ID-code?  
Default setting  
End  
Yes  
No  
Copy  
default  
Language  
Management  
Bypass  
setting  
BOX  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Metric specifications  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
Stop  
ID-code: 0007  
1st Sales Dept.  
Metric specifications  
Name to display:  
Are you sure you want to delete this ID-code?  
Default setting / Counter  
Yes  
No  
Default setting  
End  
Copy  
Language  
default  
Management  
Bypass  
setting  
Hard Disk  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
NOTE  
If you want to delete another ID-code, repeat steps 3 and 4.  
Touch the “Management edit” key.  
The “Management edit” screen will be displayed.  
2
Touch the “Close” key.  
The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.  
5
Inch specifications  
Close  
Management  
Managem. Total  
Register/Sett.  
Management  
Management  
total  
Each Mgt.  
Total  
Management  
edit  
Management  
Def. Set.  
Off  
On  
Default setting  
Metric specifications  
Close  
Management  
Managem. Total  
Register/Sett.  
Management  
Management  
total  
Each Mgt.  
Total  
Management  
edit  
Management  
Def. Set.  
Off  
On  
Default setting  
7-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
Select the department ID-code for which you want to change  
the registered information, and then touch the “Mgt. Inf.  
Correction” key.  
Touch the “Clear” key to delete the old ID-code. Use the  
numeric keys on the keypad to enter the new ID-code (up to  
8 digits).  
3
5
The “Department inform. edit” [“Department info. Editing”]  
screen will be displayed.  
Inch specifications  
Back  
Close  
ID-code  
Inch specifications  
Close  
Management edit  
(0~99999999)  
ID-code  
0007  
Order of  
indication  
Department  
Up  
01  
02  
0001  
0014  
00000015  
00000016  
00000017  
1st Sales Dept.  
2nd Sales Dept.  
3rd Sales Dept.  
4th Sales Dept.  
5th Sales Dept.  
6th Sales Dept.  
7th Sales Dept.  
Clear  
Mgt. Inf.  
correction  
Limit  
in use  
Delete  
Management - Management edit  
Down  
Register  
001/010  
Metric specifications  
Default setting - Management  
Back  
Close  
ID-code  
Metric specifications  
Close  
Management edit  
(0~99999999)  
ID-code  
0007  
Order of  
indication  
Department  
Up  
01  
02  
0001  
0014  
00000015  
00000016  
00000017  
1st Sales Dept.  
2nd Sales Dept.  
3rd Sales Dept.  
4th Sales Dept.  
5th Sales Dept.  
6th Sales Dept.  
7th Sales Dept.  
Clear  
Mgt. Inf.  
correction  
Limit  
in use  
Delete  
Management - Management edit  
Down  
Register  
001/010  
Default setting - Management  
Touch the “Close” key.  
The touch panel will return to the screen in step 4. Proceed  
to step 10.  
To change the registered ID-code, proceed to the next step.  
To change the registered department name, proceed to step  
7.  
6
Inch specifications  
Back  
Close  
ID-code  
NOTE  
It is possible for you to change the order of how the list of ID-codes is  
displayed.  
(0~99999999)  
ID-code  
0007  
To so, touch the “Order of indication” key and then touch the “Sort by  
code” key (and select either “1 / 9” or “9 / 1”) or the “Sort by Name”  
key (and select either “A / Z” or “Z / A”), as appropriate.  
Clear  
Management - Management edit  
Metric specifications  
Select “ID-code” under the “Setting item” column on the left  
side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.  
The “ID-code” screen will be displayed.  
Back  
Close  
ID-code  
4
(0~99999999)  
ID-code  
0007  
Inch specifications  
Clear  
Back  
Close  
Department inform. edit  
Setting item  
Management - Management edit  
Value  
ID-code  
Name to display  
0007  
1st Sales Dept.  
Change #  
Default setting - Management - Management edit  
Metric specifications  
Back  
Close  
Department info. Editing  
Setting item  
Value  
ID-code  
Name to display  
0007  
1st Sales Dept.  
Change #  
Default setting - Management - Management edit  
7-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
Select “Name to display” under the “Setting item” column on  
the left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #”  
key.  
Touch the “End” key.  
The touch panel will return to the screen in step 7.  
7
9
The “Name to display” screen will be displayed.  
Touch the “Close” key.  
The touch panel will return to the screen in step 3.  
10  
Inch specifications  
Back  
Close  
Department inform. edit  
Touch the “Close” key.  
The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.  
Setting item  
Value  
11  
ID-code  
0007  
1st Sales Dept.  
Name to display  
Change #  
Touch the “Close” key.  
12  
Default setting - Management - Management edit  
Metric specifications  
Back  
Close  
Department info. Editing  
Setting item  
Value  
ID-code  
Name to display  
0007  
1st Sales Dept.  
Change #  
Default setting - Management - Management edit  
Touch the “AllDel.” key to delete the old department name,  
then enter the new name.  
8
Inch specifications  
Stop  
End  
Name to display  
1st Sales Dept.  
Limit:32 letters including #  
AllDel.  
Del. prev  
1
2
z
3
x
4
c
5
v
6
b
7
n
8
9
0
-
/
=
`
q
w
e
r
t
y
u
i
o
p
[
]
\
a
s
d
f
g
h
j
k
l
;
'
m
,
.
Capital  
Letter  
Num./Sym.  
Space  
Metric specifications  
Stop  
End  
Name to display  
1st Sales Dept.  
Limit: 32 letters inc. # key  
AllDel.  
Del. prev  
1
2
3
x
4
c
5
v
6
b
7
n
8
9
0
-
/
=
`
q
w
e
r
t
y
u
i
o
p
[
]
\
`
a
s
d
f
g
h
j
k
l
;
'
z
m
,
.
Capital  
Letter  
Symbol 1  
Symbol 2  
Space  
NOTE  
For information on how to enter the department name, refer to  
“11. Entering characters” on page 7-104.  
7-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
● Change restrictions for use  
Select the department ID-code for which you want to change  
the restrictions, and then touch the “Limit in use” key.  
The “Limit in use” screen will be displayed.  
3
Perform the following procedure when you want to change the  
restrictions for using the copier under each department ID-code.  
Inch specifications  
IMPORTANT!  
Close  
Management edit  
Order of  
indication  
Department  
Up  
In order to access the “Change restrictions for use” procedure under  
“Editing copy management information”, it is necessary to select “On”  
under “Copier function management ON/OFF”. When the optional  
Printer Kit, Printer/Scanner Kit or Fax Kit are installed in your copier, it  
is necessary to select “On” under the corresponding “Printer function  
management ON/OFF”, “Scanner function management ON/OFF” or  
“Fax function management ON/OFF” procedure. (See “(6) Changing  
the copy management default settings” on page 7-25.)  
01  
02  
0001  
0014  
00000015  
00000016  
00000017  
1st Sales Dept.  
2nd Sales Dept.  
3rd Sales Dept.  
4th Sales Dept.  
5th Sales Dept.  
6th Sales Dept.  
7th Sales Dept.  
Mgt. Inf.  
correction  
Limit  
in use  
Delete  
Down  
Register  
001/010  
Default setting - Management  
Metric specifications  
Close  
Management edit  
Order of  
indication  
Department  
Up  
01  
02  
0001  
0014  
00000015  
00000016  
00000017  
1st Sales Dept.  
2nd Sales Dept.  
3rd Sales Dept.  
4th Sales Dept.  
5th Sales Dept.  
6th Sales Dept.  
7th Sales Dept.  
Mgt. Inf.  
correction  
Limit  
in use  
Access the copy management menu screen.  
1
(See “(2) Accessing the copy management menu screen” on  
page 7-3.)  
Delete  
Down  
Register  
001/010  
Inch specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting - Management  
Default setting  
End  
NOTE  
Copy  
default  
Language  
Management  
It is possible for you to change the order of how the list of ID-codes is  
displayed.  
To so, touch the “Order of indication” key and then touch the “Sort by  
code” key (and select either “1 / 9” or “9 / 1”) or the “Sort by Name”  
key (and select either “A / Z” or “Z / A”), as appropriate.  
Bypass  
setting  
BOX  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
Metric specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting  
End  
Change the restrictions for using the copier under that  
department ID-code as desired.  
4
Copy  
Language  
default  
Management  
Bypass  
setting  
Hard Disk  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Inch specifications  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
Close  
Limit in use  
0007  
1st Sales Dept.  
Setting item  
Value  
Copy limitation  
On  
Printer limitation  
On  
Output limitation  
Scanner limitation  
Fax Transm. Limitation  
No limit  
No limit  
No limit  
Touch the “Management edit” key.  
The “Management edit” screen will be displayed.  
Change #  
2
Default setting - Management - Management edit  
Inch specifications  
Close  
Management  
Metric specifications  
Close  
Limit in use  
Managem. Total  
Register/Sett.  
Management  
1st Sales Dept.  
Setting item  
0007  
Value  
Management  
total  
Each Mgt.  
Total  
Management  
edit  
Management  
Def. Set.  
Copy limitation  
Printer limitation  
Output limitation  
Scanner limitation  
Fax Transm. Limitation  
On  
On  
No limit  
No limit  
No limit  
Off  
On  
Default setting  
Change #  
Default setting - Management - Management edit  
Metric specifications  
Close  
Management  
NOTE  
Managem. Total  
Register/Sett.  
Management  
For information on how to change restrictions, refer to “Setting the  
restrictions for use” on page 7-7.  
Management  
total  
Each Mgt.  
Total  
Management  
edit  
Management  
Def. Set.  
Off  
On  
Default setting  
7-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
Touch the “Close” key.  
The touch panel will return to the screen in step 3.  
(4) Checking the copy management counts  
5
Inch specifications  
● Check all departments  
Close  
Limit in use  
Perform the following procedure when you want to check the total  
number of copies made under all department ID-codes as a whole,  
print out a copy management report and clear the copy counts for all  
of the registered department ID-codes.  
1st Sales Dept.  
Setting item  
0007  
Value  
Copy limitation  
Printer limitation  
Output limitation  
Scanner limitation  
Fax Transm. Limitation  
On  
On  
No limit  
No limit  
No limit  
Change #  
Access the copy management menu screen.  
(See “(2) Accessing the copy management menu screen” on  
page 7-3.)  
1
Default setting - Management - Management edit  
Metric specifications  
Inch specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Close  
Limit in use  
1st Sales Dept.  
Setting item  
0007  
Value  
Default setting  
End  
Copy limitation  
Printer limitation  
Output limitation  
Scanner limitation  
Fax Transm. Limitation  
On  
On  
No limit  
No limit  
No limit  
Copy  
default  
Language  
Management  
Bypass  
setting  
BOX  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Change #  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
Default setting - Management - Management edit  
Metric specifications  
Touch the “Close” key.  
The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.  
Default setting / Counter  
6
7
Default setting  
End  
Copy  
Language  
default  
Management  
Touch the “Close” key.  
Bypass  
setting  
Hard Disk  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
Touch the “Management total” key.  
The “Management total” screen will be displayed.  
2
Inch specifications  
Close  
Management  
Managem. Total  
Register/Sett.  
Management  
Management  
total  
Each Mgt.  
Total  
Management  
edit  
Management  
Def. Set.  
Off  
On  
Default setting  
Metric specifications  
Close  
Management  
Managem. Total  
Register/Sett.  
Management  
Management  
total  
Each Mgt.  
Total  
Management  
edit  
Management  
Def. Set.  
Off  
On  
Default setting  
7-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
The total number of copies made under all department ID-  
codes as a whole will be displayed. If you want to print out a  
copy management report, touch the “Print report” key.  
When the confirmation message appears, touch the “Yes”  
key.  
3
5
Inch specifications  
Inch specifications  
Stop  
Close  
Management Total  
Number print.  
Copy  
Printer  
100  
Fax  
Total  
Fax  
Black & White:  
300  
50  
450  
The counted number for this ID-code will be deleted  
Are you sure?  
Counter  
clear  
Scan.Transm.  
Scan # pages:  
Fax Transm.  
Scanner  
Yes  
No  
100  
Trsm. # pages:  
Commun.Time:  
100  
Print  
report  
1Hrs 10Mins  
Default setting - Management  
Metric specifications  
Metric specifications  
Stop  
Close  
Management Total  
Number print.  
Copy  
Printer  
100  
Fax  
Total  
450  
Black & White:  
300  
50  
The counted number for this ID-code will be deleted  
Are you sure?  
Counter  
clear  
Scan.Transm.  
Scan # pages:  
Fax transm.  
Scanner  
Fax  
Yes  
No  
100  
Trsm. # pages:  
Commun.Time:  
100  
Print  
report  
1Hrs 10Mins  
Default setting - Management  
Touch the “Close” key.  
The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.  
6
7
NOTES  
• The type of report printed out will vary according the setting selected  
for “Copy/Printer output management” under the copy management  
default settings.  
• If any of the “Total size 1” through “Total size 5” settings is selected  
under the copy management default settings, the total size report  
will also be printed out.  
Touch the “Close” key.  
To clear all of the copy counts, touch the “Counter clear” key.  
4
Inch specifications  
Close  
Management Total  
Number print.  
Copy  
Printer  
100  
Fax  
Total  
Black & White:  
300  
50  
450  
Counter  
clear  
Scan.Transm.  
Scan # pages:  
Fax Transm.  
Scanner  
Fax  
100  
Trsm. # pages:  
Commun.Time:  
100  
Print  
report  
1Hrs 10Mins  
Default setting - Management  
Metric specifications  
Close  
Management Total  
Number print.  
Copy  
Printer  
100  
Fax  
Total  
450  
Black & White:  
300  
50  
Counter  
clear  
Scan.Transm.  
Scan # pages:  
Fax transm.  
Scanner  
Fax  
100  
Trsm. # pages:  
Commun.Time:  
100  
Print  
report  
1Hrs 10Mins  
Default setting - Management  
7-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
● Check individual departments  
Select the department ID-code for which you want to check  
the copy counts, and then touch the “Total” key.  
3
Perform the following procedure when you want to check the total  
number of copies made under each individual department ID-code  
and/or clear the copy counts for individual departments as well.  
Inch specifications  
Close  
Each Management Total  
Access the copy management menu screen.  
(See “(2) Accessing the copy management menu screen” on  
page 7-3.)  
Order of  
indication  
Department  
Up  
Total  
1
! 01  
02  
0001  
1st Sales Dept.  
2nd Sales Dept.  
3rd Sales Dept.  
4th Sales Dept.  
5th Sales Dept.  
6th Sales Dept.  
7th Sales Dept.  
! 0014  
00000015  
00000016  
00000017  
Inch specifications  
Down  
001/010  
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting - Management  
Default setting  
End  
Metric specifications  
Copy  
default  
Language  
Management  
Bypass  
setting  
BOX  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Close  
Each Management Total  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
Order of  
indication  
Department  
Up  
Total  
! 01  
02  
0001  
1st Sales Dept.  
2nd Sales Dept.  
3rd Sales Dept.  
4th Sales Dept.  
5th Sales Dept.  
6th Sales Dept.  
7th Sales Dept.  
! 0014  
00000015  
00000016  
00000017  
Metric specifications  
Down  
001/010  
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting - Management  
Default setting  
End  
Copy  
Language  
default  
Management  
NOTES  
Bypass  
setting  
Hard Disk  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
• The “---ETC” displayed in the list indicates the number of printouts  
that were made without entering an ID-code.  
· The printouts included under “---ETC” are as follows:  
· Report print out  
· Printer error report print out  
Touch the “Each Mgt. Total” key.  
The “Each Management Total” screen will be displayed.  
· Print out from a computer for which an ID-code is not set (When  
the “Non-standard printer driver printout (Printer)” is set to “ON”  
under the copy management default settings.)  
· Fax reception print out  
2
Inch specifications  
Close  
Management  
· Fax report print out  
• It is possible for you to change the order of how the list of ID-codes  
is displayed. To so, touch the “Order of indication” key and then  
touch the “Sort by code” key (and select either “1 / 9” or “9 / 1”)  
or the “Sort by Name” key (and select either “A / Z” or “Z / A”), as  
appropriate.  
Managem. Total  
Register/Sett.  
Management  
Management  
total  
Each Mgt.  
Total  
Management  
edit  
Management  
Def. Set.  
Off  
On  
Default setting  
Metric specifications  
Close  
Management  
Managem. Total  
Register/Sett.  
Management  
Management  
total  
Each Mgt.  
Total  
Management  
edit  
Management  
Def. Set.  
Off  
On  
Default setting  
7-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
The total number of copies made under that department ID-  
code will be displayed.  
When the confirmation message appears, touch the “Yes”  
key.  
4
6
Inch specifications  
Inch specifications  
Close  
Stop  
Each Management Total  
Number print.  
Copy  
Printer  
Total  
Fax  
Number in( )  
is limit value  
Black & White:  
50  
30  
80  
Counter  
clear  
Scan.Transm.  
Scan # pages:  
Fax Transm.  
The count value of this ID-code will be deleted  
Are you sure?  
Scanner  
100  
Trsm. # pages:  
Commun.Time:  
100  
1Hrs 10Mins  
Yes  
No  
Default setting - Management  
0007 1st Sales Dept.  
Metric specifications  
Metric specifications  
Close  
Each Management Total  
Stop  
Number print.  
Copy  
Printer  
30  
Total  
Fax  
Number in( )  
is limit value  
Black & White:  
50  
80  
Counter  
clear  
Scan.Transm.  
Scan # pages:  
Fax transm.  
The count value of this ID-code will be deleted  
Are you sure?  
Scanner  
100  
Trsm. # pages:  
Commun.Time:  
100  
1Hrs 10Mins  
Yes  
No  
Default setting - Management  
0007 1st Sales Dept.  
NOTE  
Touch the “Close” key.  
7
8
9
The touch panel will return to the screen in step 3.  
On the “Each Management Total” screen, the number in the brackets  
following the number of copies made indicates the maximum number  
of copies that can be made.  
Touch the “Close” key.  
The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.  
To clear all of the copy counts for that ID-code, touch the  
“Counter clear” key.  
Touch the “Close” key.  
5
Inch specifications  
Close  
Each Management Total  
Number print.  
Copy  
Printer  
Total  
Fax  
Number in( )  
is limit value  
Black & White:  
50  
30  
80  
Counter  
clear  
Scan.Transm.  
Scan # pages:  
Fax Transm.  
Scanner  
100  
Trsm. # pages:  
Commun.Time:  
100  
1Hrs 10Mins  
Default setting - Management  
0007 1st Sales Dept.  
Metric specifications  
Close  
Each Management Total  
Number print.  
Copy  
Printer  
30  
Total  
Fax  
Number in( )  
is limit value  
Black & White:  
50  
80  
Counter  
clear  
Scan.Transm.  
Scan # pages:  
Fax transm.  
Scanner  
100  
Trsm. # pages:  
Commun.Time:  
100  
1Hrs 10Mins  
Default setting - Management  
0007 1st Sales Dept.  
7-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
(5) Turning the copy management function ON/OFF  
(6) Changing the copy management default settings  
Perform the following procedure when you want to turn copy  
management ON or OFF.  
Perform the following procedure when you want to change the default  
settings for the copy management function.  
The following default settings are available.  
Access the copy management menu screen.  
(See “(2) Accessing the copy management menu screen” on  
page 7-3.)  
• Copier function management ON/OFF (Page 7-26.)  
• Printer function management ON/OFF (Page 7-27.)  
• Printer error report (Page 7-28.)  
1
• Non-standard printer driver printout (Printer) (Page 7-29.)  
• Copy/Printer output management (Page 7-30.)  
• Scanner function management ON/OFF (Page 7-31.)  
• Fax function management ON/OFF (Page 7-32.)  
• Response to exceeded restriction (Page 7-33.)  
• Default copy limit (Page 7-34.)  
Inch specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting  
End  
Copy  
default  
Language  
Management  
Bypass  
setting  
BOX  
Management  
Counter  
check  
• Total count for specified paper size (1 to 5) (Page 7-35)  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
● Accessing the copy management default settings  
Access the copy management menu screen.  
(See “(2) Accessing the copy management menu screen” on  
page 7-3.)  
Metric specifications  
1
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting  
End  
Inch specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Copy  
Language  
default  
Management  
Bypass  
setting  
Hard Disk  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
Default setting  
End  
Copy  
default  
Language  
Management  
Bypass  
setting  
BOX  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
To turn copy management ON, touch the “On” key. To turn  
copy management OFF, touch the “Off” key.  
2
Metric specifications  
Inch specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Close  
Management  
Default setting  
End  
Managem. Total  
Register/Sett.  
Management  
Copy  
Language  
default  
Management  
Bypass  
setting  
Hard Disk  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Management  
total  
Each Mgt.  
Total  
Management  
edit  
Management  
Def. Set.  
Off  
On  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
Default setting  
Metric specifications  
Close  
Management  
Managem. Total  
Register/Sett.  
Management  
Management  
total  
Each Mgt.  
Total  
Management  
edit  
Management  
Def. Set.  
Off  
On  
Default setting  
Touch the “Close” key.  
3
7-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
Touch the “Management Def. Set.” key.  
The “Managem. Def. Set.” screen will be displayed.  
● Copier function management ON/OFF  
2
Perform the following procedure when you want to turn copy  
management ON or OFF for the copier functions of this machine.  
Inch specifications  
Close  
Management  
Select “Copy management” under the “Setting item” column  
on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the  
“Change #” key.  
1
Managem. Total  
Register/Sett.  
Management  
The “Copy management” screen will be displayed.  
Management  
total  
Each Mgt.  
Total  
Management  
edit  
Management  
Def. Set.  
Off  
On  
Inch specifications  
Close  
Managem. Def. Set.  
Default setting  
Setting item  
Value  
Metric specifications  
Copy management  
Print. Managem.  
Printer error report  
Others Mgt. Reg. (print)  
Copy/Printer output mgt.  
Scanner Managem.  
Fax Management  
On  
On  
On  
On  
All  
On  
On  
Close  
Management  
Change #  
Managem. Total  
Register/Sett.  
Management  
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.  
Management  
total  
Each Mgt.  
Total  
Management  
edit  
Management  
Def. Set.  
Off  
On  
Metric specifications  
Close  
Managem. Def. Set.  
Default setting  
Setting item  
Value  
Copy management  
Print. managem.  
Printer error report  
Others mgt. Reg. (print)  
On  
On  
On  
On  
Select the default setting that you want to change and then  
touch the “Change #” key.  
Copy/Printer output mgt.  
Scanner Managem.  
Fax Management  
All  
On  
On  
3
Change #  
Inch specifications  
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.  
Close  
Managem. Def. Set.  
Setting item  
Value  
To turn copy management ON for the copier functions of this  
machine, touch the “On” key.  
Copy management  
Print. Managem.  
Printer error report  
Others Mgt. Reg. (print)  
Copy/Printer output mgt.  
Scanner Managem.  
Fax Management  
On  
2
On  
On  
On  
All  
On  
On  
Inch specifications  
Change #  
Back  
Close  
Copy management  
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.  
Copy management can be set up.  
Metric specifications  
Off  
On  
Close  
Managem. Def. Set.  
Setting item  
Value  
Copy management  
Print. managem.  
Printer error report  
Others mgt. Reg. (print)  
On  
On  
On  
On  
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.  
Copy/Printer output mgt.  
Scanner Managem.  
Fax Management  
All  
On  
On  
Metric specifications  
Change #  
Back  
Close  
Copy management  
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.  
Copy management can be set up.  
Off  
On  
NOTE  
Perform the following procedure that corresponds to the desired  
setting.  
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.  
NOTE  
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the  
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 1.  
Touch the “Close” key.  
The touch panel will return to the screen in step 1.  
3
7-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
● Printer function management ON/OFF  
To turn copy management ON for the printer functions of this  
machine, touch the “On” key.  
2
Perform the following procedure when you want to turn copy  
management ON or OFF for the printer functions of this machine.  
Inch specifications  
Back  
Close  
Print. Managem.  
Printer management can be set up.  
NOTE  
This setting is only available when the optional Printer Kit or Printer/  
Scanner Kit is installed in your copier.  
Off  
On  
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.  
Select “Print. Managem.” under the “Setting item” column on  
the left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #”  
key.  
1
Metric specifications  
Back  
Close  
Print. managem.  
The “Print. Managem.” screen will be displayed.  
Printer management can be set up.  
Inch specifications  
Off  
On  
Close  
Managem. Def. Set.  
Setting item  
Value  
Copy management  
Print. Managem.  
Printer error report  
Others Mgt. Reg. (print)  
On  
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.  
On  
On  
On  
Copy/Printer output mgt.  
Scanner Managem.  
Fax Management  
All  
On  
On  
Change #  
NOTE  
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.  
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the  
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 1.  
Metric specifications  
Close  
Managem. Def. Set.  
Setting item  
Value  
Copy management  
Print. managem.  
Printer error report  
Others mgt. Reg. (print)  
Copy/Printer output mgt.  
Scanner Managem.  
Fax Management  
On  
On  
On  
On  
All  
On  
On  
Touch the “Close” key.  
The touch panel will return to the screen in step 1.  
3
Change #  
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.  
7-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
● Printer error report  
To have a printer error report printed out, touch the “On” key.  
If you do not want the printer error report printed out, touch  
the “Off” key.  
2
Perform the following procedure if you want an error report printed  
anytime “On” is selected as the “Printer function management ON/  
OFF” setting and printing is attempted with an invalid department ID-  
code.  
Inch specifications  
Back  
Close  
Printer error report  
Error report is output. at the time of Mgt. code mismatch.  
NOTE  
Off  
On  
This setting will only be available when “On” is selected as the “Printer  
function management ON/OFF” setting.  
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.  
Metric specifications  
Select “Printer error report” under the “Setting item” column  
on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the  
“Change #” key.  
1
Back  
Close  
Printer error report  
Error report is output. at the time of Mgt. code mismatch.  
The “Printer error report” screen will be displayed.  
Inch specifications  
Off  
On  
Close  
Managem. Def. Set.  
Setting item  
Value  
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.  
Copy management  
On  
Print. Managem.  
Printer error report  
Others Mgt. Reg. (print)  
On  
On  
On  
Copy/Printer output mgt.  
Scanner Managem.  
Fax Management  
All  
On  
On  
Change #  
NOTE  
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.  
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the  
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 1.  
Metric specifications  
Close  
Managem. Def. Set.  
Touch the “Close” key.  
The touch panel will return to the screen in step 1.  
Setting item  
Value  
3
Copy management  
Print. managem.  
Printer error report  
Others mgt. Reg. (print)  
On  
On  
On  
On  
Copy/Printer output mgt.  
Scanner Managem.  
Fax Management  
All  
On  
On  
Change #  
NOTE  
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.  
If anyone attempts to print using an invalid department ID-code, an  
error will occur under the printing functions and printout will not be  
possible. When the [Printer] key is touched, “Department ID-code  
mismatch.” will be displayed. Touch the “GO” key to print out an error  
report.  
Inch specifications  
Department code mismatch.  
Off line  
Cancel  
GO  
Metric specifications  
Department code mismatch.  
Off line  
Cancel  
GO  
7-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
● Non-standard printer driver printout (Printer)  
To allow the use of printer drivers other than those available  
under copy management, touch the “On” key.  
2
Perform the following procedure when “On” is selected as the “Printer  
function management ON/OFF” setting and you want to want to allow  
the use of printer drivers other than those available under copy  
management.  
Inch specifications  
Back  
Close  
Others Mgt. Reg. (print)  
Output. of print. is possible for unspecif. ID-code  
NOTE  
Off  
On  
This setting will only be available when “On” is selected as the “Printer  
function management ON/OFF” setting.  
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.  
Metric specifications  
Select “Others Mgt. Reg. (print)” under the “Setting item”  
column on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the  
“Change #” key.  
Back  
Close  
Others mgt. Reg. (print)  
1
Output. of print. is possible for unspecif. ID-code  
The “Others Mgt. Reg. (print)” screen will be displayed.  
Off  
On  
Inch specifications  
Close  
Managem. Def. Set.  
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.  
Setting item  
Value  
Copy management  
On  
Print. Managem.  
Printer error report  
Others Mgt. Reg. (print)  
On  
On  
On  
NOTE  
Copy/Printer output mgt.  
Scanner Managem.  
Fax Management  
All  
On  
On  
Change #  
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the  
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 1.  
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.  
Metric specifications  
Close  
Managem. Def. Set.  
Touch the “Close” key.  
The touch panel will return to the screen in step 1.  
3
Setting item  
Value  
Copy management  
Print. managem.  
Printer error report  
Others mgt. Reg. (print)  
On  
On  
On  
On  
Copy/Printer output mgt.  
Scanner Managem.  
Fax Management  
All  
On  
On  
Change #  
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.  
7-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
● Copy/Printer output management  
To have copier and printer functions both handled together,  
touch the “All” key. To have copier and printer functions each  
handled separately, touch the “Each” key.  
2
Perform the following procedure to determine whether management of  
copier and printer functions will be handled together or separately.  
Inch specifications  
NOTE  
Back  
Close  
Copy/Printer output mgt.  
Copy/Printer output management method setting.  
If this setting is changed, it will affect which setting items are available  
for restriction under the copy management function. (See “Setting the  
restrictions for use” on page 7-7.)  
All  
Each  
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.  
Select “Copy/Printer output mgt.” under the “Setting item”  
column on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the  
“Change #” key.  
1
Metric specifications  
Back  
Close  
Copy/Printer output mgt.  
The “Copy/Printer output mgt.” screen will be displayed.  
Copy/Printer output management method setting.  
Inch specifications  
All  
Close  
Managem. Def. Set.  
Each  
Setting item  
Value  
Copy management  
Print. Managem.  
Printer error report  
Others Mgt. Reg. (print)  
On  
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.  
On  
On  
On  
Copy/Printer output mgt.  
Scanner Managem.  
Fax Management  
All  
On  
On  
Change #  
NOTE  
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.  
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the  
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 1.  
Metric specifications  
Close  
Managem. Def. Set.  
Setting item  
Value  
Copy management  
Print. managem.  
Printer error report  
Others mgt. Reg. (print)  
Copy/Printer output mgt.  
Scanner Managem.  
Fax Management  
On  
On  
On  
On  
All  
On  
On  
Touch the “Close” key.  
The touch panel will return to the screen in step 1.  
3
Change #  
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.  
7-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
● Scanner function management ON/OFF  
To turn copy management ON for the scanner functions of  
this machine, touch the “On” key.  
2
Perform the following procedure when you want to turn copy  
management ON or OFF for the scanner functions of this machine.  
Inch specifications  
Back  
Close  
Scanner Managem.  
Scanner management can be set up.  
NOTE  
This setting is only available when the optional Printer/Scanner Kit is  
installed in your copier.  
Off  
On  
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.  
Select “Scanner Managem.” under the “Setting item” column  
on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the  
“Change #” key.  
1
Metric specifications  
Back  
Close  
Scanner Managem.  
The “Scanner Managem.” screen will be displayed.  
Scanner management can be set up.  
Inch specifications  
Off  
On  
Close  
Managem. Def. Set.  
Setting item  
Value  
Copy management  
Print. Managem.  
Printer error report  
Others Mgt. Reg. (print)  
On  
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.  
On  
On  
On  
Copy/Printer output mgt.  
Scanner Managem.  
Fax Management  
All  
On  
On  
Change #  
NOTE  
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.  
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the  
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 1.  
Metric specifications  
Close  
Managem. Def. Set.  
Setting item  
Value  
Copy management  
Print. managem.  
Printer error report  
Others mgt. Reg. (print)  
Copy/Printer output mgt.  
Scanner Managem.  
Fax Management  
On  
On  
On  
On  
All  
On  
On  
Touch the “Close” key.  
The touch panel will return to the screen in step 1.  
3
Change #  
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.  
7-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
● Fax function management ON/OFF  
To turn copy management ON for the fax functions of this  
machine, touch the “On” key.  
2
Perform the following procedure when you want to turn copy  
management ON or OFF for the fax functions of this machine.  
Inch specifications  
Back  
Close  
Fax Management  
Fax management can be set up.  
NOTE  
This setting is only available when the optional Fax Kit is installed in  
your copier.  
Off  
On  
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.  
Select “Fax Management” under the “Setting item” column on  
the left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #”  
key.  
1
Metric specifications  
Back  
Close  
Fax Management  
The “Fax Management” screen will be displayed.  
Fax management can be set up.  
Inch specifications  
Off  
On  
Close  
Managem. Def. Set.  
Setting item  
Value  
Scanner Managem.  
Fax Management  
Excess of limit Setting  
Def. Val. of coun. limit  
Total size 1  
On  
On  
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.  
Unable to use  
999999  
81  
81  
81  
/
/
/
2x11" No specif.  
2x11" No specif.  
2x11" No specif.  
Total size 2  
Total size 3  
Change #  
NOTE  
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.  
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the  
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 1.  
Metric specifications  
Close  
Managem. Def. Set.  
Setting item  
Value  
Scanner Managem.  
Fax Management  
Excess of limit Setting  
Def. Val. of coun. limit  
Total size 1  
On  
On  
Touch the “Close” key.  
The touch panel will return to the screen in step 1.  
3
You cannot use  
999999  
A3 No specif.  
B4 No specif.  
A4 No specif.  
Total size 2  
Total size 3  
Change #  
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.  
7-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
● Response to exceeded restriction  
To discontinue further use of the machine immediately  
(starting with the current job) when a department ID-code  
has exceeded its set limit, touch the “Stop job immediatly”  
key. To cancel further use of the machine starting from the  
next job, touch the “Stop after job done” key. To have an error  
message generated, touch the “Only warning” key.  
2
Perform the following procedure to determine whether further use of  
the machine by the corresponding department will be discontinued  
immediately (starting with the current job) or with the next job, or if  
only an error message will be generated when a department ID-code  
has exceeded its set limit.  
Inch specifications  
NOTE  
Back  
Close  
Excess of limit Setting  
Select proper setting when limit exceeded.  
If the optional Printer/Scanner Kit or Fax Kit is installed on your copier,  
even if you select here to have further use of the machine  
discontinued immediately (starting with the current job), if a  
department ID-code exceeds its set limit during scanning or during fax  
transmission, the actual restriction will start from the next job.  
Stop job  
immediatly  
Stop after  
job done  
Only  
warning  
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.  
Metric specifications  
Select “Excess of limit Setting” under the “Setting item”  
column on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the  
“Change #” key.  
Back  
Close  
Excess of limit Setting  
1
Select proper setting when limit exceeded.  
The “Excess of limit Setting” screen will be displayed.  
Stop job  
immediatly  
Inch specifications  
Stop after  
job done  
Only  
warning  
Close  
Managem. Def. Set.  
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.  
Setting item  
Value  
Scanner Managem.  
Fax Management  
Excess of limit Setting  
Def. Val. of coun. limit  
Total size 1  
On  
On  
Unable to use  
999999  
NOTE  
81  
81  
81  
/
/
/
2x11" No specif.  
2x11" No specif.  
2x11" No specif.  
Total size 2  
Total size 3  
Change #  
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the  
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 1.  
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.  
Metric specifications  
Close  
Managem. Def. Set.  
Touch the “Close” key.  
The touch panel will return to the screen in step 1.  
3
Setting item  
Value  
Scanner Managem.  
Fax Management  
Excess of limit Setting  
Def. Val. of coun. limit  
Total size 1  
On  
On  
You cannot use  
999999  
A3 No specif.  
B4 No specif.  
A4 No specif.  
Total size 2  
Total size 3  
Change #  
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.  
7-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
● Default copy limit  
Use the numeric keys on the keypad to enter the default copy  
limit. The limit can be set to any 1-page increment up to  
999,999.  
2
Perform the following procedure when you want to change the default  
copy limit for new department ID-codes.  
Inch specifications  
Select “Def. Val. of coun. limit” under the “Setting item”  
1
Back  
Close  
column on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the  
“Change #” key.  
Def. Val. of coun. limit  
Default value of counter limit can be set.  
The “Def. Val. of coun. limit” screen will be displayed.  
(1~999,999)  
Limited value  
999,999  
Clear  
Inch specifications  
Close  
Managem. Def. Set.  
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.  
Setting item  
Value  
Scanner Managem.  
Fax Management  
Excess of limit Setting  
Def. Val. of coun. limit  
Total size 1  
On  
On  
Metric specifications  
Unable to use  
999999  
81  
81  
81  
/
/
/
2x11" No specif.  
2x11" No specif.  
2x11" No specif.  
Total size 2  
Total size 3  
Change #  
Back  
Close  
Def. Val. of coun. Limit  
Default value of counter limit can be set.  
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.  
(1~999,999)  
Limited value  
999,999  
Clear  
Metric specifications  
Close  
Managem. Def. Set.  
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.  
Setting item  
Value  
Scanner Managem.  
Fax Management  
Excess of limit Setting  
Def. Val. of coun. limit  
Total size 1  
On  
On  
You cannot use  
999999  
A3 No specif.  
B4 No specif.  
A4 No specif.  
NOTE  
Total size 2  
Total size 3  
Change #  
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the  
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 1.  
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.  
Touch the “Close” key.  
The touch panel will return to the screen in step 1.  
3
7-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
● Total count for specified paper size (1 to 5)  
Touch the “On” key.  
2
Perform the following procedure when you want to register a specific  
paper size in order to calculate and check the copy counts for that  
particular size of paper. It is also possible to register a paper size AND  
type.  
Inch specifications  
Back  
Close  
Total size 1  
Can set totals of paper size and type.  
Off  
On  
NOTES  
• You can register up to 5 different paper sizes for this function.  
• If the type of paper is not registered in any of the settings, the  
corresponding copy counts for that size of paper will be calculated  
regardless of the type of paper that is used. However, if the same  
size of paper is registered in another setting along with a paper type,  
the counts for the first setting will NOT include copies made with the  
type of paper that is registered in the second setting.  
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.  
Metric specifications  
Back  
Close  
Total size 1  
Can set totals of paper size and type.  
Off  
On  
Select one of the “Total size 1” through “Total size 5” settings  
under the “Setting item” column on the left side of the touch  
panel and then touch the “Change #” key.  
1
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.  
The corresponding setting screen will be displayed.  
Touch the “Select size” key.  
Inch specifications  
Inch specifications  
3
Close  
Managem. Def. Set.  
Back  
Close  
Total size 1  
Setting item  
Value  
Can set totals of paper size and type.  
Paper size  
Scanner Managem.  
Fax Management  
Excess of limit Setting  
Def. Val. of coun. limit  
Total size 1  
On  
On  
Paper type  
Unable to use  
999999  
With no  
specif.  
81/2x11"  
Select  
81  
81  
81  
/
/
/
2x11" No specif.  
2x11" No specif.  
2x11" No specif.  
Select  
paper type  
Off  
Total size 2  
Total size 3  
Change #  
size  
On  
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.  
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.  
Metric specifications  
Metric specifications  
Close  
Managem. Def. Set.  
Back  
Close  
Total size 1  
Setting item  
Value  
Can set totals of paper size and type.  
Paper size  
Scanner Managem.  
Fax Management  
Excess of limit Setting  
Def. Val. of coun. limit  
Total size 1  
On  
On  
Paper type  
You cannot use  
999999  
With no  
specif.  
A4  
A3 No specif.  
B4 No specif.  
A4 No specif.  
Select  
Select  
Off  
Total size 2  
Total size 3  
paper type  
size  
Change #  
On  
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.  
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.  
NOTE  
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the  
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 1.  
7-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
Touch the key that corresponds to the desired paper size,  
and then touch the “Close” key.  
Touch the key that corresponds to the desired paper type,  
and then touch the “Close” key.  
4
6
Inch specifications  
Inch specifications  
Back  
Close  
Back  
Close  
Select size  
Select paper type  
Thick  
paper  
With no  
specif.  
B4  
B5  
11x17"  
Plain  
Labels  
Cardstock  
Color  
Custom 1  
Custom 2  
Custom 3  
Custom 4  
Custom 5  
Custom 6  
Custom 7  
Custom 8  
A3  
A4  
Transp-  
arency  
81/2x14"  
81/2x11"  
51/2x81/2"  
Recycled  
Preprinted  
Bond  
Envelope  
Rough  
Vellum  
Prepunched  
Letterhead  
A5  
Folio  
High  
quality  
Management - Managem. Def set. - Total size 1  
Management - Managem. Def set. - Total size 1  
Metric specifications  
Metric specifications  
Back  
Close  
Select paper type  
Back  
Close  
Select size  
With no  
specif.  
Thick  
paper  
Plain  
Labels  
Cardstock  
Colour  
Custom 1  
Custom 2  
Custom 3  
Custom 4  
Custom 5  
Custom 6  
Custom 7  
Custom 8  
B4  
11x17"  
A3  
A4  
Transp-  
arency  
Recycled  
Preprinted  
Bond  
Envelope  
81/2x14"  
81/2x11"  
51/2x81/2"  
B5  
Rough  
Vellum  
Prepunched  
Letterhead  
A5  
Folio  
High  
quality  
Management - Managem. Def set. - Total size 1  
Management - Managem. Def set. - Total size 1  
Touch the “Close” key.  
The touch panel will return to the screen in step 1.  
To specify a paper type as well, touch the “Select paper type”  
key and proceed to the next step. If you do not want to  
specify a paper type, proceed to step 7.  
7
5
NOTE  
Inch specifications  
You can check the copy counts for the paper sizes registered under  
the “Total size 1” through “Total size 5” settings on the total size report  
that is printed together with the copy management report. For  
information on how to print out a copy management report, refer to  
“Check all departments” on page 7-21.  
Back  
Close  
Total size 1  
Can set totals of paper size and type.  
Paper size  
Paper type  
With no  
specif.  
81/2x11"  
Select  
paper type  
Select  
size  
Off  
On  
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.  
Metric specifications  
Back  
Close  
Total size 1  
Can set totals of paper size and type.  
Paper size  
Paper type  
With no  
specif.  
A4  
Select  
paper type  
Select  
size  
Off  
On  
Default setting - Management - Managem. Def set.  
7-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
(7) Making copies when copy management is turned  
ON  
NOTES  
• If you enter the wrong ID-code, touch the “clear” key and reenter the  
correct ID-code.  
• If an invalid (unregistered) department ID-code is entered, an error  
alarm will sound. Enter the correct ID-code.  
When copy management is turned ON, copying will only be possible  
when a valid department ID-code is entered.  
• If you enter your department ID-code and touch the “Each Mgt.  
Total” key, you can check the copy counts for your own department.  
IMPORTANT!  
Once you are finished copying, BE SURE to press the [Management]  
key so that the “Enter ID-code” screen is displayed again.  
Inch specifications  
Close  
Each Management Total  
Number print.  
Copy  
Printer  
Total  
Number in( )  
is limit value  
Black & White:  
50  
30  
80  
Scan.Transm.  
Scan # pages:  
Fax Transm.  
Scanner  
Fax  
100  
Trsm. # pages:  
Commun.Time:  
100  
1Hrs 10Mins  
Default setting - Management  
1st Sales Dept.  
Metric specifications  
Close  
Each Management Total  
Number print.  
Copy  
Printer  
30  
Total  
80  
Number in( )  
is limit value  
Black & White:  
50  
Scan.Transm.  
Scan # pages:  
Fax transm.  
Scanner  
Fax  
100  
Trsm. # pages:  
Commun.Time:  
100  
1Hrs 10Mins  
Default setting - Management  
1st Sales Dept.  
Use the numeric keys on the keypad to enter your  
department ID-code, and then touch the “Enter” key.  
The “Basic” screen will be displayed.  
1
Perform the desired copy operation as usual.  
Inch specifications  
2
3
Enter ID-code.  
Once you are finished copying, press the [Management] key.  
Each Mgt.  
Total  
****  
Clear  
Enter  
Metric specifications  
Enter ID-code.  
Each Mgt.  
Total  
****  
Clear  
Enter  
7-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
2. Default settings  
The state that the copier enters at the end of warm-up or when the [Reset] key is pressed is called the “initial mode”. The modes, functions and other  
settings that are automatically pre-set for the initial mode are called “default settings”. These default settings are separated into two categories:  
“Copy defaults” and “Machine defaults” and can be changed as desired to suit your copying needs.  
(1) Machine default settings  
The following table indicates the machine default settings available in this copier. Change any or all of the settings as desired in order to make the  
most effective use of your copier.  
Default setting  
Description  
Available  
settings  
Factory  
setting  
Reference  
page  
Auto drawer[cassette]  
switching ON/OFF  
If the paper in one drawer[cassette] runs out during  
copying, the automatic drawer[cassette] switching  
function will switch paper feed from the empty  
drawer[cassette] to another drawer[cassette] that  
contains the same size of paper in the same orientation  
for uninterrupted copying. To enable this function, it is  
necessary to turn the related setting “On”.  
On / Off  
On  
7-42  
In order to prevent a drawer[cassette] that holds a different  
type of paper from being switched to when the automatic  
drawer[cassette] switching function is turned ON, it is  
necessary to select “Feed same paper type” as well.  
All types of paper /  
Feed same paper  
type  
All types of  
paper  
Paper size  
(drawer[cassette] No.1 –  
No.4)  
Sets the size of paper that is loaded in  
drawers[cassettes] No.1 through No.4.  
If you want the size to be detected automatically, select  
“Auto Detection” (Automatic size detection). If you want  
to manually set the size of paper, select “Standard  
sizes”.  
Auto Detection /  
Standard sizes  
Auto Detection  
7-43  
<If you select “Auto Detection”>  
Inch  
Inch  
You can also select the desired unit of measurement:  
“Inch” or “Centimeter”.  
Centimeter  
specification:  
Inch  
Metric  
specification:  
Centimeter  
<If you select “Standard sizes”>  
A3  
– – –  
You can then select the paper size.  
A4  
A4R  
* The setting for drawer[cassette] No.3 and No.4 will only A5R  
be available when the optional Paper Feeder is  
installed on your copier.  
B4  
B5  
B5R  
Folio  
11 x 17  
8 1/2 x 14  
11 x 8 1/2  
8 1/2 x 11  
5 1/2 x 8 1/2  
8 1/2 x 13  
8K  
16K  
7-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
Default setting  
Description  
Available  
settings  
Factory  
setting  
Reference  
page  
Paper type  
Sets and then displays the type of paper that is loaded in Plain  
Plain  
7-44  
(drawer[cassette] No.1 -  
No. 4)  
drawers[cassettes] No.1 through No.4.  
* The setting for drawer[cassette] No.3 and No.4 will only Recycled  
Preprinted  
be available when the optional Paper Feeder is  
installed on your copier.  
Letterhead  
Color [Colour]  
Prepunched  
Rough  
Bond  
High quality  
Vellum  
Custom 1 –  
Custom 8  
Multi-bypass tray  
settings display ON/OFF  
Turn this setting ON if you want the “Bypass setting”  
screen to be displayed whenever the “Bypass” key is  
touched in the “Basic” tab.  
On / Off  
Off  
7-45  
7-46  
Custom paper type for  
2-sided copying  
Sets whether or not each custom paper type (custom 1 – On / Off  
custom 8) will be available for use in  
On  
2-sided copying.  
-
Special paper action  
setting  
When copying onto prepunched, preprinted or letterhead  
paper, and performing both 1-sided copying and 2-sided  
copying from the same drawer[cassette], the positioning  
of the holes in relation to the copied image may be  
different for each copy or the front and rear images of 2-  
sided copies may be copied onto the opposites sides of  
the paper. If you select “Adj. print Direction”, both 1-sided  
and 2-sided copies will be created with the same  
orientation.  
Adj. print Direction /  
Speed Priority  
Speed Priority  
7-46-1  
Example: Set the paper as shown in the illustration  
Drawer[Cassette]  
Setting  
1-sided copying  
2-sided copying  
Adj. print  
Direction  
Speed  
Priority  
* When “Adj. print Direction” is selected, the speed of 1-  
sided copying will be somewhat slower than normal.  
* When making copies with “Adj. print Direction”  
selected, set the paper as shown in illustration A and  
with the first image being copied set face-down. (If the  
optional Built-in Finisher is installed on your copier, set  
the paper as shown in illustration B and with the first  
image being copied set face-down.)  
* If the optional Document Finisher or Built-in Finisher is  
installed on your copier and you have selected either  
the Staple mode or the Hole Punch mode, the direction  
that the copy image is created in may not conform to  
the desired position of the staples or holes.  
7-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
Default setting  
Description  
Available  
settings  
Factory  
setting  
Reference  
page  
Auto sleep time  
Sets the amount of time that will elapse before the auto  
sleep function engages and turns the copier OFF (O) if  
no operation is performed on the copier during that time.  
* It is recommended that you try to set a longer time  
interval before the auto sleep function engages if you  
use the copier frequently, and to a shorter time if there  
are long intervals between use.  
1, 5, 15, 30, 45, 60,  
90, 120, 180, 240  
(minutes)  
60 (minutes)  
7-47  
* For more detailed information on the auto sleep  
function, see page 4-11.  
Auto low power time  
Sets the amount of time that will elapse before the Low  
Power mode is automatically activated if no operation is  
performed on the copier during that time.  
* For more detailed information on the Low power mode,  
see page 4-11.  
1, 5, 15, 30, 45, 60,  
90, 120, 180, 240  
(minutes)  
15 (minutes)  
7-48  
7-49  
Copy eject location  
Sets the location for the ejection of finished copies.  
* This setting will only be displayed when the optional  
Document Finisher, Built-in Finisher or Job Separator  
is installed on your copier.  
* The available location for ejection will differ depending  
upon the optional equipment that is installed on your  
copier.  
Inner tray  
Job separator  
Finisher tray  
Finisher main tray  
Finisher sub tray  
Inner tray  
Fax eject location  
Sets the location for the ejection of received faxes.  
* This setting will only be displayed when the optional  
Fax Kit and Document Finisher (or the Built-in Finisher  
or Job Separator) are installed on your copier.  
* The available location for ejection will differ depending  
upon the optional equipment that is installed on your  
copier.  
Inner tray  
Inner tray  
7-50  
Job separator  
Finisher tray  
Finisher main tray  
Finisher sub tray  
Mailbox 1  
Default operation mode  
Sets which operation mode, the copy operation mode or  
the fax operation mode, will be selected when the power  
is turned on to the copier.  
Copy mode  
FAX mode  
Copy mode  
7-51  
7-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
Default setting  
Description  
Available  
settings  
Factory  
setting  
Reference  
page  
Touch panel sound ON/  
OFF  
Sets whether or not the touch panel will emit a “beep”  
sound each time a key is touched.  
On / Off  
On  
Off  
7-52  
Silent mode ON/OFF  
The copier can be switched to a silent mode, which  
shortens the length of time that the laser data writing  
motor continues to spin after each copy job is finished.  
Turn the silent mode ON if the noise of the motor  
bothers you in any way.  
On / Off  
7-53  
Day & time  
Sets the current date and time.  
Year: 2001-2049  
Month: 1 – 12  
Day: 1 – 31  
Year: 2001  
Month: 01  
Day: 01  
7-54  
Time: 00:00 – 23:59  
Time: 00:00  
Time difference  
Sets the time difference from the world standard time  
(GMT).  
+12:00 – -12:00  
0000 – 9999  
00:00  
7-55  
7-56  
Changing the  
management code  
Changes the management code that is used by the copy  
manager.  
30 cpm copiers:  
3000  
IMPORTANT:  
40 cpm copiers:  
4000  
50 cpm copiers:  
5000  
If you change the management code from its factory  
default, be sure to keep some sort of record of the new  
management code. If, for any reason, you forget the  
registered management code, you will need to contact  
your service representative.  
Auto sleep ON/OFF  
Sets whether or not to have the auto sleep function  
automatically engage and turn the copier OFF (O) if no  
operation is performed on the copier for a designated  
amount of time.  
On / Off  
On  
7-57  
* If auto sleep interferes with your copying operations,  
turn this function OFF. However, it is recommended  
that you try to set a longer time interval until auto sleep  
engages before you actually turn it OFF.  
* For more detailed information on turn the auto sleep  
function, see page 4-11.  
Changing the energy-  
saving mode  
Changes the energy-saving mode that will be entered  
into when the [Energy Saver] key is pressed.  
(See “5. Energy-saving modes” on page 4-11 for more  
information.)  
Low power mode  
Sleep mode  
Low power  
mode  
7-58  
* This setting is displayed when the optional Printer Kit  
or Printer/Scanner Kit is installed.  
If you are using a standard copier, or if the optional Fax  
Kit is installed in your copier, you can press the  
[Energy Saver] key to engage the Low power mode.  
7-40-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
Use the keypad to enter the 4-digit management code.  
The factory default setting for 30 cpm copiers is “3000”, for  
40 cpm copiers is “4000” and for 50 cpm copiers is “5000”.  
(2) Accessing the machine default settings  
3
Perform the following procedure when you want to access the  
screens for each of the various machine default settings.  
Inch specifications  
Close  
Enter the administrator number  
With the content of the “Basic” tab displayed, press the  
[Default Setting/Counter] key.  
The “Default setting”screen will be displayed.  
1
Metric specifications  
Close  
Enter the administrator number  
Touch the “Machine default” key on the left side of the touch  
panel.  
If the entered code matched the registered one, the  
“Machine default” screen will be displayed.  
2
4
Inch specifications  
Inch specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting  
End  
Close  
Machine default  
Copy  
default  
Language  
Management  
Default menu  
Setting mode  
Up  
Auto drawer switching  
Paper size (1st drawer)  
Paper size (2nd drawer)  
Paper size (3rd drawer)  
Paper size (4th drawer)  
On / All types of paper  
Auto / Inch  
Auto / Inch  
Auto / Inch  
Auto / Inch  
Bypass  
setting  
BOX  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Down  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
Change #  
Default setting  
Metric specifications  
Metric specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting  
End  
Close  
Machine default  
Copy  
Language  
default  
Management  
Default menu  
Setting mode  
Up  
Auto cassette switching  
Paper size (1st cassette)  
Paper size (2nd cassette)  
Paper size (3rd cassette)  
Paper size (4th cassette)  
On / All types of paper  
Auto / Centimeter  
Auto / Centimeter  
Auto / Centimeter  
Auto / Centimeter  
Bypass  
setting  
Hard Disk  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Down  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
Change #  
Default setting  
NOTES  
• It is possible for you to change the 4-digit management code.  
(See “Changing the management code” on page 7-56.)  
• Refer to the desired procedure(s) explained under “(3) Making  
machine default settings” and perform the corresponding setting(s).  
7-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
Touch the “On” key to automatic drawer[cassette] switching  
ON.  
(3) Making machine default settings  
3
Perform the following procedure that corresponds to the desired  
setting.  
Inch specifications  
Auto drawer switching  
Back  
Close  
When paper drawer is empty, switch to another one,  
set same size/direction paper, and continue copying.  
● Auto drawer[cassette] switching ON/OFF  
Function  
On  
Paper type  
Perform the following procedure to turn automatic drawer[cassette]  
switching ON or OFF, as desired.  
All types  
of paper  
Feed same  
paper type  
Off  
Display the “Machine default” screen.  
(See “(2) Accessing the machine default settings” on  
page 7-41.)  
Default setting - Machine default  
1
Metric specifications  
Inch specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Back  
Close  
Auto cassette switching  
When paper cassette is empty, switch to another one,  
set same size/direction paper, and continue copying.  
Paper type  
Function  
Default setting  
End  
All types  
of Paper  
Feed same  
paper type  
On  
Off  
Copy  
default  
Language  
Management  
Bypass  
setting  
BOX  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
Default setting - Machine default  
In order to prevent a drawer[cassette] that holds a different  
type of paper from being switched to when the automatic  
drawer[cassette] switching function is turned ON, touch the  
“Feed same paper type” key under “Paper type”.  
Metric specifications  
4
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting  
End  
Copy  
Language  
default  
Management  
Bypass  
setting  
Hard Disk  
Management  
Counter  
check  
NOTE  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the  
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.  
Select “Auto drawer switching” [“Auto cassette switching”] in  
the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then  
touch the “Change #” key.The “Auto drawer switching” [“Auto  
cassette switching”] screen will be displayed.  
2
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 2.  
5
Inch specifications  
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return  
to the “Default setting”screen.  
6
Default setting / Counter  
Close  
Machine default  
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the  
contents of the “Basic” tab.  
Default menu  
Setting mode  
Up  
7
Auto drawer switching  
Paper size (1st drawer)  
Paper size (2nd drawer)  
Paper size (3rd drawer)  
Paper size (4th drawer)  
On / All types of paper  
Auto / Inch  
Down  
Auto / Inch  
Auto / Inch  
Auto / Inch  
Change #  
Default setting  
Metric specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Close  
Machine default  
Default menu  
Setting mode  
Up  
Auto cassette switching  
Paper size (1st cassette)  
Paper size (2nd cassette)  
Paper size (3rd cassette)  
Paper size (4th cassette)  
On / All types of paper  
Auto / Centimeter  
Auto / Centimeter  
Auto / Centimeter  
Auto / Centimeter  
Down  
Change #  
Default setting  
7-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
● Paper size (drawer[cassette] No.1 – No.4)  
If you select “Auto Detection” (automatic size detection) here,  
select the desired unit of measure (“Centimeter” or “Inch”) as  
well.  
3
Perform the following procedure to set the size of paper that is loaded  
in drawer[cassette] No.1 through No.4.  
If you select “Standard sizes” (standard paper size) here,  
simply touch the key that corresponds to the size of paper  
that is loaded in that drawer[cassette].  
Display the “Machine default” screen.  
(See “(2) Accessing the machine default settings” on  
page 7-41.)  
1
Inch specifications  
Paper type(1st drawer)  
Select paper size.  
Back  
Close  
Inch specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
A3  
A4  
A4  
A5  
B4  
B5  
B5  
11x17"  
51/2x81/2"  
Auto  
Detection  
81/2x14"  
81/2x13"  
8K  
Default setting  
End  
Standard  
sizes  
11x81/2  
"
Copy  
default  
Language  
Management  
81/2x11"  
16K  
Folio  
Bypass  
setting  
BOX  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Default setting - Machine default  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
Metric specifications  
Metric specifications  
Back  
Close  
Paper size (1st cassette)  
Select paper size.  
Default setting / Counter  
A3  
B4  
B5  
B5  
11x17"  
51/2x81/2"  
Default setting  
End  
Auto  
Detection  
81/2x14"  
81/2x13"  
8K  
A4  
Copy  
Language  
default  
Management  
Standard  
A4  
11x81/2  
"
sizes  
Bypass  
setting  
Hard Disk  
Management  
Counter  
check  
81/2x11"  
16K  
A5  
Folio  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
Default setting - Machine default  
NOTES  
Select one of the “Paper size” settings  
• If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch  
the “Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.  
• The setting for drawer[cassette] No.3 and No.4 will only be available  
when the optional Paper Feeder is installed on your copier.  
2
(“1st drawer[cassette]” through “4th drawer[cassette]”) in the  
settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch  
the “Change #” key.  
The screen to set the paper size for that drawer[cassette] will  
be displayed.  
Inch specifications  
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 2.  
4
Default setting / Counter  
Close  
Machine default  
Default menu  
Setting mode  
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return  
to the “Default setting”screen.  
Up  
Auto drawer switching  
Paper size (1st drawer)  
Paper size (2nd drawer)  
Paper size (3rd drawer)  
Paper size (4th drawer)  
On / All types of paper  
Auto / Inch  
5
Down  
Auto / Inch  
Auto / Inch  
Auto / Inch  
Change #  
Default setting  
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the  
contents of the “Basic” tab.  
6
Metric specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Close  
Machine default  
Default menu  
Setting mode  
Up  
Auto cassette switching  
Paper size (1st cassette)  
Paper size (2nd cassette)  
Paper size (3rd cassette)  
Paper size (4th cassette)  
On / All types of paper  
Auto / Centimeter  
Auto / Centimeter  
Auto / Centimeter  
Auto / Centimeter  
Down  
Change #  
Default setting  
7-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
● Paper type (drawer[cassette] No.1 - No. 4)  
Touch the key that corresponds to the type of paper that is  
loaded in that drawer[cassette].  
3
Perform the following procedure to set the type of paper that is loaded  
in drawers[cassettes] No.1 through No.4.  
Inch specifications  
Paper type(1st drawer)  
Back  
Close  
Select and display paper type.  
Display the “Machine default” screen.  
1
High  
quality  
(See “(2) Accessing the machine default settings” on  
page 7-41.)  
Color  
Custom 1  
Custom 5  
Custom 6  
Custom 7  
Custom 8  
Plain  
Prepunched  
Rough  
Custom 2  
Custom 3  
Custom 4  
Preprinted  
Recycled  
Letterhead  
Vellum  
Inch specifications  
Bond  
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting - Machine default  
Default setting  
End  
Metric specifications  
Copy  
default  
Language  
Management  
Paper type (1st cassette)  
Back  
Close  
Bypass  
setting  
BOX  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Select and display paper type.  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
High  
quality  
Custom 1  
Custom 2  
Custom 3  
Custom 4  
Custom 5  
Custom 6  
Custom 7  
Custom 8  
Colour  
Plain  
Preprinted  
Prepunched  
Rough  
Vellum  
Recycled  
Metric specifications  
Letterhead  
Bond  
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting - Machine default  
Default setting  
End  
Copy  
Language  
default  
Management  
NOTES  
Bypass  
setting  
Hard Disk  
Management  
Counter  
check  
• If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch  
the “Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.  
• The setting for drawer[cassette] No.3 and No.4 will only be available  
when the optional Paper Feeder is installed on your copier.  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
Select one of the “Paper type” settings  
2
(“1st drawer[cassette]” through “4th drawer[cassette]”) in the  
settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch  
the “Change #” key.  
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 2.  
4
The screen to set the paper type for that drawer[cassette] will  
be displayed.  
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return  
to the “Default setting”screen.  
5
Inch specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Close  
Machine default  
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the  
contents of the “Basic” tab.  
6
Default menu  
Setting mode  
Up  
Paper type (1st drawer)  
Paper type (2nd drawer)  
Paper type (3rd drawer)  
Paper type (4th drawer)  
Check bypass sizing  
Plain  
Plain  
Plain  
Plain  
Off  
Down  
Change #  
Default setting  
Metric specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Machine default  
Close  
Default menu  
Setting mode  
Up  
Paper type (1st cassette)  
Paper type (2nd cassette)  
Paper type (3rd cassette)  
Paper type (4th cassette)  
Check bypass sizing  
Plain  
Plain  
Plain  
Plain  
Off  
Down  
Change #  
Default setting  
7-44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
● Multi-bypass tray settings display ON/OFF  
Touch the “On” key if you want to have the “Bypass setting”  
screen appear.  
3
Perform the following procedure to have the “Bypass setting” screen  
appear whenever the “Bypass” key is pressed in the “Basic” tab.  
Inch specifications  
Back  
Close  
Check bypass sizing  
Display and check bypass setting mode when selecting.  
Select "On" when using custom size or changing paper type.  
Display the “Machine default” screen.  
(See “(2) Accessing the machine default settings” on  
page 7-41.)  
1
On  
Off  
Inch specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting - Machine default  
Default setting  
End  
Metric specifications  
Copy  
default  
Language  
Management  
Bypass  
setting  
BOX  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Back  
Close  
Check bypass sizing  
Display and check bypass setting mode when selecting.  
Select "On" when using custom size or changing paper type.  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
On  
Off  
Metric specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting - Machine default  
Default setting  
End  
Copy  
Language  
default  
Management  
NOTE  
Bypass  
setting  
Hard Disk  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the  
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.  
Select “Check bypass sizing” in the settings list on the left  
side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.  
The “Check bypass sizing” screen will be displayed.  
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 2.  
2
4
Inch specifications  
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return  
to the “Default setting” screen.  
5
Default setting / Counter  
Close  
Machine default  
Default menu  
Setting mode  
Up  
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the  
contents of the “Basic” tab.  
Paper type (1st drawer)  
Paper type (2nd drawer)  
Paper type (3rd drawer)  
Paper type (4th drawer)  
Check bypass sizing  
Plain  
Plain  
Plain  
Plain  
Off  
6
Down  
Change #  
Default setting  
Metric specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Machine default  
Close  
Default menu  
Setting mode  
Up  
Paper type (1st cassette)  
Paper type (2nd cassette)  
Paper type (3rd cassette)  
Paper type (4th cassette)  
Check bypass sizing  
Plain  
Plain  
Plain  
Plain  
Off  
Down  
Change #  
Default setting  
7-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
● Custom paper type for 2-sided copying  
Select one of the “custom” paper type settings (“Custom 1”  
through “Custom 8”) under the “Default menu” column on the  
left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #”  
key.  
3
Perform the following procedure to set whether or not each custom  
type of paper (custom 1 - custom 8) will be available for use in 2-sided  
copying.  
Inch specifications  
Close  
Select paper type(2sided)  
Display the “Machine default” screen.  
(See “(2) Accessing the machine default settings” on  
page 7-41.)  
1
Select paper type(s) for duplex copy.  
Default menu  
Setting mode  
Up  
Custom 1  
Custom 2  
Custom 3  
Custom 4  
Custom 5  
Custom 6  
Custom 7  
On  
On  
On  
On  
On  
On  
On  
Down  
Inch specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Change #  
Default setting - Machine default  
Default setting  
End  
Copy  
default  
Language  
Management  
Metric specifications  
Bypass  
setting  
BOX  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Select paper type(2sided)  
Close  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
Select paper type(s) for duplex copy.  
Default menu  
Setting mode  
Up  
Custom 1  
On  
On  
On  
On  
On  
On  
On  
Custom 2  
Custom 3  
Custom 4  
Custom 5  
Custom 6  
Custom 7  
Down  
Metric specifications  
Change #  
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting - Machine default  
Default setting  
End  
Copy  
Language  
default  
Management  
Touch the “Off” key if you do NOT want that custom paper  
type to be available for use in 2-sided copying.  
Bypass  
setting  
Hard Disk  
Management  
Counter  
check  
4
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
Inch specifications  
Custom 1  
Back  
Close  
Select “Select paper type (2sided)” in the settings list on the  
left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #”  
key.  
2
On  
Off  
The “Select paper type (2sided)” screen will be displayed.  
Default setting - Machine default - Select paper type (2sided)  
Inch specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Metric specifications  
Close  
Machine default  
Custom 1  
Back  
Close  
Default menu  
Setting mode  
Up  
Paper type (2nd drawer)  
Paper type (3rd drawer)  
Paper type (4th drawer)  
Check bypass sizing  
Plain  
Plain  
Plain  
Off  
Down  
On  
Off  
Select paper type (2sided)  
Change #  
Default setting  
Default setting - Machine default - Select paper type (2sided)  
Metric specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
NOTE  
Machine default  
Close  
Default menu  
Setting mode  
Up  
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the  
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 3.  
Paper type (2nd cassette)  
Paper type (3rd cassette)  
Paper type (4th cassette)  
Check bypass sizing  
Plain  
Plain  
Plain  
Off  
Down  
Select paper type (2sided)  
Change #  
Default setting  
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 3.  
5
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 2.  
6
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
“Default setting”screen.  
7
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the  
contents of the “Basic” tab.  
8
7-46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
● Special paper action setting  
Select “Adj. print Direction”.  
Inch specifications  
Special paper action mode  
3
When copying onto prepunched, preprinted or letterhead paper, and  
performing both 1-sided copying and 2-sided copying from the same  
drawer[cassette], the positioning of the holes in relation to the copied  
image may be different for each copy or the front and rear images of  
2-sided copies may be copied onto the opposites sides of the paper. If  
you select “Adj. print Direction”, both 1-sided and 2-sided copies will  
be created with the same orientation.  
Back  
Close  
Possible to set action of the paper  
(Prepunched, Preprinted, Letterhead)  
Adj. print  
Direction  
Speed  
Priority  
Default setting - Machine default  
Display the “Machine default” screen.  
(See “(2) Accessing the machine default settings” on  
page 7-41.)  
1
Metric specifications  
Specif. paper action mode  
Back  
Close  
Inch specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Possible to set action of the paper  
(Prepunched, Preprinted, Letterhead)  
Adj. print  
Direction  
Default setting  
End  
Speed  
Priority  
Copy  
default  
Language  
Management  
Bypass  
setting  
BOX  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Default setting - Machine default  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
NOTES  
Metric specifications  
• When “Adj. print Direction” is selected, the speed of 1-sided copying  
will be somewhat slower than normal.  
Default setting / Counter  
• If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch  
the “Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.  
Default setting  
End  
Copy  
Language  
default  
Management  
Bypass  
setting  
Hard Disk  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 2.  
4
Select “Special paper action mode” [“Specif. paper action  
mode”] in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel  
and then touch the “Change #” key.  
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return  
to the “Default setting” screen.  
2
5
The “Special paper action mode” [“Specif. paper action  
mode”] screen will be displayed.  
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the  
contents of the “Basic” tab.  
6
Inch specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Close  
Machine default  
Default menu  
Setting mode  
Up  
Paper type (3rd drawer)  
Paper type (4th drawer)  
Check bypass sizing  
Plain  
Plain  
Off  
Down  
Select paper type (2sided)  
Special paper action mode  
Speed priority  
Change #  
Default setting  
Metric specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Machine default  
Close  
Default menu  
Setting mode  
Up  
Paper type (3rd cassette)  
Paper type (4th cassette)  
Check bypass sizing  
Plain  
Plain  
Off  
Down  
Select paper type (2sided)  
Specif. paper action mode  
Speed priority  
Change #  
Default setting  
7-46-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
● Auto sleep time  
Touch the “+” key or the “–” key to change the displayed time  
to the desired setting (between 1 minutes and 240 minutes).  
3
Perform the following procedure to set the amount of time that will  
elapse before the auto sleep function engages and turns the copier  
OFF (O) if no operation has been performed on the copier during that  
time.  
Inch specifications  
Back  
Close  
Sleep mode changing time  
Set Changing time to turn automatically into sleep mode  
after last setting,or when copying is done.  
Minute  
Display the “Machine default” screen.  
(See “(2) Accessing the machine default settings” on  
page 7-41.)  
1
+
–
Default setting - Machine default  
Inch specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Metric specifications  
Default setting  
End  
Back  
Close  
Sleep mode changing time  
Copy  
default  
Set Changing time to turn automatically into sleep mode  
after last setting,or when copying is done.  
Language  
Management  
Bypass  
setting  
BOX  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Minute  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
Default setting - Machine default  
Metric specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting  
End  
Copy  
NOTES  
Language  
default  
Management  
Bypass  
setting  
Hard Disk  
Management  
Counter  
check  
• The setting can be made to 1 minute, 5 minutes, 15 minutes, 30  
minutes, 45 minutes, 60 minutes, 90 minutes, 120 minutes, 180  
minutes or 240 minutes.  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
• It is recommended that you try to set a longer time interval before  
the auto sleep function engages if you use the copier frequently, and  
to a shorter time if there are long intervals between use.  
• If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch  
the “Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.  
Select “Sleep mode changing time” in the settings list on the  
left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #”  
key.  
2
The “Sleep mode changing time” screen will be displayed.  
Inch specifications  
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 2.  
4
Default setting / Counter  
Close  
Machine default  
Default menu  
Setting mode  
Up  
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return  
to the “Default setting”screen.  
Sleep mode changing time  
Low power mode chng. time  
Select Copy output mode  
Select FAX output mode  
Select the main mode  
60 Minute  
15 Minute  
Inner tray  
Inner tray  
5
Down  
Change #  
Copy mode  
Default setting  
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the  
contents of the “Basic” tab.  
6
Metric specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Machine default  
Close  
Default menu  
Setting mode  
Up  
Sleep mode changing time  
Low power mode chng. time  
Select COPY output mode  
Select FAX output mode  
Select main mode  
60 Minute  
15 Minute  
Inner tray  
Inner tray  
COPY Mode  
Down  
Change #  
Default setting  
7-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
● Auto low power time  
Touch the “+” key or the “–” key to change the displayed time  
to that desired (any available setting between 1 minute and  
240 minutes).  
3
Perform the following procedure to set the amount of time that will  
elapse before the auto low power function automatically engages and  
puts the copier in the Low power mode if no operation has been  
performed on the copier during that time.  
Inch specifications  
Back  
Close  
Low power mode chng. time  
Set Changing time to turn autom. into low power mode  
after last setting,or when copying is done.  
Display the “Machine default” screen.  
(See “(2) Accessing the machine default settings” on  
page 7-41.)  
Minute  
1
+
–
Inch specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting - Machine default  
Metric specifications  
Default setting  
End  
Copy  
default  
Language  
Management  
Back  
Close  
Low power mode chng. time  
Set Changing time to turn autom. into low power mode  
after last setting,or when copying is done.  
Bypass  
setting  
BOX  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
Minute  
Metric specifications  
Default setting - Machine default  
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting  
End  
Copy  
Language  
default  
Management  
NOTES  
Bypass  
setting  
Hard Disk  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
• The setting can be made to 1 minute, 5 minutes, 15 minutes, 30  
minutes, 45 minutes, 60 minutes, 90 minutes, 120 minutes, 180  
minutes or 240 minutes.  
• If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch  
the “Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.  
Select “Low power mode chng. time” in the settings list on the  
left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #”  
key.  
2
The “Auto preheat time” screen will be displayed.  
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 2.  
4
Inch specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return  
to the “Default setting”screen.  
Close  
Machine default  
5
Default menu  
Setting mode  
Up  
Sleep mode changing time  
Low power mode chng. time  
Select Copy output mode  
Select FAX output mode  
Select the main mode  
60 Minute  
15 Minute  
Inner tray  
Inner tray  
Down  
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the  
contents of the “Basic” tab.  
Change #  
Copy mode  
6
Default setting  
Metric specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Machine default  
Close  
Default menu  
Setting mode  
Up  
Sleep mode changing time  
Low power mode chng. time  
Select COPY output mode  
Select FAX output mode  
Select main mode  
60 Minute  
15 Minute  
Inner tray  
Inner tray  
COPY Mode  
Down  
Change #  
Default setting  
7-48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
● Copy eject location  
Touch the key that corresponds to the desired location.  
3
Perform the following procedure to set where finished copies will be  
ejected.  
Inch specifications  
Select Copy output mode  
Back  
Close  
Set the default copy output destination  
NOTE  
Job  
separator  
Inner tray  
This setting will only be displayed when the optional Document  
Finisher, Built-in Finisher or Job Separator is installed on your copier.  
Finisher  
main tray  
Finisher  
sub tray  
Default setting - Machine default  
Metric specifications  
Display the “Machine default” screen.  
(See “(2) Accessing the machine default settings” on  
page 7-41.)  
1
Back  
Close  
Select COPY output mode  
Set the default copy output destination.  
Job  
separator  
Inch specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Inner tray  
Finisher  
main tray  
Finisher  
sub tray  
Default setting  
End  
Copy  
default  
Language  
Management  
Default setting - Machine default  
Bypass  
setting  
BOX  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
NOTES  
• The available location for ejection will differ depending upon the  
optional equipment that is installed on your copier.  
Metric specifications  
• If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch  
the “Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.  
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting  
End  
Copy  
Language  
default  
Management  
Bypass  
setting  
Hard Disk  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 2.  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
4
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return  
to the “Default setting”screen.  
Select “Select Copy output mode” in the settings list on the  
left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #”  
key.  
5
2
The “Select Copy output mode” screen will be displayed.  
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the  
contents of the “Basic” tab.  
6
Inch specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Close  
Machine default  
Default menu  
Setting mode  
Up  
Sleep mode changing time  
Low power mode chng. time  
Select Copy output mode  
Select FAX output mode  
Select the main mode  
60 Minute  
15 Minute  
Inner tray  
Inner tray  
Down  
Change #  
Copy mode  
Default setting  
Metric specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Machine default  
Close  
Default menu  
Setting mode  
Up  
Sleep mode changing time  
Low power mode chng. time  
Select COPY output mode  
Select FAX output mode  
Select main mode  
60 Minute  
15 Minute  
Inner tray  
Inner tray  
COPY Mode  
Down  
Change #  
Default setting  
7-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
● Fax eject location  
Touch the key that corresponds to the desired location.  
Inch specifications  
3
Perform the following procedure to set where incoming faxes will be  
ejected.  
Select FAX output mode  
Back  
Close  
Set the default fax output destination  
NOTE  
Job  
separator  
MailBox 1  
Inner tray  
This setting will only be displayed when the optional Fax Kit and  
Document Finisher (or the Built-in Finisher or Job Separator) are  
installed on your copier.  
Finisher  
sub tray  
Default setting - Machine default  
Metric specifications  
Display the “Machine default” screen.  
(See “(2) Accessing the machine default settings” on  
page 7-41.)  
Back  
Close  
Select FAX output mode  
1
Set the default fax output destination.  
Job  
separator  
Mailbox 1  
Inch specifications  
Inner tray  
Default setting / Counter  
Finisher  
sub tray  
Default setting  
End  
Default setting - Machine default  
Copy  
default  
Language  
Management  
Bypass  
setting  
BOX  
Management  
Counter  
check  
NOTES  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
• The available location for ejection will differ depending upon the  
optional equipment that is installed on your copier.  
Metric specifications  
• If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch  
the “Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.  
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting  
End  
Copy  
Language  
default  
Management  
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 2.  
Bypass  
setting  
Hard Disk  
Management  
Counter  
check  
4
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return  
to the “Default setting”screen.  
5
Select “Select FAX output mode” in the settings list on the left  
side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.  
The “Select FAX output mode” screen will be displayed.  
2
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the  
contents of the “Basic” tab.  
6
Inch specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Close  
Machine default  
Default menu  
Setting mode  
Up  
Sleep mode changing time  
Low power mode chng. time  
Select Copy output mode  
Select FAX output mode  
Select the main mode  
60 Minute  
15 Minute  
Inner tray  
Inner tray  
Down  
Change #  
Copy mode  
Default setting  
Metric specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Machine default  
Close  
Default menu  
Setting mode  
Up  
Sleep mode changing time  
Low power mode chng. time  
Select COPY output mode  
Select FAX output mode  
Select main mode  
60 Minute  
15 Minute  
Inner tray  
Inner tray  
COPY Mode  
Down  
Change #  
Default setting  
7-50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
● Default operation mode  
Select the "Copy mode" key or the "FAX mode" key, as  
appropriate.  
3
Perform the following procedure to set whether the display that  
appears after power is turned on to the copier will be the one for the  
copy operation mode or for the fax operation mode.  
Inch specifications  
Select the main mode  
Back  
Close  
Select the default display panel mode  
when the power is on.  
NOTE  
Copy mode  
FAX mode  
This setting is only available when the optional Fax Kit is installed in  
your copier.  
Default setting - Machine default  
Metric specifications  
Display the “Machine default” screen.  
(See “(2) Accessing the machine default settings” on  
page 7-41.)  
1
Select main mode  
Back  
Close  
Select the default display panel mode  
when the power is on.  
Inch specifications  
COPY Mode  
FAX mode  
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting  
End  
Copy  
default  
Language  
Management  
Default setting - Machine default  
Bypass  
setting  
BOX  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
NOTE  
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the  
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.  
Metric specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting  
End  
Copy  
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 2.  
Language  
default  
Management  
4
Bypass  
setting  
Hard Disk  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return  
to the “Default setting”screen.  
5
Select “Select the main mode” [“Select main mode”] in the  
settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch  
the “Change #” key.  
The “Select the main mode” [“Select main mode”] screen will  
be displayed.  
2
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the  
contents of the “Basic” tab.  
6
Inch specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Close  
Machine default  
Default menu  
Setting mode  
Up  
Sleep mode changing time  
Low power mode chng. time  
Select Copy output mode  
Select FAX output mode  
Select the main mode  
60 Minute  
15 Minute  
Inner tray  
Inner tray  
Down  
Change #  
Copy mode  
Default setting  
Metric specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Machine default  
Close  
Default menu  
Setting mode  
Up  
Sleep mode changing time  
Low power mode chng. time  
Select COPY output mode  
Select FAX output mode  
Select main mode  
60 Minute  
15 Minute  
Inner tray  
Inner tray  
COPY Mode  
Down  
Change #  
Default setting  
7-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
● Touch panel sound ON/OFF  
Touch the “On” key or the “Off” key to turn the sound on the  
touch panel ON or OFF, as desired.  
3
Perform the following procedure to set whether or not the touch panel  
will emit a “beep” sound each time a key is touched. Select “Off” if you  
want to turn the sound OFF.  
Inch specifications  
Back  
Close  
Key sound ON/OFF  
Select panel key sound mode off/on.  
Display the “Machine default” screen.  
(See “(2) Accessing the machine default settings” on  
page 7-41.)  
1
On  
Off  
Inch specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting - Machine default  
Metric specifications  
Default setting  
End  
Copy  
default  
Language  
Management  
Back  
Close  
Key sound ON/OFF  
Bypass  
setting  
BOX  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Select panel key sound mode off/on.  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
On  
Off  
Metric specifications  
Default setting - Machine default  
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting  
End  
Copy  
NOTE  
Language  
default  
Management  
Bypass  
setting  
Hard Disk  
Management  
Counter  
check  
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the  
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 2.  
Select “Key sound ON/OFF” in the settings list on the left  
side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.  
The “Key sound ON/OFF” screen will be displayed.  
4
2
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return  
to the “Default setting” screen.  
Inch specifications  
5
Default setting / Counter  
Machine default  
Close  
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the  
contents of the “Basic” tab.  
6
Default menu  
Setting mode  
Up  
Key sound ON/OFF  
Silent mode  
Date/Time  
Time difference  
Management code change  
On  
On  
Down  
2001/10/30 14:02  
GMT+08:00  
5000  
Change #  
Metric specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Close  
Machine default  
Default menu  
Setting mode  
Up  
Key sound ON/OFF  
Silent mode  
Date/Time  
Time difference  
Change MGMT code with #  
On  
Off  
Down  
30/10/'01 14:02  
GMT+08:00  
5000  
Change #  
Default setting  
7-52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
● Silent mode ON/OFF  
Touch the “On” key if you want to use the silent mode.  
3
Perform the following procedure to set whether or not to use the silent  
mode which shortens the length of time that the laser data writing  
motor continues to spin after each copy job is finished. Turn the silent  
mode ON if the noise of the motor bothers you in any way.  
Inch specifications  
Back  
Close  
Silent mode  
Use this mode if you are distracted by moter sounds.  
Off  
On  
Display the “Machine default” screen.  
1
(See “(2) Accessing the machine default settings” on  
page 7-41.)  
Default setting - Machine default  
Inch specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Metric specifications  
Close  
Back  
Silent mode  
Default setting  
End  
Shorten laser motor rotating time for before/after copying  
Use this mode if you are distracted by motor sound.  
Copy  
default  
Language  
Management  
Bypass  
setting  
BOX  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Off  
On  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
Default setting - Machine default  
Metric specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
NOTE  
Default setting  
End  
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the  
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.  
Copy  
Language  
default  
Management  
Bypass  
setting  
Hard Disk  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 2.  
4
Select “Silent mode” in the settings list on the left side of the  
touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.  
The “Silent mode” screen will be displayed.  
2
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return  
to the “Default setting”screen.  
5
Inch specifications  
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the  
contents of the “Basic” tab.  
Default setting / Counter  
6
Machine default  
Close  
Default menu  
Setting mode  
Up  
Key sound ON/OFF  
Silent mode  
Date/Time  
Time difference  
Management code change  
On  
On  
Down  
2001/10/30 14:02  
GMT+08:00  
5000  
Change #  
Metric specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Close  
Machine default  
Default menu  
Setting mode  
Up  
Key sound ON/OFF  
Silent mode  
Date/Time  
Time difference  
Change MGMT code with #  
On  
Off  
Down  
30/10/'01 14:02  
GMT+08:00  
5000  
Change #  
Default setting  
7-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
● Day & time  
Touch the “+” key or the “–” key to change the displayed  
information for each field (“Year”, “Month”, “Day” and “Time”)  
to the current time and date.  
3
Perform the following procedure to set the current date and time.  
If you want the time to be automatically calculated for  
daylight savings time, touch the “On” key under  
“Summertime”.  
NOTE  
BE SURE to perform the “Time difference” setting prior to setting the  
day and time.  
Inch specifications  
Back  
Close  
Date/Time  
Year  
Month  
Day  
2001  
10  
Summertime  
Display the “Machine default” screen.  
(See “(2) Accessing the machine default settings” on  
page 7-41.)  
1
16  
Off  
On  
Time 18:27  
Inch specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting - Machine default  
Metric specifications  
Default setting  
End  
Back  
Close  
Date/Time  
Copy  
default  
Language  
Management  
Bypass  
setting  
BOX  
Management  
Counter  
check  
2001  
10  
Year  
Month  
Day  
Summertime  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
16  
Off  
On  
18:27  
Time  
Metric specifications  
Default setting - Machine default  
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting  
End  
NOTE  
Copy  
Language  
default  
Management  
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the  
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.  
Bypass  
setting  
Hard Disk  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 2.  
Select “Date/Time” in the settings list on the left side of the  
touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.  
The “Date/Time” screen will be displayed.  
4
2
Inch specifications  
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return  
to the “Default setting”screen.  
5
Default setting / Counter  
Machine default  
Close  
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the  
contents of the “Basic” tab.  
Default menu  
Setting mode  
Up  
6
Key sound ON/OFF  
Silent mode  
Date/Time  
Time difference  
Management code change  
On  
On  
Down  
2001/10/30 14:02  
GMT+08:00  
5000  
Change #  
Metric specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Close  
Machine default  
Default menu  
Setting mode  
Up  
Key sound ON/OFF  
Silent mode  
Date/Time  
Time difference  
Change MGMT code with #  
On  
Off  
Down  
30/10/'01 14:02  
GMT+08:00  
5000  
Change #  
Default setting  
7-54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
● Time difference  
Touch the “+” key or the “–” key to change the displayed time  
difference to the desired setting.  
3
Perform the following procedure to set a designated time difference  
from the world standard time (GMT).  
Inch specifications  
Back  
Close  
Time difference  
Display the “Machine default” screen.  
(See “(2) Accessing the machine default settings” on  
page 7-41.)  
1
GMT+ 00 : 00  
Inch specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting - Machine default  
Default setting  
End  
Metric specifications  
Copy  
default  
Language  
Management  
Bypass  
setting  
BOX  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Back  
Close  
Time difference  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
GMT+ 00 : 00  
Metric specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting - Machine default  
Default setting  
End  
Copy  
Language  
default  
Management  
NOTE  
Bypass  
setting  
Hard Disk  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the  
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.  
Select “Time difference” in the settings list on the left side of  
the touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.  
The “Time difference” screen will be displayed.  
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 2.  
2
4
Inch specifications  
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return  
to the “Default setting”screen.  
5
Default setting / Counter  
Machine default  
Close  
Default menu  
Setting mode  
Up  
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the  
contents of the “Basic” tab.  
Key sound ON/OFF  
Silent mode  
Date/Time  
Time difference  
Management code change  
On  
On  
6
Down  
2001/10/30 14:02  
GMT+08:00  
5000  
Change #  
Metric specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Close  
Machine default  
Default menu  
Setting mode  
Up  
Key sound ON/OFF  
Silent mode  
Date/Time  
Time difference  
Change MGMT code with #  
On  
Off  
Down  
30/10/'01 14:02  
GMT+08:00  
5000  
Change #  
Default setting  
7-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
● Changing the management code  
Use the keypad to enter a new 4-digit management code.  
Inch specifications  
3
Perform the following procedure to change the management code  
used by the copy manager.  
Management code change  
Back  
Close  
Able to change management code.(# key)  
IMPORTANT!  
If you change the management code from its factory default, be sure  
to keep some sort of record of the new management code. If, for any  
reason, you forget the registered management code, you will need to  
contact your service representative.  
Default setting - Machine default  
Metric specifications  
Back  
Close  
Change MGMT code with #  
Able to change management code.(# key)  
Display the “Machine default” screen.  
(See “(2) Accessing the machine default settings” on  
page 7-41.)  
1
Inch specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting - Machine default  
Default setting  
End  
Copy  
default  
NOTE  
Language  
Management  
Bypass  
setting  
BOX  
Management  
Counter  
check  
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the  
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
Metric specifications  
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 2.  
4
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting  
End  
Copy  
Language  
default  
Management  
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return  
to the “Default setting”screen.  
5
Bypass  
setting  
Hard Disk  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the  
contents of the “Basic” tab.  
6
Select “Management code change” [“Change MGMT code  
with #”] in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel  
and then touch the “Change #” key.  
2
The “Management code change” [“Change MGMT code with  
#”] screen will be displayed.  
Inch specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Machine default  
Close  
Default menu  
Setting mode  
Up  
Key sound ON/OFF  
Silent mode  
Date/Time  
Time difference  
Management code change  
On  
On  
Down  
2001/10/30 14:02  
GMT+08:00  
5000  
Change #  
Metric specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Machine default  
Close  
Default menu  
Setting mode  
Up  
Key sound ON/OFF  
Silent mode  
Date/Time  
Time difference  
Management code change  
On  
On  
Down  
2001/10/30 14:02  
GMT+08:00  
5000  
Change #  
7-56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
● Auto sleep ON/OFF  
Touch the “On” key if you want to use the auto sleep function.  
3
Perform the following procedure to set whether or not to have the  
auto sleep function automatically engage and turn the copier OFF (O)  
if no operation is performed on the copier for a designated amount of  
time.  
Inch specifications  
Auto sleep  
Autom. turns into sleep mode if no oper. within a set time  
Back  
Close  
after last setting,or when copying is done.  
On  
Off  
Display the “Machine default” screen.  
1
(See “(2) Accessing the machine default settings” on  
page 7-41.)  
Default setting - Machine default  
Inch specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Metric specifications  
Back  
Close  
Auto sleep  
Default setting  
End  
Autom. turns into sleep mode if no oper. within a set time  
after last setting,or when copying is done.  
Copy  
default  
Language  
Management  
Bypass  
setting  
BOX  
Management  
Counter  
check  
On  
Off  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
Default setting - Machine default  
Metric specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
NOTES  
• If auto sleep interferes with your copying operations, turn this  
function OFF. However, it is recommended that you try to set a  
longer time interval until auto sleep engages before you actually turn  
it OFF.  
Default setting  
End  
Copy  
Language  
default  
Management  
Bypass  
setting  
Hard Disk  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
• If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch  
the “Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.  
Select “Auto sleep” in the settings list on the left side of the  
touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.  
The “Auto sleep” screen will be displayed.  
2
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 2.  
Inch specifications  
4
Default setting / Counter  
Machine default  
Close  
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return  
to the “Default setting”screen.  
Default menu  
Setting mode  
2001/10/30 14:02  
GMT+08:00  
5000  
5
Up  
Date/Time  
Time difference  
Management code change  
Auto sleep  
Down  
On  
Energy Saver key setting  
Low power mode  
Change #  
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the  
contents of the “Basic” tab.  
6
Metric specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Close  
Machine default  
Default menu  
Date/Time  
Time difference  
Change MGMT code with #  
Auto sleep  
Setting mode  
Up  
30/10/'01 14:02  
GMT+08:00  
5000  
Down  
On  
Energy Saver key setting  
Low power mode  
Change #  
Default setting  
7-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
● Changing the energy-saving mode  
Touch the “Low power mode” key or the “Sleep mode” key, as  
desired.  
3
Perform the following procedure to change the energy-saving mode  
(the Low power mode or the Sleep mode) that will be entered into  
when the [Energy Saver] key is pressed.  
Inch specifications  
Energy Saver key setting  
Back  
Close  
When pressing Energy Saver key, state can be set.  
Display the “Machine default” screen.  
(See “(2) Accessing the machine default settings” on  
page 7-41.)  
1
Low power  
mode  
Sleep  
mode  
Inch specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting - Machine default  
Metric specifications  
Default setting  
End  
Copy  
default  
Language  
Management  
Energy Saver key setting  
Back  
Close  
When pressing Energy Saver key, state can be set.  
Bypass  
setting  
BOX  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
Low power  
mode  
Sleep  
mode  
Metric specifications  
Default setting - Machine default  
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting  
End  
Copy  
Language  
default  
Management  
NOTE  
Bypass  
setting  
Hard Disk  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the  
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.  
Select “Energy Saver key setting” in the settings list on the  
left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #”  
key.  
2
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 2.  
4
The “Energy Saver key setting” screen will be displayed.  
Inch specifications  
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return  
to the “Default setting”screen.  
5
Default setting / Counter  
Machine default  
Close  
Default menu  
Setting mode  
2001/10/30 14:02  
GMT+08:00  
5000  
Up  
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the  
contents of the “Basic” tab.  
Date/Time  
Time difference  
Management code change  
Auto sleep  
Energy Saver key setting  
6
Down  
On  
Low power mode  
Change #  
Metric specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Close  
Machine default  
Default menu  
Date/Time  
Time difference  
Change MGMT code with #  
Auto sleep  
Setting mode  
Up  
30/10/'01 14:02  
GMT+08:00  
5000  
Down  
On  
Energy Saver key setting  
Low power mode  
Change #  
Default setting  
7-58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
(4) Copy default settings  
The following table indicates the copy default settings available in this copier. Change any or all of the settings as desired in order to make the most  
effective use of your copier.  
Default setting  
Description  
Available settings  
Factory  
setting  
Reference  
page  
Exposure mode  
Selects between auto exposure and manual  
exposure as the default copy exposure mode in the  
initial mode.  
Manual / Auto  
Manual  
7-63  
Exposure adjustment  
step  
Changes the incremental step to be used during  
adjustment of the copy exposure.  
1 step / 0.5 step  
1 step  
7-64  
7-65  
7-66  
Original quality  
Determines the default setting that will be used for  
the image quality in the initial mode.  
Text+Photo / Text /  
Photo  
Text+Photo  
Off  
Eco print mode ON/OFF  
Determines whether the Eco print mode will be the  
default setting in the initial mode. In this case, the  
amount of toner that is used to make the copies will  
be reduced, and images will be printed out relatively  
lighter than normal.  
On / Off  
Background exposure  
adjustment  
Adjusts the ground color of the copied paper.  
-2 – +2  
Standard setting  
(0)  
7-67  
7-68  
Paper selection  
Sets whether the copier will automatically select the  
same size of copy paper as the original once an  
original is set (APS: auto paper selection mode), or  
whether the drawer[cassette] selected “Default  
drawer” [“Default cassette”] setting will be  
automatically selected.  
APS / Default  
drawer[cassette]  
APS  
Paper type (auto paper  
selection mode)  
Sets which types of paper can be selected under the  
auto paper selection mode.  
Off / On  
On  
7-69  
* It is possible to select the type of paper that has  
been designated for the drawer[cassette] currently  
in use.  
Plain  
Plain  
Preprinted  
Recycled  
Letterhead  
Color [Colour]  
Prepunched  
Rough  
Bond  
High quality  
Vellum  
Custom 1 –  
Custom 8  
Default drawer[cassette]  
Sets one drawer[cassette] that will be selected  
automatically regardless of the size of paper loaded  
in that drawer[cassette].  
* It is NOT possible to select the multi-bypass tray  
as the default drawer[cassette].  
1st paper  
2nd paper  
3rd paper  
4th paper  
1st paper  
7-70  
* The setting for drawer[cassette] No.3 and No.4 will  
only be available when the optional Paper Feeder  
is installed on your copier.  
7-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
Default setting  
Description  
Available settings  
Factory  
setting  
Reference  
page  
Cover drawer[cassette]  
Sets which drawer[cassette] will be used to feed the  
cover sheets in the cover mode, the booklet/stitching  
mode and the book to booklet mode.  
* The setting for drawer[cassette] No.3 and No.4 will  
only be available when the optional Paper Feeder  
is installed on your copier.  
1st paper  
2nd paper  
3rd paper  
4th paper  
Bypass  
Bypass  
7-71  
Default magnification  
ratio  
Sets whether or not the auto magnification selection  
mode will be used to automatically calculate the  
appropriate magnification ratio when you select the  
size of copy paper.  
Manual / AMS  
Manual  
7-72  
Auto exposure  
adjustment  
Adjusts the overall exposure level for the auto  
exposure mode.  
-3 – +3  
-3 – +3  
Standard setting  
(0)  
7-73  
7-74  
Auto exposure  
adjustment (OCR)  
Adjusts the overall exposure level for scanning with  
OCR (Optical Character Recognition) software when  
using the optional scanner functions of this copier.  
Standard setting  
(0)  
Manual exposure  
adjustment (text+photo  
mode)  
Adjusts the median exposure value when the  
text+photo mode is selected for the image quality.  
-3 – +3  
-3 – +3  
-3 – +3  
Standard setting  
(0)  
7-75  
7-76  
7-77  
7-78  
Manual exposure  
adjustment (text mode)  
Adjusts the median exposure value when the text  
mode is selected for the image quality.  
Standard setting  
(0)  
Manual exposure  
adjustment (photo  
mode)  
Adjusts the median exposure value when the photo  
mode is selected for the image quality.  
Standard setting  
(0)  
Sort/Finished mode ON/  
OFF  
Determines whether or not the Sort and/or the  
Finished modes will be the default setting in the  
initial mode.  
Sort mode :  
On / Off  
Finished mode :  
Off / On [1 set (Output  
each page) ]  
Sort mode :  
On  
Finished mode :  
Off  
Auto Rotation mode  
Determines whether or not the Auto Rotation mode  
will be the default setting in the initial mode. If Auto  
Rotation is turned ON, the image will be  
Rotate / No Rotate  
Rotate  
7-79  
automatically rotated even if the orientation of the  
original is different from that of the paper loaded in  
the drawers[cassettes].  
Margin width  
Determines the default value of the location and  
width of the margins in the margin mode.  
Inch specification  
0 – 3/4 (inches)  
Metric specification  
0 – 18 (mm)  
Inch  
7-80  
specification  
Left: 1/4 (inches)  
Top: 0 (inches)  
Metric  
specification  
Left: 6 (mm)  
Top: 0 (mm)  
7-60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
Default setting  
Description  
Available settings  
Factory  
setting  
Reference  
page  
Erased border width  
Determines the default value for the width of the  
border to be erased in the two border erase modes.  
Inch specification  
Outside border:  
0 – 3/4 (inches)  
Center area:  
Inch  
7-81  
specification  
Outside border:  
1/4 (inches)  
Center area:  
1/2 (inches)  
0 – 1 1/2 (inches)  
Metric specification  
Outside border:  
0 – 18 (mm)  
Metric  
specification  
Outside border:  
6 (mm)  
Center area:  
0 – 36 (mm)  
Center area:  
12 (mm)  
Copy limit  
Sets the limit for the number of copies (or copy sets)  
that can be made at a time.  
1 – 999  
Off / On  
999  
On  
7-82  
7-83  
Repeat copying ON/  
OFF  
Sets whether or not to prohibit repeat copying, as  
well as whether or not to make repeat copying the  
default setting in the initial mode. Sets whether to  
turn the repeat copy mode ON or OFF.  
Sets whether or not to make repeat copying the  
default setting in the initial mode.  
Off / On  
Off / On  
Off  
On  
* This setting is displayed when the optional Hard  
Disk is installed.  
Registration keys ON/  
OFF  
Sets whether or not to allow a “Register” key to be  
displayed in the screen for those function and modes  
which can be registered under the registration keys.  
Functions and/or modes can only be registered  
under registration keys through the “Register” key.  
7-84  
7-85  
Customize screen layout  
(Main functions)  
Changes the order of the main functions and modes  
that are displayed in the “Basic” and the “User  
choice” tabs in order to make the display more  
appropriate to the way you use the copier.  
* Up to 6 functions and modes can be listed and  
displayed.  
Exposure Mode /  
Reduce/Enlarge /  
Sort/Finished /  
1/2 sided /  
Original size /  
Orig. quality  
1
2
Exposure  
Mode  
Reduce/  
Enlarge  
3
4
5
6
Sort/Finished  
1/2 sided  
Original size  
Orig. quality  
[Quality orig.]  
[Quality orig.]  
Customize screen layout Adds often-used functions and/or modes, and  
All functions and modes  
other than those in the  
“Basic” tab and the  
“main functions” in the  
“User choice” tab.  
7
8
Margin  
7-86  
(Add functions)  
changes the order of their layout, in order to make  
the display more appropriate to the way you use the  
copier.  
Border Erase  
[Erase Mode]  
Combine  
9
[Merge]  
10 (None)  
11 (None)  
12 (None)  
13 (None)  
7-61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
Use the keypad to enter the 4-digit management code.  
The factory default setting for 30 cpm copiers is “3000”, for  
40 cpm copiers is “4000” and for 50 cpm copiers is “5000”.  
(5) Accessing the copy default settings  
3
Perform the following procedure when you want to access the  
screens for each of the various copy default settings.  
Inch specifications  
Close  
Enter the administrator number  
With the content of the “Basic” tab displayed, press the  
[Default Setting/Counter] key.  
The “Default setting”screen will be displayed.  
1
Metric specifications  
Close  
Enter the administrator number  
Touch the “Copy default” key on the left side of the touch  
panel.  
2
If the entered code matched the registered one, the “Copy  
default” screen will be displayed.  
4
Inch specifications  
Inch specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting  
End  
Copy  
default  
Language  
Management  
Copy default  
Close  
Bypass  
setting  
BOX  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Default menu  
Setting mode  
Up  
Exposure mode  
Exposure steps  
Original image quality  
Eco Print  
Manual  
1 step  
Text + Photo  
Off  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
Down  
Background exp. adj.  
Standard  
Change #  
Default setting  
Metric specifications  
Metric specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting  
End  
Copy  
Close  
Copy default  
Language  
default  
Management  
Bypass  
setting  
Hard Disk  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Default menu  
Exposure mode  
Exposure steps  
Image quality original  
Eco Print  
Setting mode  
Up  
Manual  
1 step  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
Down  
Text + Photo  
Off  
Background exp. adj.  
Standard  
Change #  
Default setting  
NOTES  
• It is possible for you to change the 4-digit management code.  
(See “Changing the management code” on page 7-56.)  
• Refer to the desired procedure(s) explained under “(6) Making copy  
default settings” and perform the corresponding setting(s).  
7-62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
Touch the “Manual” key or the “Auto” key, as appropriate.  
(6) Making copy default settings  
3
Inch specifications  
Perform the following procedure that corresponds to the desired  
setting.  
Exposure mode  
Select default mode of copy exposure, auto or manual.  
Back  
Close  
● Exposure mode  
Manual  
Auto  
Perform the following procedure to select between auto exposure and  
manual exposure as the default copy exposure mode in the initial  
mode.  
Default setting - Copy default  
Metric specifications  
Display the “Copy default” screen.  
1
Exposure mode  
Back  
Close  
(See “(5) Accessing the copy default settings” on page 7-62.)  
Select default mode of copy exposure, auto or manual.  
Inch specifications  
Manual  
Auto  
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting  
End  
Copy  
default  
Language  
Management  
Default setting - Copy default  
Bypass  
setting  
BOX  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
NOTE  
Metric specifications  
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the  
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.  
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting  
End  
Copy  
Language  
default  
Management  
Bypass  
setting  
Hard Disk  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 2.  
4
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return  
to the “Default setting”screen.  
5
Select “Exposure mode” in the settings list on the left side of  
the touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.  
The “Exposure mode” screen will be displayed.  
2
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the  
contents of the “Basic” tab.  
6
Inch specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Copy default  
Close  
Default menu  
Setting mode  
Up  
Exposure mode  
Exposure steps  
Original image quality  
Eco Print  
Manual  
1 step  
Text + Photo  
Off  
Down  
Background exp. adj.  
Standard  
Change #  
Default setting  
Metric specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Close  
Copy default  
Default menu  
Exposure mode  
Exposure steps  
Image quality original  
Eco Print  
Setting mode  
Up  
Manual  
1 step  
Down  
Text + Photo  
Off  
Background exp. adj.  
Standard  
Change #  
Default setting  
7-63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
● Exposure adjustment step  
Touch the “1 step” key or the “0.5 step” key, as appropriate.  
Inch specifications  
3
Perform the following procedure to change the incremental step to be  
used during adjustment of the copy exposure.  
Exposure steps  
Select step of copy exposure.  
Back  
Close  
Display the “Copy default” screen.  
(See “(5) Accessing the copy default settings” on page 7-62.)  
1
1 step  
step  
Inch specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting - Copy default  
Default setting  
End  
Metric specifications  
Copy  
default  
Language  
Management  
Bypass  
setting  
BOX  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Exposure steps  
Back  
Close  
Select adjustment step of copy exposure.  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
1 step  
0.5 step  
Metric specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting - Copy default  
Default setting  
End  
Copy  
Language  
default  
Management  
Bypass  
setting  
Hard Disk  
Management  
Counter  
check  
NOTE  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the  
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.  
Select “Exposure steps” in the settings list on the left side of  
the touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.  
The “Exposure steps” screen will be displayed.  
2
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 2.  
4
Inch specifications  
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return  
to the “Default setting”screen.  
Default setting / Counter  
5
Copy default  
Close  
Default menu  
Setting mode  
Up  
Exposure mode  
Exposure steps  
Original image quality  
Eco Print  
Manual  
1 step  
Text + Photo  
Off  
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the  
contents of the “Basic” tab.  
Down  
6
Background exp. adj.  
Standard  
Change #  
Default setting  
Metric specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Close  
Copy default  
Default menu  
Exposure mode  
Exposure steps  
Image quality original  
Eco Print  
Setting mode  
Up  
Manual  
1 step  
Down  
Text + Photo  
Off  
Background exp. adj.  
Standard  
Change #  
Default setting  
7-64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
● Original quality  
Touch the “Text+Photo” key, the “Photo” key or the “Text” key,  
as appropriate.  
3
Perform the following procedure to determine the default setting that  
will be used for the image quality in the initial mode.  
Inch specifications  
Original image quality  
Back  
Close  
Select default mode of original image quality.  
Display the “Copy default” screen.  
1
(See “(5) Accessing the copy default settings” on page 7-62.)  
Text + Photo  
Photo  
Inch specifications  
Text  
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting - Copy default  
Default setting  
End  
Copy  
default  
Language  
Management  
Metric specifications  
Bypass  
setting  
BOX  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Back  
Close  
Image quality original.  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
Select default mode of original quality.  
Text+Photo  
Metric specifications  
Photo  
Text  
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting - Copy default  
Default setting  
End  
Copy  
Language  
default  
Management  
Bypass  
setting  
Hard Disk  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
NOTE  
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the  
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.  
Select “Original image quality” [“Image quality Original”] in  
the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then  
touch the “Change #” key.  
The “Original image quality” [“Image quality Original”] screen  
will be displayed.  
2
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 2.  
4
Inch specifications  
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return  
to the “Default setting”screen.  
5
Default setting / Counter  
Copy default  
Close  
Default menu  
Setting mode  
Up  
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the  
contents of the “Basic” tab.  
Exposure mode  
Exposure steps  
Original image quality  
Eco Print  
Manual  
1 step  
6
Down  
Text + Photo  
Off  
Standard  
Background exp. adj.  
Change #  
Default setting  
Metric specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Close  
Copy default  
Default menu  
Exposure mode  
Exposure steps  
Image quality original  
Eco Print  
Setting mode  
Up  
Manual  
1 step  
Down  
Text + Photo  
Off  
Background exp. adj.  
Standard  
Change #  
Default setting  
7-65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
● Eco print mode ON/OFF  
Touch the “On” key if you want to make the eco print mode  
the default setting in the initial mode.  
3
Perform the following procedure to determine whether or not the eco  
print mode will be the default setting in the initial mode.  
Inch specifications  
Back  
Close  
Eco Print  
Select default Eco Print.  
Display the “Copy default” screen.  
(See “(5) Accessing the copy default settings” on page 7-62.)  
1
Off  
On  
Inch specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting - Copy default  
Default setting  
End  
Copy  
default  
Language  
Management  
Metric specifications  
Bypass  
setting  
BOX  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Back  
Close  
Eco Print  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
Select default EcoPrint.  
Off  
On  
Metric specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting - Copy default  
Default setting  
End  
Copy  
Language  
default  
Management  
Bypass  
setting  
Hard Disk  
Management  
Counter  
check  
NOTE  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the  
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.  
Select “Eco Print” in the settings list on the left side of the  
touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.  
The “Eco Print” screen will be displayed.  
2
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 2.  
4
Inch specifications  
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will  
return to the “Default setting”screen.  
Default setting / Counter  
5
Copy default  
Close  
Default menu  
Setting mode  
Up  
Exposure mode  
Exposure steps  
Original image quality  
Eco Print  
Manual  
1 step  
Text + Photo  
Off  
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the  
contents of the “Basic” tab.  
Down  
6
Background exp. adj.  
Standard  
Change #  
Default setting  
Metric specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Close  
Copy default  
Default menu  
Exposure mode  
Exposure steps  
Image quality original  
Eco Print  
Setting mode  
Up  
Manual  
1 step  
Down  
Text + Photo  
Off  
Background exp. adj.  
Standard  
Change #  
Default setting  
7-66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
● Background exposure adjustment  
Touch the “Lighter” key or “Darker” key to adjust density.  
3
Perform the following procedure to adjust the ground color of the  
copied paper.  
Inch specifications  
Back  
Close  
Background exp. adj.  
Able to adjust exposure of paper background.  
Display the “Copy default” screen.  
1
(See “(5) Accessing the copy default settings” on page 7-62.)  
Lighter  
Darker  
Inch specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting - Copy default  
Default setting  
End  
Copy  
default  
Language  
Management  
Metric specifications  
Bypass  
setting  
BOX  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Back  
Close  
Background exp. adj.  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
Able to adjust exposure of paper background.  
Lighter  
Darker  
Metric specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting - Copy default  
Default setting  
End  
Copy  
Language  
default  
Management  
Bypass  
setting  
Hard Disk  
Management  
Counter  
check  
NOTE  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the  
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.  
Select “Background exp. adj.” in the settings list on the left  
side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.  
The “Background exp. adj.” screen will be displayed.  
2
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 2.  
4
Inch specifications  
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will  
return to the “Default setting”screen.  
Default setting / Counter  
5
Copy default  
Close  
Default menu  
Setting mode  
Up  
Exposure mode  
Exposure steps  
Original image quality  
Eco Print  
Manual  
1 step  
Text + Photo  
Off  
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the  
contents of the “Basic” tab.  
Down  
6
Background exp. adj.  
Standard  
Change #  
Default setting  
Metric specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Close  
Copy default  
Default menu  
Exposure mode  
Exposure steps  
Image quality original  
Eco Print  
Setting mode  
Up  
Manual  
1 step  
Down  
Text + Photo  
Off  
Background exp. adj.  
Standard  
Change #  
Default setting  
7-67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
● Paper selection  
Touch the “APS” key to have the same size of copy paper as  
the original selected automatically, and the “Default  
drawer[cassette]” key to have paper fed from the designated  
default drawer[cassette].  
3
Perform the following procedure to set whether the copier will  
automatically select the same size of copy paper as the original once  
an original is set, or whether the designated default drawer[cassette]  
will be automatically selected.  
Inch specifications  
Select paper  
Set auto paper selection mode.  
Back  
Close  
Display the “Copy default” screen.  
1
(See “(5) Accessing the copy default settings” on page 7-62.)  
APS  
Inch specifications  
Default  
drawer  
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting - Copy default  
Default setting  
End  
Copy  
default  
Language  
Management  
Metric specifications  
Bypass  
setting  
BOX  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Back  
Close  
Select paper  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
Setting paper select mode.  
APS  
Metric specifications  
Default  
cassette  
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting - Copy default  
Default setting  
End  
Copy  
Language  
default  
Management  
Bypass  
setting  
Hard Disk  
Management  
Counter  
check  
NOTE  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the  
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.  
Select “Select paper” in the settings list on the left side of the  
touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.  
The “Select paper” screen will be displayed.  
2
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 2.  
4
Inch specifications  
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return  
to the “Default setting”screen.  
Default setting / Counter  
5
Close  
Copy default  
Default menu  
Setting mode  
Up  
Select paper  
APS  
Select paper type(APS)  
Default drawer  
Drawer for cover paper  
Default magnification  
Plain  
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the  
contents of the “Basic” tab.  
Down  
1st paper  
Bypass  
Manual  
6
Change #  
Default setting  
Metric specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Close  
Copy default  
Default menu  
Select paper  
Setting mode  
Up  
APS  
Select paper type(APS)  
Default cassette  
Cassette for cover paper  
Default mode  
Plain  
Down  
1st paper  
Bypass  
Manual  
Change #  
Default setting  
7-68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
● Paper type (auto paper selection mode)  
Touch the “On” key and then touch the key that corresponds  
to the types of paper you want to allow to be used under the  
auto paper selection mode. If you do NOT want to limit the  
types of paper that will be available for use in that mode,  
touch the “Off” key.  
3
Perform the following procedure to set which types of paper can be  
selected under the auto paper selection mode.  
Display the “Copy default” screen.  
(See “(5) Accessing the copy default settings” on page 7-62.)  
Inch specifications  
1
Back  
Close  
Select paper type(APS)  
Inch specifications  
Select paper type(s) for Auto Paper Selection.  
High  
quality  
Default setting / Counter  
Color  
Custom 5  
Custom 6  
Custom 7  
Custom 8  
Plain  
Custom 1  
Prepunched  
Rough  
Vellum  
Off  
On  
Preprinted  
Recycled  
Letterhead  
Custom 2  
Custom 3  
Custom 4  
Default setting  
End  
Copy  
default  
Language  
Management  
Bond  
Bypass  
setting  
BOX  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Default setting - Copy default  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
Metric specifications  
Select paper type(APS)  
Back  
Close  
Metric specifications  
Select paper type(s) for Auto Paper Selection.  
High  
quality  
Plain  
Colour  
Custom 1  
Custom 2  
Custom 5  
Custom 6  
Default setting / Counter  
Off  
On  
Preprinted  
Recycled  
Letterhead  
Prepunched  
Rough  
Vellum  
Default setting  
End  
Custom 3  
Custom 4  
Custom 7  
Custom 8  
Copy  
Language  
default  
Management  
Bond  
Bypass  
setting  
Hard Disk  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Default setting - Copy default  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
NOTES  
• It is possible to select the type of paper that has been designated for  
the drawer[cassette] currently in use.  
• If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch  
the “Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.  
Select “Select paper type(APS)” in the settings list on the left  
side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.  
The “Select paper type(APS)” screen will be displayed.  
2
Inch specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 2.  
Close  
Copy default  
4
Default menu  
Setting mode  
Up  
Select paper  
APS  
Select paper type(APS)  
Default drawer  
Drawer for cover paper  
Default magnification  
Plain  
Down  
1st paper  
Bypass  
Manual  
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return  
to the “Default setting”screen.  
Change #  
5
Default setting  
Metric specifications  
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the  
contents of the “Basic” tab.  
6
Default setting / Counter  
Close  
Copy default  
Default menu  
Select paper  
Setting mode  
Up  
APS  
Select paper type(APS)  
Default cassette  
Cassette for cover paper  
Default mode  
Plain  
Down  
1st paper  
Bypass  
Manual  
Change #  
Default setting  
7-69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
● Default drawer[cassette]  
Touch the key that corresponds to the desired  
drawer[cassette].  
3
Perform the following procedure to set one drawer[cassette] that will  
be selected automatically regardless of the size of paper loaded in  
that drawer[cassette].  
* It is NOT possible to select the multi-bypass tray as the default  
drawer[cassette].  
Inch specifications  
Default drawer  
Select priority drawer.  
Back  
Close  
1st paper  
2nd paper  
3rd paper  
4th paper  
Display the “Copy default” screen.  
(See “(5) Accessing the copy default settings” on page 7-62.)  
1
Default setting - Copy default  
Inch specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Metric specifications  
Default setting  
End  
Default cassette  
Back  
Close  
Copy  
default  
Language  
Management  
Select paper cassette for default setting.  
Bypass  
setting  
BOX  
Management  
Counter  
check  
1st paper  
2nd paper  
3rd paper  
4th paper  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
Default setting - Copy default  
Metric specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
NOTES  
Default setting  
End  
Copy  
Language  
default  
Management  
• If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch  
the “Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.  
• The setting for drawer[cassette] No.3 and No.4 will only be available  
when the optional Paper Feeder is installed on your copier.  
Bypass  
setting  
Hard Disk  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
Select “Default drawer[cassette]” in the settings list on the left  
side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.  
The “Default drawer[cassette]” screen will be displayed.  
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 2.  
2
4
Inch specifications  
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return  
to the “Default setting”screen.  
5
Default setting / Counter  
Close  
Copy default  
Default menu  
Setting mode  
Up  
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the  
contents of the “Basic” tab.  
Select paper  
Select paper type(APS)  
Default drawer  
Drawer for cover paper  
Default magnification  
APS  
Plain  
6
Down  
1st paper  
Bypass  
Manual  
Change #  
Default setting  
Metric specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Close  
Copy default  
Default menu  
Select paper  
Setting mode  
Up  
APS  
Select paper type(APS)  
Default cassette  
Cassette for cover paper  
Default mode  
Plain  
Down  
1st paper  
Bypass  
Manual  
Change #  
Default setting  
7-70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
● Cover drawer[cassette]  
Touch the key that corresponds to the desired  
drawer[cassette].  
3
Perform the following procedure to set which drawer[cassette] will be  
used to feed the cover sheets in the cover mode, the booklet/stitching  
mode and the book to booklet mode.  
Inch specifications  
Drawer for cover paper  
Back  
Close  
Select drawer for cover paper.  
Display the “Copy default” screen.  
(See “(5) Accessing the copy default settings” on page 7-62.)  
1st paper  
2nd paper  
3rd paper  
4th paper  
1
Bypass  
Inch specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting - Copy default  
Default setting  
End  
Metric specifications  
Copy  
default  
Language  
Management  
Bypass  
setting  
BOX  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Back  
Close  
Cassette for cover paper  
Select cassette for cover paper.  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
1st paper  
2nd paper  
3rd paper  
4th paper  
Bypass  
Metric specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting - Copy default  
Default setting  
End  
Copy  
Language  
default  
Management  
NOTES  
Bypass  
setting  
Hard Disk  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
• If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch  
the “Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.  
• The setting for drawer[cassette] No.3 and No.4 will only be available  
when the optional Paper Feeder is installed on your copier.  
Select “Drawer for cover paper” [“Cassette for cover paper”]  
in the settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then  
touch the “Change #” key.  
The “Drawer for cover paper” [“Cassette for cover paper”]  
screen will be displayed.  
2
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 2.  
4
Inch specifications  
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return  
to the “Default setting”screen.  
5
Default setting / Counter  
Close  
Copy default  
Default menu  
Setting mode  
Up  
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the  
contents of the “Basic” tab.  
Select paper  
Select paper type(APS)  
Default drawer  
Drawer for cover paper  
Default magnification  
APS  
Plain  
6
Down  
1st paper  
Bypass  
Manual  
Change #  
Default setting  
Metric specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Close  
Copy default  
Default menu  
Select paper  
Setting mode  
Up  
APS  
Select paper type(APS)  
Default cassette  
Cassette for cover paper  
Default mode  
Plain  
Down  
1st paper  
Bypass  
Manual  
Change #  
Default setting  
7-71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
● Default magnification ratio  
Touch the “Manual” key or the “AMS” key, as appropriate.  
Inch specifications  
3
Perform the following procedure to set whether or not the appropriate  
magnification ratio to be calculated automatically when you select the  
size of copy paper.  
Default magnification  
Back  
Close  
Select default magnification mode.  
Display the “Copy default” screen.  
(See “(5) Accessing the copy default settings” on page 7-62.)  
Manual  
AMS  
1
Inch specifications  
Default setting - Copy default  
Default setting / Counter  
Metric specifications  
Default setting  
End  
Copy  
default  
Language  
Management  
Default mode  
Back  
Close  
Select default zoom mode.  
Bypass  
setting  
BOX  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
Manual  
AMS  
Metric specifications  
Default setting - Copy default  
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting  
End  
Copy  
NOTE  
Language  
default  
Management  
Bypass  
setting  
Hard Disk  
Management  
Counter  
check  
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the  
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
Select “Default magnification” [“Default mode”] in the settings  
list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch the  
“Change #” key.  
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 2.  
2
4
The “Default magnification” [“Default mode”] screen will be  
displayed.  
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return  
to the “Default setting”screen.  
5
Inch specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the  
contents of the “Basic” tab.  
6
Close  
Copy default  
Default menu  
Setting mode  
Up  
Select paper  
APS  
Select paper type(APS)  
Default drawer  
Drawer for cover paper  
Default magnification  
Plain  
Down  
1st paper  
Bypass  
Manual  
Change #  
Default setting  
Metric specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Close  
Copy default  
Default menu  
Select paper  
Setting mode  
Up  
APS  
Select paper type(APS)  
Default cassette  
Cassette for cover paper  
Default mode  
Plain  
Down  
1st paper  
Bypass  
Manual  
Change #  
Default setting  
7-72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
● Auto exposure adjustment  
Touch the “Lighter” key or the “Darker” key, as appropriate, to  
move the cursor on the exposure scale and adjust the  
exposure as desired.  
3
Perform the following procedure to adjust the overall exposure level  
for the auto exposure mode.  
Inch specifications  
Display the “Copy default” screen.  
(See “(5) Accessing the copy default settings” on page 7-62.)  
Adjust auto exposure.  
Back  
Close  
1
Adjust copy exposure default setting. (Auto)  
Inch specifications  
Darker  
Lighter  
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting  
End  
Default setting - Copy default  
Copy  
default  
Language  
Management  
Bypass  
setting  
BOX  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Metric specifications  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
Adjust auto exposure.  
Back  
Close  
Adjust default setting of copy exposure. (Auto)  
Metric specifications  
Darker  
Lighter  
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting  
End  
Default setting - Copy default  
Copy  
Language  
default  
Management  
Bypass  
setting  
Hard Disk  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
NOTE  
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the  
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.  
Select “Adjust auto exposure.” in the settings list on the left  
side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.  
The “Adjust auto exposure.” screen will be displayed.  
2
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 2.  
Inch specifications  
4
Default setting / Counter  
Copy default  
Close  
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will  
return to the “Default setting”screen.  
Default menu  
Setting mode  
Standard  
Standard  
Standard  
Standard  
Standard  
5
Up  
Adjust auto exposure.  
Adjust auto exposure. (OCR)  
Adj. manual expo.(Mixed)  
Adj. manual expo.(Text)  
Adj. manual expo.(Photo)  
Down  
Change #  
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the  
contents of the “Basic” tab.  
Default setting  
6
Metric specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Close  
Copy default  
Default menu  
Setting mode  
Up  
Adjust auto exposure.  
Standard  
Standard  
Standard  
Standard  
Standard  
Adjust auto exposure. (OCR)  
Adj. manual expo.(Mixed)  
Adj. manual expo.(Text)  
Adj. manual expo.(Photo)  
Down  
Change #  
Default setting  
7-73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
● Auto exposure adjustment (OCR)  
Touch the “Lighter” key or the “Darker” key, as appropriate, to  
move the cursor on the exposure scale and adjust the  
exposure as desired.  
3
Perform the following procedure to adjust the overall exposure level  
for scanning with OCR (Optical Character Recognition) software  
when using the optional scanner functions of this copier.  
Inch specifications  
Adjust auto exposure (OCR)  
Back  
Close  
Display the “Copy default” screen.  
(See “(5) Accessing the copy default settings” on page 7-62.)  
1
Darker  
Lighter  
Inch specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting - Copy default  
Default setting  
End  
Copy  
default  
Language  
Management  
Metric specifications  
Bypass  
setting  
BOX  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Adjust auto exposure (OCR)  
Back  
Close  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
Darker  
Lighter  
Metric specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting - Copy default  
Default setting  
End  
Copy  
Language  
default  
Management  
Bypass  
setting  
Hard Disk  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
NOTE  
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the  
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.  
Select “Adjust auto exposure (OCR)” in the settings list on  
the left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change  
#” key.  
2
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 2.  
The “Adjust auto exposure (OCR)” screen will be displayed.  
4
Inch specifications  
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will  
return to the “Default setting”screen.  
Default setting / Counter  
5
Copy default  
Close  
Default menu  
Setting mode  
Standard  
Up  
Adjust auto exposure.  
Adjust auto exposure. (OCR)  
Adj. manual expo.(Mixed)  
Adj. manual expo.(Text)  
Adj. manual expo.(Photo)  
Standard  
Standard  
Standard  
Standard  
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the  
contents of the “Basic” tab.  
Down  
6
Change #  
Default setting  
Metric specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Close  
Copy default  
Default menu  
Setting mode  
Up  
Adjust auto exposure.  
Standard  
Standard  
Standard  
Standard  
Standard  
Adjust auto exposure. (OCR)  
Adj. manual expo.(Mixed)  
Adj. manual expo.(Text)  
Adj. manual expo.(Photo)  
Down  
Change #  
Default setting  
7-74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
● Manual exposure adjustment (text+photo mode)  
Touch the “Lighter” key or the “Darker” key, as appropriate, to  
move the cursor on the exposure scale and adjust the  
exposure as desired.  
3
Perform the following procedure to adjust the median exposure value  
when the text+photo mode is selected for the image quality.  
Inch specifications  
Display the “Copy default” screen.  
(See “(5) Accessing the copy default settings” on page 7-62.)  
Adj. manual expo.(Mixed)  
Back  
Close  
1
Adjust copy exposure default setting.(Manual, Text+Photo)  
Inch specifications  
Darker  
Lighter  
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting  
End  
Default setting - Copy default  
Copy  
default  
Language  
Management  
Bypass  
setting  
BOX  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Metric specifications  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
Back  
Close  
Adj. manual expo.(Mixed)  
Adjust default setting of copy exposure.(Manual,Text+Photo)  
Metric specifications  
Darker  
Lighter  
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting  
End  
Default setting - Copy default  
Copy  
Language  
default  
Management  
Bypass  
setting  
Hard Disk  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
NOTE  
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the  
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.  
Select “Adj. Manual expo. (Mixed)” in the settings list on the  
left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #”  
key.  
2
The “Adj. Manual expo. (Mixed)” screen will be displayed.  
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 2.  
4
Inch specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return  
to the “Default setting”screen.  
Copy default  
Close  
5
Default menu  
Setting mode  
Standard  
Up  
Adjust auto exposure.  
Adjust auto exposure. (OCR)  
Adj. manual expo.(Mixed)  
Adj. manual expo.(Text)  
Adj. manual expo.(Photo)  
Standard  
Standard  
Standard  
Standard  
Down  
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the  
contents of the “Basic” tab.  
Change #  
6
Default setting  
Metric specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Close  
Copy default  
Default menu  
Setting mode  
Up  
Adjust auto exposure.  
Standard  
Standard  
Standard  
Standard  
Standard  
Adjust auto exposure. (OCR)  
Adj. manual expo.(Mixed)  
Adj. manual expo.(Text)  
Adj. manual expo.(Photo)  
Down  
Change #  
Default setting  
7-75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
● Manual exposure adjustment (text mode)  
Touch the “Lighter” key or the “Darker” key, as appropriate, to  
move the cursor on the exposure scale and adjust the  
exposure as desired.  
3
Perform the following procedure to adjust the median exposure value  
when the text mode is selected for the image quality.  
Inch specifications  
Display the “Copy default” screen.  
(See “(5) Accessing the copy default settings” on page 7-62.)  
Adj. manual expo. (Text)  
Back  
Close  
1
Adjust copy exposure default setting. (Manual, Text)  
Inch specifications  
Darker  
Lighter  
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting  
End  
Default setting - Copy default  
Copy  
default  
Language  
Management  
Bypass  
setting  
BOX  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Metric specifications  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
Adj. manual expo. (Text)  
Back  
Close  
Adjust default setting of copy exposure. (Manual, Text)  
Metric specifications  
Darker  
Lighter  
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting  
End  
Default setting - Copy default  
Copy  
Language  
default  
Management  
Bypass  
setting  
Hard Disk  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
NOTE  
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the  
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.  
Select “Adj. manual expo. (Text)” in the settings list on the  
left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #”  
key.  
2
The “Adj. manual expo. (Text)” screen will be displayed.  
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 2.  
4
Inch specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return  
to the “Default setting”screen.  
Copy default  
Close  
5
Default menu  
Setting mode  
Standard  
Up  
Adjust auto exposure.  
Adjust auto exposure. (OCR)  
Adj. manual expo.(Mixed)  
Adj. manual expo.(Text)  
Adj. manual expo.(Photo)  
Standard  
Standard  
Standard  
Standard  
Down  
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the  
contents of the “Basic” tab.  
Change #  
6
Default setting  
Metric specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Close  
Copy default  
Default menu  
Setting mode  
Up  
Adjust auto exposure.  
Standard  
Standard  
Standard  
Standard  
Standard  
Adjust auto exposure. (OCR)  
Adj. manual expo.(Mixed)  
Adj. manual expo.(Text)  
Adj. manual expo.(Photo)  
Down  
Change #  
Default setting  
7-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
● Manual exposure adjustment (photo mode)  
Touch the “Lighter” key or the “Darker” key, as appropriate, to  
move the cursor on the exposure scale and adjust the  
exposure as desired.  
3
Perform the following procedure to adjust the median exposure value  
when the photo mode is selected for the image quality.  
Inch specifications  
Display the “Copy default” screen.  
(See “(5) Accessing the copy default settings” on page 7-62.)  
Adj. manual expo. (Photo)  
Back  
Close  
1
Adjust copy exposure default setting. (Manual, Photo)  
Inch specifications  
Darker  
Lighter  
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting  
End  
Default setting - Copy default  
Copy  
default  
Language  
Management  
Bypass  
setting  
BOX  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Metric specifications  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
Adj. manual expo. (Photo)  
Back  
Close  
Adjust default setting of copy exposure. (Manual, Photo)  
Metric specifications  
Darker  
Lighter  
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting  
End  
Default setting - Copy default  
Copy  
Language  
default  
Management  
Bypass  
setting  
Hard Disk  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
NOTE  
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the  
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.  
Select “Adj. manual expo. (Photo)” in the settings list on the  
left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #”  
key.  
2
The “Adj. manual expo. (Photo)” screen will be displayed.  
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 2.  
4
Inch specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return  
to the “Default setting”screen.  
Copy default  
Close  
5
Default menu  
Setting mode  
Standard  
Up  
Adjust auto exposure.  
Adjust auto exposure. (OCR)  
Adj. manual expo.(Mixed)  
Adj. manual expo.(Text)  
Adj. manual expo.(Photo)  
Standard  
Standard  
Standard  
Standard  
Down  
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the  
contents of the “Basic” tab.  
Change #  
6
Default setting  
Metric specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Close  
Copy default  
Default menu  
Setting mode  
Up  
Adjust auto exposure.  
Standard  
Standard  
Standard  
Standard  
Standard  
Adjust auto exposure. (OCR)  
Adj. manual expo.(Mixed)  
Adj. manual expo.(Text)  
Adj. manual expo.(Photo)  
Down  
Change #  
Default setting  
7-77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
● Sort/Finished mode ON/OFF  
Touch the “Sort:On” key under “Sort” if you want to make the  
Sort mode the default setting in the initial mode.  
3
Perform the following procedure to determine whether or not the Sort  
and/or the Finished modes will be the default setting in the initial  
mode.  
Inch specifications  
Back  
Close  
Sort  
Select default mode for sort, ON or OFF.  
Sort  
Offset  
Display the “Copy default” screen.  
(See “(5) Accessing the copy default settings” on page 7-62.)  
Sort : Off  
Sort : On  
Off  
On  
1
Inch specifications  
Default setting - Copy default  
Default setting / Counter  
Metric specifications  
Default setting  
End  
Copy  
default  
Language  
Management  
Sort  
Back  
Close  
Bypass  
setting  
BOX  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Select default mode of sort, ON or OFF.  
Sort  
Group  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
Sort : Off  
Sort : On  
Off  
1 set  
Metric specifications  
Default setting - Copy default  
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting  
End  
Touch the “On” [“1 set”] key under “Offset” [“Group”] if you  
want to make the Finished mode the default setting in the  
initial mode.  
4
Copy  
Language  
default  
Management  
Bypass  
setting  
Hard Disk  
Management  
Counter  
check  
• In metric specification copiers, if you select “Sort:Off” under  
“Sort”, the “1 set” key that appears under “Group” will  
change to the “Output each page” key.  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
NOTE  
Select “Sort” in the settings list on the left side of the touch  
panel and then touch the “Change #” key.  
The “Sort” screen will be displayed.  
2
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the  
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.  
Inch specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 2.  
Close  
Copy default  
5
Default menu  
Setting mode  
Up  
Sort  
Sort : On / Offset : Off  
Auto Rotation  
Default margin width  
Default erase width  
Preset limit  
Rotate  
Down  
1
Left  
/4  
"
0"  
"
1
1
Border  
999 Set  
/4  
Center  
/2"  
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return  
to the “Default setting”screen.  
Change #  
6
Default setting  
Metric specifications  
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the  
contents of the “Basic” tab.  
7
Default setting / Counter  
Close  
Copy default  
Default menu  
Setting mode  
Up  
Sort  
Auto Rotation  
Sort : On / Group : Off  
Rotate  
Down  
Default margin width  
Default erase width  
Preset limit  
Left 6mm  
Border 6mm Center 12mm  
999 Set  
0mm  
Change #  
Default setting  
7-78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
● Auto Rotation mode ON/OFF  
Touch the “Rotate” key if you want to make the Auto Rotation  
mode the default setting in the initial mode.  
3
Perform the following procedure to determine whether or not the Auto  
Rotation mode will be the default setting in the initial mode.  
Inch specifications  
Back  
Close  
Auto Rotation  
Select default mode for Auto Rotation, ON or OFF.  
Display the “Copy default” screen.  
(See “(5) Accessing the copy default settings” on page 7-62.)  
1
No Rotate  
Rotate  
Inch specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting - Copy default  
Default setting  
End  
Copy  
default  
Language  
Management  
Metric specifications  
Bypass  
setting  
BOX  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Back  
Close  
Auto Rotation  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
Select default mode of Auto Rotation, ON or OFF.  
No rotate  
Rotate  
Metric specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting - Copy default  
Default setting  
End  
Copy  
Language  
default  
Management  
Bypass  
setting  
Hard Disk  
Management  
Counter  
check  
NOTE  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the  
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.  
Select “Auto Rotation” in the settings list on the left side of  
the touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.  
The “Auto Rotation” screen will be displayed.  
2
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 2.  
4
Inch specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return  
to the “Default setting”screen.  
5
Close  
Copy default  
Default menu  
Setting mode  
Up  
Sort  
Sort : On / Offset : Off  
Auto Rotation  
Default margin width  
Default erase width  
Preset limit  
Rotate  
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the  
contents of the “Basic” tab.  
Down  
1
Left  
/
4"  
0"  
"
6
1
1
Border  
999 Set  
/
4
Center  
/2"  
Change #  
Default setting  
Metric specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Close  
Copy default  
Default menu  
Setting mode  
Up  
Sort  
Auto Rotation  
Sort : On / Group : Off  
Rotate  
Down  
Default margin width  
Default erase width  
Preset limit  
Left 6mm  
Border 6mm Center 12mm  
999 Set  
0mm  
Change #  
Default setting  
7-79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
● Margin width  
Touch the “O” key or the “P” key, and the “M” key or the “N”  
key, as desired, to change the default margins and margin  
widths to the desired setting.  
3
Perform the following procedure to determine the default value of the  
location and width of the margins in the margin mode.  
Inch specifications  
Display the “Copy default” screen.  
(See “(5) Accessing the copy default settings” on page 7-62.)  
Default margin width  
Back  
Close  
1
Adjust default setting of margin width.  
Front page  
3
(0~ /4  
)
"
Inch specifications  
0
3
(0~ /4  
)
Default setting / Counter  
1
"
Left  
/4  
Default setting  
End  
Default setting - Copy default  
Copy  
default  
Language  
Management  
Bypass  
setting  
BOX  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Metric specifications  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
Back  
Close  
Default margin width  
Adjust default setting of margin width.  
Front page  
(0~18)  
mm  
Metric specifications  
0
(0~18)  
Default setting / Counter  
mm  
Left  
6
Default setting  
End  
Default setting - Copy default  
Copy  
Language  
default  
Management  
Bypass  
setting  
Hard Disk  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
NOTE  
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the  
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.  
Select “Default margin width” in the settings list on the left  
side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.  
The “Default margin width” screen will be displayed.  
2
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 2.  
4
Inch specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return  
to the “Default setting”screen.  
Close  
Copy default  
5
Default menu  
Setting mode  
Up  
Sort  
Sort : On / Offset : Off  
Auto Rotation  
Default margin width  
Default erase width  
Preset limit  
Rotate  
Down  
1
Left  
/4  
"
0"  
"
1
1
Border  
999 Set  
/4  
Center  
/2"  
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the  
contents of the “Basic” tab.  
Change #  
6
Default setting  
Metric specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Close  
Copy default  
Default menu  
Setting mode  
Up  
Sort  
Auto Rotation  
Sort : On / Group : Off  
Rotate  
Down  
Default margin width  
Default erase width  
Preset limit  
Left 6mm  
Border 6mm Center 12mm  
999 Set  
0mm  
Change #  
Default setting  
7-80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
● Erased border width  
Touch the “+” key or the “-” key under the “Border” and  
“Center” fields to change the displayed widths to those  
desired.  
3
Perform the following procedure to determine the default value for the  
width of the border to be erased in the two border erase modes.  
Inch specifications  
Display the “Copy default” screen.  
(See “(5) Accessing the copy default settings” on page 7-62.)  
Default erase width  
Back  
Close  
1
Adjust default setting of erase width.  
3
1
(0~ /4  
)
(0~1 /2  
)
1
1
Inch specifications  
Border  
"
"
Center  
/4  
/
2
+
–
+
–
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting  
End  
Default setting - Copy default  
Copy  
default  
Language  
Management  
Bypass  
setting  
BOX  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Metric specifications  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
Back  
Close  
Default erase width  
Adjust default setting of erase width.  
(0~18)  
(0~36)  
Metric specifications  
mm  
mm  
Border  
Center  
12  
6
+
–
+
–
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting  
End  
Copy  
Default setting - Copy default  
Language  
default  
Management  
Bypass  
setting  
Hard Disk  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
NOTE  
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the  
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.  
Select “Default erase width” in the settings list on the left side  
of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.  
The “Default erase width” screen will be displayed.  
2
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 2.  
4
Inch specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return  
to the “Default setting”screen.  
Close  
Copy default  
5
Default menu  
Setting mode  
Up  
Sort  
Sort : On / Offset : Off  
Auto Rotation  
Default margin width  
Default erase width  
Preset limit  
Rotate  
Down  
1
Left  
/
4"  
0"  
"
1
1
Border  
999 Set  
/
4
Center  
/2"  
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the  
contents of the “Basic” tab.  
Change #  
6
Default setting  
Metric specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Close  
Copy default  
Default menu  
Setting mode  
Up  
Sort  
Auto Rotation  
Sort : On / Group : Off  
Rotate  
Down  
Default margin width  
Default erase width  
Preset limit  
Left 6mm  
Border 6mm Center 12mm  
999 Set  
0mm  
Change #  
Default setting  
7-81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
● Copy limit  
Touch the “+” key or the “-” key to change the copy limit to  
the desired setting.  
3
Perform the following procedure to set the limit for the number of  
copies (or copy sets) that can be made at a time.  
Inch specifications  
Preset limit  
Set output quantity.  
Back  
Close  
Display the “Copy default” screen.  
(See “(5) Accessing the copy default settings” on page 7-62.)  
1
~
Set  
Inch specifications  
+
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting - Copy default  
Default setting  
End  
Copy  
default  
Language  
Management  
Metric specifications  
Bypass  
setting  
BOX  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Back  
Close  
Preset limit  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
Select copy preset in one job (# key).  
~
Set  
Metric specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting - Copy default  
Default setting  
End  
Copy  
Language  
default  
Management  
Bypass  
setting  
Hard Disk  
Management  
Counter  
check  
NOTE  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the  
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.  
Select “Preset limit” in the settings list on the left side of the  
touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.  
The “Preset limit” screen will be displayed.  
2
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 2.  
4
Inch specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return  
to the “Default setting”screen.  
5
Close  
Copy default  
Default menu  
Setting mode  
Up  
Sort  
Sort : On / Offset : Off  
Auto Rotation  
Default margin width  
Default erase width  
Preset limit  
Rotate  
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the  
contents of the “Basic” tab.  
Down  
1
Left  
/4  
"
0"  
"
6
1
1
Border  
999 Set  
/4  
Center  
/2"  
Change #  
Default setting  
Metric specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Close  
Copy default  
Default menu  
Setting mode  
Up  
Sort  
Auto Rotation  
Sort : On / Group : Off  
Rotate  
Down  
Default margin width  
Default erase width  
Preset limit  
Left 6mm  
Border 6mm Center 12mm  
999 Set  
0mm  
Change #  
Default setting  
7-82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
● Repeat copying ON/OFF  
If you want to prohibit repeat copying, touch the “Off” key. If  
you want to make repeat copying the default setting in the  
initial mode, touch the “On” key.  
3
Perform the following procedure to set whether or not to prohibit  
repeat copying, as well as whether or not to make repeat copying the  
default setting in the initial mode.  
Inch specifications  
Modify Copy  
Back  
Close  
NOTE  
Select ON to activate Modify Copy or OFF  
to inactivate it.  
Function  
Default  
This setting is displayed when the optional Hard Disk is installed.  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
Display the “Copy default” screen.  
(See “(5) Accessing the copy default settings” on page 7-62.)  
Default setting - Copy default  
1
Metric specifications  
Inch specifications  
Back  
Close  
Modify copy  
Default setting / Counter  
Select ON to activate Modify Copy or OFF  
to inactivate it.  
Function  
Default  
Default setting  
End  
Copy  
default  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
Language  
Management  
Bypass  
setting  
BOX  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
Default setting - Copy default  
Metric specifications  
NOTE  
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting  
End  
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the  
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.  
Copy  
Language  
default  
Management  
Bypass  
setting  
Hard Disk  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 2.  
4
Select “Modify Copy” in the settings list on the left side of the  
touch panel and then touch the “Change #” key.  
The “Modify Copy” screen will be displayed.  
2
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return  
to the “Default setting”screen.  
5
Inch specifications  
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the  
contents of the “Basic” tab.  
6
Default setting / Counter  
Close  
Copy default  
Default menu  
Setting mode  
999 Set  
Up  
Preset limit  
Modify Copy  
Display register key  
On / Default Off  
On  
Down  
Customize(Main function)  
Customize(Add function)  
Change #  
Default setting  
Metric specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Close  
Copy default  
Default menu  
Preset limit  
Setting mode  
Up  
999 Set  
Modify copy  
On / Default Off  
On  
Down  
Display"Register"key  
Customize(Main function)  
Customize(Add function)  
Change #  
Default setting  
7-83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
● Registration keys ON/OFF  
If you want the “Register” key to be displayed, touch the “On”  
key. If you do NOT want it to be displayed, touch the “Off”  
key.  
3
Perform the following procedure to set whether or not to allow a  
“Register” key to be displayed in the screen for those function and  
modes which can be registered under the registration keys. Functions  
and/or modes can only be registered under registration keys through  
the “Register” key.  
Inch specifications  
Display register key  
Back  
Close  
Select One touch key On/Off.  
Able to use Register key on each screen.  
Display the “Copy default” screen.  
(See “(5) Accessing the copy default settings” on page 7-62.)  
On  
Off  
1
Inch specifications  
Default setting - Copy default  
Default setting / Counter  
Metric specifications  
Default setting  
End  
Copy  
default  
Language  
Management  
Close  
Display"Register"key  
Back  
Select to show Register key On/Off.  
Able to use Register key to register/delete at each page.  
Bypass  
setting  
BOX  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
On  
Off  
Metric specifications  
Default setting - Copy default  
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting  
End  
Copy  
Language  
default  
Management  
NOTE  
Bypass  
setting  
Hard Disk  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the  
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.  
Select “Display register key” [“Display "Register" key”] in the  
settings list on the left side of the touch panel and then touch  
the “Change #” key.  
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 2.  
2
4
The “Display register key” [“Display "Register" key”] screen  
will be displayed.  
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return  
to the “Default setting”screen.  
5
Inch specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the  
contents of the “Basic” tab.  
Close  
Copy default  
6
Default menu  
Setting mode  
999 Set  
Up  
Preset limit  
Modify Copy  
Display register key  
On / Default Off  
On  
Down  
Customize(Main function)  
Customize(Add function)  
Change #  
Default setting  
Metric specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Close  
Copy default  
Default menu  
Preset limit  
Setting mode  
Up  
999 Set  
Modify copy  
On / Default Off  
On  
Down  
Display"Register"key  
Customize(Main function)  
Customize(Add function)  
Change #  
Default setting  
7-84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
● Customize screen layout (Main functions)  
If you want to change the order of the basic functions and  
modes, touch the “▲” or the “▼” cursor key to select the item  
3
Perform the following procedure to change the order of the main  
functions and modes that are displayed in the “Basic” and the “User  
choice” tabs in order to make the display more appropriate to the way  
you use the copier.  
you want to move. Then touch the “Move ahead” key or the  
“Move behind” [“Move backward”] key to move that item and  
change the order of display. The final display of the basic  
functions and modes will be in accordance with the numbers  
in the list and those shown in the tabs to the left of that list.  
Display the “Copy default” screen.  
(See “(5) Accessing the copy default settings” on page 7-62.)  
Inch specifications  
1
Customize(Main function)  
Basic  
Back  
Close  
Inch specifications  
Register mode  
Move  
Ahead  
Exposure Mode  
Reduce/Enlarge  
Sort/Finished  
1/2 sided  
Original size  
Orig. quality  
Default setting / Counter  
Move  
Behind  
Default setting  
End  
User choice  
Copy  
default  
Language  
Management  
Bypass  
setting  
BOX  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Default setting - Copy default  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
Metric specifications  
Close  
Customize(Main function)  
Basic  
Back  
Metric specifications  
Register mode  
Exposure Mode  
Reduce/Enlarge  
Sort/Finished  
1/2 sided  
Original size  
Quality orig  
Move  
ahead  
Default setting / Counter  
Move  
backward  
Default setting  
End  
User choice  
Copy  
Language  
default  
Management  
Bypass  
setting  
Hard Disk  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Default setting - Copy default  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
NOTE  
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the  
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.  
Select “Customize(Main function)” in the settings list on the  
left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #”  
key.  
2
The “Customize(Main function)” screen will be displayed.  
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 2.  
Inch specifications  
4
Default setting / Counter  
Close  
Copy default  
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return  
to the “Default setting”screen.  
5
Default menu  
Setting mode  
999 Set  
On / Default Off  
On  
Up  
Preset limit  
Modify Copy  
Display register key  
Down  
Customize(Main function)  
Customize(Add function)  
Change #  
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the  
contents of the “Basic” tab.  
6
Default setting  
Metric specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Close  
Copy default  
Default menu  
Preset limit  
Setting mode  
Up  
999 Set  
Modify copy  
On / Default Off  
On  
Down  
Display"Register"key  
Customize(Main function)  
Customize(Add function)  
Change #  
Default setting  
7-85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
● Customize screen layout (Add functions)  
If you want to add functions and/or modes to the “User  
choice” tab, touch the “▲” or the “▼” cursor key under the list  
on the right to select the item you want to add. Then touch  
the “▲” or the “▼” cursor key under the list on the left to  
select in what order you want it to be added in that tab.  
Finally, touch the “b” key to add the selected item to the  
“User choice” tab.  
3
Perform the following procedure to add often-used functions and/or  
modes, or to change the order of their layout, in order to make the  
display more appropriate to the way you use the copier.  
Display the “Copy default” screen.  
(See “(5) Accessing the copy default settings” on page 7-62.)  
1
Inch specifications  
Inch specifications  
Customize(Add function)  
Basic  
Back  
Close  
Default setting / Counter  
Register mode  
Addition mode  
Margin  
Border Erase  
Combine  
None  
None  
None  
None  
Select paper  
Combine  
Default setting  
End  
Auto Selection  
Batch scanning  
Margin  
Copy  
default  
Language  
Management  
User choice  
Bypass  
setting  
BOX  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
Default setting - Copy default  
Metric specifications  
Metric specifications  
Back  
Close  
Customize(Add function)  
Basic  
Register mode  
Addition Mode  
Default setting / Counter  
Margin  
Erace  
Merge  
None  
None  
None  
None  
Select paper  
Merge  
Default setting  
End  
Auto selection  
Copy  
User choice  
Language  
default  
Management  
Batch scanning  
Margin  
Bypass  
setting  
Hard Disk  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
Default setting - Copy default  
NOTE  
Select “Customize(Add function)” in the settings list on the  
left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #”  
key.  
If you want to quit the displayed setting without changing it, touch the  
“Back” key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.  
2
The “Customize(Add function)” screen will be displayed.  
Inch specifications  
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 2.  
4
Default setting / Counter  
Close  
Copy default  
Default menu  
Setting mode  
999 Set  
On / Default Off  
On  
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return  
to the “Default setting”screen.  
Up  
Preset limit  
Modify Copy  
Display register key  
Customize(Main function)  
Customize(Add function)  
5
Down  
Change #  
Default setting  
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the  
contents of the “Basic” tab.  
6
Metric specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Close  
Copy default  
Default menu  
Preset limit  
Setting mode  
Up  
999 Set  
Modify copy  
On / Default Off  
On  
Down  
Display"Register"key  
Customize(Main function)  
Customize(Add function)  
Change #  
Default setting  
7-86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
3. Multi-bypass tray paper settings  
Specify the desired method of selecting the paper size.  
If you select “Auto Detection” here, select the desired unit of  
measure (“Centimeter” or “Inch”) as well, and then go directly  
to step 5. If you want to select a custom paper size, touch the  
“Input size” and then go to the next step.  
(1) Paper size and type  
3
Perform the following procedure in order to use the multi-bypass tray  
to feed copy paper.  
With the content of the “Basic” tab displayed, press the  
[Default Setting/Counter] key.  
The “Default setting” screen will be displayed.  
1
Inch specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Bypass setting  
Paper size  
Back  
Close  
Unit  
Paper type  
Select  
paper type  
Plain  
Auto  
Detection  
Centimeter  
Inch  
Input size  
Others  
Standard  
Metric specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Back  
Close  
Bypass setting  
Paper size  
Unit  
Paper type  
Touch the “Bypass setting” key.  
The “Bypass setting” screen will be displayed.  
Select  
paper type  
Auto  
Detection  
Plain  
Centimeter  
Inch  
2
Input size  
Others  
Standard  
Inch specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting  
End  
Touch the “+” key or the “-” key to change each of the  
Copy  
default  
4
Language  
Management  
displayed sizes (length and width) to the desired settings.  
* In metric specification copiers, the desired sizes can also  
be entered directly by touching the corresponding “#-Keys”  
key and then using the keypad.  
Bypass  
setting  
BOX  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
Inch specifications  
Metric specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting / Counter  
Bypass setting  
Back  
Close  
7
5
7
(
3 /8  
~
11 /8  
)
(
5 /8~17)  
Paper size  
Default setting  
End  
Paper type  
11  
9
Y
11 /16  
"
X
16 /16  
"
Copy  
Language  
default  
Management  
Auto  
Detection  
Select  
paper type  
Plain  
+
–
+
–
Bypass  
setting  
Hard Disk  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Input size  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
Others  
Standard  
Metric specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Back  
Close  
Bypass setting  
(98~297)  
297 mm  
(148~432)  
Paper size  
Paper type  
Y
X
420 mm  
Auto  
Detection  
Select  
paper type  
Plain  
+
+
–
#-Keys  
Input size  
–
Others  
Standard  
#-Keys  
7-87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
Touch the “Select paper type” key.  
The “Select paper type” screen will be displayed.  
(2) Selecting other standard sizes  
5
Perform the following procedure when you want to print out onto other  
standard sizes of special paper.  
Touch the key that corresponds to the type of paper to be  
used, and then touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will  
return to the screen in step 4.  
6
With the content of the “Basic” tab displayed, press the  
[Default setting/Counter] key.  
The “Default setting” screen will be displayed.  
1
Inch specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Select paper type  
Back  
Close  
Thick  
paper  
Plain  
Labels  
Cardstock  
Color  
Custom 1  
Custom 5  
Custom 6  
Custom 7  
Custom 8  
Transp-  
arency  
Recycled  
Preprinted  
Bond  
Envelope  
Custom 2  
Custom 3  
Custom 4  
Rough  
Vellum  
Prepunched  
Letterhead  
High  
quality  
Metric specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Back  
Close  
Select paper type  
Thick  
paper  
Plain  
Labels  
Cardstock  
Colour  
Custom 1  
Custom 2  
Custom 3  
Custom 4  
Custom 5  
Custom 6  
Custom 7  
Custom 8  
Transp-  
arency  
Recycled  
Envelope  
Touch the “Bypass setting” key.  
The “Bypass setting” screen will be displayed.  
2
Preprinted  
Rough  
Vellum  
Prepunched  
Letterhead  
High  
quality  
Bond  
Inch specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return  
to the screen in step 2. Touch the “End” key. The touch panel  
will return to the contents of the “Basic” tab.  
Default setting  
End  
7
Copy  
default  
Language  
Management  
Bypass  
setting  
BOX  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
Metric specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting  
End  
Copy  
Language  
default  
Management  
Bypass  
setting  
Hard Disk  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
Touch the “Others Standard” key.  
Inch specifications  
3
Default setting / Counter  
Bypass setting  
Back  
Close  
Paper size  
Unit  
Paper type  
Select  
paper type  
Plain  
Auto  
Detection  
Centimeter  
Inch  
Input size  
Others  
Standard  
Metric specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Back  
Close  
Bypass setting  
Paper size  
Unit  
Paper type  
Select  
paper type  
Auto  
Detection  
Plain  
Centimeter  
Inch  
Input size  
Others  
Standard  
7-88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
Touch the “Select size” key. The “Select size” screen will be  
displayed.  
Touch the “Select paper type” key. The “Select paper type”  
screen will be displayed. Touch the key that corresponds to  
the type of paper you want to use, and then touch the “Close”  
key. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 4.  
4
6
Inch specifications  
Paper Size  
Default setting / Counter  
Inch specifications  
Bypass setting  
Paper size  
Back  
Close  
Default setting / Counter  
Paper type  
Select paper type  
Back  
Close  
Select  
paper type  
Select  
size  
Auto  
Detection  
Plain  
EX  
Thick  
paper  
Input size  
Plain  
Labels  
Cardstock  
Color  
Custom 1  
Custom 5  
Custom 6  
Custom 7  
Custom 8  
Others  
Standard  
Transp-  
arency  
Recycled  
Preprinted  
Bond  
Envelope  
Custom 2  
Custom 3  
Custom 4  
Rough  
Vellum  
Prepunched  
Letterhead  
High  
quality  
Metric specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Metric specifications  
Bypass setting  
Paper size  
Back  
Close  
Default setting / Counter  
Paper type  
Back  
Close  
Select paper type  
Auto  
Detection  
Select  
size  
Select  
paper type  
Plain  
EX  
Thick  
paper  
Plain  
Labels  
Cardstock  
Colour  
Custom 1  
Custom 2  
Custom 3  
Custom 4  
Custom 5  
Custom 6  
Custom 7  
Custom 8  
Input size  
Transp-  
arency  
Others  
Standard  
Recycled  
Envelope  
Preprinted  
Rough  
Vellum  
Prepunched  
Letterhead  
High  
quality  
Bond  
Touch the key that corresponds to the size of paper you want  
to use, and then touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will  
return to the screen in step 4.  
5
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 2. Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will  
return to the contents of the “Basic” tab.  
7
Inch specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Select size  
Back  
Close  
ISO B5  
Comm.#10  
Comm.#9  
EX  
81/2x13"  
Envelope  
DL  
OUFUKU  
HAGAKI  
8 K  
Envelope  
C5  
Comm.  
#6-3/4  
YOUKEI 2  
YOUKEI 4  
16 K  
Envelope  
C4  
MO  
Metric specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Select size  
Back  
Close  
ISO B5  
Comm.#10  
Comm.#9  
EX  
81/2x13"  
Envelope  
DL  
OUFUKU  
HAGAKI  
8 K  
Envelope  
C5  
Comm.  
#6-3/4  
YOUKEI 2  
YOUKEI 4  
16 K  
Envelope  
C4  
MO  
7-89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
4. Original size registration  
Perform the following procedure in order to register a custom original  
size that can be used under the “Original size selection” procedure.  
Select of the “Original size (custom 1)” to “Original size  
(custom 4)” settings under the “Default menu” column on the  
left side of the touch panel and then touch the “Change #”  
key.  
3
With the content of the “Basic” tab displayed, press the  
1
[Default Setting/Counter] key.  
The corresponding setting screen will be displayed.  
The “Default setting”screen will be displayed.  
Inch specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Close  
Register orig. size  
Default menu  
Setting mode  
Up  
Original size (custom 1)  
Original size (custom 2)  
Original size (custom 3)  
Original size (custom 4)  
2x2"  
2x2"  
2x2"  
2x2"  
Down  
Change #  
Default setting  
Metric specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Close  
Register orig. size  
Default menu  
Setting mode  
Up  
Touch the “Register orig. size” key.  
The “Register orig. size” screen will be displayed.  
Original size (custom 1)  
Original size (custom 2)  
Original size (custom 3)  
Original size (custom 4)  
50x50mm  
50x50mm  
50x50mm  
50x50mm  
2
Down  
Change #  
Inch specifications  
Default setting  
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting  
End  
Copy  
default  
Touch the “+” key or the “-” key to change each of the  
displayed sizes (Y = width and X = length) to the desired  
settings.  
If you do not want to register a custom original size, touch  
the “Off” key.  
Language  
Management  
4
Bypass  
setting  
BOX  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
Inch specifications  
Metric specifications  
Back  
Close  
Original size (custom 1)  
Default setting / Counter  
Register custom size original.  
(2~115  
/
8)  
(2~17)  
Default setting  
End  
"
"
2
2
Copy  
Language  
default  
Management  
Off  
On  
Bypass  
setting  
Hard Disk  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
Default setting - Register orig. size  
Metric specifications  
Back  
Close  
Original size (custom 1)  
Register custom size original.  
(50~297  
)
(50~432)  
mm  
mm  
50  
50  
Off  
On  
Default setting - Register orig. size  
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 3.  
5
6
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 2. Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will  
return to the contents of the “Basic” tab.  
7-90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
5. Drum refresh  
Perform the following procedure if the copy image becomes blurred or  
if white spots which are not on the originals appear on the copies. The  
drum refreshing operation will take approximately 5 minutes.  
Touch the “Drum refresh” key. The “Drum refresh” screen will  
be displayed.  
4
Inch specifications  
Set 11" x 8 1/2", 11" x 17", A4 or A3 size paper on the multi-  
bypass tray.  
Default setting / Counter  
1
User adjustment  
Close  
Drum  
refresh  
With the content of the “Basic” tab displayed, press the  
[Default Setting/Counter] key.  
The “Default setting” screen will be displayed.  
2
Default setting  
Metric specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
User adjustment  
Close  
Drum  
refresh  
Default setting  
Touch the “User adjustment” key.  
3
Inch specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting  
End  
Copy  
default  
Language  
Management  
Bypass  
setting  
BOX  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
Metric specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting  
End  
Copy  
Language  
default  
Management  
Bypass  
setting  
Hard Disk  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
7-91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
Touch the “On” key. The drum refreshing process will begin.  
5
Inch specifications  
Close  
Drum refresh  
Refresh the drum when image blur or white dots appear  
on the image.  
On  
Default setting - User adjustment  
Metric specifications  
Close  
Drum refresh  
Refresh the drum when image blur or white dots appear  
on the image.  
On  
Default setting - User adjustment  
The “Now drum refreshing.” message will appear and the  
paper is fed from the multi-bypass tray to execute drum  
refreshing.  
Inch specifications  
Now drum refreshing.  
Output  
Orig. page  
Count/Set  
11x81  
1 sided  
Sort  
/2"  
----------  
1 sided  
Rear  
Inner tray  
Metric specifications  
Now drum refreshing.  
Output  
Original  
Count/Set  
----------  
A4  
1-sided  
Rtop / rear  
1-sided  
Sort  
Inner tray  
NOTE  
To cancel drum refreshing, press the [Stop/Clear] key.  
When drum refreshing completes after ejecting the paper,  
the touch panel will return to the “Drum refresh” screen.  
Touch the “Close” key.  
The touch panel will return to the screen in step 4.  
6
Touch the “Close” key.  
The touch panel will return to the screen in step 3.  
7
Touch the “End” key.  
The touch panel will return to the contents of the “Basic” tab.  
8
7-92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
6. Checking the total counter and printing out the counter report  
Perform this procedure when you want to check, on the touch panel,  
the total count of copies, etc., made on this machine as a whole.You  
can also print out the information as a counter report.  
The total number of copies and printouts made will be  
displayed.  
If you want to print out a counter report, touch the “Print  
report” key.  
3
Inch specifications  
NOTES  
Close  
Counter check  
• You can also check the total number of printouts made under each  
of the optional printer, scanner a fax functions.  
• You can additionally check the number of originals scanned on this  
machine.  
Number print.  
Black & White:  
Copy  
1,073  
Printer  
- - - - - - -  
Fax  
- - - - - - -  
Total  
1,073  
Num. of pages  
Original:  
Copy  
scanner  
Fax  
Total  
3
- - - - - - -  
- - - - - - -  
3
Print  
report  
Default setting  
With the content of the “Basic” tab displayed, press the  
[Default Setting/Counter] key.  
The “Default setting”screen will be displayed.  
1
Metric specifications  
Close  
Counter check  
Number print.  
Copy  
Printer  
- - - - - - -  
Fax  
- - - - - - -  
Total  
1,073  
Black & White:  
1,073  
Num. of pages  
Original:  
Copy  
scanner  
Fax  
Total  
3
- - - - - - -  
- - - - - - -  
3
Print  
report  
Default setting  
NOTE  
Make sure there is 11" x 8 1/2" [A4] size paper loaded in one of the  
drawers[cassettes] when you print out the counter report.  
Touch the “Counter check” key.  
The “Counter check” screen will be displayed.  
Once you are finished checking the counts, touch the “Close”  
key.  
The touch panel will return to the screen in step 2.  
2
4
Inch specifications  
Inch specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting  
End  
Close  
Counter check  
Copy  
default  
Number print.  
Black & White:  
Language  
Management  
Copy  
1,073  
Printer  
- - - - - - -  
Fax  
- - - - - - -  
Total  
1,073  
Bypass  
setting  
BOX  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
Num. of pages  
Original:  
Copy  
scanner  
Fax  
Total  
3
- - - - - - -  
- - - - - - -  
3
Print  
report  
Default setting  
Metric specifications  
Metric specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting  
End  
Close  
Counter check  
Copy  
Number print.  
Copy  
Language  
default  
Management  
Printer  
- - - - - - -  
Fax  
- - - - - - -  
Total  
1,073  
Black & White:  
1,073  
Bypass  
setting  
Hard Disk  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
Num. of pages  
Original:  
Copy  
scanner  
Fax  
Total  
3
- - - - - - -  
- - - - - - -  
3
Print  
report  
Default setting  
Touch the “End” key.  
The touch panel will return to the contents of the “Basic” tab.  
5
7-93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
7. Box management default settings  
Perform the following settings in order to manage the “boxes” that are used under the document management functions.  
NOTE  
This setting is displayed when the optional Hard Disk is installed.  
(1) Box settings  
Setting  
Description  
Reference  
page  
● Document list print out  
This procedure will allow you to print out a list of all of the images stored in the box for the form  
overlay mode, of the documents stored in the shared data box or of the documents stored in the  
synergy print boxes.  
7-95  
7-96  
7-97  
● Reset box  
This procedure will delete all of the image data that is stored in the “Form” box, as well as the  
documents stored in the shared data box and the synergy print boxes. Make absolutely certain  
that you do not need the corresponding data before you attempt to delete it.  
● Box name & password /  
This procedure will allow you to change the name and password for any one of the synergy print  
boxes as well as delete at one time all of the data registered in any one box. If you register a  
password for any of these boxes, you will need to enter the registered password in order to print  
out or delete any documents that are stored win that box.  
Clear data in box  
● Document save time  
This procedure will allow you to select the length of time that will elapse before each job in a  
synergy print box is automatically deleted. Set this time to any number of days between 1 and 7.  
* This setting cannot be made independently for each box.  
7-98  
Touch the “Document Management” key.  
(2) Accessing the box management default settings  
2
Inch specifications  
Perform the following procedure when you want to access the  
“Document Management” screen for each of the various box  
management default settings.  
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting  
End  
Copy  
Language  
default  
Management  
With the content of the “Basic” tab displayed, press the  
1
Bypass  
setting  
BOX  
Management  
Counter  
check  
[Default Setting/Counter] key.  
The “Default setting/Counter” screen will be displayed.  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
Metric specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting  
End  
Copy  
Language  
default  
Management  
Bypass  
setting  
Hard Disk  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
7-94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
Use the keypad to enter the 4-digit management code.  
The factory default setting for 30 cpm copiers is “3000”, for  
40 cpm copiers is “4000” and for 50 cpm copiers is “5000”.  
If the entered code matched the registered one, the  
“Document Management” screen will be displayed.  
(3) Making box management default settings  
3
Perform the following procedure that corresponds to the desired  
setting.  
● Document list print out  
Inch specifications  
Close  
Enter the administrator number  
Touch the “Print the list” key under the box (“Form Box”,  
“Shared Data Box” or “Synergy Print Box”) for which you  
want to print out the document list.  
1
Inch specifications  
Document Management  
Document Management  
Close  
Shared Data Box  
Synergy Print Box  
Form box  
Metric specifications  
Print  
Print  
Box  
Print  
the list  
the list  
editing  
the list  
Close  
Enter the administrator number  
Document  
save term  
Reset  
Box  
Reset  
Box  
Reset  
Box  
Default setting  
Metric specifications  
Document management  
Close  
Document management  
Shared Data Box  
Synergy Print Box  
Form box  
Touch the key that corresponds to the desired box  
management default setting.  
Print  
the list  
Print  
the list  
Box  
editing  
Print  
the list  
4
Reset  
Box  
Reset  
Box  
Document  
saving  
Reset  
Box  
Inch specifications  
Default setting  
Document Management  
A document list will be printed out for that box. once print out  
is completed, the touch panel will return to the screen in step  
1.  
Document Management  
Close  
2
3
Shared Data Box  
Synergy Print Box  
Form box  
Print  
the list  
Print  
the list  
Box  
editing  
Print  
the list  
Document  
save term  
Reset  
Box  
Reset  
Box  
Reset  
Box  
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
“Default setting”screen. Touch the “End” key. The touch panel  
will return to the contents of the “Basic” tab.  
Default setting  
Metric specifications  
Document management  
Close  
Document management  
Shared Data Box  
Synergy Print Box  
Form box  
Print  
Print  
Box  
Print  
the list  
the list  
editing  
the list  
Reset  
Box  
Reset  
Box  
Document  
saving  
Reset  
Box  
Default setting  
NOTES  
• It is possible for you to change the 4-digit management code.  
(See “Changing the management code” on page 7-56.)  
• Refer to the desired procedure(s) explained under “(3) Making box  
management default settings” and perform the corresponding  
setting(s).  
7-95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
● Reset box  
● Box name & password / Clear data in box  
Touch the “Reset Box” key under the box (“Form Box”,  
“Shared Data Box” or “Synergy Print Box”) that you want to  
delete all data for.  
A verification screen will be displayed.  
Touch the “Box editing” key under “Synergy Print Box”. The  
“Box editing” screen will be displayed.  
1
1
Inch specifications  
Document Management  
Inch specifications  
Document Management  
Close  
Document Management  
Shared Data Box  
Synergy Print Box  
Form box  
Document Management  
Close  
Print  
Print  
Box  
Print  
the list  
the list  
editing  
the list  
Shared Data Box  
Synergy Print Box  
Form box  
Document  
save term  
Reset  
Box  
Reset  
Box  
Reset  
Box  
Print  
Print  
Box  
Print  
the list  
the list  
editing  
the list  
Default setting  
Document  
save term  
Reset  
Box  
Reset  
Box  
Reset  
Box  
Default setting  
Metric specifications  
Document management  
Metric specifications  
Close  
Document management  
Document management  
Shared Data Box  
Synergy Print Box  
Form box  
Close  
Stop  
Stop  
Document management  
Print  
the list  
Print  
the list  
Box  
editing  
Print  
the list  
Shared Data Box  
Synergy Print Box  
Form box  
Reset  
Box  
Reset  
Box  
Document  
saving  
Reset  
Box  
Print  
the list  
Print  
the list  
Box  
editing  
Print  
the list  
Default setting  
Reset  
Box  
Reset  
Box  
Document  
saving  
Reset  
Box  
Default setting  
Either touch the synergy print box that contains the  
information to be modified, or enter its number using the  
keypad. Then touch the “Enter” key.  
2
Touch the “Yes” key or the “No” key, as appropriate.  
Inch specifications  
2
Inch specifications  
Cancel  
Box editing  
Select box No.  
Box No.  
(with #key)  
001 ABCD_0000001 006 UVWX_0000006 011 QRST_0000105 016 MNOP_0200104  
002 EFGH_0000002 007 ABCD_0000101 012 017 QRST_0200105  
003 008 EFGH_0000102 013 ABCD_0200101 018 UVWX_0200106  
Shared Data Box  
Reset this Box. Do you really want to reset?  
004 MNOP_0000004 009 IJKL_0000103 014 EFGH_0200102 019 ABCD_0500101  
005 QRST_0000005 010 MNOP_0000104 015 IJKL_0200103 020 EFGH_0500102  
Yes  
No  
Enter  
1/ 5  
Default setting - Document management  
Metric specifications  
Metric specifications  
Job cancel  
Box editing  
Select box No.  
Box No.  
(With # key)  
001 ABCD_0000001 006 UVWX_0000006 011 QRST_0000105 016 MNOP_0200104  
Shared Data Box  
002 EFGH_0000002 007 ABCD_0000101 012  
017 QRST_0200105  
003 008 EFGH_0000102 013 ABCD_0200101 018 UVWX_0200106  
Reset this box. Do you really want to reset?  
004 MNOP_0000004 009 IJKL_0000103 014 EFGH_0200102 019 ABCD_0500101  
005 QRST_0000005 010 MNOP_0000104 015 IJKL_0200103 020 EFGH_0500102  
Yes  
No  
Enter  
1/5  
Default setting - Document management  
If you selected “Yes”, all the data in the selected box will be  
deleted and the touch panel will return to the screen in step  
1. If you selected “No”, the touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 1 without deleting any data.  
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
“Default setting” screen.Touch the “End” key. The touch  
panel will return to the contents of the “Basic” tab.  
3
7-96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
If you want to change the name of that box, first select “Box  
name” and then touch the “Change #” key. Enter the new  
name as desired.  
If you want to delete all of the data in that box, select “Reset  
Box”. A verification screen will be displayed.  
3
6
Touch the “Yes” key or the “No” key, as appropriate.  
7
Inch specifications  
Inch specifications  
Close  
Box007  
Stop  
Reset  
Box  
Default menu  
Box name  
Password  
Setting mode  
ABCD_0000101  
(No register)  
007  
Box No. :  
ABCD_0000101  
Box name :  
Reset this Box. Do you really want to reset?  
Change #  
Yes  
No  
Default setting - Document Management - Box editing  
Metric specifications  
Metric specifications  
Close  
Box 007  
Stop  
Reset  
Box  
Default menu  
Box name  
Password  
Setting mode  
007  
Box No. :  
ABCD_0000101  
(No register)  
ABCD_0000101  
Box name :  
Reset this Box. Do you really want to reset?  
Change #  
Yes  
No  
Default setting - Document management - Box editing  
If you selected “Yes”, all the data in the selected box will be  
deleted and the touch panel will return to the screen in step  
3.  
If you selected “No”, the touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 3 without deleting any data.  
NOTE  
Refer to “11. Entering characters” on page 7-104 for information on  
entering characters.  
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 2.  
8
9
If you want to change the name of that box, first select  
“Password” and then touch the “Change #” key. The  
“Password” screen will be displayed.  
4
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 1. Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will  
return to the “Default setting” screen.Touch the “End” key.  
The touch panel will return to the contents of the “Basic” tab.  
Use the keypad to enter the new password for that box and  
then touch the “Close” key. The new password will be  
registered and the touch panel will return to the screen in  
step 3.  
5
Inch specifications  
Back  
Close  
Password  
Enter new password.  
Password  
(Enter by #key)  
Clear  
Default setting - Document Management - Box editings - 007  
Metric specifications  
Back  
Close  
Password  
Enter new password.  
Password  
(Enter #-key)  
Clear  
Default settund - Document management - Box editing - 007  
NOTES  
• The password can be between 1 and 8 digits long.  
• If you decide not to register a password for that box, touch the  
“Clear” key and then, with nothing entered in the password field,  
touch the “Close” key.  
7-97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
● Document save time  
Touch the “Document save term” [“Document saving”] key  
under “Synergy Print Box”. The “Document data saving term”  
[“Document data save period”] screen will be displayed.  
1
Inch specifications  
Document Management  
Document Management  
Close  
Shared Data Box  
Synergy Print Box  
Form box  
Print  
the list  
Print  
the list  
Box  
editing  
Print  
the list  
Document  
save term  
Reset  
Box  
Reset  
Box  
Reset  
Box  
Default setting  
Metric specifications  
Document management  
Close  
Document management  
Shared Data Box  
Synergy Print Box  
Form box  
Print  
Print  
Box  
Print  
the list  
the list  
editing  
the list  
Reset  
Box  
Reset  
Box  
Document  
saving  
Reset  
Box  
Default setting  
Touch the “Set save term” [“Set save period”] key and then  
touch “+” key or the “-” key to change the displayed save time  
to the desired setting.  
2
Inch specifications  
Document data saving term  
Back  
Close  
Set saving term for documents in synergy print box.  
(1~7)  
Set save  
term  
7
Days  
No time  
limit  
+
–
Default setting - Document Management  
Metric specifications  
Document data save period  
Back  
Close  
Set save period for documents in synergy print box.  
(1~7)  
Set save  
period  
7
Days  
No time  
limit  
+
–
Default Setting - Document management  
NOTES  
• The save time can be set to any number of days between 1 and 7.  
The factory default setting is for “7 Days”.  
• If you want the data to be saved indefinitely, touch the “No time limit”  
key to highlight it.  
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 1.  
3
Touch the “Close” key once again. The touch panel will return  
to the “Default setting” screen.Touch the “End” key. The  
touch panel will return to the contents of the “Basic” tab.  
4
7-98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
8. Hard disk management  
Perform the following procedure to access the “HDD management  
mode” screen and check available space and/or delete any invalid  
data on the optional Hard Disk.  
Use the keypad to enter the 4-digit management code.  
The factory default setting for 30 cpm copiers is “3000”, for  
40 cpm copiers is “4000” and for 50 cpm copiers is “5000”.  
If the entered code matched the registered one, the “HDD  
Management mode” [“HDD Management”] screen will be  
displayed.  
3
With the content of the “Basic” tab displayed, press the  
1
[Default setting/Counter] key.  
The “Default setting” screen will be displayed.  
Inch specifications  
Close  
Enter the administrator number  
Metric specifications  
Close  
Enter the administrator number  
Touch the “BOX Management” [“Hard Disk Management”]  
key.  
2
Inch specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting  
End  
Touch the “On” key under “Check HDD capacity” (left side of  
the touch panel). The overall size of the hard disk, as well  
as the currently available space, will be displayed. If you  
want to delete any invalid data, go to the next step. If you  
are finished with this procedure, go directly to step 6.  
Copy  
default  
Language  
Management  
4
Bypass  
setting  
BOX  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
Inch specifications  
Metric specifications  
HDD management mode  
Default setting / Counter  
Close  
HDD management mode  
Default setting  
End  
Check HDD capacity  
Delete invalid data  
Copy  
Able to check the free space and capacity  
of HDD.  
Delete invalid deta from the HDD.  
Language  
default  
Management  
Bypass  
setting  
Hard Disk  
Management  
Counter  
check  
On  
On  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
Default setting  
Metric specifications  
HDD management mode  
Close  
HDD management  
Check HDD capacity  
Delete invalid data  
Able to check the free space and capacity  
of HDD.  
Delete invalid deta from the HDD.  
On  
On  
Default setting  
7-99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
Touch the “On” key under “Delete invalid data” (right side of  
the touch panel). The operation to delete invalid data will  
start.  
5
Inch specifications  
HDD management mode  
Close  
HDD management mode  
Delete invalid data.  
Item  
Setting mode  
18, 569 MB  
19, 092 MB  
Delete invalid deta from the HDD.  
Free Space  
Capacity  
On  
Default setting  
Metric specifications  
HDD management mode  
Close  
HDD management  
Delete invalid data.  
Item  
Free space  
Setting mode  
18, 569 MB  
19, 092 MB  
Delete invalid deta from the HDD.  
Capacity  
On  
Default setting  
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 2.Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will  
return to the contents of the “Basic” tab.  
6
7-100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
9. Report print out  
Perform the following procedure to print out one of the following  
reports.  
< Copy report >  
Use the keypad to enter the 4-digit management code.  
The factory default setting for 30 cpm copiers is “3000”, for  
40 cpm copiers is “4000” and for 50 cpm copiers is “5000”.  
3
Lists all of the values for the copy default settings.  
< Machine report >  
Inch specifications  
Lists all of the values for the machine default settings.  
< Toner coverage report>  
Close  
Enter the administrator number  
Lists the average toner density (black ratio) for each size of copy  
paper used under each of the copy, printer and fax functions of this  
machine.  
NOTE  
Make sure that 11" x 8 1/2" [A4] size paper is loaded in one of the  
drawers[cassettes].  
Metric specifications  
Close  
Enter the administrator number  
With the content of the “Basic” tab displayed, press the  
[Default Setting/Counter] key.  
The “Default setting” screen will be displayed.  
1
NOTE  
It is possible for you to change the 4-digit management code.  
(See “Changing the management code” on page 7-56.)  
Once the “Print report menu” screen is displayed, touch the  
“Copy report” key, the “Machine report” key or the “Toner  
coverage” key, as appropriate.  
4
Inch specifications  
Touch the “Print report” key.  
Print report  
2
Inch specifications  
Close  
Print report menu  
Copy  
report  
Toner  
coverage  
Default setting / Counter  
Machine  
report  
Default setting  
End  
Copy  
default  
Language  
Management  
Default setting  
Bypass  
setting  
BOX  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
Metric specifications  
Print report  
Metric specifications  
Close  
Print report menu  
Copy  
report  
Toner  
coverage  
Default setting / Counter  
Machine  
report  
Default setting  
End  
Copy  
Language  
default  
Management  
Default setting  
Bypass  
setting  
Hard Disk  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
7-101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
The “Printing report” screen will be displayed and printing of  
the corresponding report will start.  
5
Inch specifications  
Printing report.  
Orig. page  
Count/Set  
Output  
Cancel  
11x81  
1 sided  
Sort  
/2"  
Inner tray  
Metric specifications  
Printing report.  
Original  
Count/set  
Output  
Plain  
1-sided  
Sort  
Cancel  
Inner tray  
NOTE  
If you want to cancel print out of the corresponding report, touch the  
“Cancel” key.  
When the report is complete, the touch panel will return to  
the screen in step 4.  
Touch the “Close” key. The touch panel will return to the  
screen in step 2.  
6
Touch the “End” key. The touch panel will return to the  
contents of the “Basic” tab.  
7
7-102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
10. Changing the language used for messages  
You can select the language that will be used on the touch panel.  
Touch the key that corresponds to the language that you  
want to use.  
The language used on the touch panel will change to that  
selected.  
3
The available languages are as follows:  
Inch specification copiers:  
English, French (“Français”), Spanish (“Español”) and Japanese  
Inch specifications  
(“  
”)  
Metric specification copiers:  
Stop  
Language  
English, German (“DEUTSCH”), French (“FRANÇAIS”), Italian  
(“ITALIANO”) and Spanish (“ESPAÑOL”)  
Français  
Español  
English  
With the content of the “Basic” tab displayed, press the  
[Default Setting/Counter] key.  
The “Default setting/Counter” screen will be displayed.  
1
Default setting  
Metric specifications  
Stop  
Language  
Deutsch  
Italiano  
Français  
English  
Español  
Default setting  
Touch the “Language” key. The “Language” screen will be  
displayed.  
2
Inch specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting  
End  
Copy  
default  
Language  
Management  
Bypass  
setting  
BOX  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
Metric specifications  
Default setting / Counter  
Default setting  
End  
Copy  
Language  
default  
Management  
Bypass  
setting  
Hard Disk  
Management  
Counter  
check  
Machine  
default  
Document  
Management  
Register  
orig. size  
Print  
report  
User  
Adjustment  
7-103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
11. Entering characters  
Use the following screens to enter characters when registering names  
for programs and for departments, etc.  
Capital keyboard  
Stop  
End  
Name to display  
Limit:16 letters including #  
AllDel.  
A
(1) Character input screens  
Del. prev  
!
@
Z
#
$
%
V
^
&
N
*
(
)
_
?
+
-
Q
W
E
R
T
Y
U
I
O
P
{
}
l
A
S
D
F
G
H
J
K
L
:
"
Inch specifications  
X
C
B
M
<
>
Letter keyboard  
Letter  
Num./Sym.  
Space  
Capital  
1
6
7
9
8
0
Numeral/Symbol keyboard  
Stop  
End  
Name to display  
A
Limit:16 letters including #  
AllDel.  
Stop  
End  
Name to display  
A
Del. prev  
Limit:16 letters including #  
AllDel.  
Del. prev  
1
2
z
3
x
4
c
5
v
6
b
7
n
8
9
0
-
/
=
`
1
&
?
2
'
3
(
4
)
5
*
]
6
+
^
7
,
8
-
'
9
.
0
/
!
:
}
"
;
#
<
$
=
%
>
q
w
e
r
t
y
u
i
o
p
[
]
\
a
s
d
f
g
h
j
k
l
;
'
@
[
\
_
{
l
~
m
,
.
Capital  
Letter  
Num./Sym.  
Space  
Capital  
Letter  
Space  
Num./Sym.  
2
3
4
5
1 Entry field  
Displays entered information.  
2 “Capital” key  
Touch this key when you want to enter uppercase letters.  
3 “Letter” key  
Touch this key when you want to enter lowercase letters.  
4 “Num. /Sym.” key  
Touch this key when you want to enter numerals and symbols.  
5 “Space” key  
Touch this key when you want to enter a space.  
6 “AllDel.” key  
Touch this key when you want to delete all characters that have  
been entered to this point.  
7 “r” and “R” keys  
Touch these keys when you want to move the cursor.  
8 “Del. prev” key  
Touch this key when you want to delete the character to the left of  
the cursor.  
9 “Stop” key  
Touch this key when you want to cancel character input and return  
to the previous screen.  
0 “End” key  
Touch this key when you want to register the entered information.  
7-104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
Metric specifications  
Capital keyboard  
Letter keyboard  
Stop  
End  
Name to display  
A
Limit:16 letters including #  
AllDel.  
1
7
8
0
9
!
Del. prev  
!
@
#
$
%
V
^
&
N
*
(
)
_
?
+
~
Stop  
End  
Q
W
E
R
T
Y
U
I
O
P
{
}
l
Name to display  
A
`
A
S
D
F
G
H
J
K
L
:
"
Limit: 16 letters inc. # key  
AllDel.  
Del. prev  
Z
X
C
B
M
<
>
Letter  
Letter  
Letter  
Symbol 1  
Symbol 2  
Space  
Capital  
1
2
z
3
x
4
c
5
v
6
b
7
n
8
9
0
-
/
=
`
q
w
e
r
t
y
u
i
o
p
[
]
\
`
a
s
d
f
g
h
j
k
l
;
'
Symbol 1 keyboard  
m
,
.
Capital  
Letter  
Symbol 1  
Symbol 2  
Space  
Stop  
End  
Name to display  
A
Limit:16 letters including #  
AllDel.  
Del. prev  
2
3
4
5
6
1 Entry field  
Displays entered information.  
2 “Capital” key  
Capital  
Symbol 2  
Space  
Symbol 1  
Touch this key when you want to enter uppercase letters.  
3 “Letter” key  
Touch this key when you want to enter lowercase letters.  
4 “Symbol 1” key  
Touch this key when you want to enter certain symbols.  
5 “Symbol 2” key  
Touch this key when you want to enter certain symbols.  
6 “Space” key  
Symbol 2 keyboard  
Stop  
End  
Name to display  
A
Limit:16 letters including #  
AllDel.  
Del. prev  
Touch this key when you want to enter a space.  
7 “AllDel.” key  
Capital  
Symbol 1  
Space  
Symbol 2  
Touch this key when you want to delete all characters that have  
been entered to this point.  
8 “r” and “R” keys  
Touch these keys when you want to move the cursor.  
9 “Del. prev” key  
Touch this key when you want to delete the character to the left of  
the cursor.  
0 “Stop” key  
Touch this key when you want to cancel character input and return  
to the previous screen.  
! “End” key  
Touch this key when you want to register the entered information.  
7-105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 COPIER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS  
Touch the “b”, “c”, “d” and “e” keys, in that order, on the  
keyboard.  
(2) Character input procedure  
3
Inch specifications  
[Example] “Abcde”  
Stop  
End  
Name to display  
Abcde  
Limit:16 letters including #  
AllDel.  
Touch the “Capital” key. The “Capital” will be displayed. Touch  
the “A” key on the keyboard.  
Del. prev  
1
1
2
z
3
x
4
c
5
v
6
b
7
n
8
9
0
-
/
=
`
q
w
e
r
t
y
u
i
o
p
[
]
\
Inch specifications  
a
s
d
f
g
h
j
k
l
;
'
Stop  
End  
Name to display  
m
,
.
Limit:16 letters including #  
AllDel.  
Capital  
Letter  
Num./Sym.  
Space  
Del. prev  
!
@
#
$
%
V
^
&
N
*
(
)
_
?
+
-
Metric specifications  
Q
W
E
R
T
Y
U
I
O
P
{
}
l
A
S
D
F
G
H
J
K
L
:
"
Stop  
End  
Name to display  
Abcde  
Z
X
C
B
M
<
>
Limit: 16 letters inc. # key  
AllDel.  
Letter  
Num./Sym.  
Space  
Capital  
Del. prev  
1
2
3
x
4
c
5
v
6
b
7
n
8
9
0
-
/
=
`
q
w
e
r
t
y
u
i
o
p
[
]
\
`
Metric specifications  
a
s
d
f
g
h
j
k
l
;
'
z
m
,
.
Stop  
End  
Name to display  
Limit:16 letters including #  
AllDel.  
Capital  
Letter  
Symbol 1  
Symbol 2  
Space  
Del. prev  
!
@
#
$
%
V
^
&
N
*
(
)
_
?
+
-
Once you have finished entering the information, touch the  
“End” key.  
Q
W
E
R
T
Y
U
I
O
P
{
}
l
`
4
A
S
D
F
G
H
J
K
L
:
"
Z
X
C
B
M
<
>
Inch specifications  
Letter  
Symbol 1  
Symbol 2  
Space  
Capital  
Stop  
End  
Name to display  
Abcde  
Limit:16 letters including #  
AllDel.  
Touch the “Letter” key.  
Inch specifications  
Del. prev  
2
1
2
3
x
4
c
5
v
6
b
7
n
8
9
0
-
/
=
`
q
w
e
r
t
y
u
i
o
p
[
]
\
a
s
d
f
g
h
j
k
l
;
'
Stop  
End  
Name to display  
A
z
m
,
.
Limit:16 letters including #  
AllDel.  
Del. prev  
Capital  
Letter  
Num./Sym.  
Space  
!
@
#
$
%
V
^
&
N
*
(
)
_
?
+
-
Q
W
E
R
T
Y
U
I
O
P
{
}
l
Metric specifications  
A
S
D
F
G
H
J
K
L
:
"
Z
X
C
B
M
<
>
Stop  
End  
Name to display  
Abcde  
Letter  
Num./Sym.  
Space  
Capital  
Limit: 16 letters inc. # key  
AllDel.  
Del. prev  
1
2
3
x
4
c
5
v
6
b
7
n
8
9
0
-
/
=
`
Metric specifications  
q
w
e
r
t
y
u
i
o
p
[
]
\
`
a
s
d
f
g
h
j
k
l
;
'
Stop  
End  
Name to display  
A
z
m
,
.
Limit:16 letters including #  
AllDel.  
Del. prev  
Capital  
Letter  
Symbol 1  
Symbol 2  
Space  
!
@
#
$
%
V
^
&
N
*
(
)
_
?
+
~
Q
W
E
R
T
Y
U
I
O
P
{
}
l
`
A
S
D
F
G
H
J
K
L
:
"
Z
X
C
B
M
<
>
Letter  
Symbol 1  
Symbol 2  
Space  
Capital  
7-106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 8 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT  
3Document Processor part names  
(1) Document Processor  
6
The Document Processor automatically feeds one-sided originals one  
by one for scanning. It also reverses two-sided originals automatically  
for duplex copying and page separation copying.  
2
5
1
3
4
1 Original table  
(Place the originals here.)  
2 Original insertion guides  
(Adjust the guides to the width of the originals.)  
3 Document Processor open/close handle  
(Hold this handle when opening and closing the Document  
Processor.)  
1Originals that can be used with the Document Processor  
• Sheet originals only  
• Original weights: Single-sided original of 35 g/m2 to 160 g/m2 two-  
sided original of 50 g/m2 to 120g g/m2  
• Original sizes: 11" x 17"/A3 (maximum) to 5 1/2" x 8 1/2"/A5R  
(minimum)  
4 Original eject cover  
(Copied originals are stored here.)  
5 Document Processor original cover  
(Open this cover to remove an original misfed in the Document  
Processor.)  
• Capacity:  
100 sheets (8 1/2" x 11"/A4 and smaller, 75 g/m2 or 80 g/m2)  
70 sheets (8 1/2" x 14"/Folio and larger, 75 g/m2 or 80 g/m2)  
30 sheets in auto selection mode  
6 Original set indicator  
(Lights green when the originals are set.)  
2Precautions for the use of Document Processor  
Do not use any of the originals given below with the Document  
Processor. Also do not set originals with punch holes or tear-off strips  
positioned at the leading edge.  
• Transparency films  
• Carbon paper and extremely creased or folded originals, originals of  
sort material such as vinyl  
• Non-square originals, wet originals, originals with adhesive tape or  
glue  
• Originals bundled with a paper clip or staple (if inevitable, remove  
the paper clip or staple and straighten out the creases and folds  
before setting the originals)  
• Clipped out originals, originals with slippery surface  
• Originals with still-wet whiteout  
• Originals with creases (if inevitable, straighten out the creases  
before setting the originals)  
8-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 8 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT  
4How to set originals in the Document Processor  
IMPORTANT!  
Do not set originals exceeding the limit indicated on the sticker  
attached on the rear original insertion guide. Setting more originals  
than specified may cause original misfeed.  
Adjust the original insertion guides to the original size.  
1
5How to set originals on the platen  
When using an original that cannot be set in the Document Processor,  
such as a book or magazine, open the Document Processor and  
place it on the platen.  
Hold the Document Processor open/close handle and open  
the Document Processor.  
* Before opening the Document Processor, check that no  
original is present on the original table or original eject  
cover. If present, the original may fall off when the  
Document Processor is opened.  
1
NOTE  
Before setting the originals in the Document Processor, check that no  
original from the previous operation is remaining on the original eject  
cover. Originals remaining on the original eject cover may cause  
original misfeed.  
Set the originals on the original table in correct sequence  
with the side to be copied facing upward. Securely insert the  
leading edge of the originals into the Document Processor as  
far as they will go.  
2
Set the original with the side to be copied facing downward.  
Be sure to align the original with the original size scales.  
2
* When setting large size paper such as 8 1/2" x 11", A4R or  
larger, pull out the support extension.  
8-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 8 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT  
Hold the Document Processor open/close handle and close  
the Document Processor.  
6Auto selection/Filing mode  
3
With this mode, when you are using the Document Processor without  
pressing one of the paper size keys, and thereby, specifying a desired  
paper size, originals will be checked one by one for their size, and you  
can select to either have paper of the same size as each original  
selected automatically (auto selection) or to have the originals all  
copied onto one single size of copy paper (filing).  
11"✕17"  
(A3)  
11"✕8 1/2"  
(A4)  
8 1/2"✕14"  
(Folio)  
8 1/2"✕11"  
(A4R)  
B4  
B5  
IMPORTANT!  
Do not press the Document Processor against the platen with force.  
Doing so many cause damage to the glass material.  
IMPORTANT!  
• You can set up to 30 originals in the Document Processor in this  
mode.  
Inch specifications  
CAUTION  
• Only 11" x 8 1/2" and 11" x 17", or 8 1/2" x 14" and 8 1/2" x 11", size  
originals can be used together in this mode, and the originals must  
be arranged together so that their widths coincide.  
Metric specifications  
DO NOT leave the Document Processor open as  
there is a danger of personal injury.  
• Only A4 and A3, B5 and B4, or A4R and Folio, size originals can be  
used together in this mode, and the originals must be arranged  
together so that their widths coincide.  
Metric specifications (Asia Pacific)  
• Only A4 and A3, B5 and B4, size originals can be used together in  
this mode, and the originals must be arranged together so that their  
widths coincide.  
● Differing finished sizes (Auto selection)  
Each original will copied onto the same size copy paper as that  
original.  
8-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 8 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT  
● Matching finished sizes (Filing)  
Specify the size of the very first original to be copied and  
then touch the “Close” key.  
The touch panel will return to the contents of the “Basic” tab.  
4
All originals will copied onto the same size copy paper.  
Inch specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
Place originals in Document processor.  
1
11x8 /2  
"
Register  
Back  
Close  
Auto Selection  
1st pg. orig.  
1
8 /2x11"/  
Off  
Able to scan mix size originals at  
one time using Document processor,  
and copy them in unified paper size.  
1
11x8 /2  
"
1
Auto  
selection  
8 /2x14"/  
11x17"  
Electronic  
Filing  
Metric specifications  
Set  
Paper size  
Place originals in Document processor.  
Set the originals to be copied in the Document Processor.  
Register  
Back  
Close  
Auto selection  
1st original  
1
A4 /B5  
A4  
/
Press the [Auto Selection] key.  
The lamp in the [Auto Selection] key will light and the auto  
selection/filing mode screen will be displayed.  
Off  
Able to scan different size originals at  
one time using Document processor,  
and copy them to unified paper size.  
2
Auto  
selection  
A3 /B4  
Folio  
/
Electronic  
Filing  
NOTE  
In order to have the binding direction set properly for stapling or hole  
punching, etc., finished copies, be sure to specify the size of the very  
first original being copied.  
Select the desired drawer[cassette].  
5
Inch specifications  
Set  
Paper Size  
11x81/2  
Ready to copy.  
"
Touch the “Auto selection” key or the “Electronic Filing” key,  
3
Combine  
11x81  
Plain  
/2"  
as appropriate.  
Orig.image  
quality  
81  
/2x11"  
APS  
Bypass  
Sort:Off  
AMS  
Color  
Reduce  
/Enlarge  
11x81  
Plain  
/
2
"
"
If you selected “Auto selection”, go directly to step 6.  
Auto  
Exposure  
Sort:On  
Plain  
11x81  
/
2
Sort/  
Finished  
Exposure  
mode  
Reduce  
/Enlarge  
Recycled  
If you selected “Electronic Filing”, go to the next step.  
Inch specifications  
Basic  
User choice  
Function  
Program  
Metric specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
1
Ready to copy.  
11x8 /2  
"
Set  
Paper Size  
Ready to copy.  
Auto Selection  
Register  
Back  
Close  
Merge copy  
Plain  
Image  
quality  
APS  
Sort:Off  
Sort:On  
Off  
Able to copy mix size originals at  
AMS  
Colour  
Reduce/  
Enlarge  
one time using Document processor.  
Bypass  
Plain  
Auto  
Exposure  
Auto  
selection  
Plain  
Electronic  
Filing  
Exposure  
mode  
Reduce/  
Enlarge  
Sort/  
Finished  
Recycled  
Basic  
User choice  
Function  
Program  
Metric specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
Press the [Start] key.  
Copying will start.  
6
Register  
Back  
Close  
Auto selection  
Off  
Able to copy mixed size originals at  
one time using Document processor.  
Auto  
selection  
Electronic  
Filing  
8-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 8 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT  
IMPORTANT!  
(2) Paper Feeder  
• If copies come out curled or are tacked unevenly, turn the paper in  
the drawer[cassette] over.  
• When copying onto special paper such as OHP film and other  
transparencies, use Non-sort mode.  
Two Paper Feeders of the same type as drawer[cassette] in the main  
body can be added.  
Capacity and the paper loading method is the same as those for the  
standard drawer[cassette] in the main unit.  
* Paper misfed in the optional Paper Feeder can be removed by  
opening its left cover.  
1Copying in the Sort:ON mode  
This mode automatically sorts copies made from multiple originals  
into sets identical to the originals.  
(3) Paper Feeder  
The Paper Feeder holds up to 3,000 sheets of 11" x 8 1/2" [A4 or B5  
(B5 is for Asia-Pacific specification copiers only)] size standard paper.  
Pull the Paper Feeder out towards you as far as it will go, and then  
load up to 1,500 sheets of paper in each rows.  
Touch the “Sort/Finished” key.  
The “Sort/Finished” screen will appear.  
1
Inch specifications  
* The cover on the left side of the Paper Feeder is prepared to remove  
misfed paper.  
Paper size  
Set  
1
Ready to copy.  
11x8 /2  
"
Select  
paper  
2 sided/  
Separation  
Select  
orig. size  
Combine  
Exposure  
mode  
Reduce  
/Enlarge  
Auto  
Selection  
Batch  
scanning  
Up  
Orig.image  
quality  
Margin/  
Centering  
Forms  
Overlay  
Page #  
Down  
Cover  
Mode  
Sort/  
Finished  
Border  
Erase  
Booklet  
Function  
Basic  
User choice  
Program  
Metric specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
Select  
paper  
2-sided/  
Split  
Select  
size orig.  
Merge copy  
Exposure  
mode  
Reduce/  
Enlarge  
Auto  
selection  
Large # of  
originals  
Up  
Image  
quality  
Margin/  
Imag. shift  
Page  
numbering  
Form  
overlay  
Down  
Sort/  
Finished  
Erase  
Mode  
Cover  
Mode  
Booklet  
(4) Document Finisher  
Function  
Basic  
User choice  
Program  
This unit lets you store a large volume of copies and shifts the  
position of each copy set for ease of sorting. It can staple finished  
copy sets and bind them. It is also possible to use the Document  
Finisher to punch holes in them for filling purposes (optional). For  
more detailed information, refer to the Operation Guide for the  
Document Finisher.  
8-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 8 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT  
Touch the “Sort:On” key.  
(Only for metric specification copiers produced)  
The “Output each page” key will be changed to the “1 set”  
key.  
2Copying in the Sort:OFF mode  
2
This mode automatically groups copies made from multiple originals,  
with all the copies produced from an individual original stacked  
together in one set.  
Inch specifications  
Touch the “Sort/Finished” key.  
The “Sort/Finished” screen will appear.  
1
Paper size  
Set  
1
Ready to copy.  
11x8 /2  
"
Register  
Punch  
Back  
Check direction  
Close  
Sort/Finished  
Inch specifications  
Sort  
Offset  
Staple  
Paper size  
Check direction of  
original top side.  
Set  
1
Ready to copy.  
11x8 /2  
"
Punch  
mode  
Staple  
mode  
Sort:Off  
Sort:On  
Off  
On  
Select  
paper  
2 sided/  
Separation  
Select  
orig. size  
Combine  
Exposure  
mode  
Reduce  
/Enlarge  
Auto  
Selection  
Batch  
scanning  
Left top  
corner  
Up  
Rear  
Orig.image  
quality  
Margin/  
Centering  
Forms  
Overlay  
Page #  
Down  
Cover  
Mode  
Sort/  
Finished  
Border  
Erase  
Metric specifications  
Booklet  
Function  
Basic  
User choice  
Program  
Paper size  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
Register  
Back  
Close  
Sort/Finished  
Metric specifications  
Sort  
Group  
Staple  
Punch  
Check direction  
Check direction of  
original.  
Paper size  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
Sort:Off  
Sort:On  
Off  
Staple Mode  
Punch Mode  
Select  
paper  
2-sided/  
Split  
Select  
size orig.  
Merge copy  
Output  
each page  
Exposure  
mode  
Reduce/  
Enlarge  
Auto  
selection  
Large # of  
originals  
Left top  
corner  
Up  
Back Edge  
Image  
quality  
Margin/  
Imag. shift  
Page  
numbering  
Form  
overlay  
Down  
Sort/  
Finished  
Erase  
Mode  
Cover  
Mode  
Booklet  
Touch the “On” [“1 set”] key.  
3
4
Function  
Basic  
User choice  
Program  
Touch the “Close” key. The message display returns to the  
Function screen.  
Touch the “Sort:Off” key.  
Inch specifications  
2
Set the originals to be copied.  
Paper size  
Set  
1
Ready to copy.  
5
11x8 /2  
"
Register  
Punch  
Back  
Check direction  
Close  
Sort/Finished  
Sort  
Offset  
Staple  
Press the [Start] key. Scanning of the originals will start. The  
number of scanned originals will be displayed.  
Check direction of  
original top side.  
6
Punch  
mode  
Staple  
mode  
Sort:Off  
Sort:On  
Off  
On  
NOTE  
Left top  
corner  
Rear  
Repeat this operation for all originals when using the platen. After all  
the originals have been scanned, touch the “Scanning finished” key.  
Metric specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
Register  
Punch  
Back  
Close  
Sort/Finished  
Sort  
Group  
Staple  
Check direction  
Check direction of  
original.  
Copying will begin and finished copies will be ejected face  
down onto the tray with each full set shifted slightly from the  
previous one.  
7
Sort:Off  
Sort:On  
Off  
Staple Mode  
Punch Mode  
Output  
each page  
Left top  
corner  
Back Edge  
Remove all of the finished copies from the tray.  
8
Touch the “On” [“Output each page”] key.  
3
4
5
6
Touch the “Close” key. The message display returns to the  
Function screen.  
Set the originals to be copied.  
Press the [Start] key. Scanning of the originals will start. The  
number of scanned originals will be displayed.  
8-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 8 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT  
Touch the key that corresponds to the desired stapling style.  
Inch specifications  
NOTE  
3
Repeat this operation for all originals when using the platen. After all  
the originals have been scanned, press the “Scanning finished” key.  
Paper size  
Set  
1
Ready to copy.  
11x8 /2  
"
Staple mode  
Back  
Check direction  
Close  
Staple  
Check direction of  
original top side.  
Copying will begin and finished copies will be ejected face  
down onto the tray with each full set shifted slightly from the  
previous one.  
Limited number of staple pages.  
The limit is set in setting mode.  
None  
7
1 staple  
2 staples  
When selecting staple function  
the offset can not be combined.  
Left top  
corner  
Rear  
Remove all of the finished copies from the tray.  
8
Metric specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
3Copying in the Staple mode  
Staple Mode  
Staple  
Back  
Close  
This mode automatically staples each copy set.  
Check direction  
Check direction of  
original.  
Touch the “Sort/Finished” key.  
The “Sort/Finished” screen will appear.  
None  
Limited number of pages to be stapled.  
The limitation depends on setting mode.  
1
1 staple  
2 staples  
Cannot combine sort function and  
staple.  
Left top  
corner  
Back Edge  
Inch specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
1
Ready to copy.  
11x8 /2  
"
* Stapling will be accomplished as shown in the illustration  
(as viewed from the front of the copies).  
Select  
paper  
2 sided/  
Separation  
Select  
orig. size  
Combine  
Exposure  
mode  
Reduce  
/Enlarge  
Auto  
Selection  
Batch  
scanning  
Up  
Orig.image  
quality  
Margin/  
Centering  
Forms  
Overlay  
Page #  
Down  
Cover  
Mode  
Sort/  
Finished  
Border  
Erase  
Booklet  
A A A A  
A A A  
Function  
Basic  
User choice  
Program  
Metric specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
Select  
paper  
2-sided/  
Split  
Select  
size orig.  
Merge copy  
A A A A  
A A A  
Exposure  
mode  
Reduce/  
Enlarge  
Auto  
selection  
Large # of  
originals  
Up  
Image  
quality  
Margin/  
Imag. shift  
Page  
numbering  
Form  
overlay  
Down  
Sort/  
Finished  
Erase  
Mode  
Cover  
Mode  
Booklet  
Function  
Basic  
User choice  
Program  
Set the originals to be copied. Check the direction of the  
original top side.  
Touch the “Staple mode” key.  
The staple mode set-up screen will appear.  
4
2
Inch specifications  
Press the [Start] key. Scanning of the originals will start. The  
number of scanned originals will be displayed.  
Paper size  
Set  
5
1
Ready to copy.  
11x8 /2  
"
Register  
Punch  
Back  
Check direction  
Close  
Sort/Finished  
Sort  
Offset  
Staple  
Check direction of  
original top side.  
Punch  
mode  
Staple  
mode  
NOTE  
Sort:Off  
Sort:On  
Off  
On  
Repeat this operation for all originals when using the platen. After all  
the originals have been scanned, touch the “Scanning finished” key.  
Left top  
corner  
Rear  
Metric specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
Copying will begin and the copies will be automatically  
stapled and ejected face down onto the tray.  
6
Register  
Back  
Close  
Sort/Finished  
Sort  
Group  
Staple  
Punch  
Check direction  
Check direction of  
original.  
Remove all of the finished copies from the tray.  
7
Sort:Off  
Sort:On  
Off  
Staple Mode  
Punch Mode  
Output  
each page  
Left top  
corner  
Back Edge  
8-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 8 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT  
<Inch specification copiers>  
4Copying in the Hole Punch mode (optional)  
3
Touch the “2 holes” key or the “3 holes” key, as appropriate.  
The screen to select the hole positioning will appear.  
<Metric specification copiers>  
Touch the “4 holes” key. The screen to select the hole  
positioning will appear.  
Copies can be automatically hole punched.  
Touch the “Sort/Finished” key.  
The “Sort/Finished” screen will appear.  
1
Inch specifications  
* If your copier has been set for 2-hole punching, you can  
have the “4 holes” key changed in order to display it as a “2  
holes” key.  
Paper size  
Set  
1
Ready to copy.  
11x8 /2  
"
Select  
paper  
2 sided/  
Separation  
Select  
orig. size  
Combine  
Inch specifications  
Exposure  
mode  
Reduce  
/Enlarge  
Auto  
Selection  
Batch  
scanning  
Up  
Paper size  
Set  
1
11x8 /2  
"
Ready to copy.  
Orig.image  
quality  
Margin/  
Centering  
Forms  
Overlay  
Page #  
Down  
Punch mode  
Punch  
Back  
Close  
Cover  
Mode  
Sort/  
Finished  
Border  
Erase  
Booklet  
Preview  
Check direction  
Check direction of  
original top side.  
Function  
Basic  
User choice  
Program  
None  
Metric specifications  
2 holes  
3 holes  
Left top  
corner  
Rear  
Paper size  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
Select  
paper  
2-sided/  
Split  
Select  
size orig.  
Merge copy  
Metric specifications  
Exposure  
mode  
Reduce/  
Enlarge  
Auto  
selection  
Large # of  
originals  
Up  
Paper size  
Set  
Ready to copy.  
Image  
quality  
Margin/  
Imag. shift  
Page  
numbering  
Form  
overlay  
Down  
Punch Mode  
Punch  
Back  
Close  
Sort/  
Finished  
Erase  
Mode  
Cover  
Mode  
Booklet  
Preview  
Check direction  
Check direction of  
original.  
Function  
Basic  
User choice  
Program  
None  
4 holes  
Touch the “Punch mode” key.  
Left top  
corner  
2
Back Edge  
The hole “Punch” screen will appear.  
Inch specifications  
Touch the key that corresponds to the desired position of holes.  
Inch specifications  
4
Paper size  
Set  
1
Ready to copy.  
11x8 /2  
"
Paper size  
Set  
Register  
Punch  
Back  
Check direction  
Close  
Sort/Finished  
Sort  
Ready to copy.  
1
11x8 /2  
"
Offset  
Staple  
Check direction of  
original top side.  
Back  
Close  
Punch mode  
Punch  
mode  
Punch  
Position  
Preview  
Staple  
mode  
Check direction  
Sort:Off  
Sort:On  
Off  
On  
Check direction of  
original top side.  
None  
Left side  
Left top  
corner  
Rear  
2 holes  
3 holes  
Right side  
Top side  
Left top  
corner  
Rear  
Metric specifications  
Paper size  
Set  
Metric specifications  
Ready to copy.  
Paper size  
Set  
"
Register  
Back  
Close  
Sort/Finished  
1
Ready to copy.  
11x8 /2  
Sort  
Group  
Staple  
Punch  
Check direction  
Check direction of  
original.  
Back  
Close  
Punch Mode  
Punch  
Position  
Preview  
Check direction  
Check direction of  
original.  
Sort:Off  
Sort:On  
Off  
Staple Mode  
Punch Mode  
Output  
each page  
None  
4 holes  
Left side  
Left top  
corner  
Back Edge  
Right side  
Top side  
Left top  
corner  
Back Edge  
IMPORTANT!  
* Hole punching will be accomplished as shown in the  
illustration (as viewed from the front of the copies).  
When the optional punch unit is not installed, the “Punch mode” key  
will not appear.  
Inch specifications  
Metric specifications  
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
8-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 8 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT  
IMPORTANT!  
(6) Document Finisher  
The position of the holes on each page may differ very slightly due to  
the fact that holes are punched in one sheet at a time.  
The Document Finisher stores a large quantity copies, and sorts  
multiple sets (Sort: ON) or groups copies made from multiple  
originals, with all the copies produced from an individual original  
grouped together in one set (Sort: OFF). It is also possible to use the  
Document Finisher to staple sorted copy sets.  
For detailed information on the sort mode, refer to the Operation  
Guide for the Document Finisher. For more information on the  
corresponding procedures, refer to “(4) Document Finisher” on page  
8-5 of this guide.  
Set the originals to be copied.  
5
Press the [Start] key. Scanning of the originals will start. The  
number of scanned originals will be displayed.  
6
NOTE  
Repeat this operation for all originals when using the platen. After all  
the originals have been scanned, touch the “Scanning finished” key.  
Copying will begin and the copies will be automatically  
punched and ejected face down onto the tray.  
7
Remove all of the finished copies from the tray.  
8
* Stapling will be accomplished as shown in the illustration  
(at the top and from the front of the copies).  
(5) Document Finisher  
The Document Finisher stores a large quantity copies, and sorts  
multiple sets by shifting the position that each one is ejected. It is also  
possible to use the Document Finisher to staple the copy sets or  
punch holes in them for filling purposes.  
For detailed information on the sort mode, refer to the Operation  
Guide for the Document Finisher. For more information on the  
corresponding procedures, refer to “(4) Document Finisher” on page  
8-5 of this guide.  
A A  
(7) Built-in Finisher  
The finisher stores a large quantity of copies. It can also sorts multiple  
copies into sets by shifting the eject position. Paginated copies can be  
stapled, too.  
1
* Stacking mode  
If the number of copies to be made in the Non-sort mode is set to a  
number greater than the acceptable limit (250 sheets), the finished  
copies will be ejected onto the Sort tray.  
2
1 Sort tray  
2 Finisher tray  
8-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 8 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT  
* Sorted copies are ejected to the Sort tray.  
Remove the empty staple cartridge from the staple holder.  
3
4
* When setting large size paper such as 8 1/2" x 11", A4R or larger,  
pull out the support extension.  
Hold the staple holder in one hand and the new staple  
cartridge in the other and insert the new staple cartridge  
making sure the direction of insertion is correct.  
* The arrow on the staple cartridge indicates the correct  
direction of insertion.  
1Refilling the Stapling Unit  
Open the stapler front cover towards you.  
Make sure the new staple cartridge is completely inserted all  
the way into the staple holder and then remove the paper  
tape covering the staple cartridge.  
1
5
Pull out the staple holder.  
2
Replace the staple holder back in its original position in the  
Stapling Unit. Once it has been fully inserted, it will click into  
place.  
6
8-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 8 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT  
2Clearing a staple jam  
(8) Job Separator  
Remove the staple cartridge referring to the “1 Refilling the  
1
When using the optional printer function, the paper eject point can be  
changed according to the used function, making it easier to sort  
paper.  
Stapling Unit”.  
Push up on the tab “A” on the protective faceplate in order to  
raise the faceplate.  
Copied paper can be ejected to the Job Separator (upper section).  
See “Copy eject location” in Machine default setting on page 7-49.  
* The Job Separator can store up to 100 copies. When making 101 or  
more copies, copying will stop when 100 copies are made. Copying  
will resume automatically when the copied sheets are removed.  
A
Remove the jammed staple from the tip of the staple  
cartridge (the end where staples are set).  
2
3
4
(9) Hard Disk  
The Hard Disk is required in order to use the following modes and  
functions of your copier.  
• Job reservation during copying  
• Form overlay of registered forms  
• Repeat copying  
• Document management functions  
• Using the output management functions to change the job printing  
order, cancel and delete print jobs, and verify content  
It is also possible to register up to 1000 department ID-codes under  
document management.  
Lower the protective faceplate back into its original position.  
Replace the staple holder back in its original position in the  
Stapling Unit. Once it has been fully inserted, it will click into  
place.  
Lift up the Stapling Unit slightly and than lower it into its  
original position.  
5
6
Close the stapler front cover securely.  
8-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 8 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT  
(10) Key Counter  
(12) Printer Kit  
The Key Counter determines the number of copies that have been  
made. It is useful for copier centralized management on a department  
or even company level.  
* The Key Counter may count up when either data from a computer is  
printed out or fax pages are printed out.  
If the Printer Kit is installed, this copier can be used as a printer.  
For more detailed information, see the printer’s Operation Guide.  
Since the network board is equipped, this copier can also be used as  
a network printer, allowing access from multiple computers. The  
optional printer network kit and hard disk are also available.  
(13) Printer/Scanner Kit  
•
Setting the Key Counter  
Insert the Key Counter securely into the Key Counter opening.  
If the Printer/Scanner Kit is installed, this copier can be used as a  
printer or a network scanner. For more detailed information, see the  
Operation Guide for the Printer/Scanner Kit. Since the network board  
is equipped, this copier can also be used as a network printer,  
allowing access from multiple computers. The optional printer network  
kit and hard disk are also available.  
NOTE  
When the Key Counter function is used, copies cannot be made  
unless the Key Counter is inserted into the copier. If the Key Counter  
is not inserted securely, “Insert key counter.” appears on the message  
display.  
(14) Fax Kit  
If the Fax Kit is installed, this copier can be used as a fax. Also if the  
Fax Kit is used together with the optional Printer/Scanner Kit, this  
copier can be used as a network fax, allowing transmission and  
reception by a computer. For details, see the Operation Guide for the  
fax.  
(11) Document Tray  
* In some cases, this function may not be used.  
The Document Tray lets you place originals and other documents next  
to the machine before using them, etc. It also contains space for  
storing paper clips, etc.  
8-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 9 TROUBLESHOOTING  
1. If one of the following messages is displayed  
When any of the following messages appears on the message display, take the indicated action.  
Message  
Procedure  
Reference  
page  
“Close xxx cover x.”  
The cover indicated is open. Close the cover securely.  
There is no paper in the drawer[cassette] indicated. Load paper.  
——  
“Add paper in drawer.”  
3-1  
[“Add paper in cassette.”]  
“Set drawer. ”  
[“Close paper cassette.”]  
One of the drawers[cassettes] is not closed properly. Pull it out and push it back in all  
the way.  
——  
“Paper drawer is out of order. Select  
another paper drawer.”  
[“Paper cassette is out of order. Select  
other paper cassette. ”]  
The drawer[cassette] currently in use is out of order and cannot be used. Contact  
your service representative immediately. Continue copying using another  
drawer[cassette].  
——  
“Check paper size.”  
“Reposition original.”  
No paper that can be used in the selected mode is loaded. Check the paper.  
——  
——  
The orientation of the original and the selected paper are different. Change the  
orientation of the original. If the [Start] key is pressed, same-size copying will be  
performed.  
“Exceeds pre registered copying  
quantity.”  
The number of copies reached the limit set in the copy management mode and no  
more copies can be made. Clear the copy count from the management mode.  
7-1  
[“Copy limit for this ID-code has been  
reached. No copying possible.”]  
“Ready to copy. Add toner.”  
There is not enough toner in the copier. Replace the toner container immediately as  
only one copy can be made at a time.  
10-3  
10-3  
“Add toner to resume copying.”  
“System error. Main switch off/on.”  
There is not enough toner in the copier to make copies. Replace the toner container  
immediately.  
A system error has occurred. Turn the power switch OFF and then ON.  
——  
——  
“System error. Disconnect power plug  
from the socket.”  
A system error has occurred. Disconnect the power plug from the outlet and connect  
it again.  
* If the optional Fax Kit is installed in your copier, when the power cord is unplugged from the outlet, original data or reserved communication  
information stored in the memory may be lost.  
9-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 9 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Message  
Procedure  
Reference  
page  
“Call service.”  
Open and close the front cover. If the same message appears again, make a note of  
the “C” and the number appearing with it, turn the power switch OFF (O), unplug the  
power cord from the outlet, and contact your service representative or authorized  
service center.  
——  
“Time for maintenance.”  
Periodic maintenance is necessary to keep your copier in good condition.  
Contact your service representative or an authorized service center as soon as  
possible.  
——  
“Close Document processor cover.”  
“Memory full.”  
The Document Processor original cover of the optional document processor is open.  
Close the cover securely.  
——  
——  
The copier memory is full. Either print out or clear all scanned data. It is not possible  
to copy or scan another original until one of these two operations is performed.  
The copier memory size and the capacity for scanning originals are shown below.  
Number of originals that can be scanned*  
Standard memory (64MB): approximately 322 pages  
When the optional Hard Disk is installed (20GB): approximately 70,000 pages**  
* When using our standard original (A4 original, 6% text)  
** The maximum number of originals that can be scanned at one time is 999  
(11" x 8 1/2" [A4]).  
“Paper misfeed.”  
“Paper misfeed. Careful for Drum.”  
If paper is misfed, the copier will stop and the location of the misfeed will appear on  
the message display. Remove the misfed paper with the power switch turned ON ( | )  
by following the appropriate procedure. If “Careful for Drum.” is displayed, be sure not  
to touch the drum area that is located inside the machine when removing the  
jammed paper.  
9-4  
“Duplex tray inoperable, call service.”  
[“Duplex unit is out of order. Call  
service.”]  
The duplex unit is out of order and duplex copying is not possible.  
Contact your service representative immediately.  
——  
10-1  
“Clean the slit glass for original fed from  
DP.” [“Clean the slit glass for original  
fed.”]  
The slit glass is dirty. This may result in black lines or other blemishes appearing on  
copies when you use the optional Document Processor, so you should perform the  
cleaning operation on the slit glass.  
“Attach Finisher.”  
Connect the optional Document Finisher securely to the copier.  
——  
——  
“Finisher is out of order. Detach  
Finisher.”  
The optional Document Finisher is out of order and cannot be used for the moment.  
Contact your service representative or an authorized service center as soon as  
possible.  
“Paper capacity exceeded. Remove  
paper from Finisher.”  
The maximum number of sheets that can be stored on the optional Document  
Finisher has been exceeded. Remove the copies from the Document Finisher.  
——  
“Remove paper form inner tray of  
Finisher.”  
Paper has been misfed inside the optional Document Finisher. See the Document  
Finisher’s Operation Guide and remove the paper.  
9-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 9 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Message  
Procedure  
Reference  
page  
“Out of staples. Add staples.”  
[“Stapler empty. Add staples.”]  
There are no staples in the optional Document Finisher. See the Document  
Finisher’s Operation Guide and replace the staple cartridge.  
——  
——  
——  
“Cannot staple this size.”  
[“Cannot staple this paper size.”]  
Stapling is not possible with small size paper. For details, see the optional Document  
Finisher’s Operation Guide.  
“Empty waste punch box.”  
The hole punch chad container in the optional Document Finisher is full. Refer to the  
Operation Guide for your Document Finisher and dispose of the waste hole punch  
chads.  
“Check the waste punch box.”  
[“Check Punch Hole box.”]  
The hole punch chad container in the optional Document Finisher is not set properly.  
Refer to the Operation Guide for your Document Finisher and set the hole punch  
chad container properly.  
——  
10-3  
“Replace the waste toner box.”  
The waste toner box is filled with waste toner. Replace the waste toner box with a  
new one.  
2. If one of these indicators lights or flashes  
If one of the indicators to the left of the [Copier] key, the [Printer] key, or the [Scanner] key either lights orange or flashes orange, carry out the  
appropriate procedure indicated below.  
Indication  
Procedure  
Reference  
page  
Lights orange or flashes  
orange  
Check the appropriate response to the  
message, and perform the  
–
corresponding procedure.  
9-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 9 TROUBLESHOOTING  
3. When paper misfeeds  
If a paper misfeed occurs, a message will be displayed in the touch panel about the misfeed and copying will stop. Leave the power switch ON ( | )  
and refer to “(2) Removal procedures” to remove the jammed paper.  
Inch specification  
Metric specification  
Paper misfeed. Careful for Drum.  
Paper misfeed. Careful for Drum.  
1. Open left cover1.  
2. Remove paper.  
3. Close cover.  
1. Open left cover1.  
2. Remove paper.  
3. Close cover.  
JAM 30  
JAM 30  
(1) Cautions  
(2) Removal procedures  
1Misfeed in paper feed section  
•
Misfeed in drawer[cassette] (JAM 10 to 13, 15 to 17)  
WARNING  
If the message below appears, a misfeed has occurred in the  
drawer[cassette] (or optional Paper Feeder). Remove the misfed  
paper using the procedure given below.  
High voltage is present in the charger section. Take  
sufficient care when working in this area, as there is  
a danger of electrical shock.  
Inch specifications  
Paper misfeed.  
1. Open cassette1.  
2. Remove paper.  
3. Set cassette.  
CAUTION  
The copier’s fixing unit is extremely hot. Take  
sufficient care when working in this area, as there is  
a danger of getting burned.  
JAM 10  
Metric specifications  
Paper misfeed.  
• Do not reuse misfed paper.  
1. Open cassette1.  
2. Remove paper.  
3. Set cassette.  
• If paper is torn during removal, be sure to remove all loose scraps  
from inside the copier, or they could cause misfeed later.  
• After misfed paper has been removed, warm-up will begin. The  
Misfeed indicator will turn off and the copier will return to the same  
settings prior to the misfeed.  
JAM 10  
Open the drawer[cassette].  
1
9-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 9 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Remove the misfed paper while taking care not to tear it.  
* If the paper should be torn, remove all the scraps from the  
inside the copier.  
Remove the misfed paper.  
2
2
3
4
Raise the duplex unit to remove the misfed paper.  
Close the drawer[cassette] slowly.  
3
•
Misfeed in left cover 1 (JAM 30, 40 to 44, 46, 47, 50 to 53, 60,  
61)  
If the message below appears, a misfeed has occurred in the left  
cover 1. Remove the misfed paper using the procedure given below.  
Inch specifications  
Paper misfeed. Careful for Drum.  
1. Open left cover1.  
2. Remove paper.  
3. Close cover.  
Remove the misfed paper in the output section.  
JAM 30  
Metric specifications  
Paper misfeed. Careful for Drum.  
1. Open left cover1.  
2. Remove paper.  
3. Close cover.  
JAM 30  
NOTE  
The drum area inside the copier is extremely sensitive to dirt and  
damage. When removing the jammed paper, be sure not to touch the  
drum area that is located inside the machine with your hands, or with  
jewelry such as watches and rings, etc.  
CAUTION  
The copier’s fixing unit is extremely hot. Take  
sufficient care when working in this area, as there is  
a danger of getting burned.  
Pull up the left cover 1 handle to open the left cover 1.  
1
Close the left cover 1.  
5
9-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 9 TROUBLESHOOTING  
•
Misfeed in left cover 1 (JAM 05)  
Raise the duplex unit to remove the misfed paper.  
3
4
If the message below appears, a misfeed has occurred in the left  
cover 1. Remove the misfed paper using the procedure given below.  
Inch specifications  
Paper misfeed. Careful for Drum.  
1. Open left cover1.  
2. Remove paper.  
3. Close cover.  
JAM 05  
Metric specifications  
Paper misfeed. Careful for Drum.  
Remove the misfed paper in the output section.  
1. Open left cover1.  
2. Remove paper.  
3. Close cover.  
JAM 05  
NOTE  
The drum area inside the copier is extremely sensitive to dirt and  
damage. When removing the jammed paper, be sure not to touch the  
drum area that is located inside the machine with your hands, or with  
jewelry such as watches and rings, etc.  
CAUTION  
Pull up the left cover 1 handle to open the left cover 1.  
1
The copier’s fixing unit is extremely hot. Take  
sufficient care when working in this area, as there is  
a danger of getting burned.  
Close the left cover 1.  
5
Remove the misfed paper.  
2
9-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 9 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Press the [Start] key after the “Press Start Key. Re-starting.”  
message appears.  
If the message below appears, proceed to the next step.  
When the optional Fax Kit is installed, the message below  
appears. Perform the appropriate action by following the  
message.  
6
9
Inch specifications  
Inch specifications  
System error.  
Disconnect power plug from the socket.  
Paper misfeed. Careful for Drum.  
1. Open left cover1.  
2. Remove paper.  
3. Close cover.  
11x81  
Plain  
/2"  
81  
/2x11"  
APS  
Bypass  
11x81  
1-Sided  
Sort  
/2"  
Color  
11x81  
Plain  
/
2
"
"
Plain  
11x81  
/
2
Recycled  
JAM 05  
Metric specifications  
Metric specifications  
System error.  
Disconnect power plug from the socket.  
Paper misfeed. Careful for Drum.  
1. Open left cover1.  
2. Remove paper.  
3. Close cover.  
Plain  
APS  
Colour  
Bypass  
Plain  
1-Sided  
Sort  
Plain  
Recycled  
JAM 05  
Repeat the steps 1 to 5.  
•
Misfeed in left cover 2 (JAM 18, 22)  
7
8
If the message below appears, a misfeed has occurred in the left  
cover 2. Remove the misfed paper using the procedure given below.  
The message below appears. Perform the appropriate action  
by following the message.  
Inch specifications  
Inch specifications  
Paper misfeed.  
System error.  
Main switch off / on.  
1. Open left cover2.  
2. Remove paper.  
3. Close cover.  
11x81  
Plain  
/2"  
81  
/2x11"  
APS  
Bypass  
11x81  
1-Sided  
/2"  
Color  
11x81  
Plain  
/
2
"
"
Plain  
Sort  
JAM 18  
11x81  
/
2
Recycled  
Metric specifications  
Metric specifications  
Paper misfeed.  
System error.  
Main switch off / on.  
1. Open left cover 2.  
2. Remove paper.  
3. Close cover.  
Plain  
APS  
Colour  
Bypass  
Plain  
1-Sided  
Sort  
Plain  
JAM 18  
Recycled  
Open the left cover 2.  
1
9-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 9 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Remove the misfed paper.  
Pull up the lever to remove the misfed paper.  
If the misfed paper cannot be removed, go to the next step.  
2
2
Close the left cover 2.  
3
Pull up the left cover 1 handle to open the left cover 1.  
3
4
•
Misfeed in multi-bypass tray (JAM14, 20, 21, 23)  
If the message below appears, a misfeed has occurred in the multi-  
bypass tray.  
Remove the misfed paper using the procedure given below.  
Inch specifications  
Paper misfeed.  
1. Remove paper in bypass.  
2. Open left cover1.  
3. Remove paper.  
4. Open front cover if you can not remove paper.  
5. Turn right the green knob.  
6. Remove paper.  
7. Close the cover.  
Remove the misfed paper.  
Metric specifications  
Paper misfeed.  
1. Remove paper in bypass.  
2. Open left cover 1.  
3. Remove paper.  
4. Open front cover if you can not remove paper.  
5. Turn green knob clockwise.  
6. Remove paper.  
7. Close cover.  
Remove all the paper remaining in the multi-bypass tray.  
1
Raise the duplex unit to remove the misfed paper.  
If the misfed paper cannot be removed, go to the next step.  
5
9-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 9 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Open the front cover.  
Open the internal tray cover to remove the misfed paper.  
6
7
10  
11  
12  
13  
Turn the knob clockwise to release the misfed paper from the  
internal tray section.  
If the paper has been torn, remove the internal tray.  
Remove the misfed paper.  
Remove the misfed paper.  
If the misfed paper cannot be removed, go to the next step.  
8
9
Replace the internal tray in its original position.  
Close the front cover.  
Pull out the internal tray.  
9-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 9 TROUBLESHOOTING  
2Misfeed in Document Processor (optional) (JAM 70 to 76)  
If the misfed original is found, remove it.  
* If paper is torn during removal, be sure to remove all loose  
scraps from inside the copier, or they could cause misfeed  
later.  
3
If the message below appears, a misfeed has occurred in the  
Document Processor. Remove the misfed original using the procedure  
given below.  
Inch specifications  
Paper misfeed.  
1. Open the document processor.  
2. Raise the reverse unit up.  
3. Turn the left dial.  
4. Remove original(s).  
5. Close Document processor.  
JAM 73  
Metric specifications  
Paper misfeed.  
1. Open document processor.  
2. Raise reverse unit up.  
3. Turn dial left.  
4. Remove original (s).  
5. Close Document processor.  
Raise the reversing unit.  
4
5
If the misfed original is found, remove it.  
* If paper is torn during removal, be sure to remove all loose  
scraps from inside the copier, or they could cause misfeed  
later.  
JAM 73  
If the original is on the original table, remove it.  
1
Turn the left knob to eject and remove the misfed original.  
6
7
Open the Document Processor original cover.  
2
Close the Document Processor original cover.  
9-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 9 TROUBLESHOOTING  
3Misfeed in Built-in Finisher (optional) (JAM 80 to 84)  
Remove the misfed paper.  
3
4
5
6
If the message below appears, a misfeed has occurred in the Built-in  
Finisher. Remove the misfed paper using the procedure below.  
Inch specifications  
Paper misfeed.  
1. Remove any paper in output part of Finisher  
2. Pull the tray of finisher down.  
3. Remove the paper if there is a paper.  
4. Set the tray  
JAM 84  
Paper misfeed. Careful for Drum.  
1. Lower inner tray of finisher.  
2. Remove the paper.  
3. Remove the eject tray, open left cover of machine.  
4. Remove the paper.  
Raise the Built-in Finisher tray back into its original position.  
5. Close cover and set the tray.  
JAM 83  
Metric specifications  
Paper misfeed.  
1. Remove any paper in output part of Finisher.  
2. Put Finisher tray down.  
3. Remove any paper.  
4. Set tray back.  
JAM 84  
Remove the tray.  
Paper misfeed. Careful for Drum.  
1. Put inner tray of Finisher down.  
2. Remove any paper.  
3. Remove output tray, open left cover of machine.  
4. Remove paper.  
5. Close cover and set tray.  
3
JAM 83  
1
NOTE  
2
The drum area inside the copier is extremely sensitive to dirt and  
damage. When removing the jammed paper, be sure not to touch the  
drum area that is located inside the machine with your hands, or with  
jewelry such as watches and rings, etc.  
Pull up the left cover 1 handle to open the left cover 1.  
Remove the misfed paper in the Built-in Finisher output  
section.  
1
Lower the Built-in Finisher tray.  
2
9-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 9 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Remove the misfed paper.  
7
Install the tray.  
8
Close the left cover 1.  
9
4Misfed in Document Finisher (optional) (JAM 80 to 89)  
If a misfeed has occurred in the Document Finisher, remove the  
misfed paper referring to the Operation Guide for the Document  
Finisher.  
9-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 9 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4. If other trouble occurs  
If trouble occurs with your copier, carry out the applicable checkpoints and procedures indicated on the following pages.  
If the trouble persists, contact your service representative or authorized service center.  
Trouble  
Checkpoint  
Procedure  
Reference  
page  
Nothing lights on the  
operation panel when the  
power switch is turned ON.  
Is the power plug connected to an AC  
outlet?  
Connect the plug to an AC outlet.  
——  
No copies come out when  
the [Start] key is pressed.  
Is there any message appearing on the  
message display?  
Perform the corrective action corresponding  
to the message.  
9-1  
4-1  
-
Copies come out blank.  
Are the originals set correctly?  
When setting originals on the platen, place  
them face-down.  
When setting originals in the optional  
8-2  
Document Processor, place them face-up.  
Copies come out too light.  
Is the copier in the auto exposure  
mode?  
To change the overall exposure, perform the  
auto exposure adjustment.  
7-73  
4-2  
Is the copier in the manual exposure mode?  
Adjust the exposure to the correct degree  
using the copy exposure adjustment keys.  
To change the overall exposure, perform the  
exposure adjustment for the each copy  
quality mode.  
7-75  
7-76  
7-77  
Is the add toner message displayed?  
Is paper wet?  
Replace the toner container.  
10-3  
3-1  
Replace the paper with new paper.  
9-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 9 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Trouble  
Checkpoint  
Procedure  
Reference  
page  
Copies come out too dark.  
Is the copier in the auto exposure mode?  
Is the copier in the manual exposure mode?  
To change the overall exposure, perform the  
auto exposure adjustment.  
7-73  
Adjust the exposure to the correct degree  
using the copy exposure adjustment keys.  
4-2  
To change the overall exposure, perform the  
exposure adjustment for the each copy  
quality mode.  
7-75  
7-76  
7-77  
Copies are dirty.  
Is the platen or the original cover dirty?  
Clean the platen and/or the original cover.  
10-1  
10-5  
Open the front cover and pull and push back  
in the cleaning shaft.  
Is the transfer roller contaminated?  
Are the originals set correctly?  
Clean the transfer roller with the cleaning  
brush.  
10-2  
4-1  
Copy image is askew.  
Misfeed occurs frequently.  
Copies are wrinkled.  
When setting originals on the platen, align  
their edges with the correct original size  
scale for their size.  
When setting originals in the optional  
Document Processor, adjust the original  
insertion guides to the size of the originals  
correctly.  
8-2  
3-1  
Is the paper set correctly in the  
drawer[cassette]?  
Set paper properly.  
Is paper curled, folded or wrinkled?  
Replace the paper with new paper.  
3-1  
9-4  
Is there any misfed paper or loose scraps of  
paper remaining inside the copier?  
Carry out the appropriate procedure to  
remove the paper.  
Is the separation in the paper feed section  
dirty?  
Clean the separator.  
10-1  
10-5  
Black or white lines appear  
on the copy.  
Is the electrostatic section dirty?  
Open the front cover and pull and push back  
in the cleaning shaft.  
9-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 10 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION  
INFORMATION  
1. Cleaning the copier  
NOTE  
When the slit glass becomes dirty, “Clean the slit glass for original fed  
CAUTION  
from DP.” [“Clean the slit glass for original fed.”] may appear. In this  
case, perform the cleaning operation on the slit glass and then touch  
the “End” key.  
For safety purposes, ALWAYS remove the power  
plug from the outlet when performing cleaning  
operations.  
Inch specifications  
Clean the slit glass for original fed from DP.  
● Cleaning the original cover  
Open the document processor.  
Clean the surface of narrower glass  
located at left with a dry cloth.  
Please close the document processor.  
Press END key  
Lift open the original cover. Wipe the back side of the original cover  
with a soft cloth dampened with alcohol or a mild detergent.  
* Never use thinner or other organic solvents for this purpose.  
If the slit glass is dirty, black line  
will appear on the copy.  
End  
Metric specifications  
Clean the slit glass for original fed.  
Open the document processor.  
Clean the surface of narrower glass  
located at left with a dry cloth.  
Please close the document processor.  
Press END key  
If the slit glass is dirty, black line  
will appear on the copy.  
End  
● Cleaning the platen  
Lift open the original cover. Wipe the platen with a soft cloth  
dampened with alcohol or a mild detergent.  
● Cleaning the separator  
* Never use thinner or other organic solvents for this purpose.  
NOTE  
To keep the best copying quality, perform cleaning periodically  
(approximately once a month) using the following procedure.  
Open the front cover.  
1
* If soiling, such as black lines appear on the copy while using the  
optional Document Processor, the slit glass a is soiled.  
Wipe the slit glass with a soft dry cloth.  
* Never use water, thinner, organic solvents or alcohol.  
a
10-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 10 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION INFORMATION  
Remove the blue cleaning brush.  
● Cleaning the transfer roller  
2
3
4
Open the front cover.  
1
2
3
4
Pull up the left cover 1 handle to open the left cover 1.  
Remove the blue cleaning brush.  
Clean the separator by moving the cleaning brush from left  
and right several times along the separator as shown in the  
illustration.  
Pull up the left cover 1 handle to open the left cover 1.  
While rotating the gear as shown, clean the transfer roller by  
moving the cleaning brush from left to right along with the  
transfer roller.  
Once the cleaning operation is completed, return the  
cleaning brush to the copier and close both the left cover 1  
and the front cover.  
5
Once the cleaning operation is completed, return the  
cleaning brush to the copier and close both the left cover 1  
and the front cover.  
5
10-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 10 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION INFORMATION  
2. Replacing the toner container and waste toner box  
If “Add toner to resume copying.” appears on the message display,  
replenish the toner. Although several copies can be made after the  
message appears, it is recommended that you replace the toner  
container immediately. After replacing the toner container, be sure to  
also replace the waste toner box.  
Push up the toner container release lever and slowly pull the  
old toner container out until the handle can be seen.  
2
Also be sure to clean the related parts when you replace a toner  
container. Dirty parts can cause lower performance by your copier.  
IMPORTANT!  
• Replenish toner only when the message is displayed.  
• When replacing a toner container, do not leave any items such as  
floppy disks, etc., nearby.  
Inch specifications  
Set  
Paper Size  
11x81/2  
WARNING  
Ready to copy.  
"
Add toner to resume copying.  
Combine  
11x81  
Plain  
/2"  
High voltage is present in the charger section. Take  
sufficient care when working in this area, as there is  
a danger of electrical shock.  
Orig.image  
quality  
81  
/2x11"  
Sort:Off  
AMS  
APS  
Bypass  
Color  
Reduce  
/Enlarge  
11x81  
Plain  
/
2
"
"
Auto  
Exposure  
Sort:On  
Plain  
11x81  
/
2
Sort/  
Exposure  
mode  
Reduce  
/Enlarge  
Recycled  
Finished  
Adding  
toner  
Basic  
User choice  
Function  
Program  
Metric specifications  
CAUTION  
Set  
Paper Size  
Ready to copy.  
Add toner to resume copying.  
Merge copy  
Do not pull the toner container all the way as it can  
fall off.  
Plain  
Image  
quality  
Sort:Off  
Sort:On  
AMS  
APS  
Colour  
Reduce/  
Enlarge  
Auto  
Exposure  
Bypass  
Plain  
Plain  
Sort/  
Finished  
Exposure  
mode  
Reduce/  
Enlarge  
Recycled  
Adding  
toner  
Grasp the handle on the toner container, push the left cover  
1 handle up again and gently lift the toner container.  
Basic  
User choice  
Function  
Program  
3
CAUTION  
DO NOT attempt to incinerate the toner container or  
the waste toner box. Dangerous sparks may cause  
burns.  
CAUTION  
DO NOT attempt to force open or destroy the toner  
container or the waste toner box.  
Open the front cover.  
1
10-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 10 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION INFORMATION  
Take out the new toner container from the bag, and then tap  
it on the top 5 to 6 times.  
Remove the waste toner box.  
4
5
6
7
8
Close the opening of the waste toner box with its seal.  
9
Thoroughly shake the toner container (in the direction of the  
arrow) ten times or more to loosen and mix the toner inside.  
CAUTION  
Grasp the handle on the toner container and insert the toner  
container along the rail of the copier.  
DO NOT attempt to incinerate the toner container or  
the waste toner box. Dangerous sparks may cause  
burns.  
CAUTION  
DO NOT attempt to force open or destroy the toner  
container or the waste toner box.  
Hold the toner container by hands and fully insert it into the  
copier.  
10-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 10 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION INFORMATION  
<Cleaning the related parts>  
Pull the electrostatic section out as far as it will go and then  
push it back into the copier to a point just BEFORE the roller  
A touches the white pad of the grid cleaner.  
Repeat this step a few times.  
13  
Push the electrostatic section (with the blue handle) to the  
10  
right and then pull it out about 2 inches (5 cm).  
Remove the cap from the grid cleaner.  
11  
12  
IMPORTANT!  
DO NOT push the electrostatic section all the way back into the copier  
in this step as that may result in problems appearing in the printed  
images.  
With the electrostatic section pulled out about 2 inches  
(5 cm), remove the grid cleaner and then push the  
electrostatic section all the way back into the copier.  
14  
Attach the grid cleaner to the machine body aligning with the  
notches.  
Fit the new waste toner box into the copier.  
15  
10-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 10 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION INFORMATION  
Gently pull out the cleaning shaft (with the green handle) as  
far as it will go and then push it back into the copier.  
Repeat this step a few times.  
Clean the separator by moving the cleaning brush from left  
and right several times along the separator as shown in the  
illustration.  
16  
19  
2
1
IMPORTANT!  
Do not pull the cleaning shaft with force or pull it out completely.  
Once the cleaning operation is completed, return the  
cleaning brush to the copier and close both the left cover 1  
and the front cover.  
20  
Remove the blue cleaning brush.  
17  
IMPORTANT!  
Wait about 5 minutes after the cleaning operation is completed for the  
electrostatic section to dry before attempting to start copying again.  
NOTE  
To keep the best copying quality, perform cleaning of steps 15 and 18  
described above periodically (approximately once a month) in addition  
to the time of toner container replacement.  
Pull up the left cover 1 handle to open the left cover 1.  
18  
● After use, ALWAYS dispose of the toner container  
and the waste toner box in accordance with  
Federal, State and Local rules and regulations.  
10-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 10 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION INFORMATION  
3. Specifications  
Type ............................................................................... Desk-top  
Original table .................................................................. Fixed type  
Copying system.............................................................. Indirect electrostatic  
Originals ......................................................................... Sheets, books and 3-dimensional objects (Maximum original size: 11" x 17"/A3)  
Copy sizes...................................................................... Drawers[Cassettes]: 11" x 17" / A3, 8 1/2" x 14" / B4 (257 mm x 364 mm), 11" x 8 1/2" / A4,  
8 1/2" x 11" / A4R, 5 1/2" x 8 1/2" / A5R, 8 1/2" x 13", Folio, 8K and 16K,  
B5, and B5R (Asia Pacific specification copiers)  
Multi-bypass tray: 11" x 17" / A3, 8 1/2" x 14" / B4 (257 mm x 364 mm), 11" x 8 1/2" / A4,  
8 1/2" x 11" / A4R, 5 1/2" x 8 1/2" / A5R, A6R, 8 1/2" x 13", Folio, 8K and 16K,  
B5, and B5R (Asia Pacific specification copiers)  
For 2-sided copying: 11" x 17" / A3 – 5 1/2" x 8 1/2" / A5R  
Print margin loss: 0.5 mm – 5.5 mm  
Copying speed ............................................................... 30 cpm copiers: Same-size copying/memory copying;  
11" x 17"/A3: 20 copies/min., 8 1/2" x 14"/B4: 20 copies/min., 11" x 8 1/2"/A4: 30 copies/min.,  
8 1/2" x 11"/A4R: 22 copies/min., B5: 30 copies/min., B5R: 18 copies/min.  
40 cpm copiers: Same-size copying/memory copying;  
11” x 17”/A3: 23 copies/min., 8 1/2" x 14"/B4: 23 copies/min., 11" x 8 1/2"/A4: 40 copies/min.,  
8 1/2" x 11"/A4R: 27 copies/min., B5: 40 copies/min., B5R: 22 copies/min.  
50 cpm copiers: Same-size copying/memory copying;  
11” x 17”/A3: 26 copies/min., 8 1/2" x 14"/B4: 26 copies/min., 11" x 8 1/2"/A4: 50 copies/min.,  
8 1/2" x 11"/A4R: 31 copies/min., B5: 50 copies/min., B5R: 24 copies/min.  
Warm-up time................................................................. Within 25 seconds (at room temperature of 73.4°F (23°C), humidity 50%RH)  
From Low power mode: Within 12 seconds  
First copy time ................................................................ 30 cpm copiers: From 3.9 seconds (11" x 8 1/2"/A4)  
40 cpm copiers, 50 cpm copiers: From 3.5 seconds (11" x 8 1/2"/A4)  
Zoom ratio ...................................................................... Any ratio between 25 and 400% (in increments of 1%). Alternatively, standard ratios.  
Standard amount of memory ......................................... 64 MB  
Resolution ...................................................................... Reading: 600 x 600 dpi  
Writing: 600 x 600 dpi  
Paper feed system ......................................................... Automatic feeding from drawers[cassettes] (2 drawers[cassettes], capacity 500 sheets each  
[80 g/m2/standard paper specified by our company]), automatic feeding from multi-bypass  
(capacity 200 sheets [80g/m2])  
Copy paper..................................................................... <Paper weights>  
Drawers[Cassettes]: 60 g/m2 – 105 g/m2  
Duplex Unit: 64 g/m2 – 80 g/m2  
Multi-bypass tray: 45 g/m2 – 200 g/m2; 110 lbs.  
<Paper types>  
Drawers[Cassettes]: Standard copy paper and color paper  
Duplex Unit: Standard copy paper and color paper  
Multi-bypass tray: Standard copy paper, letterhead, color paper, tracing paper,  
OHP transparencies, envelopes, etc.  
Continuous copying........................................................ 1 – 999 sheets  
Light source ................................................................... Rare gas lamp  
Developing system ......................................................... Dry process  
Fixing system ................................................................. Heat roller  
Cleaning system ............................................................ Blade and cleaning roller  
Photoconductor .............................................................. a-Si  
Standard functions and modes ...................................... Auto paper selection mode, Image quality selection, Auto magnification selection mode,  
Zoom mode, Preset zoom mode, XY zoom mode, 2-sided copy modes, Page separation/  
Split copy modes, Margin mode, Centering/Image shift mode, Memo mode, Border erase  
modes, Combine/Merge Copy modes, Print page numbers mode, Form overlay mode,  
Booklet/Stitching mode, Book to Booklet mode, Sort/Finished mode, Auto rotation function,  
Cover mode, Transparency + backing sheet mode, Invert mode, Mirror image mode, Proof  
mode, Repeat copy mode*, Batch scanning mode, Eco print mode, Program function, Job  
build mode, Form registration*, Shared data box*, Synergy print boxes*, Copy management  
mode, Language selection function  
* Requires the optional Hard Disk  
10-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 10 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION INFORMATION  
Power source ................................................................. Inch specifications: 120 V AC, 60 Hz, 12 A Max.  
Metric specifications: 220-240 V AC, 50 or 60 Hz, 6.5 A Max.  
Dimensions .................................................................... 23"(W) x 25 2/5"(D) x 29 1/3"(H)  
585 mm (W) x 646 mm (D) x 745 mm (H)  
Weight ............................................................................ Approx. 165 lbs.  
Approx. 82 kg  
<
Noise emission............................................................... 70dB (A)  
=
Required space .............................................................. 23"(W) x 25 2/5"(D)  
585 mm (W) x 646 mm (D)  
Optional equipment ........................................................ Document Processor, Paper Feeder, Document Finisher, Bult-in Finisher, Job Separator,  
Hard Disk, Key Counter, Document Tray, Printer Kit, Printer/Scanner Kit, Fax Kit  
(Specifications are subject to change without notice.)  
10-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 10 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION INFORMATION  
4. Environmental Specifications  
● Power consumption  
30 cpm copiers  
40 cpm copiers  
50 cpm copiers  
Inch  
Metric  
Inch  
Metric  
Inch  
Metric  
specifications  
670 wh or less  
175 wh or less  
75 wh or less  
specifications  
specifications  
685 wh or less  
175 wh or less  
75 wh or less  
specifications  
specifications  
720 wh or less  
175 wh or less  
75 wh or less  
specifications  
• During copying  
670 wh or less  
200 wh or less  
75 wh or less  
685 wh or less  
200 wh or less  
75 wh or less  
760 wh or less  
200 wh or less  
75 wh or less  
• During standby  
• During the Low Power mode  
• Recovery time from the Low Power  
mode  
12 seconds or  
less  
12 seconds or  
less  
12 seconds or  
less  
12 seconds or  
less  
12 seconds or  
less  
12 seconds or  
less  
• During the Off and Sleep mode  
0.1 wh or less  
15 minutes  
0.1 wh or less  
15 minutes  
0.1 wh or less  
15 minutes  
0.1 wh or less  
15 minutes  
0.1 wh or less  
15 minutes  
0.1 wh or less  
15 minutes  
• Transition time to the Low Power  
mode (at time of purchase)  
• Transition time to the Off and Sleep  
modes (at time of purchase)  
60 minutes  
60 minutes  
60 minutes  
60 minutes  
60 minutes  
60 minutes  
• During the Plugged-In mode  
0.1 wh or less  
0.1 wh or less  
0.1 wh or less  
0.1 wh or less  
0.1 wh or less  
0.1 wh or less  
* Power consumption in the Plugged-In mode can only be terminated by removing the power plug from the outlet.  
● Duplex (2-sided) copying  
• Comes as standard equipment  
● Paper feed  
• Recycled paper made from 100% recycled pulp may be used with this product.  
* Contact your sales or service representative for information on recommended paper types, etc.  
10-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 10 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION INFORMATION  
5. Installing the optional equipment  
This section shows where to install the optional units for this copier. For more details, refer to the Operation Guide for the corresponding optional  
unit.  
● Available optional units  
The following optional units can be installed on your copier.  
Document  
Processor  
Original Cover  
Key Counter  
Document Tray  
Printer/Scanner Kit  
Printer Kit  
Hard Disk  
Fax Kit  
Document  
Finisher  
Paper Feeder  
Document  
Finisher  
Document  
Finisher  
Paper Feeder  
Built-in Finisher  
Job Separator  
10-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 10 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION INFORMATION  
Document Processor  
The Duplex Document Processor automatically feeds one-sided originals one by one for scanning. It also reverses two-sided originals automatically  
for duplex copying and page separation copying.  
Paper Feeder  
Two Paper Feeders of the same type as drawer[cassette] in the main body can be added.  
Capacity and the paper loading method is the same as those for the standard drawer[cassette] in the main unit.  
Paper Feeder  
The Paper Feeder holds up to 3,000 sheets of 11" x 8 1/2" [A4 or B5 (B5 is for Asia-Pacific specification copiers only)] size standard paper.  
Pull the Paper Feeder out towards you as far as it will go, and then load up to 1,500 sheets of paper in each rows.  
Document Finisher  
This unit lets you store a large volume of copies and shifts the position of each copy set for ease of sorting. It can staple finished copy sets and bind  
them. It is also possible to use the Document Finisher to punch holes in them for filling purposes (optional).  
Document Finisher  
The Document Finisher stores a large quantity copies, and sorts multiple sets by shifting the position that each one is ejected. It is also possible to  
use the Document Finisher to staple the copy sets or punch holes in them for filling purposes.  
Document Finisher  
The Document Finisher stores a large quantity copies, and sorts multiple sets (Sort: ON) or groups copies made from multiple originals, with all the  
copies produced from an individual original grouped together in one set (Sort: OFF). It is also possible to use the Document Finisher to staple sorted  
copy sets.  
Built-in Finisher  
The finisher stores a large quantity of copies. It can also sorts multiple copies into sets by shifting the eject position. Paginated copies can be  
stapled, too.  
Job Separator  
When using the optional printer function, the paper eject point can be changed according to the used function, making it easier to sort paper. Copied  
-paper can be ejected to the Job Separator (upper section). See “Copy eject location” in Machine default setting on page 7-49.  
Hard Disk  
The Hard Disk is required in order to use the following modes and functions of your copier.  
• Job reservation  
• Form overlay of registered forms  
• Repeat copying  
• Document management functions  
• Using the output management functions to change the job printing order, cancel and delete print jobs, and verify content  
It is also possible to register up to 1000 department ID-codes under document management.  
Key Counter  
The Key Counter determines the number of copies that have been made. It is useful for copier centralized management on a department or even  
company level.  
Document Tray  
The Document Tray lets you place originals and other documents next to the machine before using them, etc. It also contains space for storing  
paper clips, etc.  
Printer Kit  
If the Printer Kit is installed, this copier can be used as a printer.  
Since the network board is equipped, this copier can also be used as a network printer, allowing access from multiple computers.  
Printer/Scanner Kit  
If the Printer/Scanner Kit is installed, this copier can be used as a printer or a network scanner.  
Since the network board is equipped, this copier can also be used as a network printer, allowing access from multiple computers.  
Fax Kit  
If the Fax Kit is installed, this copier can be used as a fax. Also if the Fax Kit is used together with the optional Printer/Scanner Kit, this copier can be  
used as a network fax, allowing transmission and reception by a computer.  
10-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix: Functions and settings combination chart  
This copier contains many different functions and settings, and many of them can be used in combination for more efficient copying.  
Refer to the following chart for details on combining specific functions and settings.  
:Combination is possible  
---: Combination is NOT possible  
01:Auto exposure adjustment is not available for the photo 07:The border erase modes and the auto selection/filing  
06:The border erase modes cannot be used in  
combination with original size selection (input size).  
11:The transparency + backing sheet mode and the 2-  
sided copy modes cannot be used in combination with  
each other.  
mode. The text&photo mode, the text mode, or manual  
exposure adjustment will be selected.  
02:Only the auto magnification selection mode is available.  
That mode will be selected.  
03:Only same size (100% [1:1]) copying in the auto paper  
selection mode is available. That mode will be selected. 10:The booklet/stitching mode and book to booklet mode  
mode cannot be used in combination with each other.  
08:The book erase mode and the booklet/stitching mode  
cannot be used in combination with each other.  
09:Not available because open-faced originals must be set  
with the top edge towards the rear of the platen.  
12:Cannot be used in combination with the auto selection/  
filing mode.  
13:The 2-sided copy modes and the invert mode cannot  
be used in combination with each other.  
14:Open-faced originals cannot be used in combination  
with original size selection.  
04:The margin mode cannot be used in combination with  
the booklet/stitching mode or the book to booklet mode.  
05:The margin mode cannot be used in combination with  
the combine/merge copy modes or the memo mode.  
will be given second priority when the 2-sided copy  
modes or the page separation/split copy modes are  
selected.  
15:The book g page separation/split copy mode cannot be  
used in combination with the combine/merge copy  
modes or the memo mode.  
Function selected second  
Function selected first  
1 Image quality mode (text&photo)  
2 Image quality mode (photo)  
3 Image quality mode (text)  
4 Copy exposure mode (auto exposure)  
5 Copy exposure mode (manual exposure)  
6 Eco print mode  
01  
01  
7 Original size selection (standard size)  
8 Original size selection (input size)  
9 Original size selection (auto selection)  
0 Original size selection (custom original size)  
! Same size (100% [1:1]) copying  
@ XY zoom mode  
12 12  
12 12  
12 12  
03 02  
03 02  
03  
# Auto magnification selection mode  
$ Zoom mode  
03 02  
31  
% Paper selection  
^ Original set direction  
& Batch scanning mode  
27  
* Auto rotation function  
( Auto selection/filing mode (auto selection)  
) Auto selection/filing mode (filing)  
⁄ Proof mode  
12 12  
12 12  
12 03 03 03 03 12  
12 02 02  
02  
33  
¤ Repeat copy mode (settings)  
‹ Sort mode  
› Finished mode  
fi Staple mode  
12  
fl Punch mode  
‡ 2-sided copy modes (1 sidedR1 sided)  
— 2-sided copy modes (1 sidedR2 sided)  
· 2-sided copy modes (2 sidedR2 sided)  
‚ 2-sided copy modes (BookR2 sided)  
Œ Page separation/Split copy modes (2 sidedR1 sided)  
„ Page separation/Split copy modes (BookR1 sided)  
´ Booklet/Stitching mode  
12  
14 14  
14  
14  
09  
09  
09  
12 12  
14 14  
20  
12 12  
12 12  
12 12  
20  
02  
‰ Book to Booklet mode  
20  
20 02 02  
02  
ˇ Margin mode  
Á Centering/Image shift mode  
¨ Border erase modes (Sheet erase)  
ˆ Border erase modes (Individual border erase)  
Ø Border erase modes (Book erase)  
∏ Combine/Merge Copy modes  
Å Memo mode  
06  
06  
06  
32  
32  
06  
06  
06  
07 07  
07 07  
07 07  
12 12  
12 12  
12 12  
12 12  
12 12  
12 12  
09  
32  
32  
02  
02  
Í Form overlay mode  
35  
Î Cover mode  
24  
29  
24  
29  
Ï Transparency + backing sheet mode  
˝ Print page numbers mode  
Ó Invert mode  
30  
Ô Mirror image mode  
Interrupt copying  
Ò Document management functions (form registration)  
Ú
¸
˛
Ç
Document management functions (shared data box [storing documents])  
Document management functions (synergy print boxes [storing documents])  
Document management functions (shared data box [printing out documents])  
Document management functions (synergy print boxes [printing out documents])  
◊ Output management functions (interrupt print)  
ı Repeat copy mode (print out)  
˜ Job build mode (Step 1)  
 Job build mode (from step 2)  
¯ Scanner functions (Scan to PC)  
˘ Scanner functions (Send E-mail)  
¿ Scanner functions (TWAIN)  
¡ Scanner functions (Database connection)  
10-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix: Functions and settings combination chart  
16:The book g page separation/split copy mode and the  
transparency + backing sheet mode cannot be used in  
combination with each other.  
23:The booklet/stitching and book to booklet modes  
cannot be used in combination with the combine/merge  
copy modes or the memo mode.  
30:The transparency + backing sheet mode cannot be  
used in combination with the sort/finished mode, the  
staple mode or the punch mode.  
17:The print page numbers mode is only available in the  
auto magnification selection mode.  
18:Because a cover can be selected within the booklet/  
stitching and book to booklet modes, they cannot be  
used in combination with the cover mode.  
19:The transparency + backing sheet mode and the cover  
mode cannot be used in combination with each other.  
20:The booklet/stitching and book to booklet modes  
cannot be used in combination with original size  
selection (input size).  
21:The function selected second will be given priority and  
original size selection (auto selection) will engage.  
22:Cannot be used in combination with the punch mode.  
24:The cover mode cannot be used in combination with  
original size selection (input size).  
25:The cover mode cannot be used in combination with  
the combine/merge copy modes or the memo mode.  
26:The cover mode and the invert mode cannot be used in  
combination with each other.  
31:The selected paper setting will be canceled in order to  
switch to the auto paper selection mode.  
32:The combine/merge copy modes and the memo mode  
cannot be used in combination with original size  
selection (input size).  
33:Cannot be used in combination with the batch scanning  
mode.  
34:Cannot be used in combination with interrupt copying.  
35:Not available in combination with the form overlay  
mode.  
27:The function selected second will be given priority and  
the function selected first will be canceled.  
28:The transparency + backing sheet mode and the invert  
mode cannot be used in combination with each other.  
29:The transparency + backing sheet mode cannot be  
used in combination with original size selection (input  
size).  
™:Image quality (OCR)  
Function selected second  
Function selected first  
1 Image quality mode (text&photo)  
2 Image quality mode (photo)  
3 Image quality mode (text)  
4 Copy exposure mode (auto exposure)  
5 Copy exposure mode (manual exposure)  
6 Eco print mode  
7 Original size selection (standard size)  
8 Original size selection (input size)  
9 Original size selection (auto selection)  
0 Original size selection (custom original size)  
! Same size (100% [1:1]) copying  
@ XY zoom mode  
14  
14  
14  
14 21 21  
06 06 06 32 32  
06 06 06 32 32  
02 02  
24 29  
24 29  
14  
14 21 21  
02  
02 02  
# Auto magnification selection mode  
$ Zoom mode  
02  
% Paper selection  
^ Original set direction  
09  
09  
09  
09  
& Batch scanning mode  
* Auto rotation function  
( Auto selection/filing mode (auto selection)  
) Auto selection/filing mode (filing)  
⁄ Proof mode  
12  
12  
12  
12  
12 12 12  
12 12 12  
07 07 07 12 12 12 12 12 12  
07 07 07 12 12 12 12 12  
34  
¤ Repeat copy mode (settings)  
‹ Sort mode  
35  
› Finished mode  
27  
27  
27  
fi Staple mode  
fl Punch mode  
22 22  
‡ 2-sided copy modes (1 sidedR1 sided)  
— 2-sided copy modes (1 sidedR2 sided)  
· 2-sided copy modes (2 sidedR2 sided)  
‚ 2-sided copy modes (BookR2 sided)  
Œ Page separation/Split copy modes (2 sidedR1 sided)  
„ Page separation/Split copy modes (BookR1 sided)  
´ Booklet/Stitching mode  
10 10  
10 10  
10 10  
10 10  
10 10  
11  
11  
13  
13  
13  
15 15 35  
15 15 35  
11  
16  
22  
22  
10 10 10 10 10  
10 10 10 10 10  
04  
04  
08 23 23 35 18 11  
23 23 35 18 11  
05 05  
13  
13  
‰ Book to Booklet mode  
ˇ Margin mode  
04 04  
Á Centering/Image shift mode  
¨ Border erase modes (Sheet erase)  
ˆ Border erase modes (Individual border erase)  
Ø Border erase modes (Book erase)  
∏ Combine/Merge Copy modes  
Å Memo mode  
08  
15  
15  
35  
15 23 23 05  
15 23 23 05  
35 35 35  
18 18  
35 25  
35 25  
Í Form overlay mode  
35 35  
Î Cover mode  
25 25  
19  
26  
28  
Ï Transparency + backing sheet mode  
˝ Print page numbers mode  
Ó Invert mode  
30 30  
11 11 11  
13 13 13  
16 11 11  
19  
34  
13 13  
27 27  
Ô Mirror image mode  
Interrupt copying  
Ò Document management functions (form registration)  
Ú
¸
˛
Ç
Document management functions (shared data box [storing documents])  
Document management functions (synergy print boxes [storing documents])  
Document management functions (shared data box [printing out documents])  
Document management functions (synergy print boxes [printing out documents])  
◊ Output management functions (interrupt print)  
ı Repeat copy mode (print out)  
˜ Job build mode (Step 1)  
 Job build mode (from step 2)  
¯ Scanner functions (Scan to PC)  
˘ Scanner functions (Send E-mail)  
¿ Scanner functions (TWAIN)  
¡ Scanner functions (Database connection)  
10-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copy eject location (machine default setting) ............................... 7-49  
Copy limit (copy default setting) .................................................... 7-82  
Copy management mode ................................................................ 7-1  
Copying in the Hole Punch mode.................................................... 8-8  
Copying in the Sort:OFF mode ....................................................... 8-6  
Copying in the Sort:ON mode ......................................................... 8-5  
Copying in the Staple mode ............................................................ 8-7  
Cover drawer[cassette] (copy default setting) ............................... 7-71  
Cover mode................................................................................... 5-31  
Index  
Numerics  
2 in 1 ............................................................................................. 5-13  
2-sided copy modes ........................................................................ 5-1  
4 in 1 ............................................................................................. 5-13  
Custom paper type for 2-sided copying  
(machine default setting)............................................................... 7-46  
A
Accessing the copy default settings .............................................. 7-62  
Accessing the copy management menu screen ............................. 7-3  
Accessing the machine default settings ........................................ 7-41  
Adjusting the copy exposure ........................................................... 4-2  
At the end of copying ...................................................................... 4-4  
Auto clear function .......................................................................... 2-4  
Customize screen layout (Add functions) (copy default setting) ... 7-86  
Customize screen layout (Main functions) (copy default setting).. 7-85  
D
Day & time (machine default setting) ............................................ 7-54  
Default drawer[cassette] (copy default setting) ............................. 7-70  
Default magnification ratio (copy default setting) .......................... 7-72  
Default operation mode (machine default setting) ........................ 7-51  
Default settings ............................................................................. 7-38  
Delete department ID-codes ......................................................... 7-16  
Deleting a registered program ...................................................... 5-52  
Deleting a registration key ............................................................ 5-55  
Document Finisher .................................................................. 8-5, 8-9  
Document management functions .................................................. 6-1  
Document Processor ...................................................................... 8-1  
Document Tray .............................................................................. 8-12  
Drawer[Cassette] ............................................................................ 3-2  
Drum refresh ................................................................................. 7-91  
Auto drawer[cassette] switching ON/OFF  
(machine default setting) ............................................................... 7-42  
Auto exposure adjustment (copy default setting) .......................... 7-73  
Auto exposure adjustment (OCR) (copy default setting) .............. 7-74  
Auto low power function ................................................................. 4-11  
Auto low power time (machine default setting) ............................. 7-48  
Auto magnification selection mode ................................................. 4-5  
Auto rotation function .................................................................... 5-30  
Auto Rotation mode ON/OFF (copy default setting) ..................... 7-79  
Auto selection mode ....................................................................... 8-3  
Auto selection/Filing mode .............................................................. 8-3  
Auto sleep function ........................................................................ 4-11  
Auto sleep ON/OFF (machine default setting) .............................. 7-57  
Auto sleep time (machine default setting) ..................................... 7-47  
Automatic drawer[cassette] switching function ............................... 2-4  
E
Eco print mode .............................................................................. 5-48  
Eco print mode ON/OFF (copy default setting) ............................. 7-66  
Editing copy management information............................................ 7-4  
Enlarging/reducing the copy image................................................. 4-5  
Entering characters ..................................................................... 7-104  
Environmental specifications ........................................................ 10-9  
Erased border width (copy default setting) ................................... 7-81  
Exposure adjustment step (copy default setting) .......................... 7-64  
Exposure mode (copy default setting) .......................................... 7-63  
B
Background exposure adjustment (copy default setting) .............. 7-67  
BASIC OPERATION ....................................................................... 4-1  
Batch scanning mode ................................................................... 5-47  
Book erase mode ........................................................................... 5-11  
Book to Booklet mode ................................................................... 5-26  
Booklet/Stitching mode ................................................................. 5-22  
Border erase modes ...................................................................... 5-11  
Box management default settings................................................. 7-94  
Built-in Finisher ............................................................................... 8-9  
F
Fax eject location (machine default setting).................................. 7-50  
Fax Kit ........................................................................................... 8-12  
Filing mode ..................................................................................... 8-4  
Form overlay mode ....................................................................... 5-20  
Form registration ............................................................................. 6-1  
C
CAUTION LABELS ......................................................................... 1-1  
Centering/Image shift mode ............................................................ 5-8  
Changing a registered program name .......................................... 5-51  
Changing the copy management default settings ......................... 7-25  
Changing the energy-saving mode (machine default setting)....... 7-58  
Changing the management code (machine default setting) ......... 7-56  
Checking the copy management counts ....................................... 7-21  
Checking the total counter and printing out the counter report ..... 7-93  
Cleaning the copier ....................................................................... 10-1  
Cleaning the original cover ........................................................... 10-1  
Cleaning the platen ....................................................................... 10-1  
Cleaning the separator.................................................................. 10-1  
Cleaning the transfer roller............................................................ 10-2  
Combine/Merge Copy modes ....................................................... 5-13  
COPIER MANAGEMENT................................................................ 7-1  
Copy default settings..................................................................... 7-59  
H
Hard Disk ...................................................................................... 8-11  
Hard disk management ................................................................. 7-99  
How to set originals in the Document Processor ............................ 8-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
I
O
If one of the following messages is displayed ................................. 9-1  
If one of these indicators lights or flashes ....................................... 9-3  
If other trouble occurs ................................................................... 9-13  
Individual border erase mode ....................................................... 5-12  
Initial mode...................................................................................... 2-4  
INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS .................................................... 1-2  
Installing the optional equipment ................................................ 10-10  
Interrupt copying ............................................................................. 4-9  
Invert mode ................................................................................... 5-38  
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT ............................................................... 8-1  
Original quality (copy default setting) ............................................ 7-65  
Original set direction ..................................................................... 5-49  
Original size registration ............................................................... 7-90  
Original size selection ................................................................... 5-34  
Originals that can be used with the Document Processor .............. 8-1  
Output management functions ...................................................... 6-20  
P
Page separation/Split copy modes .................................................. 5-4  
Paper Feeder .................................................................................. 8-5  
Paper selection (copy default setting) ........................................... 7-68  
J
Job build mode .............................................................................. 5-57  
Job reservation ............................................................................. 4-10  
Job Separator ............................................................................... 8-11  
Paper size (drawer[cassette] No.1 - No.4)  
(machine default setting) ............................................................... 7-43  
Paper type (auto paper selection mode) (copy default setting) ..... 7-69  
Paper type (drawer[cassette] No.1 - No.4)  
(machine default setting) ............................................................... 7-44  
K
Key Counter .................................................................................. 8-12  
Photo mode..................................................................................... 4-3  
Precautions for the use of Document Processor............................. 8-1  
PRECAUTIONS FOR USE ............................................................. 1-3  
Preset zoom mode .......................................................................... 4-7  
Print page numbers mode............................................................. 5-16  
“Print status” screen ...................................................................... 6-22  
Printer Kit ...................................................................................... 8-12  
Printer/Scanner Kit ........................................................................ 8-12  
Printing out with the repeat copy mode ......................................... 5-43  
Program function ........................................................................... 5-50  
Proof mode ................................................................................... 5-40  
L
Language selection function ....................................................... 7-103  
Loading paper ................................................................................. 3-1  
Low power mode............................................................................ 4-11  
M
Machine default settings ............................................................... 7-38  
MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION INFORMATION .................... 10-1  
Making copies when copy management is turned ON .................. 7-37  
Making copy default settings......................................................... 7-63  
Making machine default settings................................................... 7-42  
R
Register new department ID-codes ................................................ 7-4  
Registering a copy job for repeat copying ..................................... 5-42  
Registering a function or mode under a function key .................... 5-53  
Registering a program .................................................................. 5-50  
Registration keys........................................................................... 5-53  
Registration keys ON/OFF (copy default setting) ......................... 7-84  
Repeat copy mode ........................................................................ 5-42  
Repeat copying ON/OFF (copy default setting) ............................ 7-83  
Report print out ........................................................................... 7-101  
Manual exposure adjustment (photo mode)  
(copy default setting)..................................................................... 7-77  
Manual exposure adjustment (text mode) (copy default setting) .. 7-76  
Manual exposure adjustment (text+photo mode)  
(copy default setting)..................................................................... 7-75  
Margin mode ................................................................................... 5-6  
Margin width (copy default setting) ............................................... 7-80  
Memo mode .................................................................................... 5-9  
Mirror image mode ........................................................................ 5-39  
Misfed in Document Finisher ........................................................ 9-12  
Misfeed in Built-in Finisher ............................................................. 9-11  
Misfeed in Document Processor ................................................... 9-10  
Misfeed in drawer[cassette] ............................................................ 9-4  
Misfeed in left cover 1 ............................................................. 9-5, 9-6  
Misfeed in left cover 2 ..................................................................... 9-7  
Misfeed in multi-bypass tray ........................................................... 9-8  
Misfeed in paper feed section ......................................................... 9-4  
Multi-bypass tray ............................................................................. 3-3  
Multi-bypass tray paper settings ................................................... 7-87  
S
Saving on toner use ...................................................................... 5-48  
Selecting functions .......................................................................... 4-1  
Selecting the image quality ............................................................. 4-3  
Selecting the paper size .................................................................. 4-2  
Separate front and back margin settings ........................................ 5-6  
Setting an original ........................................................................... 4-1  
Setting the Key Counter ................................................................ 8-12  
Setting the number of copies to be made ....................................... 4-3  
Shared data box .............................................................................. 6-4  
Sheet erase mode ......................................................................... 5-11  
Silent mode ON/OFF (machine default setting) ............................ 7-53  
Sleep mode ................................................................................... 4-11  
Sort/Finished mode ....................................................................... 5-29  
Sort/Finished mode ON/OFF (copy default setting) ...................... 7-78  
Special paper action setting (machine default setting)............... 7-46-1  
Specifications ................................................................................ 10-7  
Start copying ................................................................................... 4-3  
Synergy print boxes ........................................................................ 6-9  
Multi-bypass tray settings display ON/OFF  
(machine default setting) ............................................................... 7-45  
N
NAMES OF PARTS ......................................................................... 2-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
T
Text mode........................................................................................ 4-3  
Text+photo mode ............................................................................ 4-3  
Time difference (machine default setting) ..................................... 7-55  
Toner Container ............................................................................ 10-3  
Touch panel sound ON/OFF (machine default setting) ................. 7-52  
Transparency + backing sheet mode ............................................ 5-36  
Turning the copy management function ON/OFF ......................... 7-25  
U
Using programmed settings to make copies ................................. 5-51  
W
Warm-up ......................................................................................... 4-1  
Waste Toner Box ........................................................................... 10-3  
When paper misfeeds ..................................................................... 9-4  
X
XY zoom mode................................................................................ 4-8  
Z
Zoom mode ..................................................................................... 4-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
* For best copy results and machine performance, we  
recommend that you use only KYOCERA MITA original  
supplies for your KYOCERA MITA copier.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
©2003  
http://www.kyoceramita.com  
2003. 12  
2FD80022C  
is a trademark of Kyocera Corporation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Kyocera Telescope KD245 User Manual
LG Electronics MiniDisc Player WM2487H User Manual
Lincoln Automobile 2010 MKT User Manual
Loewe DVD Player ViewVision DR+ User Manual
LST Smoke Alarm AO 58000 600 User Manual
Makita Trimmer JS1602 User Manual
Martin Audio Portable Speaker F12+ User Manual
Meade Telescope StarNavigator User Manual
Memorex CD Player MTT3200 User Manual
Midland Radio Weather Radio 75 822 User Manual